JP2022000267A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: First variation means and second variation means are provided between first ball entry means and second ball entry means. The first variation means is varied for a first period from a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the first ball entry means to a first position in which the game balls can enter the first ball entry means by first variable control means, based on satisfaction of a first condition. In the meantime, the second variation means is varied for a second period from a fourth position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means to a third position in which the game balls can enter the second ball entry means by second variable control means, based on satisfaction of a second condition. The first condition is a satisfiable condition regardless of arrangement of the second variation means. Thus, player's interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 25144417

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the player may end up with a task of simply continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction aiming at the big winning opening while the hit state is reached. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in playing games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter and a predetermined distance from the first entry means. A second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, the first ball-entry means, and the second ball-entry means are provided, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A first variable means that changes to a first position, a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A second position that is provided between the two and is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The variable means, the first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and the second variable. The means is provided with a second variable control means that changes the means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, and the first condition is the second condition. It can be established regardless of the arrangement of the variable means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. The state, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the first position, and The state in which the second variable means is variable to the fourth position is different from the state in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. It is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. It is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball-entry means than in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. ..

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter and the first ball-entry means are provided at a predetermined distance from each other, and the game ball enters the ball. A first position provided between the possible second entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means, and the game ball can enter the first entry means. A first variable means that changes to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and between the first entry means and the second entry means. Further, a second variable means that is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the above-mentioned. The first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for the first period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined first condition, and the second variable means are predetermined. A second variable control means that changes from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of the second condition is provided, and the first condition is the arrangement of the second variable means. It can be established regardless.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means. The second variable means may be changed independently of each other, and there is an effect that control can be simplified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the said. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position, a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the first. Since the degree of advantage for the player is different from the state in which the position is variable and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, the combination of the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means is used. It is possible to pay attention to and play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the fourth position. The variable state is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the player expect that the ball cannot be entered into both the means and the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 4, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the third position. In the variable state, the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means more than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the first condition is satisfied while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three symbol display devices in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of failure of transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the transition effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the time-dependent change of the effect mode of the development effect. It is a figure. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the time course of the effect mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern table for jackpot. It is the figure which showed, (c) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is a figure shown schematically. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the development effect mode selection table in the first embodiment. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transformation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a valid period to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the success notification mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the failure notification mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during transition effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the numerical command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the time course of the effect mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect with the maximum number of transformations of 4 is set is executed in the second embodiment. Is. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the transformation effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp control in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the apparatus, (c) is the definition of the period selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the contents schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 2 during the valid period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process during the display period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the development effect mode selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of a control device, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the defined content of the push tendency table in 4th Embodiment (c). d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 4 during the valid period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the search effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) is an effect when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed while the player who is determined to have a low participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time-dependent change of an aspect schematically, and (b) is a state which the player who was determined to have a high participation frequency to a continuous transformation effect in 5th Embodiment is playing a game. It is a figure which schematically showed an example of the time-dependent change of the effect mode when the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the number of valid periods set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transformation effect start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the flowchart in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 5 during the valid period executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the processing in the notification mode executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transition effect | process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing tendency update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed an example of the time-dependent change of the effect mode of the transition effect in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a case where the left specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is in a state where the ball can be entered, and (b) is a front perspective view showing the case where the right specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is entered. It is a front perspective view which showed the case where the ball is possible. (A) is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Rb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. , (C) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table, and (b) is the main control in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the moving member in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (c) is the sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of the modification, and (d) is the front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member and the left specific winning opening are close to each other in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a right specific winning opening are close to each other. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the probability variation winning device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation winning device in the XCIV-XCIV line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player strikes left, and (b) and (c) are views. In the seventh embodiment, the opening pattern of the right V is determined, and it is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball when the player hits right. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect executed in the 1st round of a jackpot in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the right V opening pattern is set in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the time change of the left V in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern is set. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a front view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment. It is a side view when viewed from the left side of the front view. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at an intermediate position, and (b) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged in a protruding position. It is a front perspective view which showed the state. (A) is a figure showing the time-dependent change of the movable position when the movable member in the eighth embodiment is moved by the movable pattern A, and (b) is the figure which showed the time-dependent change in the movable member in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern B. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position when it was moved by. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the structure of the rotating member in the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. FIGS. (A) to (C) are views showing the flow path of the game ball hit to the right in the ninth embodiment for each movable position of the electric accessory. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a second type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an electric accessory operation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the detour accessory in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in eleventh embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being done. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the time course of the state of the right specific winning opening when the opening pattern capable of V winning is set in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the change with time of the right specific winning opening. In the embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the time-dependent change of the state of the right specific winning opening in the case where the opening pattern which is difficult to win V is set. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which showed the state of the opening / closing door in 1 opening period in the case where the opening pattern which can win V is set in more detail. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device at the start of 1 round of a jackpot where a V winning open pattern is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the probability variation winning apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the state of the movable member, and each flow path distribution valve in the big hit game in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the modification of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of each movable member in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the positive direction in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the negative direction in the modification of. It is a front view of the game board in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the game ball in the case of the protruding overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is movable first after the protruding overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the traveling direction of a game ball when a member is moved to an immersive position, and (c) is the figure which the electric accessory is moved to the immersive position first after the protrusion overlap state in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the traveling direction of a game ball in the case of. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the right-handed navigation effect executed during the jackpot interval period in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the right-handed navigation effect during the jackpot round period in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the storage effect which is executed when the protrusion overlap state by hitting a normal symbol. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the effect mode during execution of the jackpot game in the twelfth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an effect update process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot middle processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure opening command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a state command process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball during the jackpot round period in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball during the hit period of the normal symbol in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball of. (A) is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball when only the electric accessory is arranged in the protruding position in the 2nd modification of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the 12th. In the second modification of the embodiment, it is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball in the case of the protruding overlap state.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "sandy beach stage" → "deep sea stage" "→" Sandy beach stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower plate 50 in front view. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. A lottery for the design) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, waits for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won a prize. ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, the hit / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. It will be easy. That is, when it hits a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the first entry port 64, and as a result, a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is "big hit A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit of the special symbol. On the other hand, after the end of "Big Hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times as an added value.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time reduction state" (during the normal symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not the "normal state of the normal symbol" is called the "normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state (the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time reduction).

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the "high probability state of the special symbol" is obtained after the end of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot. It is changing whether it becomes "normal symbol time saving state". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol time reduction state" may be obtained may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is lengthened, or the number of times for opening the electric accessory 64a per hit of the normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the change is not executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Will be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is composed of 10 types of special symbols that imitate the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbol composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "probability variation symbol". When "big hit A", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot, occurs, the same combination of probability variation symbols may be stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbol composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "normal symbol". When "big hit B", which is a 16R normal big hit, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always displayed as a stop. Further, even in a part of the case where "Big hit A" is obtained, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the jackpot A has been achieved.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. This small display area Dm4 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is urged to be pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, the effect can be displayed in a larger main display area Dm to provide a more understandable effect. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a numerical value.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous transformation effect, which is one of the display effects in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the reach state refers to a state in which the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 are stopped and displayed with the main symbol having the same number, and only the middle symbol column Z2 is in the variable display. In the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical symbols are aligned, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. Can be done.

The continuous transformation effect is an effect performed to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit after the reach state occurs, and the details will be described later, but the boy's displayed in the main display area Dm. Character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (n is a natural number of 1 or more) according to the passage of time or the operation (pressing) of the player's frame button 22 (the mode is changed). It is a production. In this continuous transformation effect, basically, the higher the number of transformations of the character 811, the higher the expectation that the character 811 will be a big hit, and the character 811 may be transformed five times at the maximum.

The maximum number of transformations (effect type of the continuous transformation effect) in the continuous transformation effect of 1 is determined in advance before the start of the continuous transformation effect. More specifically, any number of 1 to 5 times is determined by a lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. This continuous transformation effect ends when the transformation of the predetermined upper limit number of times is successful, or when the effect time specified for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect is reached before reaching the upper limit number of times. To. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. That is, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the production type of the continuous transformation effect, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the maximum number of transformations can be determined before the continuous transformation effect is started. Just do it. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the previous jackpot. If the upper limit is increased as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel the merit of continuing to be out of the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol lottery can be performed many times in a row. Even if a state of continuous disengagement (so-called addiction) occurs, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, if the upper limit is increased as the number of fluctuations is smaller, if the jackpot is won at short intervals (so-called consecutive villa state), there are merits other than winning the prize ball. Because it can be done, the player can be more entertained. Further, if the upper limit number of times is increased in a specific range (for example, the number of fluctuations is in the range of 100 to 200), the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the transformation development mode indicating that the continuous transformation effect is started (developed into the continuous transformation effect) is displayed. be. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, the boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and the horizontally long rectangular display area is displayed above the character 811. HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, the characters "continuous transformation chance" and the characters "expectation increases as the number of transformations increases!" Are displayed. The "continuous transformation chance" is a production name indicating a continuous transformation effect. These characters displayed in the display area HR1 make it easy for the player to understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation effect) is started. This transformation development mode is continuously displayed for 1 second, and after 1 second, the continuous transformation effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 for simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol is formed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm. Will be done. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display is continued. This simple display of the third symbol continues during the continuous transformation effect and the subsequent development effect.

In the continuous transformation effect set after the display time of the transformation development mode has elapsed, an effect urging the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) to be pressed is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR2 is displayed on the left side of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and a frame button 22 is imitated inside the display area HR2. The image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Further, below the PUSH button PB inside the display area HR2, a scroll bar SB with diagonal lines whose length becomes shorter with the passage of time is displayed. This scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period in which the operation for the frame button 22 is valid. In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is set to 5 seconds, so that the scroll bar SB has a length of 0 over 5 seconds after the operation valid period is started. By displaying the scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation valid period.

In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the end of the operation valid period is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a numerical value as it is, and the countdown may be performed according to the passage of time so that the remaining operation valid period can be recognized by the player. Further, for example, the coloring of the PUSH button PB imitating the frame button 22 may be changed according to the remaining operation validity period to suggest the remaining time to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. It is displayed in green, and if the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in yellow, and if the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the PUSH button PB is displayed. If the color is displayed in orange and the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in red. Further, it is not always necessary to indicate to the player the remaining time until the operation valid period ends. By omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the operation valid period, the display control can be simplified, so that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the display area HR2, a balloon-type display area HR3 with the characters "Transformed by PUSH!" Is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 811. Depending on the display contents of the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, the player is made to recognize that the character 811 may be transformed (the aspect of the character 811 is changed) by pressing the frame button 22. Can be done.

Further, on the lower right side of the display area HR3, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR4 for showing the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in this continuous transformation effect is formed. In this display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the characters "transformation x 0" are displayed. This character will be updated according to the number of successful transformations. Specifically, if the character 811 succeeds in transformation once, it is updated to the character "transformation x 1", and if it succeeds in transformation twice, it is updated to the character "transformation x 2". Similarly, when the number of transformations is 3, the characters are updated to "transformation x 3", and when the number of transformations is 4, the characters are updated to "transformation x 4 times". When the number of times becomes 5, it is updated to the character "transformation x 5 times". By confirming the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect of this time.

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation valid period and the character 811 succeeds in transformation. be. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, the display area HR2 is changed to the appearance as if the PUSH button PB is pushed, and the operation valid period ends. .. Further, the aspect of the character 811 is changed to, for example, an aspect imitating an adventurer possessing a sword and a shield. Further, in the display area HR4, 1 is added to the character indicating the number of transformations and the character is updated. FIG. 6A exemplifies the case where the update is made to “transformation × 1”. The mode of notifying the success of this transformation (success notification mode) continues for 1 second, and after the success notification mode is completed, the operation validity period is set again. After that, the operation valid period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the effect period elapses.

On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player does not press the frame button 22 within the set valid period and the transformation is successful. As shown in FIG. 6B, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached, and the production time remains for a predetermined period or longer (the remaining fluctuation time is predetermined). If it is determined that the time is equal to or greater than the lower limit time), the success notification mode is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the effect type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

Even if the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation valid period has elapsed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If it is equal to or longer than the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, when all the transformations are executed with the elapse of the operation valid period, the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set so that it becomes. In other words, the operation valid period is set so that the sum of the operation valid periods for the maximum number of times (and the effect period of the success notification mode for the maximum number of times) is longer than the effect period for the continuous transformation effect.

With this configuration, in each operation valid period set in 1 continuous transformation effect, if the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses by pressing the frame button 22, the effect type It becomes impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each. Further, the shorter the period from the start of the operation valid period until the frame button 22 is pressed, the earlier the start timing of the operation valid period set after that can be accelerated, so that the number of feasible transformations can be determined. , Can be increased within the range of the upper limit. Therefore, the player who wants to perform the transformation of the upper limit number of times (desiring to perform as many transformations as possible) can positively press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example in which the success notification mode is transformed into a mode different from that of the adventurer. In the example of FIG. 7A, the case where the character 811 is transformed into a mode imitating a gunman is illustrated when the number of transformations is the third time. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes according to the number of transformations are prepared, such as a mode imitating this gunman and a mode imitating the adventurer described above.

In the first embodiment, the mode when the transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of transformations, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like each time the success notification mode is performed. As a result, the variation of the continuous transformation effect can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. In addition, when the mode of the success notification mode is determined by lottery or the like, it is easy to determine the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display that is the big hit of the special symbol, or in the case of the variable display that is the big hit of the special symbol. It may be configured to provide an aspect, an aspect that can be easily determined in the case of a variable display that is out of the special symbol, and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to perform the game during the continuous transformation effect by paying attention not only to the number of transformations but also to the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the transformation fails, the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed in a manner of being split in two, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. Further, on the upper right side of the character 811 is a display area HR5 in which the characters "End ..." are displayed. By these displays, it is possible to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has ended (the number of transformations has been determined).

In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process shifts to the development effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. A plurality of types of development effects are provided, and one type of development effects is selected and executed according to the remaining fluctuation time and the success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol this time. The details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B.

First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a display mode of a transition effect showing a transition from a continuous transformation effect to a development effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 are glaring at each other is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an image is displayed between the character 811 and the monster 812. The display area HR6 with the characters "VS" is displayed. In addition, the characters "defeat the enemy !!" are displayed in the display area HR1. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the character 811 becomes a big hit by defeating the enemy (that is, the monster 812).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or a plurality of stars indicating the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed after the end of the transition effect is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two stars are displayed. The number of these stars is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect. Although not shown, the aspect of the monster 812 is also changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). That is, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the appearance of the monster 812 (that is, the appearance that the character 811 is likely to win), and the smaller the number of stars, the stronger the appearance of the monster 812 (that is, the more likely it is that the character 811 will win). That is, the character 811 is displayed with an appearance that makes it easy to win. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the impression that the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the subsequent development effect are linked. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) in the continuous transformation effect suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit.

In this transition effect and the above-mentioned failure notification mode (see FIG. 7B), the length of the display period is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is the last time since the continuous transformation effect is started, while the effect period of each development effect is fixed (any of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds). This is because the period required for the operation valid period to end is variable according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining fluctuation time is determined at the timing when the operation valid period ends (that is, the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development effect of the longest effect period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. do. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the period of difference between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, the variation in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, so that the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort. It should be noted that the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A is shown during the period in which the transition effect is set so that the switching to the development effect does not become unnatural no matter how many seconds the effect time of the transition effect is set. On the other hand, it is configured so that a large change in mode does not occur. That is, the image illustrated in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the change is limited to the extent that the character 811 and the character 812 periodically raise and lower their shoulders in accordance with their own breathing and the like ( No special action is taken). As a result, the display mode when switching to the development effect can be made the same regardless of the execution period of the transition effect, so that the player feels uncomfortable when switching from the transition effect to the development effect. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, changes over time in the production mode of the development effect will be described. Here, in the first embodiment, 12 types of hit development effects A to F and off-development development effects A to F are provided as development effects. Both the hit and miss development effects A are display effects with an effect period of 30 seconds, and the hit and miss development effects B are both display effects with an effect period of 33 seconds. Similarly, the hit and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects for the effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect of the longest effect period is selected within the range not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first embodiment, the data of the display effect (base effect) which is the basis for executing the development effect is prepared. This original display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds, and the corresponding effect is achieved by executing the effect from the beginning or in the middle of this original display effect (base effect). It is configured to be feasible for the development of the period. That is, the development effect is not prepared as a separate effect for each effect period, but is configured to generate the development effect data for each display period using the data of the base effect of 1. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data for executing the development effect, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the character 811 is zoomed in for the first 3 seconds of the base effect. Then, in the next 3 seconds, the effect that the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, the display mode in which the enemy monster 812 is zoomed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then the display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, after displaying the display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoomed for 3 seconds, the character 811 and the monster 812 fight each other violently, and the battle is won or lost. The effect of notifying (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. As described above, the base effect is roughly divided into five display modes for 3 seconds and one display mode for 30 seconds. By starting the display effect from the delimiter position of any of these display modes, the development effect can be displayed without discomfort.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the hit and miss development effect A is executed, the display mode for 30 seconds after the lapse of 15 seconds in the base effect is displayed. A development production with a production period of 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, when the hit and miss development effect B is executed, the display mode for 33 seconds after the lapse of 12 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect C is executed, the base is displayed. The display mode for 36 seconds after the lapse of 9 seconds in the production is displayed. Further, when the hit and miss development effect D is executed, the display mode for 39 seconds after the lapse of 6 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect E is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after the lapse of 3 seconds in is displayed. On the other hand, when the hit and miss development effects F are executed, the development effects for 45 seconds are executed by displaying the base effects from the beginning to the end.

In addition to the above-mentioned monster 812 battle mode, a plurality of display effects are prepared for the base effect. It is decided by lottery which display effect is used as the basis for executing the development effect. In addition, each of the original display effects is prepared with a mode for a big hit and a mode for a miss.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base effect can be diverted even after the continuous transformation effect is executed. That is, after the reach state occurs, it is possible to notify whether or not it will be a big hit by executing the base effect directly or through another notice effect without going through the continuous transformation effect. .. As a result, the versatility of the base effect can be increased, and the data required to execute the effect can be reduced. Further, even when the base effect is executed without going through the continuous transformation effect, the effect can be executed from the beginning or the middle of the base effect according to the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect using the base effect even for the variable display of different variable times.

As described above, in the first embodiment, a base effect for displaying the development effect is prepared, and the number of places where the effect is well separated is set in the base effect for the number of the development effect. Each division point is set so that the remaining production time matches the production time of each development production. As a result, it is possible to provide a display effect having a natural appearance over the effect time of each development effect. Further, by configuring a plurality of development effects having different production times from the original one production mode so as to be feasible, as compared with the case where different production data are prepared for each type (production time) of the development production. , It is possible to reduce the data required to display each development effect. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of development effects having different production times can be executed based on the base effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display effect having a completely different display mode may be executed according to the effect time of the development effect. With such a configuration, the development and production can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the change over time in the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, a case where a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is 3 times is set will be described as an example. First, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a timekeeping change of the effect mode when the player never presses the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variation effect (super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds. In the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the variation (see FIG. 4B). Then, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach state is generated and the transformation development mode (see FIG. 5A) that suggests to the player that the continuous transformation effect is developed is over 1 second. Is displayed.

When the display period of the transformation development effect has elapsed, the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. If the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation valid period continues for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Then, when the operation valid period has elapsed, the first success notification mode is displayed. This success notification mode continues for 1 second, and when 1 second elapses (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the success notification mode ends and the operation validity period corresponding to the second transformation is set. To. This second operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (over 17 to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation) if the frame button 22 is not pressed. Then, after the success notification mode for 1 second is set, the third operation valid period is set. This third operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (over 23 to 28 seconds after the start of fluctuation) if the frame button 22 is not operated. Then, at the timing of 28 seconds (the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) after the fluctuation start when the operation valid period ends, the remaining fluctuation time is small (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds set as the lower limit value). ), And even if the upper limit of the number of transformations has not been reached, the failure notification mode for 1 second is set. That is, even though the upper limit of the number of transformations is set to 3, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of transformations is 2.

The conditions for determining whether or not there is sufficient effect time remaining to set the success notification mode are defined by the transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A), which will be described later. Specifically, the lower limit (threshold value) of the remaining fluctuation time in which the success notification mode can be set is defined according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the production type of the continuous transformation effect). There is. If the operation valid period ends with the remaining fluctuation time exceeding the lower limit, the success notification mode is set on condition that the upper limit of the number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends after the remaining fluctuation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether or not the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is 3 is set, and the time lapse of the effect mode when the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Explain the changes.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the player's pressing on the frame button 22 is detected at the time when 1 second has elapsed (12 seconds after the start of fluctuation) in the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation, The operation validity period is terminated, and the first success notification mode is displayed. When 1 second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, the operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set (at the time of 13 seconds from the start of the fluctuation). In this second operation valid period, if the press on the frame button 22 is detected again when 1 second has elapsed (14 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the operation valid period is similarly terminated and the second operation is valid. The success notification mode of is displayed. Then, when 1 second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses (15 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the third operation valid period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the third operation valid period (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the remaining fluctuation time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, the third success notification mode is displayed. After that, when the display period of the third success notification mode has elapsed, the fourth operation valid period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again when 2 seconds have elapsed (20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) in this fourth operation valid period, the upper limit of the number of transformations of this continuous transformation effect has already been set. Since it has already been executed, the failure notification mode is set.

The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition effect after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect. As described above, as the type of development effect, the type of the longest effect time is selected within the range not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time. When the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, a maximum of 38 seconds can be used for the development effect by adding the failure notification mode and the shortest display period of the transition effect of 2 seconds. However, as described above, as the production time of the development effect, only 6 types of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds are prepared. Therefore, the development effect (development effect C) for 36 seconds, which has a shorter effect period than 38 seconds, is set as the development effect this time. Then, 4 seconds, which is the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect period of the development effect C of 36 seconds, is set as the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect. Specifically, 4 seconds are equally divided, and 2 seconds are set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

In this way, by absorbing the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development production by the display period of the failure notification mode and the production period of the transition production, the variation of the production time of the development production is made. Even if the number is small, the timing of the fluctuation stop and the timing of the end of the development effect can be surely matched. As a result, the variation in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, so that the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the start timing of the failure notification mode is reached with the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds, 2 seconds each is set as the display time of the failure notification mode and the transition effect. .. Then, after the transition effect is completed, the development effect C having an effect time of 36 seconds is executed. As a result, the timing at which the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) and the end timing of the development effect can be exactly matched.

In this way, by the player positively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be shortened and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In the present embodiment, by varying the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect, the gap between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect can be absorbed. , Not limited to this. For example, the effect period of the failure notification mode may be fixed and only the display time of the transition effect may be changed, or conversely, only the effect period of the failure notification mode may be changed. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and a part of the effect period of the development effect (for example, the period in which the third symbol is definitely displayed) may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or changes by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As the stop symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is used only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (as in the case of the first ball entry port 64). For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches with, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11 (b)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is specified in association with each other. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5-204" is defined as the determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entry ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the probabilistic state of the special symbol, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9", and "0 to 9". If it is any of 9 ”, it is determined that it is a big hit. The first hit random number counter C1 has 400 possible values of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that becomes a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first, there is only one judgment value of "200" that is a big hit, so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A" (FIG. 11). (B) See 202b1). Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 11 (c)). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (d). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12 (c)). ) And the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12 (d)) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (b). FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 12 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2. The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the out-of-reach, various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds) are in the range where the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", and various out-of-range super reach are in the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3. The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is out of order in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-bounds reach (front-back out-of-front reach, non-front-back out-of-reach reach) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the value returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer is interrupted, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (of a normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28" (FIG. 11 (c). ) 202c1). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the opening of the first ball entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 28) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation flag. It has at least 203e and a time-saving / medium-time counter 203f.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is made. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. It should be noted that the various information corresponds to whether or not the information is correct, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S603: No in FIG. 27).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probabilistic state, and if the value of the probabilistic flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability change flag 203e is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot A of the special symbol (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, it is set to off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 23).

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for the high probability time, while the probability variation flag 203e state. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110, and each time a jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f and the state of the probability-changing flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability-changing flag 203e is ON. If so, it is determined that the time is shortened for a normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined to be the normal state of the normal symbol, and based on the second random number table for low probability time, A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is connected to various commands and controls via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and a development effect mode selection table 222c.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify a detailed display mode of the variation effect based on a rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main control device 110. Be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation) from the variation patterns specified in the variation pattern table 222a is received. (Detailed display mode of the effect) is extracted (specified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Among the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7) for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the super reach having a fluctuation time of at least 60 seconds. It also contains information to indicate.

The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table referred to for determining the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when the variation pattern accompanied by the continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. The details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a).

FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the transformation effect selection table 222b, the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect is defined for each type (whether or not) of the fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. There is. As shown in FIG. 15A, five types of continuous transformation effects A to E are set as the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect.

The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is one, and the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is not set. Therefore, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, the failure notification mode is displayed once after the success notification mode is displayed, regardless of whether or not the player presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15A, the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of hit super reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is “0”. .. That is, if the maximum number of transformations is one, it is determined that the continuous transformation effect A will be a big hit in the set variable display. As described above, in the continuous transformation effect, basically, the higher the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed), the higher the expectation of the jackpot, but in the case of the continuous transformation effect A (when the maximum number is 1). Only, the jackpot is exceptionally fixed. This makes it possible to provide an unexpected effect.

The continuous transformation effect B is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is two, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "1 to 19". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 44". Since the effect counter 223n is a loop counter updated in the range of "0 to 99", the continuous transformation effect B has a ratio of 19% (19/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of the out-of-order super reach where the continuous transformation effect is determined. For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect B is determined is higher in the out-of-order super reach (the expectation of a big hit is lower).

Further, in the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect starts at the time when the remaining fluctuation time is 49 seconds (when 11 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the second operation valid period is suppressed within 8 seconds (49 seconds-41 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions is stopped once. That is, if the operation valid period set for the first and second operations is not terminated in the middle by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time that can be transformed in the middle of the second operation valid period is set. It will be below. As a result, if the operation valid period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect B is set, probably because the continuous transformation effect A is set and the number of transformations is one. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether the number of transformations is one. As described above, the continuous transformation effect A is an effect in which the jackpot is fixed, while the continuous transformation effect B is an effect in which the expectation of the jackpot is low. Therefore, by distinguishing whether it is the continuous transformation effect A or the continuous transformation effect B, the expected degree of the jackpot can be accurately known. Therefore, during the operation valid period, the frame button is positively given to the player. 22 can be pressed.

The continuous transformation effect C is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 3 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "20 to 44". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 45 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (45/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect C is determined is higher in the out-of-order super reach (the expectation of a big hit is low). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the hit super reach is higher than that of the continuous transformation effect B, the expectation that the continuous transformation effect C will be a big hit is higher than that of the continuous transformation effect B.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. This is because if each operation valid period is expired without pressing the frame button 22, the second operation valid period ends exactly after 11 seconds have elapsed (the first operation valid period is 5 seconds + 1). The second success notification mode 1 second + the second operation valid period 5 seconds). As a result, if the operation validity period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, it is a continuous transformation effect C, or a continuous transformation effect D or E with a higher expectation of a big hit than the continuous transformation effect C described later. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether it exists. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

The continuous transformation effect D is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 4 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 79". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "90 to 98". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 9 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (9/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect D is determined is higher in the hit super reach (the expectation of the big hit is higher). Further, as compared with the continuous transformation effects B and C, the ratio determined in the case of the winning super reach is higher, and the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-order super reach is lower. Compared to C, the expectation of a big hit is higher.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect D, the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effect C. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. Further, even if the period until the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed to 11 seconds or less, if the period until the end of the fourth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode. The number of times of display of is stopped at 3 times. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation effects C to E is, unless the operation valid period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 5 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "80 to 99". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-order super reach, it is selected only when the value of the effect counter 223n is "99". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while it is 1 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (1/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect E is determined is higher in the hit super reach (the expectation of the big hit is higher). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-order super reach is extremely low as compared with the continuous transformation effects B to D, the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher than that of the continuous transformation effects B to D.

This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which the transformation can be executed the largest number of times among the effect types of the continuous transformation effect. In the continuous transformation effect E, if the transformation is successful five times, the failure notification mode is not displayed after that, and the direct transition effect is performed after the display period of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed (FIG. 8). (See)) is started.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect E, the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effects C and D. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. Further, even if the period until the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed to 11 seconds or less, if the period until the end of the fourth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode. The number of times of display of is stopped at 3 times. Furthermore, even if the end timing of the operation valid period up to the 4th time is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the 5th operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is 4 It will stop. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation effects C to E is, unless the operation valid period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

As described above, the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment is provided with five types of effect. Each effect type is configured to have a different upper limit of the number of transformations, and is configured to be able to suggest a jackpot expectation degree by the number of transformations of the character 811 (the number of times the character 811 is displayed). Further, regarding the continuous transformation effects B to E, the transformation of the maximum number of times cannot be displayed unless the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to terminate the operation valid period. It is configured. As a result, the player who wants to know the expectation level of the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be improved.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. Therefore, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 14 (a). The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table in which the development effect mode is defined. This development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of the development effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. The details of the development effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b).

FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the defined contents of the development effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15B, in this development effect mode selection table 222c, the remaining fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time T) and the type of the current fluctuation display (outside super reach or hit super reach) are displayed. For each), the type of development effect to be selected is specified.

Specifically, if the residual variation time T is in the range of 32 seconds ≦ T <35 seconds at the end of the last operation valid period, the development effect with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, if the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected, and if the effect time is 30 seconds, the out-of-development effect A is selected.

Further, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≤ T <38 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect B with a production time of 33 seconds is selected, and the deviation super reach. If so, the development effect B with an effect time of 33 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≤ T <41 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect C with a production time of 36 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development effect C with an effect time of 36 seconds is selected.

Similarly, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 41 seconds ≤ T <44 seconds and the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the development effect D with an effect time of 39 seconds is selected, and the out-of-order super reach is selected. If so, the development effect D with an effect time of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≤ T <47 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect E with a production time of 42 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development production E with a production time of 42 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≤ T <48 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the development effect F with a hit time of 45 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development effect F with an effect time of 45 seconds is selected.

As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the variation display from being different from the end timing of the development effect, the remaining variation time T and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are changed according to the difference between the two. Thereby, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variation display regardless of the length of the remaining variation time T. Therefore, it is possible to provide a production that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d, which are valid. The period flag 223e, the valid period timer 223f, the transformation count counter 223g, the transformation effecting flag 223h, the success notification mode timer 223i, the failure notification mode timer 223j, the transition effect time timer 223k, and the development effect storage area 223m. And at least the effect counter 223n is provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially. It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (see S4002 in FIG. 33) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

The valid period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. If the valid period flag 223e is on, it means that the operation is valid, and if it is off, it means that the operation is not valid. This valid period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous transformation effect has come (see S4403 in FIG. 37 (a)). It is also set to ON when the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and it is determined that the number of display times (transformation number) of the success notification mode is less than 5 (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, it is set to off when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when 5 seconds set as the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While the validity period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) for the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the valid period flag 223e is on, the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is executed.

The valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. When the start condition of the valid period is satisfied (when the start timing of the continuous transformation effect or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), the timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds for this valid period timer 223f. ) Is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the valid period timer 223f is 1 or more, the valid period processing executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 37 (b). ), The value is subtracted (updated) by 1. Based on the value of the valid period timer 223f, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed, and if it is determined that the operation valid period has elapsed, the transformation setting for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. The process (see FIG. 35) is executed.

The transformation count counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7 (a)) is displayed (character 811 succeeds in transformation) in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The counter value of the transformation count counter 223g is added (updated) by 1 each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the continuous transformation effect in the first embodiment, the transformation is performed depending on whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223 g becomes the upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. It is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of times has been reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, if the success notification mode for the upper limit of the number of transformations is displayed and the operation valid period ends after that, the failure notification is performed regardless of whether or not the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time has been reached at the end time. The aspect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, so it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations.

The transformation effect flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the continuous transformation effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed. It means not inside. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means from the end timing of the transformation development mode (start of the first operation valid period) to the end timing of the transition effect (start of the development effect). This transformation effect flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change, which is the start timing of the transformation effect, in the variation display in which the execution of the continuous transformation effect is determined ( See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is set to off when it is determined that the display period of the transition effect has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set for the success notification mode timer 223i. As described above, the condition for displaying the success notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number of times set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and at the end of the operation valid period. The remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has come, the timer value (1000) corresponding to one second is set in the success notification mode timer 223i (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process in the success notification mode executed every 1 millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). ..

The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set for the failure notification mode timer 223j. As described above, the condition for displaying the failure notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or greater than the upper limit set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, or the operation valid period ends. The remaining fluctuation time at the time point is less than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. The failure notification mode timer 223j determines that the display timing of the failure notification mode has come, and when the effect mode of the development effect is selected, the display time is set according to the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect. The corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process in the failure notification mode executed every 1 millisecond (see S4701 in FIG. 39). ..

The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the display condition of the transition effect is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the transition effect is set for the transition effect time timer 223k. The transition effect starts to be displayed when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed or when the display time of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed in the continuous transformation effect E. In the transition effect time timer 223k, a timer value corresponding to the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect is set at the start of the transition effect (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. See S4704 of 39). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process during the transition effect executed every 1 millisecond (see S4801 in FIG. 40).

The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of development effect. In this development effect storage area 223m, development effect is performed from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) according to the remaining fluctuation time based on the end of the last operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect. When the effect mode of is selected, the data corresponding to the effect mode is stored. At the start of the transition effect, the mode (effect time) of the development effect is determined from the data stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, and the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is displayed. Set as time. Further, at the end of the transition effect, the type of the development effect to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m.

The data corresponding to the type of development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data, and for example, the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area for storing data indicating the fluctuation time, and the 4th bit is used as an area for storing data indicating whether or not the result is correct. .. Specifically, if the 1st to 3rd bits are "001B", the production time is 30 seconds, and if it is "010B", the production time is 33 seconds. If so, it indicates a developmental production with a production time of 36 seconds. Further, "100B" indicates a development effect with an effect time of 39 seconds, "101B" indicates an development effect with an effect time of 42 seconds, and "111B" indicates an development time with an effect time of 36 seconds. Show the development production. If the most significant bit (4th bit) is 1 (high), it means that the development effect corresponds to the hit, and if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 0 (low), it is out. It means that it is a development production corresponding to. Therefore, for example, if the data "1010B" is stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, the development effect this time is a development effect (that is, a hit development effect B) that is a hit in the effect time of 33 seconds. Means.

The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223n is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. .. The effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each type of effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, for example) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. It is composed of 2 kilobytes). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type flash memory 234d, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided to store a part of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. Set in the bank of, and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 was first set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c from the program and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR-type flash. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type flash memory 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs are NOR type flash. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program excluding the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. A program of the work RAM 233 for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the program and its control program. It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 17, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 17 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 17 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 17 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 18 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 18, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "sandy beach stage" or the "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed sandy beach stage is displayed in the rear image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage has a resident video RAM 235 containing only a part of the back surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed by scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers “0” to “9” of the third symbol are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311 and a female character 312 and a male character 313 are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and the player is notified of the game value (normal symbol time reduction period) given to the player after the jackpot ends, or the special symbol is suspended. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so that the chances of lottery of the normal symbol will increase and the chance of winning the normal symbol will increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory 64a to be opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the reduced working hours of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory 64a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first. The easier it is to enter the entrance 64, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Further, the display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table (variation display data table) for variable effect among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table corresponds to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of an image and a character used for various effects, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or the back different from the backs A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, in the example of FIG. 20). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 55 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the drawing instructions. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 21) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol) and various comments.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (the backmost drawing hierarchy), and the last drawn sprite is the frontmost side (the frontmost drawing hierarchy). It can be placed in. When the comment display function is turned on, the image arranged on the frontmost side (the foremost drawing hierarchy) is a character image constituting the comment. By arranging the comment on the frontmost side (the foremost drawing hierarchy), the comment can be visually recognized more clearly by the player.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S7802 of FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 31. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first The start winning process accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No) ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the big hit. (S214). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S216), and the process shifts to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the processing of S216 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol is set (S217), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change is made. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

When the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first value for high probability. Based on the random number table per unit, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "200", it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit A). , The jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B), and "50". If it is in the range of "~ 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12). When the processing of S307 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the normal reach is achieved by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12). Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as super reach. When the processing of S309 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 30). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering (winning) into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (winned) in the first entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of pending times of variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing (whether or not a big hit) of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0. If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second random number table for high probability time are used. Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 11 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a hit of the normal symbol (S511), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S511: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process is shifted to S514. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S511: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514), and if it is in the normal symbol time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is performed. To finish. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, so it is normal. The lottery frequency of symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols increases, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the first entry opening 64. It becomes a state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S517 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the processing of S518, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S518, and then the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S519). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state (S520), and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. (S520: Yes) sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64, and shifts to the processing of S523. On the other hand, in the processing of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64. As a setting, "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set, and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 is set (S523), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the electric accessory 64a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If is less than 4 (S603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S812 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S812. As will be described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 30, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S833, S814) is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S83, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 26). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 30). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S214 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and the end timing of the ending effect is inside. If it is determined (S1011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1011 when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012).

In the processing of S1012, if it is determined that the jackpot is not A (that is, the jackpot is B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f, so that 100 times of normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The time saving period is set to be given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on so that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1013 or the processing of S1015 executed after the processing of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol (whether it is the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol) after the jackpot is completed is voiced. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4018 (see FIG. 33) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4018. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4017 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

In the process of S3902, if the power off processing flag is off (S3902: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 was completed, or only the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110). It was started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the data shifts to S3908.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4018. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3906). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4018 is executed (see S4017 in FIG. 33). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4018 is executed, the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3909), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S3911) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S3908 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S3908 is performed via the processing of S3904 to S3906. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S3910, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S3910), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S3911), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S3909 is that when the processing of S3908 is reached from S3904 via the processing of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3904. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4001 this time was executed (S4001), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4012. In the process of S4001, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S4002 to S4012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4013 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by each process of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4004). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the processing of S4005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4007). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is set. That is, it is a process for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4009, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4010), and then the menu setting process is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the menu setting process, processing according to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed is executed.

After the processing of S4011, during the execution of the variation display, the effect update process for changing the effect mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the values of various timers, etc. is executed (S4012), and the process shifts to S4013. .. The details of this effect update process (S4012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the process of S4013, a command determination process of performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. Then, when the command determination process is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S4014). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the processing of S4014 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4017), and the power-off process is executed (S4018). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to the process of S4001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4016: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing. As described above, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101), and if it is off (S4101: No), it is not the operation valid period. Since it means, this process is terminated as it is. This is because there is no possibility of displaying the failure notification mode or the success notification mode even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected unless the operation is valid.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation valid period is set, so that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected next. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4102). If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the transformation setting process for setting the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is executed (S4103), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the transformation setting process (S4103) described above will be described. In this transformation setting process, first, the valid period flag 223e is set to off, and the valid period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). This sets the end of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect.

When the processing of S4201 is completed, next, the value of the transformation count counter 223g is read (S4202), and the read transformation count (display count of the success notification mode) is the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect executed this time. (S4203). In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g matches the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining fluctuation is specified. The effect mode of the development effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) (S4205).

When the processing of S4205 is completed, the data corresponding to the effect mode of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), the remaining fluctuation time specified in the processing of S4204, and the development selected in the processing of S4205. The display time of the failure notification mode this time is calculated from the difference from the production time of the production (S4207). Specifically, half the time obtained by subtracting the effect time of the development effect from the remaining variation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the display time of the specified failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number (S4203: No), the remaining fluctuation time (T) is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed. It is determined whether (whether it is a value equal to or higher than the lower limit value corresponding to the current production type) (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S421 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. That is, 1 is added to the value of the transformation count counter 223g to update (S4210), a success notification mode is set according to the value of the transformation count counter 223g (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is set to 1 second. The corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining variation time T is less than the lower limit value specified in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No). , The process of S4204 to S4208 described above for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this process is terminated.

By this transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within the range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time set for each production type, the success notification mode is set up to the upper limit of the number of transformations. It can be displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether or not the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached. As a result, the player can be made to want to display more success notification modes within a range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, so that the frame button 22 can be positively pressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process (S4012) will be described. This effect update process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the variation display, the remaining variation time, the values of various timers, and the like are used. This is a process for changing the effect mode accordingly. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this effect update process.

In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display is being executed (S4301), and if it is determined that the variation display is not being executed (S4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Return to the main process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variable display is in progress (S4301: Yes), then whether or not the transformation effect flag 223h is on (that is, whether the continuous transformation effect is being executed). (S4302). In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is off (S4302: No), the transformation effect start for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. The determination process is executed (S4303), and this process is terminated. The details of this transformation effect start determination process (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 (a).

Further, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is being executed. Therefore, first, whether or not the validity period flag 223e is on. (S4304), if it is on (S4304: Yes), the process during the valid period for determining whether or not the operation valid period has expired is executed (S4305), and the present process is terminated. The details of the treatment during the valid period (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the flag 223e during the valid period is off (that is, it is not during the operation valid period) (S4304: No), then the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is larger than 0. (S4306), if it is a value larger than 0 (S4306: Yes), it is determined whether or not (whether the success notification mode is being displayed) or not, and the process during the success notification mode for determining whether it is the end timing of the success notification mode. (S4307) to end this process. The details of this process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), then the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is set. It is determined whether or not it is larger than 0 (whether the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308), and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S4308: Yes), the end timing of the failure notification mode is determined. The process in the failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process is terminated. Details of this failure notification mode processing (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is larger than 0. (That is, whether or not the transition effect is being executed) is determined (S4310), and if it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not to switch from the transition effect to the development effect. The process during the transition effect for the purpose is executed (S4311), and this process is terminated. The details of the process during the transition effect (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4310 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 36), appropriate control can be executed according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, so that it is possible to preferably update the effect mode in the continuous transformation effect. can.

Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process (S4303) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 (a). As described above, this transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time.

In the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (the timing when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) (S4401), and the continuous transformation effect is performed. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and this process is terminated.

By executing this transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), the continuous transformation effect is accurately executed at the same timing each time the variable display set to execute the continuous transformation effect is executed. be able to.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 (b). As described above, the process during the valid period (S4305) is a process for determining whether or not the operation valid period has expired.

In the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting one (S4501). Since the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37 (b)) is executed every 1 millisecond, the value of the valid period timer 223f is decremented by 1 every 1 millisecond.

When the processing of S4501 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction in the processing of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and if the value of the valid period timer 223f is not 0 (S4502). S4502: No) Since it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction becomes 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the remaining fluctuation time ( According to T), the above-mentioned transformation setting process (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and this process is terminated. Since the details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described with reference to FIG. 35, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned success notification mode processing (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. As described above, the process during the success notification mode (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode.

In this process during the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction becomes 0. Determine (S4602). If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (the success notification mode continues), so this processing is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. , The processing of S4603 to S4611 for setting the effect mode after the display period ends is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5. (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 5, (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period, the display control device 114 executes the display mode corresponding to the operation valid period (see FIG. 5B) in the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4604 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the start of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to ON (S4605). This process ends. As a result, a new operation validity period can be started.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), the success notification mode of 5 times has already been displayed, and it is necessary to set the operation validity period any longer. Since it means that there is no such thing, the development effect and the transition effect of the mode according to the remaining fluctuation time (T) are determined. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time (T) of the variation display is specified (S4606), and the effect mode of the development effect corresponding to the specified remaining variation time (T) is set in the development effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). Select from (see (b)) (S4607).

When the processing of S4607 is completed, next, the data corresponding to the effect mode of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4608), the remaining fluctuation time (T), and the development selected in the processing of S4607. The difference from the production time of the production is specified as the production time of the transition effect (S4609). Then, the timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), the display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and the present process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned failure notification mode processing (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. As described above, the process in the failure notification mode (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode.

In the process during the failure notification mode (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is subtracted by 1 (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the subtraction becomes 0 (see FIG. 39). S4702). In the process of S4702, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the failure notification mode, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j becomes 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the end timing of the failure notification mode has come, so that the remaining fluctuation time (T). ) And the effect time of the development effect of the aspect indicated by the data stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and this process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the transition effect in-process (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As described above, the process during the transition effect (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect.

In the transition effect in-process (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is subtracted by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the subtracted timer value becomes 0 (S4802). If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, it is the end timing of the transition effect) (S4802: Yes), the data is then stored in the development effect storage area 223 m. Set the start of the development effect corresponding to the existing data (S4803). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to off (S4804), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and this process is terminated. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display exactly match. Therefore, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the end timing of the fluctuation. Therefore, the effect mode can be preferably executed.

Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S4901). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S4902: Yes). S4903), return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4907). When the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4908). Further, in the process of S4908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S4908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4908. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4907, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4909, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4911). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), the display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4911, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4913). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted round number to the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts the round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4916). Then, when the ending command is received (S4916: Yes), the ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S4917), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4916, if the ending command is not received (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By executing this command determination process, it is possible to execute an appropriate process according to the command output from the main control unit 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4014). This variation display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S5001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5008 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then the variation pattern is processed in S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41). Based on the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command, the variation display mode of the current variation display is determined from the variation pattern table 222a (S5003).

Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variation pattern type is an aspect accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004), and if it is determined to be an aspect accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), the transformation effect selection table. The mode of the continuous transformation effect is determined based on 222b (see FIG. 15A) and the value of the effect counter 223n (S5005), and the process shifts to S5006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 is an aspect that does not accompany the continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5006.

In the process of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S5003 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S5006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the processing of S5007, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5008.

In the process of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S5008). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5008: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then in the processing of S4906 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5011), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type flash memory 234d, whereby the NOR type flash memory. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, so when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , Of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)). The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to display the S6304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing (see FIG. 52), the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504 is updated, and the pointer 233f is set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, by the processing of S6502. Transfer data table The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is clocked by using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the time is measured in the variation display data table. When it is determined that the variation effect is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variable type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front-back off reach, non-front-back off reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6603, and the identification thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6705), the present processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7002 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418). S6418: Yes), the transformation effect related command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

The commands related to the continuous transformation effect are, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation valid period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and the start of the transition effect. A display command indicating the start of the development effect, a display command indicating the start of the development effect, and the like can be mentioned. The display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b in the same manner as the variable display data table and the like. By executing the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode in which the display start is instructed, the display time, etc. are determined from the commands related to the continuous transformation effect, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d.

Here, the details of the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a command process related to the transformation effect. This transformation effect-related command process executes the process corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the transformation effect-related command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time indicated by the command is set in the clock counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing. The continuous transformation effect is a kind of effect mode set during the execution of the variation display, and the fact that the continuous transformation effect is executed means that the variation pattern command is set (variation pattern command processing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47)). a) Executed after (see)) and before the end of the variation pattern. Therefore, since the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are already set to off in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)), these flags are set in the transformation effect related command processing (see FIG. 51). There is no need to turn it off again.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7302), S7303 and S7304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45B), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the expanded warning image is specified based on the expanded warning image data, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7305.

In S7305, the pointer update process is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer is used. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7506). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 52 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the definite display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S7317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that it is displayed.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (any of FIGS. 17B and 17C) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7601 (S7601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7702). In the process of S7702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7810), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7812, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is the one of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The discrimination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7902 (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 45B) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of performing a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation effect is an effect in which the character 811 transforms 1 to 5 times in the third symbol display device 81, and basically, the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of a big hit. be. During the execution of this continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period during which the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is valid is set a plurality of times. When the press on the frame button 22 is detected during this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period (5 seconds) has elapsed, an effect (success notification mode) in which the character 811 succeeds in transformation is executed. There is a possibility. More specifically, when either of the above two types of conditions is satisfied, the upper limit of the number of transformations predetermined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not reached. , If it is equal to or more than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type, the character 811 succeeds in transformation (success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached or the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit, the effect of the mode in which the transformation fails (failure notification mode) is executed and the continuous transformation effect ends. ..

The length of the operation valid period varies depending on the game method of the player. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated at that time and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, for each operation valid period, when all success notification modes are displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed, the continuous transformation effect production period is set before the success notification mode for the maximum number of times is displayed. Set to elapse. In other words, when all transformations are executed with the lapse of the operation valid period, the length of the production period elapses before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production time (the lower limit remaining fluctuation time defined for each production type) is set. As a result, when the operation valid period is started, the frame button 22 must be positively pressed to end the operation valid period at an early stage, or the transformation cannot be performed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to confirm the transformation of the upper limit number of times in the continuous transformation effect, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

Further, depending on the player's game method (whether or not the frame button 22 is positively pressed during the operation valid period) during the execution of the continuous transformation effect, the subsequent effect mode (display timing of the success notification mode and the display timing of the success notification mode) may be determined. Since the number of impressions) can be changed, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between a production type with a low expectation (the maximum number of transformations is small) and a production type with a high expectation (the maximum number of transformations is large), and it is continuous in a manner corresponding to a relatively low expectation. You can perform a transformation effect. Therefore, even if the mode corresponds to an apparently low degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to a big hit, so that even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. can.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the development effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. This development production is provided with a plurality of types having different production times. Here, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect is variable according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Therefore, the timing at which the continuous transformation effect ends is not constant, and the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the continuous transformation effect ends is variable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the final operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining fluctuation time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the period of difference between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the variation in the production time of the development effect, and thus it is possible to reduce the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. However, the operation valid period The conditions for censoring (shortening) are not limited to this. For example, when a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the operation valid period may be terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated (shortened) and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. , Not limited to this. For example, the operation valid period may be terminated based on the detection that the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the operation valid period. Further, in this case, the same number of presses may be set each time as the number of presses required to terminate the operation valid period, or the number of presses may be randomly selected by lottery each time the start timing of the operation valid period is reached. It may be a predetermined configuration. With this configuration, the player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. Furthermore, when determining the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, the operation type of the continuous transformation effect being executed, whether or not the maximum number of transformations has been reached, the lottery result of the special symbol, etc. The number of presses that can be easily selected may be changed according to the situation when setting the validity period. Specifically, for example, a variable display that is a big hit may be configured so that a smaller number of presses can be easily selected than a variable display that is off. Further, for example, a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is large may be configured so that a small number of presses can be easily selected, and the upper limit of transformation is higher than when the maximum number of transformations has been reached. It may be configured so that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected when the number of presses has not been reached. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be pressed by paying attention to the number of presses until the operation valid period ends, so that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the continuous transformation effect is further improved. Can be made to.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to terminate the operation valid period. Further, for example, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and when a press is detected, the operation valid period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display) for each operation valid period. , The operation valid period may not be terminated even if the press is detected (or the operation valid period may be terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect while thinking about which frame button 22 should be pressed to terminate the operation validity period, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the operation valid period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation valid period ends unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, but the configuration is limited to this configuration. Instead, there may be a case where the operation valid period is terminated without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, each time the operation valid period is set, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to terminate in the middle of the period. Further, for example, corresponding to the type of continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the operation valid period even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. May be configured to provide a type that is terminated in the middle.

In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number may be arbitrarily set. By narrowing the range of the maximum number of times that can be set (for example, 1 to 3 times), the difference in the expectation of big hits for each transformation number can be reduced, so that the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations. Even in this case, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit. On the contrary, by widening the range of the upper limit number of times that can be set (for example, setting it to 1 to 10 times), it is possible to give the player a chance to press (operate) the frame button 22 more times. .. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. Further, in the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation effect, the transformation is successful at least once (success notification mode is displayed), but the upper limit number of transformations is 0 in at least some production types. It may be configured to be set to times (no successful transformation). Further, not only the maximum number of transformations, but also the length of the operation valid period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

In the first embodiment, in all the types of continuous transformation effects, when the frame button 22 is never operated (that is, there is no operation valid period interrupted in the middle), the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type is obtained. The operation validity period of the length at which the continuous transformation effect ends before the success notification mode of is displayed (character 811 succeeds in transformation) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some types of continuous transformation effects, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the maximum number of times corresponding to the type. With this configuration, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, even a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 and plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 can enjoy the continuous transformation effect.

In the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of transformations) has not reached the upper limit regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period, and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period is the lower limit. If it is longer than the above time, the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed may be changed according to the end condition of the operation valid period (whether the time set as the operation valid period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

In the first embodiment, when the display time of the 1st to 4th success notification modes in the continuous transformation effect of 1 has elapsed, the operation valid period of 5 seconds is newly set, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. At the start of the continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period of 1 is set, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period is interrupted (the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). good. If the number of times the success notification mode is displayed does not reach the upper limit, the suspended operation valid period is restarted (the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is restarted) after the display time has elapsed. good. Further, the length of the operation valid period may be changed according to the number of times of display of the maximum success notification mode. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the validity period timer 223f every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even if the period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period, the success notification mode may be displayed within a range in which the upper limit number of times is not reached. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first embodiment. Instead of interrupting the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f, the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f may be continued even during the display time of the success notification mode. Then, during the display time of the success notification mode, even if the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press may be treated as invalid. Even in such a configuration, the same operation as that of the first embodiment can be realized.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition effect is changed so that the end timing of the subsequent development effect and the end timing of the variable time are matched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the end of the development effect (or as a part of the development effect), the difference between the set effect time of the development effect and the remaining fluctuation time is compensated. It may be configured to execute the effect for the purpose. In this way, by adjusting the time at the end of the effect, it is possible to match the end timing of the effect with the end timing of the variation display with simpler control than simply setting the remaining variation time to the effect time. can.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification) is immediately (before the operation valid period elapses). The configuration is such that the mode) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). In this case, the player may be notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed during a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By setting a predetermined period between the detection of pressing the frame button 22 and the display of the notification mode, an opportunity for the player to imagine which notification mode will be displayed during the predetermined period. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this case, a predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. It may be a variable configuration. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, 1 second is set when there is a margin of 1 second or more until the end timing of the operation valid period, and a frame is set in a state of less than 1 second until the end timing of the operation valid period. When a press on the button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period from the setting of the operation valid period to the display of the notification mode to be longer than that when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period regardless of the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

In the first embodiment, it is better to press the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period than to allow the operation valid period to elapse without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation valid period elapses. The configuration is such that the display timing of the mode is earlier, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of continuous transformation effects, pressing the frame button 22 may delay the display timing of the notification mode. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined pressing effect indicating that the pressing is detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the press effect may be set so that the press effect ends after the timing when the originally set operation valid period ends. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, but rather the display timing of the notification mode can be delayed. Therefore, the frame button can be provided. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is better to press 22 each time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the first embodiment described above, the transition effect of the length corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed is executed. In addition, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a moving image whose mode does not change significantly) is displayed until the start timing of the development effect is reached, and the end timing of the transition effect (length of the execution period). Regardless of this, the configuration was such that it was possible to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development effect.

On the other hand, in this modification, the transition effect is composed of an effect mode in which the change in mode is relatively large and an effect mode in which the change in mode is small (no). Then, the end timing of the transition effect is configured to be within the period in which the effect mode with relatively little change in mode is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the display mode during the execution of the transition effect. By increasing the degree of freedom of the transition effect, the configuration is such that only the effect time of the transition effect covers the difference time between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining fluctuation time. That is, in this modification, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second.

The transition effect in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In this modification, the data of the base effect which is the basis for executing the transition effect is prepared as in the development effect in the first embodiment described above. The display period of the base effect is 4 seconds, and the transition effect of the corresponding effect period can be executed by executing the effect from the beginning or the middle of the base effect.

As shown in FIG. 83, the data of the base effect for executing the transition effect of this modification includes data of four types of display modes in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for one second (first section) at the beginning of the base production is composed of data corresponding to the production in which the character 811 searches for the target (monster 812) to fight in the development production. ing. Further, the data corresponding to the time when 1 second has passed to the time when 2 seconds have passed (second section) of the base effect is composed of the data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to the production of a mode in which it is unclear to the player which type the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 this time is. With this effect, it is possible to make the player imagine which type of monster 812 will be fought.

In addition, the data corresponding to the time when 2 seconds have passed to the time when 3 seconds have passed (third section) of the base production is composed of the data corresponding to the production in which the type of the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 is clarified in this development production. ing. That is, the silhouette of the monster 812, which was displayed as a silhouette, is removed, and the data corresponds to the effect of displaying the mode of the monster 812 fighting the character 811. With this effect, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed after that according to the type of the monster 812.

In this way, the effect corresponding to the beginning to the time when 1 second elapses (first section), the effect corresponding to the time when 1 second elapses to 2 seconds (the second section), and the time when 2 seconds elapses to 3 seconds elapses. The effect corresponding to (third section) is composed of an effect in which the change in the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, a part of the display contents such as the character 811 moving to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appearing in front of the character 811, and the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed in the silhouette disappearing. Is changed to a completely different content.

On the other hand, the data corresponding to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 4 seconds have passed (4th section) of the base effect is the stillness in which the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type notified in the effect of the 2nd section confront each other. The image (see FIG. 8A) is composed of data corresponding to the display effect. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to the effect of the mode in which the display mode does not change (relatively small) even after the passage of time. By executing the transition effect so that the timing of switching to the development effect comes within the range of this third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance when switching to the development effect from becoming unnatural. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, in this modification, three types of start timings (start positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timings is set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. Since all of these start timings are set in places where the division of the production is good, even if the transition production is started from any start timing, the player should confirm the transition production without making the player feel uncomfortable. Can be done. Here, in the present modification, as in the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the production time of the development effect is within the range of 2 seconds to 5 seconds. The production time (production type) of the development production is determined. In this modification, as described above, since the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, the effect period of the transition effect is within the range of 1 second to 4 seconds. In this modification, the base effect of the transition effect is determined from which start timing based on the effect period of the transition effect.

More specifically, when the effect period of the transition effect is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data from the third start timing (the beginning of the third section) of the base effect data is used this time. It is set as data for executing the transition effect of. As a result, the end timing of the transition effect (timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, in the effect period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the effect of 1 second of the 3rd section is first executed, and then the effect (still image) of the 4th section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. .. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

If the effect period of the transition effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data from the second start timing (the beginning of the second section) of the base effect data will be used for this transition effect. Set as data to execute. As a result, the end timing of the transition effect (timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section, as in the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds. can. That is, in the effect period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the 1-second effect of the 2nd section and the 1-second effect of the 3rd section are executed, and then the 4th section until the end timing of the transition effect. Display the effect (still image) of. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

Furthermore, if the effect period of the transition effect is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data from the first start timing (the beginning of the first section) of the base effect data will be used for this transition effect. Set as data to execute. Thereby, as in the other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. That is, in the production period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the production for 1 second for each of the 1st section to the 3rd section is executed, and then the production of the 4th section (still image) until the end timing of the transition production. Is displayed. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

As described above, in this modification, the effect data (first section) corresponding to the mode in which the display mode changes relatively significantly when the transition effect, which is the effect of connecting the continuous transformation effect and the development effect, is executed. The transition effect is executed using the base effect data composed of the effect data of the third section) and the effect data corresponding to the aspect in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small). .. Further, the start of the transition effect is set from the start timing of any one of the plurality of start timings preset for the base effect according to the effect time of the transition effect. In other words, the range of data used to execute the transition effect is selected according to the effect time of the transition effect. In this way, by configuring the transition effects having different production times by using the base effect of 1, the display data for executing the transition effects can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Can be reduced.

Further, in this modification, the end timing of the transition effect is set during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small) regardless of the effect time of the transition effect. , It is configured to select the start timing. With such a configuration, when the transition effect is ended and the development effect is switched to, the player can have a natural appearance.

In this modification, three start timings are set for the base effect, but the present timing is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set.

In this modification, by adjusting the production time of the transition effect, the time difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development effect is filled, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the first embodiment, the remaining effect time may be adjusted between the failure notification mode and the transition effect. In this case, the failure notification mode may be configured to provide a base effect as in the transition effect. Then, among the effect data of the base effect, the effect data in the range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode may be used to display the failure notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation between the failure notification mode and the transition effect.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. In the first embodiment described above, if it is assumed that the frame button 22 is never pressed during the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the success notification mode of the maximum number of times is continuously displayed before the success notification mode is displayed. The configuration was such that the operation validity period of the length at which the transformation effect was completed was set. In other words, when all the transformations are executed with the lapse of the operation valid period, the production period becomes the length before the transformation of the upper limit number of times (success notification mode) is executed. Was configured to set. Further, in the operation valid period, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the operation valid period is terminated, so that only when the game method is performed in which the frame button 22 is positively pressed to terminate the operation valid period. , The configuration was such that the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times could be displayed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period, the success notification mode is used until the period set at the start of the operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is impossible to shorten the period from the setting of the operation valid period to the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Further, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, and the more the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is continuous, the more the set operation valid period is set. It has a long structure. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of transformations can reach the upper limit set for each effect type only when the player positively presses the frame button 22. It is possible.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the continuous transformation effect of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Further, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player positively presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. be.

Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the super reach fluctuation in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first operation valid period is set 11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. To. In the second embodiment, since the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation valid period is included at the start of the operation valid period. The mode is determined in advance. That is, at the start of the operation valid period, the display start of a series of effect modes that summarizes the effect mode during the operation valid period and the notification mode is set. Hereinafter, the effect mode composed of 1 operation valid period and 1 notification mode set after the valid period is referred to as a transformation effect mode.

As for which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is to be set, the transformation effect mode is set at the start of the transformation effect mode (at the start of the operation valid period). It is determined by determining in advance the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the notification mode ends (the time when the notification mode ends). Specifically, first, the display period of the transformation effect mode is determined using the period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining variation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect mode predicted from the determined display period is compared with the lower limit of the residual variation time defined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect mode is a value that is 5 seconds or more larger than the lower limit value, the success notification is displayed as the notification mode displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. The configuration is such that the transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed is selected. On the other hand, in other cases, the failure notification mode is set. Note that 5 seconds is the shortest time (minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the display of the notification mode. That is, if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the end of the notification mode, it is possible to secure a display time for displaying at least one new transformation effect mode accompanied by the failure notification mode, so that the success notification can be performed. Display the aspect. On the other hand, if it is predicted that the margin for the lower limit value is less than 5 seconds after the end of the transformation effect mode, it is not possible to secure a display period sufficient to display the new transformation effect mode, so that the transformation accompanied by the failure notification mode is performed. By setting the effect mode, the continuous transformation effect is terminated. As a result, the type of transformation effect mode can be changed flexibly according to the remaining fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode in which the display period is 5 seconds (operation valid period is 4 seconds) is set. As a result, the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but in this continuous transformation effect (continuous transformation effect D2 in which the maximum number of transformations is 4 times), the lower limit remaining variation time is set to 24 seconds, which is predicted. The remaining fluctuation time is a value that is 5 seconds or more larger than the lower limit. Therefore, as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode accompanied by a success notification mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the first success notification mode is displayed with the elapse of 4 seconds set as the operation valid period. Although the details will be described later, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the continuous number of operation valid periods in which the frame button 22 is never pressed is counted by the non-pressed number counter 223r described later. The length of the operation valid period (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) to be set is variable according to the counter value of the non-pressed number counter 223r (the larger the counter value, the longer the period is set. , See FIG. 60 (c)). Since this is the first operation valid period, 1 is set for the non-pressed number counter 223r.

When the display period of the first success notification mode (display period of the transformation effect mode) has elapsed (16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of this second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1 which is the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r. The remaining fluctuation time at the end of the second transformation effect mode is 37 seconds, and there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit, so the second transformation effect mode is also set to include a success notification mode. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the operation valid period of 6 seconds has elapsed, the success notification mode for 1 second is displayed.

At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (23 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the third transformation effect mode, 9 seconds corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds) is selected. The remaining fluctuation time at the time when the third transformation effect mode is completed is 28 seconds, and the margin for the lower limit value of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, the third transformation effect mode is accompanied by a failure notification mode. Set to the aspect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the operation valid period of 8 seconds and the failure notification mode of 1 second are displayed, and then the transition effect is executed. That is, the continuous transformation effect is completed only by performing the transformation two times without performing the transformation four times (displaying the success notification mode) which is the upper limit number of times. In the second embodiment, the production time of the development production is predetermined for each production type of the continuous transformation production. For the transition effect, the time difference between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect is set. In the example of FIG. 58A, after the transition effect of the effect time of 5 seconds is set, the development effect for 23 seconds (hit development effect D2) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the continuous transformation effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period, the effect period of each of the 1st to 5th transformation effect modes is set. Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. As a result, the maximum number of transformations of 4 times can be contained within the production period of the continuous transformation effect.

In this way, the player can positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to set a short operation valid period, so that more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. First, FIG. 59 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a new period selection table 222d added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (a)). It differs in that. In addition, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c have been partially changed.

The period selection table 222d is a data table referred to when setting a new transformation effect mode, and the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode and the length of the operation valid period are determined for each value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. It is a data table that specifies.

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), the value "0" of the non-pressed count counter 223r is defined by "5 seconds" as the display period of the transformation effect mode and "4 seconds" as the operation valid period. Has been done. Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set in a state where the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 0, the transformation effect mode of 5 seconds including the operation valid period of 4 seconds is selected. The non-pressed count counter 223r becomes 0 when the press on the frame button 22 is detected at the start of the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect or in the operation valid period one time before. be.

Further, with respect to the value "1" of the non-pressed number counter 223r, "7 seconds" is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode, and "6 seconds" is defined as the operation valid period. Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set while the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 1, the transformation effect mode of 7 seconds including the operation valid period of 6 seconds is selected. The value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 1. In the continuous transformation effect of 1, the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation valid period two times before, and the press is detected in the operation valid period one time before. It is a case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, or a case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected during the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect.

Further, for the value "2 or more" of the non-pressed number counter 223r, "9 seconds" is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode, and "8 seconds" is defined as the operation valid period. As a result, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, when the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is continuous twice or more and the value of the non-press count counter 223r is 2 or more, it is 8 seconds. The transformation effect mode of the display period of 9 seconds including the operation valid period is set. When setting the transformation effect mode, the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the transformation effect mode to be set is completed is determined (predicted). Then, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit set for each effect type, the shortest operation valid period is set regardless of the specified contents of the period selection table 222d. .. As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the development production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is set, the operation set before the operation valid period to be set in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The length of the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined in consideration of the operation status of the frame button 22 in the valid period, and the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 was not detected in the past. If is present, the set operation validity period tends to be long. More specifically, the larger the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, the longer the display period (operation valid period) is set. As a result, if the player does not positively press the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode is reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can positively press the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when the operation for the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is reset to 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, 1 may be subtracted from the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r increases, it becomes difficult to shorten the subsequent operation valid period. Therefore, the frame button 22 is used for the player during each operation valid period. You can get the motivation to press. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 2 or more, the transformation effect mode of the same length (9 seconds) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is larger than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be lengthened as the counter value increases.

Next, the details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). Similar to the transformation effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the transformation effect selection table 222b provides an effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern accompanied by a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. A data table referenced to determine.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment defines five types of effects, continuous transformation effects A2 to E2. The continuous transformation effect A2 is an effect type corresponding to the continuous transformation effect A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated effect counter 223n are the continuous transformation effect A. It is the same. Similarly, the continuous transformation effect B2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect B in the first embodiment, the continuous transformation effect C2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect C in the first embodiment, and the continuous transformation effect D2 corresponds to the first implementation. Corresponding to the continuous transformation effect D in the form, the continuous transformation effect E2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect E in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated effect counter 223n. Is the same as.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the continuous transformation effect A2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation valid period, notification mode) is set so that the remaining variation time at the timing when the final notification mode of the continuous transformation effect A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, in the continuous transformation effect B2, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time is set to 34 seconds, in the continuous transformation effect C2, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time is set to 29 seconds, and in the continuous transformation effect D2, the lower limit of the residual variation time is set. Is set to 24 seconds, and the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time of the continuous transformation effect E2 is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit of these residual fluctuation times is set to a value obtained by adding 1 second to the effect time of the development effect corresponding to each effect type. That is, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, a transition effect of at least 1 second is performed, and a time during which the corresponding development effect can be executed is set. When the frame button 22 is pressed during all the operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, in addition to being able to display the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times, the remaining variation time is displayed on the transformation effect selection table 222b. It is configured so that the continuous transformation effect ends at the timing when it matches the specified lower limit value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60 (b), the details of the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode of the development effect to be executed after the continuous transformation effect is completed, similarly to the development effect mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment. be.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment, the type of continuous transformation effect, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the effect mode (effect time) of the development effect are paired. It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, the development effect with an effect time of 38 seconds is selected. That is, if the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect A2 with an effect time of 38 seconds is selected, and if the effect time is 38 seconds, the out-of-development effect A2 is selected.

Similarly, when the continuous transformation effect B2 is executed as the effect type, the hit development effect B2 or the out-of-development effect B2 is selected for the effect time of 33 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect C2 is executed, the continuous transformation effect C2 is executed. A development effect C2 with an effect time of 28 seconds or an out-of-development effect C2 is selected. Further, when the continuous transformation effect D2 is executed as the effect type, the hit development effect D2 or the out-of-development effect B2 is selected for the effect time of 23 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect E2 is executed, the effect is produced. The development effect E2 with a time of 18 seconds or the out-of-development effect E2 is selected. In this way, by defining the effect type of the continuous transformation effect and the effect mode of the development effect in association with each other, the processing load when selecting the effect type of the development effect can be reduced.

Next, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment has a timer 223p during the display period and a non-pressed count counter with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the 223r, the pressed flag 223s, and the transition effect flag 223t are added. It is also different in that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

The timer 223p during the display period is a timer that measures the period from the start of the transformation effect mode of 1 to the end of the display period of the transformation effect mode. The value of the timer 223p during the display period is updated by 1 in the valid period process 2 executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

The non-pressed number counter 223r is a counter for counting the continuous number of times during the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The non-pressed count counter 223r adds 1 to the value when the frame button 22 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period (see S4514 in FIG. 63). The length of the display period (and operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined based on the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of 1, and if it is on, it means that the press on the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation valid period. The pressed flag 223s is set to ON when the push of the frame button 22 is first detected during the operation valid period in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Further, it is set to off after updating the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r at the end of the operation valid period (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the transition effect should be set when the display period of the transformation effect mode being executed ends. If this transition effect flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the timing when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and if it is off, a new transformation effect mode is set. Means that it should be. This transition effect flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined that the transformation effect mode is the last transformation effect mode in the continuous transformation effect this time when setting a new transformation effect mode. That is, it is set to ON when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time specified for each effect type (see S5116 in FIG. 64). ..

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. This frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and monitors the pressing of the frame button 22. , It is a process for performing control according to the pressed situation.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, in each process of S4101 and S4102, S4101 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , The same process as each process of S4102 is executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), then the pressing is performed. It is determined whether or not the completed flag 223s is on (S4111). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is on in the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes), it means that the pressing detected this time is not the first pressing in the operation valid period, so this processing is terminated as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4111, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4111: No), it means that the first pressing in the operation valid period is detected. Therefore, first, the pressed flag 223s is turned on. Is set to (S4112). Then, the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), the pressing effect corresponding to the pressing is set (S4114), and this process is terminated. The pressing effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed, for example, displaying an image in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is pressed. It is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and like the effect update process (see FIG. 36), the variable display is being executed. In this process, the effect mode is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time, the values of various timers, and the like.

Of the effect update processes 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311, the effect update processes (see FIG. 36) S4301 to S4304 in the first embodiment, respectively, The same processing as each processing of S4310 and S4311 is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), during the valid period in the first embodiment. Instead of the process (see FIG. 37 (b)), the process 2 is executed during the valid period (S4321), and the present process is terminated. The valid period processing 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period, as in the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the first embodiment. The details of the process 2 (S4321) during the valid period will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is off in the process of S4304 (S4304: No), then the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0. (S4322), and if it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4322, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process during the display period is executed (S4323), and this process is terminated. The process during the display period (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing 2 (S4321) will be described. As described above, the process 2 (S4321) during the valid period is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period.

In the valid period processing 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the display period timer 223p are both subtracted by 1 and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (whether the operation valid period has reached the end timing) (S4512), and if it has not become 0 (S4512: No), this is the case. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4512, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f becomes 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off in the processing of S4513 (S4513: No), it means that the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected during the current operation valid period, so that it is not. 1 is added to the value of the press count counter 223r to update (S4514), and the process shifts to S4515.

On the other hand, in the process of S4513, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513: Yes), the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at least once during the operation valid period. , The process of S4514 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to off, and the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4515) to end this process.

By executing the process 2 during the valid period (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r indicating the continuous number of times of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected can be appropriately updated. .. Therefore, the subsequent operation validity period can be set to an appropriate length.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the above-mentioned display period processing (S4323) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing during the display period (S4323).

In the display period processing (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the timer 223p during the display period is subtracted by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223p during the display period after the subtraction is 0. (S5102). If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the value of the timer 223p during the display period after subtraction is not 0 (S5102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p becomes 0 during the display period after subtraction (S5102: Yes), it means that the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103), and if it is determined to be on (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. Therefore, first, the mode of the development effect corresponding to the current effect type is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60B), and the data corresponding to the read development effect mode is developed. It is stored in the effect storage area 223 m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect to be set this time (S5105), and this process is performed. finish. By executing the process of S5105, the difference between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining variation time can be covered by the effect time of the transition effect, so that the end timing of the variation display and the end timing of the development effect can be covered. Can be matched with.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), it means that a new transformation effect mode should be set. Therefore, first, the non-pressed count counter 223r The display period of the transformation effect mode corresponding to the value of and the operation valid period are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether the read display period is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect set this time (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the current remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type.

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the display period of the transformation effect mode exceeds the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: No), the display period of the transformation effect mode is included in the effect period of the continuous transformation effect. Set the shortest display period of 5 seconds. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, the transformation effect mode of the type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), the transition effect flag 223t and the validity period flag 223e are both set to ON (S5110), and this process is performed. finish. That is, when a long operation valid period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the transformation effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous transformation effect, the display period is switched to the shortest and the continuous transformation effect is terminated. ..

If it is determined in the process of S5107 that the end timing of the transformation effect mode is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read in the process of S5106 is displayed. In addition to setting the timer 223p during the period, the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the operation validity period is started by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

When the processing of S5112 is completed, next, is the timing at which the display period read in the processing of S5106 elapses (the end timing of the transformation effect mode) is 5 seconds or later before the end of the effect time of the continuous transformation effect (lower limit). (S5113), and if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more for the production period when the display period elapses (S5113:). No), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the success notification mode, which ends in the display period set in the process of S5111, is set (S5115). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is 5 seconds or later before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation valid period set this time. The transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4 (S5117), and if it is determined that the value is 4, the process is shifted to S5114 and the fifth success. Set the execution of the notification mode. Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is five, and after the fifth success notification mode is set, the direct transition effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5117 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 4 (3 or less) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the processing of S5111 elapses, which is a failure. The execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the notification mode is set (S5118), and this process is terminated.

By executing the process during the display period, the length of the operation valid period can be changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect, and the frame button 22 is not pressed. The longer the operation validity period is continuous, the longer the operation validity period is set. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) is set for each effect type only when the player positively presses the frame button 22. It is possible to reach the maximum number of times. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to perform the transformation up to the upper limit number of times, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the display period of the transformation effect mode of 1 is associated with each value of the non-pressed number counter 223r, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the tendency of the selected display period can be made different depending on the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. For example, it should be selected for each value of the non-pressing number counter 223r. It may be configured to specify a plurality of display period candidates in association with each other. Then, a display period of 1 may be selected from the candidates by lottery. Further, in the lottery for the display period, the larger the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r, the higher the ratio of selecting the longer display period may be. With this configuration, randomness can be added to the length of the set display period. Further, in this case, the display period that is easy to be selected may be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed but also to the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the second embodiment, the length of the operation valid period to be set is changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. It suffices if the player presses the frame button 22 so that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is more likely to be set. For example, the configuration may be such that the number of consecutive operation valid periods when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is counted. .. Then, the length of the set operation valid period may be shortened as the number of consecutive counts increases. Then, if the frame button 22 is positively pressed to increase the count value of the number of consecutive times and a shorter operation valid period is not set, the number of continuous transformations is continuously set before reaching the upper limit of the number of transformations set for each effect type. It may be configured so that the transformation effect is completed. With this configuration, as in the second embodiment described above, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to display more success notification modes. That is, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production.

In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected is counted within the continuous transformation effect of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is continuous in the past continuous transformation effect. It may be configured to take over the number of times and count. That is, the counter value of the non-pressed count counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect is held, and in the next continuous transformation effect, counting is started from the held value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. May be. In this case, the non-pressed number counter 223r itself may be held in the state at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect, or the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r may be stored in a predetermined storage of the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous transformation effect. It may be configured to be saved in the area and the saved counter value may be set again for the non-pressed number counter 223r at the start of the continuous transformation effect. With this configuration, the player's operation status in the continuous transformation effect of 1 can be inherited from the next time onward, so that the influence when the operation is not performed can be further increased. Therefore, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of transformations is set for each production type of the continuous transformation effect, and the number of transformations is less than the upper limit and the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or more than the lower limit. When the operation validity period ends, the transformation is always successful (success notification mode is displayed).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode. In addition, the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is configured so that the variable display that is a big hit is higher than the variable display that is out of order. As a result, when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is further improved as compared with the first embodiment. Further, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 has a higher ratio of displaying the success notification mode than the lottery executed by the elapse of the operation valid period.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. (See FIG. 14A) is different in that the transformation possibility determination table 222e is added.

The transformation possibility determination table 222e is referred to for determining whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the display condition of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied. Data table. The details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b).

FIG. 65B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation possibility determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the transformation possibility determination table 222e, the variation type (whether it is a hit super reach or a missed super reach) of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and the operation is valid. The range of the counter value (random value) of the effect counter 223n, which determines the display of the success notification mode, is defined in association with each end condition of the period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a hit super reach and the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is used. The range of "0 to 79" is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 80, so the operation is performed during the execution of the hit super reach. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 80% (80/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of range and the super reach is detected and the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. ing. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

In this way, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%, whereas even if the operation valid period ends during the execution of the off-super reach, the success notification mode is displayed. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50%, the higher the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the possibility that the hit super reach is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect in the hope that the success notification mode will continue more times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a hit super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is "0 to 49". The range of "is specified. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 50, so the operation is performed during the execution of the winning super reach. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of range and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the button 22, the range of "60 to 99" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. .. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 40. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 40% (40/100).

In this way, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%, whereas even if the operation valid period ends during the execution of the off-super reach, the success notification mode is displayed. The success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. That is, the difference in the ratio at which the display of the success notification mode is determined between the case of the hit super reach and the case of the off super reach, as compared with the case where the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. Is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the frame button 22, the jackpot expectation is not so high even if the success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to estimate the jackpot expectation more accurately during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

Further, when the operation valid period is elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even during the execution of the hit super reach. That is, it is more difficult to display the success notification mode than when the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 so much plays a game, even if a big hit occurs, the continuous transformation effect can be easily completed with a relatively small number of display times of the success notification mode. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of cases where a big hit is achieved with a small number of display times of the success notification mode, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of display times of the success notification mode, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S4031).

The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is an operation valid period. This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the period.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66), in each of the processes S4101 and S4102, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34) S4101 and S4102 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed. Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the first embodiment is performed. Instead of the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the form, the transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33). The details of the transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 3 (S4121). This transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the number of transformations, and the like, as in the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. be.

Of the transformation setting processes 3 (see FIG. 67), in each of the processes S4201 to S4208 and S421-S4212, the transformation setting processes (see FIG. 35) S4201 to S4208 and S421-S4212 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number of transformations corresponding to the effect type of the continuous transformation effect this time. (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value specified for each effect type.

In the process of S4221, when it is determined that the period during which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformed) is not possible (S4221: No), the process is performed to set the failure notification mode and select the effect type of the development effect. To S4204. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4221 that the display of the success notification mode is within the settable period (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66 (b)) is displayed. The value of the effect counter 223n is read out (S4222). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the display determination (successful transformation) of the success notification mode defined in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

In the process of S4223, if it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process shifts to S4210 in order to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process shifts to S4204 in order to display the failure notification mode.

By this transformation setting process 3, whether or not to display the success notification mode can be drawn with a lottery probability according to the type of variable display and the end condition of the operation valid period, so that it is based on the number of times the success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the result of this variation display will be a hit. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the operation valid period ends and to play the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined differs depending on the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and the case becomes a big hit. The configuration is such that the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of disconnection. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed and perform the game. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible, and the player who wants to more accurately determine the expected degree of the jackpot is positively pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production.

Further, also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, by pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period, the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times set for each effect type. It is configured to be possible. That is, in the third embodiment, when the player positively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period in the middle and continues to win the lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode. , The configuration is such that the success notification mode can be displayed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, as compared with the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be smaller. In other words, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be relatively small regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, so even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of times, there is a sense of expectation that it will be a hit. Can be embraced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the continuous transformation production.

Further, in the third embodiment, the operation valid period ends based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22, and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode is different. Then, when the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, there is a difference in the lottery probability in which the display of the success notification mode is determined between the case of winning super reach and the case of losing super reach. It is configured to be less. With this configuration, if the operation valid period elapses without pressing the frame button 22, the jackpot expectation is not so high even if the success notification mode is displayed, so the continuous transformation effect is being executed. It is possible to positively press the frame button 22 for a player who wants to estimate the jackpot expectation more accurately.

In the third embodiment, if the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode is missed, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation effect is terminated, but the continuous transformation effect is not necessarily terminated. You don't have to. For example, instead of setting the number of times to display the success notification mode, the upper limit of the number of times to set the operation validity period is set, and the continuous transformation effect is continued even if the failure notification mode is displayed until the upper limit is reached. It may be configured to be set (a new operation validity period is set after the end of the failure notification mode). With this configuration, the lottery for displaying the success notification mode can be performed more times. Further, by positively pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period, it is possible to perform the display lottery of the success notification mode more times. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict whether the success notification mode is a hit or a miss from the displayed ratio. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be pressed more positively in the continuous transformation effect.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the success notification mode is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed, as compared with the case where the operation valid period elapses without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The winning probability in the lottery of whether to display or not was configured to be high, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, but the lottery of the special symbol is missed. May be configured so that the winning probabilities are the same regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation can be further increased, so that the player can press the frame button 22 more positively. Can be made to. Further, for example, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while when the special symbol lottery is missed, the frame button 22 is pressed to win. It may be configured so that the probability is low. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation can be further increased. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode may be configured to depend only on the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, whether or not to display the success notification mode with the same probability regardless of whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period or the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22. It may be configured to perform a lottery.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. In the third embodiment described above, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode, and when the lottery is won, the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, the lottery probability that the display decision of the success notification mode is made is set higher in the execution of the winning super reach than in the execution of the out-of-order super reach. As a result, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the player's expectation for a big hit can be further improved.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during the predetermined period (operation valid period of the first half two times) in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the pressing state (player's operation state) for the frame button 22 is determined, and the said The rate at which the success notification mode is set is variable according to the discrimination result. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is determined whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 when the operation valid period is set, and the degree of expectation of whether or not the player is a hit is suggested according to the determination result. The method (selection rate when selecting the notification mode) is different.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The third is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. First, the details of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. First, FIG. 68A is a block diagram showing a development effect mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the development effect mode selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment corresponds to the development effect mode to be selected for each value of the transformation number counter 223 g and the variation type of the variation display. It is specified with.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the development effect can be determined according to the value of the transformation count counter 223 g, as in the above-described second embodiment, in the fourth embodiment, the operation valid period is not interrupted in the middle. This is because it is said. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the operation valid period is always set to 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the value of the transformation count counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining fluctuation time. For example, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is 3 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is 2 times, so that the failure notification mode is displayed. The elapsed time at the time of setting is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 3 + 1 seconds x 2 until the continuous transformation effect is started). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, if 1 second, which is the display period of the failure notification mode, and 1 second, which is the display period of the transition effect, are added, if the effect of 30 seconds is executed as the development effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the development effect Can be matched with.

Similarly, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is 5 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is 4 times. The elapsed time at the time of setting the display is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 5 + 1 seconds x 4). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, by executing the development effect of 18 seconds in which the failure notification mode and the effect time of the transition effect are reduced, the end timing of the development effect can be adjusted to the end timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, the development effect with an effect time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value “2” of the transformation number counter 223 g. That is, the hit development effect A4 having an effect time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect A4 having an effect time of 30 seconds is defined with respect to the out-of-super reach.

Similarly, with respect to the value "3" of the transformation number counter 223 g, a development effect with an effect time of 24 seconds is defined in association with the value "3". That is, the hit development effect B4 having an effect time of 24 seconds is defined in association with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect B4 having an effect time of 24 seconds is associated with the out-of-super reach. Further, the development effect with an effect time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the value "4,5" of the transformation number counter 223 g. That is, the hit development performance C4 having an effect time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect C4 having an effect time of 18 seconds is defined with respect to the out-of-super reach.

In this way, by referring to the development effect mode selection table 222c, the type of development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time can be determined according to the value of the transformation number counter 223 g, so that the end timing of the development effect can be determined. And the end timing of the variable display can be matched.

Next, the details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (d). First, FIG. 68B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment is determined when it is determined that the player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game. , When it is determined that the pressing tendency table 222e1 used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode and the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 are playing the game, the success notification is performed. It is composed of at least a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used for determining whether or not to display an aspect.

In the fourth embodiment, after the start of the continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player is determined over the two operation valid periods. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing the game. In addition, in order to determine the tendency of the player, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end in the first two operation valid periods. That is, it is configured so that the failure notification mode is displayed before the tendency of the player is determined, and the continuous transformation effect is not terminated.

FIG. 68 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the pressing tendency table 222e1 is determined to display the success notification mode for each set number of operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1 and the variation type, the effect counter 223n. The value of is specified in association with each other.

Specifically, when the variation type is a hit super reach, "0 to 79" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the 3rd to 5th operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect. There is. As a result, when the third to fifth operation valid periods of the continuous transformation effect are completed, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of the range and the super reach is specified, "0 to 59" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. "0 to 39" is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and "0 to 19" corresponds to the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation valid period. It is specified with.

Therefore, when the out-of-order super reach is executed, it becomes difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode as compared with the hit super reach. Further, as the operation validity period increases, it becomes more difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode. Therefore, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases. Therefore, it is possible to have the player who tends to press the frame button 22 play the game with the expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

FIG. 68 (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)). That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the value of the effect counter 223n, which is determined to display the success notification mode, is associated with each of the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect 1 and the variation type. It is stipulated.

Specifically, when the variation type is a hit super reach, "0 to 39" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth time. "0 to 79" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the operation valid period of, and "0 to 39" is defined as the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the fifth operation valid period. Is specified in association with each other. That is, during the execution of the hit super reach, it becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation valid periods, while the end of the even-numbered (fourth) operation valid period. Sometimes it becomes easier to set the success notification mode.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of the range and the super reach is specified, "0 to 69" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. “0 to 49” is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0 to 69” corresponds to the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation valid period. It is specified with. That is, during the execution of the out-of-order super reach, contrary to the case of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is likely to be set at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation valid periods, while the even-numbered super reach is executed. At the end of the (fourth) operation validity period, it becomes difficult to set the success notification mode.

Therefore, after the odd-numbered operation valid period ends, the expectation that the failure notification mode is displayed will be a big hit, while the success notification mode will be displayed after the even-numbered operation valid period ends. The expectation that it will be a big hit will increase. Therefore, in the odd-numbered operation valid period, the game can be played with the expectation that the failure notification mode will be displayed after the end of the period, while in the even-numbered operation valid period, after the end of the period. The game can be played with the expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed.

As described above, the lottery method (table used for the lottery) for displaying the success notification mode is different between the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to not press it easily. As a result, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a game property in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases. On the other hand, when a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 is playing a game, the jackpot expectation decreases when the success notification mode is displayed at odd-numbered times, and the success notification mode is displayed at even-numbered times. If this is done, it is possible to provide a playability that improves the expectation of a big hit.

Further, during the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot (gaming property) can be switched, the player can be made to select the preferred suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method according to the taste of each player. Further, even if one is tired of the suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, only the continuous transformation effect having a maximum number of transformations of 5 is used as the type of continuous transformation effect so that the expectation of a big hit can be more accurately determined from the display timing of the success notification mode. It is configured to be set. With this configuration, the case where the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to the case where the success notification mode display lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is missed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment has the pressed flag 223s and pressed with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). It differs from the number counter 223u in that it is provided.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of 1, as in the second embodiment. Further, the press count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected, out of the operation valid periods of the first half of the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the press count counter 223u, the tendency of the player (whether or not the player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing the game) is determined.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. This frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, and the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored and the pressing is performed. This is a process for displaying the corresponding effect when it is detected.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S4101 and S4102, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4101 and S4102 is executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), is the pressed flag 223s turned on? If it is determined whether or not the button is pressed (S4131) and the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4131 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then 1 is set to the value of the pressed count counter 223u. Add and update (S4133). Then, a pressing effect for notifying the player that the pressing has been detected is set (S4134), and this processing is terminated. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the pressing number counter 223u can be updated in response to the pressing of the frame button 22, so that the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 can be determined. It can be determined according to the value of the press count counter 223u.

Next, the process 4 (S4331) during the valid period will be described with reference to FIG. 71. This valid period processing 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the end of the operation valid period. This is a process for performing the corresponding control at the timing.

Of the treatments during the valid period 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the treatments of S4501 and S4502 are the same as the treatments during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment, respectively. Will be executed. Further, in the process 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction is 0 in the process of S4502 (S4502: Yes), then , The pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). This transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting a notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, as in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. The details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the processing of S4532 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, after the first and second operation valid periods are completed, the success notification mode is always displayed (successful transformation). Then, the tendency of the player is determined by the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 in the two operation valid periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to determine the tendency of the player to press (whether it is the timing when the operation valid period of the first two times has ended).

If it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 2, it is not the timing to determine the tendency of the player to press, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4533, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), whether or not to determine the tendency of the player to press and display the success notification mode. The processes of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for the lottery are executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534), and when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), the success notification mode is set. A pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)) is set as a table used for a lottery (determination of whether or not transformation is possible) for display or not (S4535), and this process is terminated. When the value of the press count counter 223u is 2, it means that the player presses the frame button 22 both times during the operation valid period of the first half of the continuous transformation effect, so that the frame button is positively pressed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player who presses 22 is playing the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4534 that the value of the press count counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), it is highly possible that a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 is playing the game. As a table used for lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode, a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68 (d)) is set (S4536), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 4 (S4532). In each of the transformation setting processes 4 (S4532), S4201, S4202, S4206, and S421-S4212, S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 of the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S4212 is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223 g read in the process of S4202 is 2 or more (see FIG. 72). S4231). If it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), either of the operation valid periods of the first half of the continuous transformation effect 4 is performed in the transformation setting process 4 this time. It means that it was executed when it was finished. As described above, the success notification mode is always displayed after the first half of the two operation valid periods has expired. In this case, the processing of S421 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode is executed, and this processing is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), it is set in the process 4 (see FIG. 71) during the valid period in the transformation possibility determination table 222e. The table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) and the value of the effect counter 223n are read out (S4222). As described above, by referring to the pressing tendency table 222e1 to determine whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed, the gameability (suggestion of the degree of expectation) increases as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases. Method) can be realized. On the other hand, by determining whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed by referring to the non-pressing tendency table 222e2, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the jackpot expectation is lowered, and the even-numbered operation is performed. When the success notification mode is displayed after the valid period, it is possible to realize a playability (method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high.

When the processing of S4222 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the read effect counter 223n is the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) specified in the table (S4223), and succeeds. If the counter value corresponds to the display of the notification mode (successful transformation) (S4223: Yes), the process of S421 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is out of the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the development effect mode selection table. From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of the development effect corresponding to the variation type of the variation display of this time are read out (S4322). Next, the data corresponding to the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and the failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and this process is terminated.

By executing this transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), the method of suggesting the degree of expectation that is a big hit can be changed according to the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22, so that the game becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being lost.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, whether or not the player who is currently playing the game tends to press the frame button 22 during the predetermined period in the continuous transformation effect. Is configured so that it can be discriminated (identified). The method of suggesting the degree of expectation (playability) in the continuous advance notice effect is different between the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period and the player who does not. That is, when it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game, the larger the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of times the transformation is successful), the bigger the hit. It is configured to set a suggestion method that raises expectations. On the other hand, when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation valid period, the expectation of a big hit decreases. , When the success notification mode is displayed after the even-numbered operation validity period, a suggestion method for improving the expectation of a big hit is set.

With such a configuration, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, during the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot (gaming property) can be switched, the player can be made to select the preferred suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method according to the taste of each player. Further, even if one is tired of the suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined during the first half of the two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, but the method for determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. The tendency of the player may be determined by the pressing state in the first operation valid period. Thereby, in the continuous transformation effect, it is possible to execute the suggestion method according to the tendency of each player for a larger number of times. Further, conversely, the configuration may be such that the tendency of the player is determined according to the pressing state over the operation valid period of three times or more. With such a configuration, the tendency of the player can be determined more accurately. Further, a period for determining the tendency of the player may be provided separately from the operation valid period set in the continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before starting the continuous transformation effect, an effect (pressing effect) for prompting the frame button 22 to be pressed is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing status in the one or more pressing effects, the effect is displayed. It may be configured to determine the tendency of the player. With this configuration, all notification modes of the continuous transformation effect can be set to the suggestion method according to the tendency of the player.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to 5 times. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, is missed. It is not something that can be done. Similar to each of the above embodiments, a plurality of types having different maximum number of transformations may be provided. With this configuration, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, but the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the failure notification mode may be displayed. Therefore, assuming that the failure notification mode is determined by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at the timing when the expectation of the jackpot becomes low, the player's expectation of the jackpot is high. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the fourth embodiment, the player who positively presses the frame button 22 is configured so that the higher the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation that the frame button 22 will be a big hit, while the frame button 22 For players who tend not to press too much, the expectation that a big hit will be high when the continuous transformation effect is completed at the odd number of times is not limited to this. It suffices if the method of suggesting the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the player actively presses the frame button 22 or the player who does not press the frame button 22 so much. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect is completed in the even number of times, the expectation of a big hit is high, while for the player who does not press the frame button 22, the expectation of a big hit is so small that the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations. May be configured to be high. In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to making the tendency of the number of transformations different, the player can refer to the law of the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is increased when the transformation is successful (success notification mode is displayed). It may be configured to be different according to the tendency of. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811. That is, the rear image may be configured so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of wilderness → mountain → sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who tends not to press the frame button 22, the rear image may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation by the facial expression of the character 811 instead of setting it randomly. That is, the facial expression of the character 811 may be configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of expressionless → smiling → angry face. Further, for example, instead of changing the suggestion method during the execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the tendency of the player, or in addition, the content of the development effect may be different according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who positively presses the frame button 22, the more the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the development effect, the higher the expectation that it will be a big hit, while the frame In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the expectation of a big hit may be.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82. In the fourth embodiment described above, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the method of notifying the jackpot expectation degree is different depending on the discriminating result.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is changed from the situation where the player presses the frame button 22 in the past continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for the player who positively presses the frame button 22, the effect mode in which the operation valid period is set a relatively large number of times is executed. On the other hand, for the player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22, instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set, a long development effect is set. As a result, the player who positively presses the frame button 22 is given an opportunity to press the frame button 22 more times, while the player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is given an opportunity to press the frame button 22. Instead of reducing it, you can entertain the development production for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the taste of each player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous transformation effect, if the set number of times (2 times or 5 times) of the operation valid period remains, the continuous transformation effect is terminated. The configuration is such that the operation validity period is set again without doing so. That is, it is prevented (suppressed) that the operation valid period ends in a small number of times even though the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The fourth regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22, and the tendency to positively press the frame button 22 according to the determination result (participation frequency is high). The configuration is such that a larger operation validity period is set for the player of (tendency). Further, for the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 so much (the tendency that the participation frequency is low), the number of times the operation valid period is set is reduced, while the effect time of the development effect is extended. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the development effect (development effect for low participation frequency) in which the effect time is extended, the character 811 searches the cave and collects items. Is configured to execute. The discovered item favors the character 811 in the subsequent battle with the monster 812. The effect of exploring this cave (search effect) is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811 (the more items there are, the easier it is to win the monster 812). is doing). That is, when the operation valid period is set to a small number of times for a player who participates infrequently, the number of executions of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is reduced depending on whether or not the character 811 is transformed, but the search effect is performed. The number of items discovered by the character 811 can be used to suggest the degree of expectation. As a result, even when the number of times the operation valid period is set is small, it is possible to give an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the number of times of setting is large.

FIG. 73A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the above-mentioned search effect. As shown in FIG. 73A, when the search effect is started, the effect that the character 811 progresses toward the depth of the cave is displayed. Further, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, the characters "search mode" and the characters "expectation level UP as the item is GET!" Are displayed. Further, the characters "item x 0" are displayed in the display area HR4 displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm. The characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811. The character 811 can discover up to three items in one search effect.

FIG. 73B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 discovers an item during the execution of the search effect. In this case, the effect that the character 811 opens the treasure box displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and the item appears from the treasure box. Further, on the right side of the treasure box, a display area HR5 for notifying the type of the acquired item is displayed. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the characters "power-up drink GET !!" are displayed for the display area HR5. Further, the characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated to "item x 1". The numbers displayed in the display area HR4 can indicate the degree of expectation that the player will be a big hit. In the search effect, there is a possibility that the character 811 finds the treasure box, but the item does not appear. That is, in the search effect, the treasure box is basically found three times, and the degree of expectation is suggested by how many times the item is found out of the three times.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the player's participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect is low, the search effect is executed instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect. In this search effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times the operation valid period is set is small, it is possible to give an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the number of times of setting is large.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the time course of the effect mode will be described when it is determined that the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is low and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), a change with time of the effect mode when the participation frequency of the player is low will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation valid period is set only twice. That is, the operation valid period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not completed until the operation valid period of the specified number of times is set. .. This makes it possible to more accurately estimate the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed.

When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a one-second transition effect is then set. When the transition production is completed, the development production is started. In the development effect when the participation frequency is low, first, a search effect for 15 seconds (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be a big hit is executed depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811. Then, when the production period of 15 seconds elapses, the production in which the battle with the monster 812 is performed is executed. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the hit development effect A5 in which the monster 812 is defeated is executed during the effect period of 23 seconds.

In this way, when the participation frequency is low, the two operation validity periods set in the continuous transformation effect give two opportunities to suggest the jackpot expectation. In addition, the search effect gives three chances to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, a total of 5 opportunities are given to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the change with time of the effect mode when it is determined that the participation frequency of the player is high will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the player frequently participates, the operation valid period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed 5 times each. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, the success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and the failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. The success notification mode is displayed as the fourth and fifth notification modes. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the fifth embodiment, the operation valid period is not terminated even when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period. As a result, the production time of the continuous transformation effect can be fixed, so that the production time of the development effect executed after that can also be fixed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare various modes for each production time of the development effect, the storage capacity for displaying the development effect can be reduced.

When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, the transition effect is displayed, and then the development effect A5 with an effect time of 23 seconds is displayed. In this way, when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period is always set 5 times in the continuous transformation effect, so there is an opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation as in the case where the participation frequency is low. Given times.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. First, FIG. 75A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment in that the validity period number table 222f is added.

The valid period number table 222f is a data table in which the number of operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect is defined for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period). If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player actively participates in the continuous transformation effect, and if it is off, it means that the player is a player who participates less frequently in the continuous transformation effect. ..

The details of the valid period number table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), "5 times" is defined as the number of times the operation valid period is set for the state "on" of the pressing tendency flag 223y. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation valid period is set five times in the continuous transformation effect. .. Of the notification modes displayed after the set five operation validity periods have expired, the number of times (ratio) that the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot to the player. ..

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, in the case of a big hit, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after each operation valid period ends, but it is out of the question. In this case, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the state "off" of the pressing tendency flag 223y is defined by associating "twice" as the number of times the operation valid period is set. Therefore, when the player who participates in the continuous transformation effect infrequently (the frequency of pressing the frame button 22 is low) is playing the game, the operation valid period is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. Of the notification modes displayed after the set two operation validity periods have expired, the number of times (ratio) that the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot to the player. ..

When the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the number of times the operation valid period is set is reduced by 3 times as compared with the case of a player who participates frequently. That is, the number of times the jackpot expectation is suggested in the continuous transformation effect is reduced. In order to cover this decrease in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) that suggests the degree of expectation in the development effect. As a result, even for a player who participates less frequently, it is possible to guarantee the number of suggested jackpot expectations equivalent to that of a player who participates more frequently. Further, by lengthening the effect time of the development effect instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set, it is possible to provide an effect mode that suits the taste of the player who does not want to press the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment has a valid period number counter 223w, a notification mode timer 223x, and a pressing tendency flag 223y with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69). And a total number of presses counter 223aa and a total valid period counter 223ab are added at least. Further, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j have been deleted.

The valid period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The value of the valid period number counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Further, each time a new operation validity period is set, the value is added by 1 (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the valid period number counter 223w is used for determining whether to newly set the operation valid period or set the transition effect each time the display period of the notification mode elapses. That is, if the value of the valid period count counter 223w is less than the set number of operation valid periods specified in the valid period count table 222f, a new operation valid period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the valid period number counter 223w matches the set number of times specified in the valid period number table 222f, the start of the transition effect is set.

The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the operation valid period ends. The notification mode timer 223x is set with a timer value corresponding to 1 second each time the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation valid period or a transition effect. ..

The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If this pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively press the frame button 22), and if it is off, it means that the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. It means that the frequency of participation in continuous transformation production is low. The participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of times the player has pressed (participated in) the frame button 22 to the number of times the total operation valid period has been set. Specifically, when the operation validity period when the player presses the frame button 22 exceeds 80% of the total, the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game. Determine. The pressing tendency flag 223y is updated every time the continuous transformation effect of 1 is completed, according to the participation status of the player (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

The total number of times of pressing counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of times of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. That is, the number of operation valid periods accompanied by pressing all the frame buttons 22 after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted by the total pressing number counter 223aa. The ratio of pressing the frame button 22 based on the counter value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the number of all operation valid periods set after the power is turned on (counter value of the total valid period counter 223ab described later). (Tendency of the player) is determined. The total number of presses counter 223aa is updated every time the continuous transformation effect of 1 is completed, according to the participation status of the player (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

The total valid period count counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods. That is, the number of times of all operation valid periods after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted by the total valid period number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab and the value of the total pressing number counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (the tendency of the player) is determined. Similar to the total number of presses counter 223aa, the total valid period counter 223ab responds to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect each time one continuous transformation effect is completed. (See S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, the effect update process 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The effect update process 5 (S4051) is the same as the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), during the execution of the variation display, the remaining variation time and the values of various timers. It is a process for changing the effect mode according to the above.

Of the effect update processes 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310, the effect update processes (see FIG. 36) S4301, S4302, respectively, in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S4304 and S4310 is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is set. The transformation effect start determination process 5 for determining is executed (S4341), and this process ends. The details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (a).

Further, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is on in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes), the end timing of the valid period is determined. This process is terminated by executing the process 5 during the valid period (S4342). The details of the process 5 (S4342) during the valid period will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), then it is determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is larger than 0 (S4343). If the value is larger than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that the notification mode is in the display period. Therefore, the processing during the notification mode for determining the end timing of the notification mode is executed (S4344). End the process. The details of the processing in the notification mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

If it is determined in the process of S4343 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), is the value of the transition effect time timer 223k larger than 0 (during the display time of the transition effect)? (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), the transition effect in-process 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this process is terminated. The details of the transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). The transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect, as in the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process for.

Of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4401, S4402, and S4404, the transformation effect start determination process (FIG. 37 (a)) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. )) The same processes as those of S4401, S4402, and S4404 are executed.

Further, in the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f. At the same time, the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set in the value of the valid period count counter 223w (S4412), and the process shifts to S4404.

By executing the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set at the same timing each time (at the time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), and the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set. The count of the valid period count counter 223w can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78 (b), the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing 5 (S4342) will be described. Similar to the valid period processing 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the valid period processing 5 (S4342) determines the end timing of the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period ends, the operation valid period ends. This is a process for displaying the corresponding notification mode.

Of the effective period treatment 5 (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4501, S4502, and S4531, the effective period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4501, S4502, and S4531 is executed. Further, in the process 5 during the valid period (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4502 is completed, the fourth mode is set in order to set the display of either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Instead of the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, the transformation setting process 5 is executed (S4541), and this process is terminated. The details of the transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 5 (S4541). In each of the transformation setting processes 5 (S4541), S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233, S4201, S4202, and S4210 of the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. , S4211, S4222, S4223, S4233, and the same processing as each processing is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4233 or S4211 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x (see FIG. 79). S4241), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the above-mentioned processing in the notification mode (S4344) will be described. As described above, the processing in the notification mode (S4344) is a processing for determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

In this notification mode processing (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is subtracted by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the subtracted timer value becomes 0 (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 in the processing of S5202 (S5202: No), it means that the display time of the notification mode (1 second) has not elapsed. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after subtraction becomes 0 (S5202: Yes), a process for setting either a new operation valid period or a transition effect is performed. Run. Specifically, the pressing tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are read out (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

As a result of comparison by the processing of S5204, it was determined whether or not the value of the valid period count counter 223w matches the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and it was determined that the value matches the upper limit value. In that case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, the timer value corresponding to 1 second is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), the display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the valid period counter 223w does not match the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation valid period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the valid period count counter 223w (S5209), and this process is terminated.

By executing this processing in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of transition effect or new mode) is performed. Operation validity period can be set).

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the above-mentioned transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described. This transition effect in-process 5 (S4345) is executed in place of the transition effect in-process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81), the processes S4801 and S4802 are the same as the processes S4801 and S4802 of the transition effect process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

Further, in the transition effect in-process 5 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after subtraction becomes 0 (S4802: Yes). Next, it is determined whether the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). If it is determined in the process of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the effect time after the search effect (search mode) is completed. (S4812), and the process shifts to S4814.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process is transferred to S4814.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether the development effect is started from the search effect or after the search effect is completed, depending on the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (the tendency of the player). As a result, it is possible to execute a development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time.

After the processing of S4812 or S4813, the pressing tendency updating process for updating the player's tendency (state of the pressing tendency flag 223y) according to the participation frequency of the player in this continuous transformation effect is executed (S4814). ). The details of this pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. 82. After the processing of S4814, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to off (S4815), the value of the transformation count counter 223g and the value of the valid period counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the details of the above-mentioned pressing tendency updating process (S4814) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this pressing tendency update process (S4814). In the pressing tendency update process (S4814), first, by adding the value of the valid period count counter 223w to the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab, the number of operation valid periods set in this continuous transformation effect is set. It is reflected in the set number of times of the total operation validity period (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the press count counter 223u to the value of the total press count counter 223aa, the number of times of the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in this continuous transformation effect is pressed against the frame button 22. Is reflected in the total number of detected operation valid periods (S5302).

When the processing of S5302 is completed, next, a value obtained by dividing the value of the updated total number of presses counter 223aa by the value of the updated total valid period counter 223ab is calculated (S5303), and the calculated value is 0. It is determined whether the value is larger than .8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, if it is determined that the calculated value is larger than 0.8 (S5304), when the operation valid period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (That is, the player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game), so the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), the player who presses the frame button 22 relatively infrequently during the operation valid period is the game. Therefore, the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to off (S5306), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), each time the continuous transformation effect is completed, the player's tendency can be updated in consideration of the participation status of the player in the continuous transformation effect. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect (the ratio of the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of operation valid periods) is used. Therefore, the configuration is such that the production mode in the continuous transformation production is different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the number of times (5) in the continuous transformation effect is relatively large. Instead of setting the operation validity period of (times), it is configured to shorten the production time of the development production. On the other hand, when a player who does not participate much in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22 much during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the operation is performed a relatively small number of times (twice) in the continuous transformation effect. Instead of setting the validity period, it is configured to lengthen the production time of the development production. With this configuration, players who tend to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect can be given more opportunities to participate in the continuous transformation effect. On the other hand, for players who tend not to participate in the continuous transformation production very much, the chances of participating in the continuous transformation production can be reduced, and the development production can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, the effect can be suitably set according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the tendency of the player is determined by the ratio of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected to the number of times of all the operation valid periods set after the power is turned on. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a function for identifying a player who is playing a game, and each time it is determined (authenticated) that a different player has started the game, the tendency of the player is renewed. It may be configured to discriminate between. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started the game, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab may be reset to 0. As a result, the tendency of each player can be determined more accurately, so that it is possible to realize an effect that is more in line with the tendency of the player. Examples of the function for identifying the player who is playing the game include a known face authentication function, a fingerprint authentication function, a voiceprint authentication function, and the like. Further, the information of the player who is currently playing the game may be obtained from the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, while the information indicating the type of the card inserted in the card unit (for example, the serial number of the card or the member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 side can output the information. , The type of card can be identified from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be determined that the same player is playing the game while the same card is inserted.

Further, for a known gaming system composed of a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, tablet, etc.) possessed by a player, a server capable of communicating with the mobile terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 capable of communicating with the server. May be applied. That is, in the server, individual information for each player (game history, type and number of generated effects, etc.) is accumulated, and the information accumulated in the server is stored in the corresponding mobile terminal (for each player). For a gaming system configured to be able to browse via a mobile terminal that accessed the server with the assigned login ID and password, and to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on the accumulated information. May be applied. More specifically, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab described above are included in the game history information accumulated on the server side. Then, when the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa stored (stored) in the server and the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab are used as the value of the pachinko machine 10 to start the game. By reflecting on the above, it is possible to reflect the percentage of players participating in the continuous transformation effect on different days or on different platforms. Therefore, even if the date and time when the game is played or the table (hall) where the game is played is changed, the tendency of each player can be accurately determined and the effect mode suitable for the player's tendency can be set.

In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting the server information on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on the coding rules common to the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. The method can be mentioned. That is, when starting a game, a mobile terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts the game history and the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the above-mentioned coding rules. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa, the value of the total valid period counter 223ab, etc., and set in the RAM 223, etc., based on the above-mentioned coding rule. do. As a result, the operator of the mobile terminal can start the game from the state of the game history immediately after the previous game is finished. When ending the game, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the end of the game (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the end of the game on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10). Etc.). Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the value of the current total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-mentioned coding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 To display. The displayed password is output to the server by the mobile terminal connected to the server. On the server side, the password is converted into the information corresponding to the game history, and the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal is updated. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 and the server can share and update individual information for each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the continuous transformation effect is set depending on whether or not the number of operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of operation valid periods. Although the display is configured to change the effect mode (the number of times the operation valid period is set and the mode of the development effect), the threshold value for changing the effect mode is not limited to 80% and may be arbitrarily set. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effect mode to be set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and the case of 80% or less. Although it was configured to switch between the effect mode set to (easily set), the player's tendency may be discriminated more finely and the effect mode may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is 20% or less, the continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set once is set and the frame button 22 is pressed. When the ratio of the operation valid period that detected is more than 20% and 40% or less, the operation valid period is set to the continuous transformation effect twice, and the operation valid that detects the pressing of the frame button 22. When the ratio of the period exceeds 40% and is 60% or less, the continuous transformation effect is set in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is 3 times, and the ratio of the operation valid period when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is 6. When it exceeds the percentage and is 80% or less, the number of times the operation valid period is set is set to 4 times for continuous transformation effect, and the ratio of the operation valid period when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%. In this case, a continuous transformation effect may be set in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is five. That is, one type may be set from five types of production modes in which the number of operation valid periods and the production time of the development production are different according to the tendency of the player (frequency of participation in the continuous transformation production). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect mode that is more matched to the tendency of each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined by the ratio of the operation valid period in which the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected, but the method of determining the player's tendency is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with another effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the ratio of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the other effect is also taken into consideration. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22 (a tendency to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 89. In the first to fifth embodiments described above, as the specific winning opening (large opening opening) opened during the execution of the jackpot game (privilege game), a single specific winning opening 65a is directly under the first entry opening 64a. Was configured to be provided. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the lower center of the front view of the game board 13, the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. Both the game ball fired toward (left-handed) and the game ball fired (right-handed) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 enter. It was a structure to get.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning openings having different benefits (number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters are provided. Specifically, a left specific winning opening 650La, in which seven prize balls are given each time a game ball enters, is provided on the left side of the area below the first entry opening 64, and ten prizes are awarded. The right specific winning opening 650Ra to which the ball is given is provided on the right side of the area below the first entry opening 64. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are provided symmetrically in the lower center of the front view of the game board 13. These two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are normally set in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and when the jackpot round is started, one of them is specified. The winning opening will be ready for entry. Further, as will be described in detail later, when each specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to be able to enter, the left-struck game ball is also right-struck. The structure is such that both game balls can enter. As a result, the player can freely select the desired firing direction during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 84, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning opening 650La on the left side surface of the front view where a game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning opening 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, and a game ball that has reached the left variable winning device 650L from the right direction in the front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails forming an inclination in the downward direction in the front view of the left variable winning device are arranged, and most of the left-struck game balls are below the first entrance 64 through the inclination. Since it reaches the region of, the game ball flows down in the lower right direction in the region below the first entry port 64. That is, since the ball flows down in the direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in the normal state. Further, the arrangement of the nails and the like on the game board 13 is symmetrical, and an inclination in the downward direction to the lower left is formed above the right variable winning device 650R, but the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device are formed. Since it is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that a game ball that is hit right and flows down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R directly enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface provided with the opening) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured such that the upper side side protrudes toward the right side in the front view from the lower side side. As a result, even if the game ball flows down substantially vertically from above, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the left specific winning opening 650La by being obstructed by the protruding portion. The right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is symmetrical with the left variable winning device 650L and 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb and 650Rb capable of appearing and disappearing (variable movement) on the front side and the back side of the front view. Is provided. Since these variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried in the back side of the front view (that is, buried in the back side of the base plate 60), they are moved to the region below the first ball entry port 64. The progress of the game ball that has flowed down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, the variable member 650Lb forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower left direction of the front view by performing a projecting motion toward the front side of the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side surface of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, the variable member 650Rb forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower right direction of the front view by performing a projecting operation toward the front side of the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

In each round of the jackpot, the variable member according to the jackpot type protrudes toward the front side of the front view, so that the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening different according to the jackpot type. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot A6 (16 rounds probability variable jackpot), the variable member 650Rb protrudes, so that the game ball moves to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, which has a relatively large number of prize balls (that is, 10). It becomes easier to enter the ball. On the other hand, in each round of the jackpot B6 (7 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot C6 (7 rounds of short time jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so that the prize balls are relatively few (that is, 7) left. It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 650La.

As shown in FIG. 84, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are almost all game balls that reach below the first entry port 64 from above in a protruding state (a state in which they are arranged at the protruding positions). It is a structure that can be received. As a result, when either the movable member 650Lb or 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are received by the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in a protruding position. Then, it is guided to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb) from the inclination formed by the movable member. Therefore, even if the left movable member 650Lb becomes a jackpot type that performs an infestation motion (variable motion), or the right movable member 650Rb becomes a jackpot type that performs an infestation motion (variable motion), the launch direction of the game ball Regardless, just by continuing to shoot the game ball in the desired firing direction, the game ball can be entered into the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). .. Therefore, each time a jackpot is reached, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the jackpot.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening in which the game ball can be entered during the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot type. Then, regardless of the type of the specific winning opening where the game ball can be entered, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are guided to the specific winning opening where the ball can be entered. To. That is, there are two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening) for the area that can be reached by both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball (the area below the first entry opening 64). The mouth 650Ra) is provided. Then, each movable member for guiding the game ball to each specific winning opening moves to the corresponding specific winning opening for almost all the game balls that have reached the area (specific area) below the first entry opening 64. It is configured to operate variably so that it can be guided. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening regardless of the launch direction of the game ball during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is placed in the protruding position, the firing strength that can reach the game area (at least the firing strength that allows the game ball to fly beyond the return ball prevention member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that reach a specific area without entering the first entry port 64 or the general winning opening 63) can be entered into the specific winning opening. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that cannot be won (winned) to the specific winning opening and flow down to the out opening 66, so that the game efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game can be reduced. Can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

Further, the two specific prize openings are configured to have different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) given when a game ball enters each other. Then, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased. That is, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of the game state that shifts after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given each time the ball is entered into the specific winning opening is also the type of the jackpot. Since it can be made different according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value indefinitely, and must be set within the range of the upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to the difference in the prize spherical surface to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the range of the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively disadvantageous type, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The more disadvantageous types of jackpots are, the shorter the period. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or voice effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the number of rounds is set by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) and different specific winning openings that can be entered according to the jackpot type. (That is, while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in an advantageous type of jackpot, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. In the case of a jackpot of an unfavorable type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the left specific winning opening 650La) having a small privilege (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without reducing the number of rounds of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type too much. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness to each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (left variable winning device 650L, right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 85A is a front perspective view when the left specific winning opening 650La of the left variable winning device 650L is in a state where a ball can be won (winning), and FIG. 85B is a right variable winning device. It is a front perspective view in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state where a ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 85A, in the state where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is in a state of protruding toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85A, the portion of the movable member 650Lb protruding toward the front side of the front view from the base plate 60 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction. A game ball that has reached the area below the first entry opening 64 (specific area) is guided to the lower left direction of the front view provided with the left specific winning opening 650La to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be done. Further, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is blocked by the movable member 650Lb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is surely limited to the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be entered into.

On the other hand, in the state where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the movable member 650Rb is in a state of protruding toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb protruding toward the front side of the front view from the base plate 60 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. , The game ball that has reached the area below the first entry opening 64 (specific area) is guided to the lower right direction of the front view provided with the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be made to. Further, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is blocked by the movable member 650Rb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is surely limited to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be entered into.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the detailed configuration of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb described above will be described. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure shows the front side direction of the game board 13, and the upper side shows the back side direction of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86A is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86A, the movable member 650Lb has a horizontally long rectangular base member 650Lb1 and a shape protruding from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 toward the back side of the game board 13. , The protruding portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are provided, respectively. Although not shown, the ends of these protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 on the opposite sides of the base member 650Lb1 are connected to a solenoid for a left variable winning device (not shown). By driving the solenoid for the left variable winning device (setting the solenoid on), the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the front view via the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60. It is variable so that it protrudes from the base plate 60 toward the front side. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the back of the front view and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 86A, a notch portion 650Lb5 is provided in the center of the base member 650Lb1 from the front side of the front view toward the back side, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side of the front view is provided. The left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected to each other without being separated from each other. The width of the notch portion 650Lb5 is at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although the details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch portion 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be independently moved to appear and disappear without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 86A, the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb except that the orientation (arrangement) of the notch portion 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch portion 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side of the front view toward the front side, and is provided on the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side of the front view. It is connected to the right side without separating. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb are in a state of being housed behind the base plate 60 in a state of intersecting each other. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state in which the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged with each other. That is, the connecting portion 650Lb5 of the movable member 650Lb and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb are housed in a state of facing each other. By storing in this way, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

FIG. 86B is a top view of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86B, when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed on the front side of the base plate 60. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that has reached the lower region (specific region) of the first entry opening 64 is along the inclination. You will be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

FIG. 86 (c) is a top view of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connecting portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connecting portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation progresses. In this protruding operation, the connecting portion 650Lb continues to come into contact with the connecting portion 650Rb2, and the connecting portions come into contact with each other, so that the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is hindered and the operation is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the movable member 650Lb is in a state in which at least the connecting portion 650Lb2 is housed behind the base plate 60 at the protruding position. Even if a part of the base portion on the back side (the range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is stored, the game ball sufficiently passes through the range protruding toward the front side from the base plate 60. The possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) is surely left specific winning opening by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. It can be guided to 650La.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 87, the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment defines three types of jackpots A6, B6, and C6.

As shown in FIG. 87, "big hit A6" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". "Big hit A6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probable change state of a special symbol is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit A6" is reached, the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Rb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit A6" has the largest number of rounds, and the game state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of the special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), and during the big hit. The benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each ball entered will also increase (to 10). Therefore, "big hit A6" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit A6" are "0 to 4". Since there are five, the rate at which "big hit A6" is determined when a big hit is won is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B6" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 49". "Big hit B6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a probable change state of a special symbol is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit B6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of the special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), and the big hit is in progress. The privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to each ball is relatively small (to 7). Therefore, "big hit B6" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, but at least in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot, it is more disadvantageous to the player than "big hit A6". Become. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit B6" are "5 to 49". Since there are 45 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B6" is determined when a big hit is won is 45% (45/100).

Further, "big hit C6" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". "Big hit C6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a time saving state of a normal symbol is given only until the variable display of 100 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit. Further, in the case of "big hit C6", the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the number of rounds of "Big hit C6" is relatively small, the game state after the big hit is disadvantageous, and the privilege (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each entry during the big hit is relatively small (7). (Individually). Therefore, the "big hit C6" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit C6" are "50 to 99". Since there are 50 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C6" is determined when a big hit is won is 50% (50/100).

Since the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the contents of the type selection table 202b per first, the description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. There is.

The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member to be moved (protruded) in each round of the jackpot. When a big hit occurs, data indicating a movable member according to the big hit type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot A6 is determined, "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either the jackpot B6 or C6 is stored. When it is determined, "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of the jackpot game, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified every time the start timing of a new round is reached, and the protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). See S1021). Further, the initial value of the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is set to "00H", and the data is reset to the initial value even at the end of the big hit (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value "00H" means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol change start processing 6 (S221) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. This special symbol variation start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and is special. Similar to the symbol change start processing (see FIG. 24), a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (Win / fail determination) is performed, and the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S301 to S311, each of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the jackpot type in the processing of S306 (S306), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A6. If it is determined whether or not (S321) and it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A6 (S321: No), "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S321). S322), the process shifts to S307.

On the other hand, in the process of S321, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). , The process shifts to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started in the jackpot, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the protruding position. To.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S921). The jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31). ), This is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the specific winning opening when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol.

Of the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016, the jackpot control processes in the first embodiment (FIG. 31) The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that the start timing of a new round has come (S1004: Yes), the movable type storage area 203aa is set. The projecting motion of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, it is set so that the ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by setting the protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb. .. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, it is set so that the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La by setting the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb. When the processing of S1021 is completed, the processing is transferred to S1006.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening opening (specific winning opening) is satisfied in the processing of S1007 (S1007: Yes), it is movable. The burial operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and this process is terminated. That is, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersive operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the ball cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersive operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 is completed, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is then reset to "00H" (S1024). ), The process is transferred to S1016. By this jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89), the variable operation of each movable member is possible so that the specific winning opening corresponding to the jackpot type can be entered among the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be controlled appropriately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to provide two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) having different benefits given to the specific area. , The configuration is such that the specific winning openings that can be entered are variable according to the type of jackpot. More specifically, the movable member 650Lb forming an inclination that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La by performing the projecting motion, and the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area are on the right. A movable member 650Rb forming an inclination leading to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the jackpot type (big hit B6, C6) in which the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each round of the jackpot.

Both the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all game balls that have flowed down to a specific region in a state of being arranged at a protruding position. Therefore, in a state where any of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can almost certainly be entered into the corresponding specific winning opening. Here, the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) can be reached by almost all game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 63 or the first entry opening 64, regardless of the launch direction. It is configured in. That is, most of the left-handed game balls and the right-handed game balls (90% or more) reach a specific area. Therefore, regardless of whether the left movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position or the right movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position, the jackpot type is supported regardless of the launch direction of the game ball. The game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). Therefore, each time a jackpot is reached, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the jackpot.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a surface on which a game ball can be entered (left specific winning opening 650La, The right specific winning opening 650Ra) is arranged so as to face each other. Then, each movable member forms an inclination in the downward direction toward each specific winning opening, thereby forming a state in which the game ball can enter each specific winning opening. In other words, it is possible to enter each specific winning opening by providing each specific winning opening in a direction in which the game ball does not normally advance and changing the traveling direction of the game ball in a direction different from the normal direction by each movable member. It is in a state of being. As a result, the configuration of the specific winning opening 65a according to the first embodiment described above (provided in the middle of the flow path in which the game ball travels even in normal times, so that most of the game ball flowing down the flow path flows in. Compared to the open structure), each specific winning opening can be made more compact. That is, since each specific winning opening can be configured with an area of one game ball or more and less than two, it is possible to realize a small area of the specific winning opening. Therefore, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area indicated by the two variable winning devices on the board surface can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in board surface configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of large winning openings (specific winning openings) that are opened and closed during the execution of a big hit game are provided on the board, each large winning opening is used as a flow path in which the large winning opening is provided. It is generally configured so that it can be opened with substantially the same width as. In addition, a plurality of large winning openings are arranged side by side in the vertical direction of the front view in one flow path, and the game balls can be placed in any of the large winning openings simply by continuously firing the game balls into the same flow path during the big hit. Generally, it is configured so that the ball can enter. However, in this configuration, as the number of large winning openings increases, the installation area increases, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in board configuration is reduced. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be compactly configured, so that the degree of freedom in board configuration can be improved.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are privileged when the game balls enter each other (the number of prize balls to be paid out). Is configured differently. Then, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased. That is, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of the game state that shifts after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given each time the ball is entered into the specific winning opening is also the type of the jackpot. Since it can be made different according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value indefinitely, and must be set within the range of the upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to the difference in the prize spherical surface to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the range of the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively disadvantageous type, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The more disadvantageous types of jackpots are, the shorter the period. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or voice effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the number of rounds is set by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) and different specific winning openings that can be entered according to the jackpot type. (That is, while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in an advantageous type of jackpot, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. In the case of a jackpot of an unfavorable type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the left specific winning opening 650La) having a small privilege (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without reducing the number of rounds of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type too much. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness to each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, an independent drive source is provided for each movable member, but two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb may be configured to be controllable by one drive source. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) with each movable member 650 Lb arranged at the immersion position (buried position). By driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction), only the movable member 650Rb can move toward the protruding position, while only the movable member 650Lb can move toward the protruding position. You may. That is, two types of gears for tilting to the left for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Lb and a gear for tilting to the right for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Rb are provided for the rotation axis of one motor. The left tilt gear is arranged so that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the positive direction at the immersion position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in a range in which the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the gear for tilting to the left engage only when the motor rotates in the normal direction. Further, the gear for tilting to the right has teeth arranged so that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the immersion position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in a range in which the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the gear for tilting to the right engage only when the motor rotates negatively. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved separately with one drive source, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a game ball hit to the right with one of the movable members arranged at a protruding position. , Almost all may be configured to be guided to a specific winning opening. On the contrary, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and one of the movable members is left-handed in a protruding position. Almost all game balls may be configured to be guided to a specific winning opening. Since the space on the right side flow path and the left side flow path of the variable display device unit 80 is narrower than that in the area below the first ball entry port 64, each variable winning device and each movable member are on the board surface. The area it occupies can be made smaller. In this case, the width and the inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modified example of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is projected to provide a specific winning opening. The game ball that has reached a specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the two movable members, a single moving member 650b capable of translating in the left-right direction in the front view is provided between the two specific winning openings in the specific area. Although the details of the moving member 650b will be described later, the left side of the moving member 650b forms an inclination toward the lower left of the front view, while the right side of the moving member 650b forms an inclination toward the lower right of the front view. When the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the left in the front view so as to be adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the left side of the moving member 650b is tilted. The game ball can be guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. On the contrary, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view, and the right side tilt of the moving member 650b leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Configure the game ball to be movable. As described above, by moving the single moving member 650b in parallel to the left and right, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 in this modification, the moving member 650b is replaced with the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 84) of the game board 13 in the above-described sixth embodiment. It differs in that it is provided.

As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b has a substantially triangular shape, and is in a stationary state at an intermediate position of each specific winning opening in a normal state (when the jackpot game is not being executed). In this state (see FIG. 90), there is a space of one game ball or more between the moving member 650b and each specific winning opening. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) in the normal state is the flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific winning opening. It flows down the flow path between the port 650Ra and is guided to the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 91A is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91B is a front view of the moving member 650b. FIG. 91 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a horizontally long substantially rectangular flat plate-shaped projecting portion 650 bb projects on the back surface side of the substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the protrusion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction to move the protrusion 650bb to the left in the front view. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left in the front view. Further, when the motor for the moving member is driven in the negative direction, the driving force in the right direction in the front view is transmitted to the protrusion 650bb, and the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction in the front view.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 having a width of one game ball or more are provided on the right side of the moving member 650b and the left side of the front view, respectively. There is. The game ball that has reached the moving member 650b from above flows downward along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

FIG. 91 (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91 (d), the protruding portion 650 bb of the moving member 650 b is included in the back side of the base plate 60 via the left-right moving hole 650 ba formed in the base plate 60. The end of the protrusion 650 bb on the far side of the front view is connected to the motor for the moving member as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction acts on the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protruding portion 650bb moves in the left-right direction along the left-right moving hole 650ba, and as a result, the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left-right direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92A is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view. As shown in FIG. 92A, when the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view and is adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball reaches the specific area from the left direction. (That is, the game ball hit to the left) falls to the slope on the left side of the front view of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R and is directed toward the out port 66. Flow down. As a result, in the state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction, the game ball can be entered only into the left specific winning opening 650La.

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view and is adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball reaches the specific area from the right direction. (That is, the game ball hit to the right) falls to the slope on the right side of the front view of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and is directed toward the out port 66. Flow down. As a result, in the state where the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction, the game ball can be entered only into the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, a single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction to correspond to the moving direction. It is configured to form a state in which a game ball can enter into either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). With this configuration, one drive source (motor for moving member) can switch the states of the two specific winning openings (switching between a state in which the ball can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball). Therefore, as compared with the sixth embodiment described above, the number of drive sources can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening on the side close to the moving member 650b due to the inclination provided on both the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. By simply visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the launch direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right side in the front view and is in a state close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball can be easily entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by hitting right. You can make it a ball. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left side in the front view and is in a state close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can be easily entered into the left specific winning opening 650La by hitting left. You can make it a ball.

Further, in the present modification, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a game ball can be entered. The surfaces (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are arranged so as to face each other. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, it is sufficient to secure an area of one game ball or more as the area of each specific winning opening, and it is possible to realize a small area of the specific winning opening. That is, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area indicated by the two variable winning devices on the board surface can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in board configuration can be increased.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, each specific winning opening is arranged in the left-right direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between the specific winning openings, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, each specific winning opening may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. Further, in this case, the inclination of the side surface of the moving member 650b on the side opposite to the side surface on which the specific winning opening is arranged may be deleted. With such a configuration, the area occupied by each variable winning device and the moving member 650b on the board surface can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

<Second variant of the sixth embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, a drive source (solenoid) for driving (appearing and appearing) two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is provided separately (independently) for each movable member. When the movable condition of each movable member is satisfied, the movable member is variably operated (appearance operation) by driving the corresponding drive source.

On the other hand, in the second modification, a plurality (two) movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be controlled by one drive source. More specifically, only a single motor (driving motor 6500) is provided as a drive source for variable operation (appearance operation) of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and each movable member 650Lb and 650Rb are both provided. By driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction while being placed in the buried position, the movable member 650Lb variably operates in the protruding position, while by driving the drive motor 6500 in the negative direction, the movable member The configuration is such that the 650Rb variably operates at the protruding position. As a result, since the plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a small number of drive sources, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that the configurations of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a perspective view showing the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in the second modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 shows a state in which the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are both arranged at the buried position. As shown in FIG. 137, in each movable member 650Lb in the second modification, the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 provided on the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment are deleted, and instead, the movable member 650Lb is replaced. A substantially cylindrical projecting portion 650Lb6 is provided so as to project to the back side of the front view, and a gear member 650Lb7 connected to an end opposite to the movable member 650Lb in the projecting portion 650Lb6 is provided. Similarly, for the movable member 650Rb, the protruding portions 650Rb3 and 650Rb4 are deleted, and instead, a substantially cylindrical protruding portion 650Rb6 provided so as to project to the back side of the front view with respect to the movable member 650Rb and its protrusion. A gear member 650Rb7 connected to an end opposite to the movable member 650Rb in the portion 650Rb6 is provided.

In addition, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 137, there is a circular shape between the gear member 650Lb7 provided on the movable member 650Lb and the gear member 650Rb7 provided on the movable member 650Rb. A gear tooth is provided on the side surface on the back side of the front view, and a circular gear 6500a without a gear tooth is provided on the side surface on the front side of the front view. The circular gear 6500a is joined to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 arranged below, and when the drive motor 6500 is driven, the drive shaft rotates in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive shaft. Rotate in the same direction and at the same cycle. In this circular gear 6500a, the side surface provided with the gear teeth is arranged on the back side in the front view, and the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 and the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 are not meshed with each other. The arrangement (see FIG. 137) is set to the initial arrangement. In the initial arrangement of the circular gear 6500a, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are arranged in the immersion position. Further, the circular gear 6500a rotates in a direction in which the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other by driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction. By driving the drive motor 6500 in the negative direction, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a rotate in the direction of meshing with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the operation of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the circular gear 6500a rotates in the positive direction and the negative direction will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 138 (a), the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb and the circular gear 6500a when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction and the circular gear 6500a joined to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 rotates counterclockwise, the circular gear 6500a The gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 arranged on the left side in the front view and the gear teeth provided in a part of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other. Therefore, the rotational force that the circular gear 6500a rotates in the counterclockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and the driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7. work. As a result, the movable member 650Lb joined to the gear member 650Lb7 also exerts a driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view, and the movable member 650Lb projects toward the front side of the front view. As a result, the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb is variably operating from the immersion position to the protruding position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating counterclockwise by about 180 degrees). Since the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not arranged at the position where the gear member 650Rb meshes with the gear teeth, the gear member 650Rb7 is not movable. Therefore, while the movable member 650Lb moves from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb does not perform a variable operation. When moving the movable member 650Lb from the protruding position to the immersive position (buried position), the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise to the origin position by driving the drive motor 6500 to the origin position in the negative direction. At the same time, the gear member 650Lb7 returns to the immersion position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a do not mesh with each other, so that the movable member 650Rb7 does not move.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction and the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise, the gear arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the circular gear 6500a. The gear teeth of the member 650Rb7 and the gear teeth provided in a part of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other. Therefore, the rotational force that the circular gear 6500a rotates in the clockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Rb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and a driving force acts on the gear member 650Rb7 in the direction toward the front side of the front view. .. As a result, the movable member 650Rb joined to the gear member 650Rb7 also exerts a driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view, and the movable member 650Rb projects toward the front side of the front view. As a result, the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb is in a variable operation from the immersion position to the protruding position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating about 180 degrees clockwise). Since the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not arranged at the position where the gear member 650Lb meshes with the gear teeth, the gear member 650Lb7 is not movable. Therefore, while the movable member 650Rb moves from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb does not perform a variable operation. When moving the movable member 650Rb from the protruding position to the immersive position (buried position), the circular gear 6500a rotates counterclockwise to the origin position by driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction to the origin position. While performing the operation, the gear member 650Rb7 returns to the immersion position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a do not mesh with each other, so that the movable member 650Lb7 does not move.

As described above, in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the plurality of movable members can be independently and variably operated according to the driving direction of the driving motor 6500. More specifically, by rotating the drive motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the positive direction from the origin position of the rotational operation, the movable member 650Lb is immersed while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the immersion position (buried position). While it is possible to variably operate from the position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is immersed (buried) by rotating the drive motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the negative direction from the origin position of the rotational operation. The movable member 650Rb can be variably operated from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position while being arranged at the position). With this configuration, a plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a smaller number of drive sources, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are movable only by one drive source (drive motor 6500), but the present invention is not limited to this. , Another drive source may be additionally provided. More specifically, for example, for one movable member, a second drive source is provided separately from the drive motor 6500, and the movable member on the side where the second drive source is provided is provided. In at least a part of the case where the movable condition is satisfied, the second drive source may be driven to move the second drive source. With only the drive motor 6500, while one movable member is movable (while being arranged at a position different from the immersion position), the other movable member cannot be moved (gear teeth of the corresponding gear member). And the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a cannot mesh with each other), so that it is impossible to move a plurality of movable members to positions other than the buried position at the same time. On the other hand, by providing the second drive source, both movable members can be normally moved when the movable condition of the other movable member is satisfied while one movable member is being moved. can. In this modification, in particular, either one of the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R has the same performance as that of the first ball opening 64 (that is, when a game ball enters the ball). It is effective when the second ball entrance (which triggers the lottery of special symbols) is used and the corresponding movable member is configured as an electric accessory that moves to a protruding position when a hit is made in the lottery of ordinary symbols. Even during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the game ball will hit the normal symbol by passing through the through gate 67, so the electric role based on the round period of the jackpot and the hit of the normal symbol. This is because there is a possibility that the opening period of the object overlaps.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved by one drive source (drive motor 6500), but a plurality of movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved by one drive source. The technique for moving the member is not limited to the application to the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening. For example, the drive motor 6500 having the configuration of this modification may be adopted when moving a plurality of accessories for production.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is set with respect to the flow direction (vertical direction in the front view) of the game ball. By arranging them in orthogonal directions, it was configured to prevent (suppress) the game balls from entering each specific winning opening during normal times (states other than when the jackpot game is being executed). , Not limited to this. For example, an opening / closing door for opening / closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot game state, only the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening / closing plate attached to the specific winning opening that facilitates the guidance of the game ball that has reached the specific area by the movable member) may be opened. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball from entering the specific winning opening and being paid out even though it is not in the big hit game state at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in this case, the movable member may be configured to be moved periodically or randomly regardless of the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of launching the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily guided by the movable member to the specific winning opening with the opening / closing door open. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In order to realize this playability, the player understands to which specific winning opening the game ball is more likely to be guided by using the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is more effective because it becomes easier. The period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be constantly moved while the power is turned on. May be good. In addition, when the opening / closing door is provided for each specific winning opening in the modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the arrangement of the moving member 650b is arranged at an intermediate position between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. By tilting each opening / closing door toward the moving member 650b, the side surface of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening / closing door form a flow path toward the specific winning opening. Each specific winning opening may be configured to be in a state where the ball can be entered. With this configuration, the range in which the game ball can be guided to the corresponding specific winning opening is widened in the state where the ball can be entered into each specific winning opening, so that the possibility of wasteful balls is reduced. can do. Therefore, the profit of the player can be increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, 10 prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra, while 10 prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Although the configuration is such that seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of benefits given when a game ball enters each specific winning opening can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, it is not always necessary to increase the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra to be larger than the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La. .. For example, the number of prize balls to be given may be matched, or the number of prize balls given to the left specific winning opening 650La may be larger than that of the right specific winning opening 650Ra. good. In addition, the benefits given when a ball is entered into each specific prize opening are not limited to the prize ball. For example, if a game ball enters one of the specific winning openings during the execution of a jackpot game, only the winning ball is paid out, while if the game ball enters the other specific winning opening, a prize is awarded. Instead of paying out the ball, or in addition, the probability change state of the special symbol may be given as a privilege after the end of the jackpot.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, two specific winning openings are provided in a specific area, and the specific winning openings that are in a state where the ball can be entered are switched according to the jackpot type, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning openings provided in the specific area may be used as an entry opening (second entry opening) that triggers a lottery of special symbols. That is, at least one of the two specific winning openings may be configured by a second entrance opening having the same function as the first entry opening 64. In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) may be moved in a predetermined movable pattern when a winning result is obtained by a lottery of ordinary symbols. In addition, when transforming into a combination of the specific winning opening and the second entry opening, the condition that each winning opening (specific winning opening and the second entry opening) can enter the ball can be satisfied at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is desirable that the movable member for forming a state in which the ball can be entered into each winning opening can be independently operated. The through gate 67 is in a state where the game ball can always pass through, and the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the same manner as in the normal time even during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, during the round game of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is arranged at the protruding position), the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol, and the movable member corresponding to the second entry opening protrudes. There is a possibility that the condition to move to the position is satisfied. Therefore, if a movable member such as the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment that can form a state in which the ball can be entered only in one of the entrances is adopted, at least one of the winnings is won. Even though the condition for allowing the ball to enter the mouth is satisfied, there may be a problem that the state of being able to enter the ball cannot be achieved. Therefore, as illustrated in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the separate movable members corresponding to the winning openings can be independently movablely controlled, each winning opening can enter the ball. Even if the conditions are duplicated, the movable member corresponding to each winning opening can be moved at the same time. Even though the condition that the ball can be entered into at least one winning opening is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be entered.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the two specific winning openings are arranged to face each other on the left and right in the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64), and the two specific winning openings are directed toward each specific winning opening. The configuration was such that the game ball that reached the specific area was guided to the corresponding specific winning opening by forming an inclination, but the arrangement of the specific winning opening and the configuration for allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening are , Not limited to these. For example, in the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable winning devices having different numbers of prize balls may be vertically arranged in a specific area. Then, the specific winning openings that are opened may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the specific winning openings that can be entered are different depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the specific winning openings that can be entered may be different depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot. As a result, the degree of freedom of control can be further increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening La were arranged side by side, the left specific winning opening 650La was configured to face right in the front view, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra was configured to face left in the front view. It is not necessary to face each specific winning opening. It is possible to enter the ball while the movable member 650Lb is arranged in the protruding position (easy to enter the ball), and while the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the protruding position, and each movable member is in the buried position (immersion position). The left specific winning opening 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball while it is arranged (it is difficult to enter the ball), and it is possible to enter the ball while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position (entry). (Easy), and while the movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position and while each movable member is placed in the buried position (immersion position), the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the entry spherical surface of the left specific winning opening 650La and the entrance spherical surface of the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be arranged so as to be parallel to each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning opening 650La composed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and the movable member 650Rb is provided on the lower right side. The right specific winning opening 650Ra, which is composed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60, may be provided. Further, for both the person who guides the game ball that has flowed down the movable member to the specific winning opening while the corresponding movable member is arranged at the protruding position with respect to the circumference of each specific winning opening, the corresponding movable member is provided. The outer edge portions 650La1 and 650Ra1 may be provided to prevent (suppress) the game balls that have flowed down in the state of being arranged in the immersion position (buried position) from reaching the specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially inverted "U" -shaped peripheral edge portion 650La1 is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral edge portion 650La1. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower left through the movable member 650Lb is formed from the lower left side of the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650La1 to the lower left. The downward inclination leads to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially "U" -shaped peripheral edge portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower right through the movable member 650Rb is from the upper left side of the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. The downward inclination to the lower right side leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As described above, even if the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are not configured to face each other, the same playability as the above-mentioned sixth embodiment can be realized.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, in each round of the jackpot, by moving the corresponding movable member to the protruding position, the ball can be entered into the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening. It was configured to form a state in which a ball can enter 650Ra, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the ball can be entered in the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which the ball can be entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of the game ball. In this case, a movable member whose state (arrangement) is structurally switched each time the game ball passes may be adopted, or a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball may be provided for controllability. It may be configured to be realized.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 108. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left) in which the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters a specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is different from each other. The specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and the type of the specific winning opening that can be entered in each round of the big hit is changed according to the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the big hit game, so that the probable change game is performed after the big hit is completed. It is configured to provide two probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra) that trigger a state (probability changing state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probable winning openings is set so that the ball can be entered for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). That is, by moving the movable member 1 to the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward one of the probabilistic winning openings is formed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. Of the game balls that have been hit to the left and reached a specific area, one is capable of entering the probabilistic winning opening and the other is difficult to enter. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player predicts the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening and launches the game ball.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 93, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is left instead of the left variable winning device 650L with respect to the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84). A variable winning device 655L is provided, a right variable winning device 655R is provided in place of the right variable winning device 650R, and a variable winning device is provided below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that the device 65 is provided.

The left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are provided with a left probability variation winning opening 650La and a right probability variation winning opening 655Ra having the same shape as the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, respectively. There is. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area in the normal time (a state other than the execution of the jackpot game) does not enter the left probability variation winning opening 655La or the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra, and the out opening 66. It flows down in the direction of. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Lb is projected, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination in the direction toward the left probability variation winning opening 655La (inclination in the direction from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction), so that the movable member 650Lb can be moved to a specific area. The reached game ball is guided to the left probability change winning opening 655La. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 650Rb is projected, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination in the direction toward the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra (inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view), so that a specific area is formed. The game ball that has reached the right is guided to the right probability change winning opening 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the protruding position only for one second (predetermined period) in one round, so that while any of the movable members is arranged in the protruding position. Even if the game ball reaches a specific area, if it cannot reach the corresponding probability variation winning opening within 1 second after being placed in the protruding position, the movable member must be immersed. The game ball flows down in the direction of the out port 66.

The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment or the like. That is, a specific winning opening 65a through which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is composed of (not shown) and. The specific winning opening 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which a game ball can be entered in each round after the second round of the jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the protruding position for only one second depending on the jackpot type. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in an immersive state, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is opened to the front side to the specific winning opening 65a. And the game ball forms an open state where it can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, or 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. In the first round of the jackpot, the game ball enters one of the probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La or right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra), and after the jackpot ends, the probabilistic game state (probability changing state of the special symbol, In addition, while the normal symbol time saving state is given, if the game ball does not enter the probability change winning opening even once during the jackpot game, the time saving game state (special) is 100 times after the jackpot ends. A low-probability state of the symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol) are given. Therefore, since the degree of advantage after the end of the big hit changes depending on whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation winning opening, the game ball enters the probability variation entry opening for the player in the first round. It can be noticed depending on whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is an enlarged front view of a specific region portion in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. 94 (a). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are connected to each other on the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a game ball provided inside the left probability variation winning device 655L and entering the left probability variation winning opening 655La is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharged. The left probabilistic flow path 655Ld for guiding and the right probabilistic flow path 655Rd for guiding the game ball entering the right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharging it are on the back side of the base plate 60. Meet at. Further, at a position where the left probability variable flow path 655Ld and the right probability variation flow path 655Rd meet, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. Although not shown, the discharge port 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probability change switch) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability change switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the probability change winning openings, and the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change game state.

In this way, the probabilistic winning devices are merged internally, and the game ball that has entered one of the probabilistic winning openings is discharged by the discharge port 656, and the passage of the discharge port 1 is monitored. By doing so, the number of probabilistic change switches can be minimized by configuring the configuration to determine whether or not the game ball has entered any of the probabilistic winning openings. That is, when a probability change switch is provided for each probability change winning device, it is necessary to provide at least two probability change switches, but by the configuration of the seventh embodiment, only one probability change switch is used to provide two probability change winning openings. It is possible to accurately determine that the game ball has entered either of the two. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of probabilistic switches. Further, by merging the probabilistic winning devices internally, it can be treated as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, as in the seventh embodiment, by treating the two probabilistic winning devices as one winning device, the number of winning devices in the game rules can be reduced, so that the game rules can be more easily satisfied. The pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, regarding the flow direction of the game ball in the first round when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment. explain. For the sake of simplification of the explanation, in the following description, the movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position is defined as an open pattern in which the left probability variation winning opening 655La is easily won. Opening pattern ". On the other hand, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at a protruding position is referred to as an "opening pattern of the right V" in the sense of an opening pattern that makes it easy to win a prize in the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra.

FIG. 95A is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V (movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position) is determined and the player strikes left. be. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the game ball hit to the left falls on the movable member 650Rb from the left direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb is inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view, the momentum of the flow of the game ball (momentum in the lower left direction) is not reduced. Therefore, the ball can be relatively easily entered into the right probability change winning opening 655Ra within 1 second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position.

FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c) are views showing the flow direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the game ball hit to the right falls on the movable member 650Rb from the right direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), since the game ball has a momentum (momentum) toward the left side of the front view, until the momentum is reduced (the momentum becomes 0). , Rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction of the front view. Then, when the momentum of rolling in the upper left direction is lost due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (the momentum becomes 0), the game ball rolls in the lower right direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. To start. However, since it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for the momentum of the game ball to become 0, after that, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state of 0 to reach the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra. There is no time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), one second elapses while the game ball is rolling on the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction in the front view, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. That is, since the inclination in the direction toward the right probability change winning opening 655Ra disappears, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out opening 66. Therefore, when the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right, the movable member 650Rb reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra within 1 second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. It will be extremely difficult to make it.

When the opening pattern of the left V is determined, the operation is essentially the same as the opening pattern of the right V, only the left and right operations are opposite to the opening pattern of the right V. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted and briefly described, when the right-handed hit is performed when the open pattern of the left V is determined, the game ball has a momentum from the right direction to the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the game proceeds in this state, the ball is entered (winning) into the left probability variation winning opening 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum. On the other hand, if a left-handed strike is performed when the open pattern of the left V is determined, the game ball proceeds in a state of having a momentum from the left direction to the right direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction in the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination. Therefore, as in the case where the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right (see FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c)), the movable member 650 Lb is immersed before reaching the left probability change winning opening 655 La. Then, the game ball flows down to the out port 66.

Here, the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment takes a period of about 1 second for the launched game ball to reach the specific area regardless of whether the game is left-handed or right-handed. It takes. Therefore, in the method of launching the game ball after confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, before the game ball reaches the specific area or immediately after reaching the specific area. After 1 second has passed, the movable member is returned to the immersion position. That is, even if the game ball is launched after confirming the type of the movable member, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the probabilistic winning opening. Therefore, for a player who wants to enter the game ball into the probability variation winning opening, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the movable members is moved to the protruding position before being moved to the protruding position. It is possible to predict the type of movable member and launch the game ball in the predicted firing direction. As a result, if the movable member predicted by the player to be placed in the protruding position and the movable member actually placed in the protruding position match, the game ball can be entered into the probability variation winning opening. On the other hand, when the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the protruding position, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the probabilistic winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each jackpot, the type of movable member placed at the protruding position (the launching direction that makes it easier to enter the ball with respect to the probabilistic entry port) is predicted more seriously and the game ball is launched. Since it is possible to provide a novel playability, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b), but in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot of the left V opening pattern (opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) in the first round. The ratio at which the type is determined is configured to be higher than the ratio at which the jackpot type of the right V opening pattern (opening pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average number of rounds of each jackpot type in which the left V opening pattern is set is smaller than the average number of rounds of each jackpot type in which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, by hitting right every time, a probable change game state is given after the jackpot ends at a high rate (70% rate), but the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds (10 rounds or more). When the type is decided, the probabilistic game state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, if a game method is performed in which the opening pattern is predicted and the firing direction is changed each time, the transition to the probabilistic game state is confirmed, and a larger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) of jackpot games are performed. However, depending on the accuracy of the player's prediction, the rate of transition to the probabilistic gaming state will be significantly reduced (for example, the rate of 50% or less). ) There is a risk.

With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game method in the first round of the jackpot according to what element the player prioritizes in the jackpot. More specifically, for players who place the highest priority (priority) on the rate at which the probabilistic game state is set, a high rate of about 70% is achieved by hitting right each time in the first round of the jackpot. You can select the game method to which the probability change state is given. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds such as 16 rounds and 10 rounds more advantageous (the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous), this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the number of rounds has a large number of big hits, and to select a game method in which the firing direction of the game ball is different according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first hit), while emphasizing the setting ratio of the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot won during the probabilistic gaming state (so-called consecutive villa). For the hit), the game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, and for the first hit, predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, while for the consecutive villas, the setting ratio of the probabilistic game state (that is, the consecutive villas) It is possible to let the player select various game methods, such as a game method in which the player strikes right with an emphasis on (ratio). Therefore, since it is possible to select and play a game according to each player's favorite playability, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability according to different tastes for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that can be received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when a big hit occurs, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR8 and a display area HR9 are formed with respect to the upper left portion and the upper right portion in the main display area Dm, respectively. Inside the display area HR9, the characters "big hit" indicating that the big hit game is currently being executed are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds, the display indicating the maximum number of rounds, and the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in one jackpot can be obtained. Display indicating the maximum number of prize balls) is displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained are kept secret from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, "ROUND: 01 / ???" is displayed as a display showing the number of rounds, and "GET: 0000 / ???" is displayed as a display showing the number of prize balls. Will be done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls are displayed first, the jackpot type will be recognized by the player who visually recognizes the displayed contents, and the type of movable member (probability change prize). This is because there is a risk that the launch direction in which the ball can enter the mouth) will also be specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, information that can specify the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is concealed until at least one round is completed. This eliminates the clue for the player to identify the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position, so more seriously, the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position (entering the probable change winning opening). It is possible to select the launch direction in which the ball is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) for urging the player to select whether to perform left-handed or right-handed is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, the display area HR10 is formed in the substantially central portion of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Choose !!" are displayed inside the display area HR10. Further, in the lower part of the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (the left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR11 in which the characters "Expected degree Low" are displayed and "the number of rounds" are displayed. A horizontally long substantially elliptical display area 12 in which the characters "High" are displayed, and a left-pointing arrow image YG1 in which the characters "left-handed" are displayed and imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area HR9 in the main display area Dm (the right half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR13 in which the characters "Expectation High" are displayed and a "round". The horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR14 in which the characters "number Low" are displayed, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed, and the right-pointing arrow image YG2 imitating the right-pointing arrow is displayed.

According to these display contents, if you hit left, the expectation that the game ball will enter the probable change winning opening is low, but if the game ball enters, it may be a big hit of a type with a large number of rounds. Can be made to understand to the player that is high. Also, if you hit right, there is a high expectation that the game ball will enter the probable change winning opening, but if the game ball enters, there is a high possibility that it is a big hit of a type with a small number of rounds. Can be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each launch direction, it is possible to predict the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening and launch the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, an opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 97A is a diagram showing the time course of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern of the right V is set, and FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time course of the movable position of each movable member, and FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time course of the opening pattern of the left V. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member in the case.

As shown in FIG. 97A, when the opening pattern of the right V is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. The protruding state of the movable member 650Rb continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60. After that, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a buried state until the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the movable member 650Lb is consistently maintained in a buried state during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when one round is started, the selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when the start timing of one round is reached and the main control device 110 outputs a round number command indicating the start of the first round to the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 113 displays and controls the display. The device 114 is instructed to start executing the selection effect. When the player who visually recognizes this selection effect hits the left side, the game ball can enter the right probability change winning opening 655Ra through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a right-handed hit, the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right probability change winning opening 655Ra, so that the game ball is inserted into the right probability change winning opening. It is not possible to enter the ball into 655Ra.

As shown in FIG. 97B, when the opening pattern of the left V is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. The protruding state of the movable member 650Lb continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60. After that, the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a buried state until the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movable member 650Rb is consistently maintained in a buried state during the jackpot. When the player who visually recognizes the selection effect displayed from the start of the first round makes a right-handed hit, the game is played to the left probability change winning opening 655La through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the protruding position. The ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a left strike, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left probability change winning opening 655La, so that the game ball is inserted into the left probability change winning opening. It is not possible to enter the ball into 655La.

<Electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (a). FIG. 98A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is an open pattern with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11 (a)). The difference is that table 202aa has been added. It is also different in that the contents of the first type selection table 202b have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 202 in the above-described sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The open pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines variable operations to be set for the movable member in each open pattern (open pattern of right V and open pattern of left V). At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the data for the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as the variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (b). FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), "big hit A7" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" (FIG. 98 (b). See 202b1). This "big hit A7" has the largest number of rounds, 16 rounds, and is a big hit type in which the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 5 random values (counter values) are associated with "big hit A7". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of "big hit A7" being determined as a big hit type is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B7" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 29" (see 202b2 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit B7" has 10 rounds, which is the second largest after "big hit A7", and is a big hit type in which the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit B7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit B7" determined as the big hit type is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit C7" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 69" (see 202b3 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit C7" has 7 rounds, which is less than "big hit A7" and "big hit B7", and is a big hit type in which the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 random values (counter values) are defined in association with the "big hit C7", so the big hit. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit C7" determined as the big hit type is 40% (40/100).

Further, "big hit D7" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 89" (see 202b4 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit D7" has 5 rounds, and is the jackpot type with the second smallest number of rounds among all the jackpot types. Further, "big hit D7" is a big hit type in which the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit D7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit D7" determined as the big hit type is 20% (20/100).

Further, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99", "big hit E7" is defined in association with it (see 202b5 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit E7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the smallest, 2 rounds, and the open pattern of the left V is set in the first round. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit E7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit E7" determined as the big hit type is 10% (10/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the right V opening pattern is set when "big hit A7" or "big hit B7" is obtained, while "big hit C7" to "big hit E7" are obtained. In this case, the left V opening pattern is set. Since the ratio of determining either "big hit A7" (distribution 5%) or "big hit B7" (distribution 25%) is 30%, the ratio (30%) in which the right V opening pattern is set is , The left V opening pattern is configured to be lower than the set ratio (70%). Therefore, for the player who places the highest priority (priority) on the rate at which the probability change game state is set, by hitting right every time in the first round of the jackpot, the probability change state is as high as about 70%. You can select the game method to be given. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds such as 16 rounds and 10 rounds more advantageous (the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous), this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the number of rounds has a large number of big hits, and to select a game method in which the firing direction of the game ball is different according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first hit), while emphasizing the setting ratio of the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot won during the probabilistic gaming state (so-called consecutive villa). For the hit), the game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, and for the first hit, predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, while for the consecutive villas, the setting ratio of the probabilistic game state (that is, the consecutive villas) It is possible to let the player select various game methods, such as a game method in which the player strikes right with an emphasis on (ratio). Therefore, since it is possible to select and play a game according to each player's favorite playability, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability according to different tastes for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that can be received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (c). FIG. 98 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98 (c), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has the probability change setting flag 203ba and the probability change passage counter with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 87 (b)). The difference is that 203bb, a winning number counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and an ejection number counter 203bf are added.

The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the probabilistic winning opening during the jackpot game. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned probability change switch provided in the discharge port 656, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, this probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). The probability variation setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch before the power off is cut off, and it can be determined that the game ball has passed. The probability variation setting flag 203ba may be officially set to on and restored. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203bb, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage to the hall by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203ba to be turned on and determining an illegality in which the power is turned on again in the state where the power is turned off.

The probability variation passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch after the end of one round (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won in the probabilistic winning opening in the first round have been ejected from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203bb and the ejection number counter 203bf described later. The probability variation passage counter 203bb is updated by adding one value each time it detects the passage of the probability variation switch in a predetermined period (so-called ball brushing period) after the end of one round (S1409 in FIG. 104). ). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the probabilistic winning opening and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 104). The probability variation pass counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the probabilistic winning openings 655La, 655Ra or the specific winning openings 65a in each round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned probability variable switch provided in the probability variation winning device. It is added and updated by 1 (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 and the probabilistic winning device (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the probabilistic passing counter 203bb) and the number of ejected (discharging number). After it is determined whether or not it matches the value of the counter 203bf), it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203bd is a ball brushing period for ejecting the remaining game balls when the game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device at the end of the round. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is. When the remaining ball timer flag 203db is set to on, it means that the ball is in the ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203be, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

The remaining ball timer 203be is a variable winning device 65 or a probabilistic winning device (left probabilistic winning device) when one round is completed and the specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening 655La, 655Ra changes to a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the remaining game ball to be discharged has elapsed when the game ball remains inside the 655L, right probability variation winning device 655R). The time required for the game ball to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the seventh embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203be (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), does the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device match the number of ejected balls? Is executed (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device. In addition, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the probability change winning device and suppress the fraudulent act of causing the game ball to flow down to the probability change switch at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203ba is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The discharge number counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device in each round of the jackpot. The ejection number counter 203bf allows the game ball to pass through the ball ejection port for ejecting the game ball from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or the probability variation winning device) (ball ejection provided in the ball ejection port). The value is incremented and updated by 1 each time the exit switch is turned on by passing the game ball (see S1403 in FIG. 104). This discharge number counter 203bf wins a variable winning device 65 or a probability variable winning device. After the match between the number of game balls and the number of ejected balls is determined, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1415 in FIG. 104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has been V-winned with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the flag 223aa has been added.

The V winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has already passed through the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the probability change switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the probability change switch has not been detected. This V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON based on the first reception of the probability-change winning command output from the main controller 110 each time the passage of the probability-change switch is detected in the first round of the jackpot (the V-winning flag 223aa). See S5503 in FIG. 108). Further, the V winning flag 223aa is set to off when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, the V-winning success effect of notifying the player that the winning is won to the probabilistic winning opening is executed. By executing this V winning success effect, it is possible to make the player aware that his / her selection (launching direction) is correct and that the player will shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot. It can make people feel more satisfied.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 104, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. The jackpot control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30) of the main control device 110.

Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment are S1001 to S1004, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S1009 to S1011 is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), opening according to the round and the jackpot type. The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1031), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set. The jackpot end process for this is executed (S1032), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the probability variation winning are won. The winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the mouth is executed (S1033). The details of this winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. After the completion of the winning process (S1033), an abnormal process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening is normally ejected is executed (S1034), and this processing is performed. To finish. Details of these winning processes (S1033) and abnormal processing (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) described above will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). As described above, this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No). ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process shifts to S1105.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the processing of S1103, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot A7 or jackpot B7, the data for performing the variable operation with the opening pattern of the right V (see FIG. 97A) is read, while the jackpot type this time. If is any of the jackpots C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation is read out in the open pattern of the left V (see FIG. 97 (b)).

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the open pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process is transferred to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled with an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1032) will be described with reference to FIG. 102. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1032) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1032), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), this time. Since it means that no game ball has entered (winned) into the probability variation winning opening (left probability variation winning opening 655La and right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) during the big hit, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set. By setting 100, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the time-saving gaming state (low-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol) (S1202), and the process shifts to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203ba is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening during this big hit, so the probability change. By setting the flag 203e to ON, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic gaming state (probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process shifts to S1204.

In the processing of S1204 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1203, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status after the jackpot set by the processing of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probability change setting flag 203ba is set to off (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 102), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203ba.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. As described above, this winning process (S1033) is a process for performing processing according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening. In this winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if the round is not valid (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1301: Yes), then, winning to any specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or probable change winning opening) is detected. If it is determined (S1302) and it is determined that the winning to the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning for the specific winning opening is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203bc to update (S1303), and the process shifts to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1304), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability change switch (S1304: Yes), the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1304). S1305), a probability change winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch is set (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch (S1304: No), each process of S1305 and S1306 is skipped and the process shifts to S1307.

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307), and when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307: Yes), move to the process of S1309 and set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1308), and the round time is determined. If it has passed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 and the end of this round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), it is not necessary to end the round, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S1308, when the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set open pattern is reached, while in the case of the second and subsequent rounds, it is determined. When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

In the process of S1309, the closure of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening) is set (S1309), and the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, the ball brushing period is set by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203db to ON (S1311), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the abnormality handling (S1034) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. As described above, this abnormal processing (S1034) is a processing for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening is normally discharged. In this abnormality processing (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is ejected from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). Whether it was discharged) is determined (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball ejection port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to the process of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203db is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203b is off (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently in the ball brushing period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is 1. Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball brushing period (when 0.8 seconds have passed from the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer If it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the ball brushing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) If it is determined that the ball brushing period is after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1408), and the probability change switch is pressed. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON. (S1410), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball brushing period is the ball brushing period after the second and subsequent rounds are completed (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410. This process is skipped and this process ends as it is.

Further, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the number of discharged balls counter 203bf) is determined. It is determined whether the number of winnings (value) matches the number of winnings (the total value of the value of the winning number counter 203bb and the value of the probability variation passing counter 203bb) (S1411).

If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to the process of S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing a game ball through the probability change switch while the probability change winning opening is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winnings match (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the discharging number counter 203bf, and the probability variation passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and the present processing is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 104), ball clogging occurs inside each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 and probabilistic winning device), and so on, each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, and specific winning opening 65a, and probabilistic winning device). It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of a problem that the game ball that has entered each probability variation winning opening) is not normally discharged.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the command determination process 7 (S4061) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105. This command determination process 7 (S4061) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), This is a process for analyzing the unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 41).

Of the command determination processes 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4910 and S4918, the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed commands in the process of S4909 (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to the hit has been received (S4921). Here, the commands related to the hit are, specifically, an opening command, a round number command, a closing command, a probability change winning command, an ending command, and the like.

In the processing of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to the hit is received from the main control device 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to the hit is analyzed and the command is commanded. The hit-related command process for executing the control according to the type of is executed (S4922), and this process is terminated. The details of this hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4921 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the command related to the hit (S4921: No), the processing is shifted to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this hit-related command processing (S4922). Of the hit-related command processes (S4922), each process of S4911 to S4917 is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) of S4911 to S4917. Since each process is merely ported as it is, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 does not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the closed command is included in the unprocessed command (S4951). In the process of S4951, when it is determined that the closed command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4951: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of one round of jackpot. Therefore, the closing command process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process is terminated. The details of this closing command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the closing command has not been received (S4951: No), then whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 includes the probability change winning command. If it is determined (S4953) and it is determined that the probability variation winning command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch. The probabilistic winning command process for controlling according to the number of times of passing is executed (S4954), and this process is terminated. The details of this probabilistic winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. Further, in the process of S4953, if it is determined that the probabilistic winning command is not included in the unprocessed command (S4953: No), the process is shifted to S4916.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned closing command processing (S4952) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As described above, this closing command process (S4952) is a process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round. In this closing command processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first round of the jackpot that has ended this time (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not the first round of the jackpot (S5401: No). , Execution of the interval effect according to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5401 when it is determined that the round finished this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403: No), the probability variation winning opening (either the left probability variation winning slot 655La or the right probability variation winning slot 655Ra) during one round). Since it means that the winning of the winning is detected, the V winning flag 223aa is set to off (S5404), and the process shifts to S5402. On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of big hits without being able to enter the game ball into the probability variation winning opening during one round. Since it means that the game has ended, a V winning failure effect for notifying the player that the game ball could not be won in the probability variation winning opening is set (S5405), and this process is ended. .. By executing this V winning failure effect, the game ball did not enter the probabilistic winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch that makes it easier for the game ball to actually win the probabilistic winning opening. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the direction did not match). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the launch direction is predicted more seriously so that the game ball wins (wins) the probable change winning opening at the next big hit. Therefore, since the motivation of the player for the next big hit can be improved, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the above-mentioned probability variation winning command processing (S4954) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the probability variation winning command processing (S4954). As described above, this probability change winning command process (S4954) is a process for performing control according to the number of passes of the probability change switch.

In this probabilistic winning command processing (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501), and when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5501: No). , This means that the probability change winning command is a command output based on the passage of the first probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot, so it is notified that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening. The execution of the V winning success effect for this is set (S5502), the V winning flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and this process is terminated. By executing this V winning success effect, the game ball enters the probabilistic winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch direction that makes it easier for the game ball to actually win the probabilistic winning opening). Was matched) can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501: Yes), it means that the V winning success effect has already been executed, so that the V winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the process from being executed, each process of S5502 and S5503 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the probabilistic game state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) after the end of the jackpot is completed. ) Is given as an opportunity to provide two probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probable winning openings is set so that the ball can be entered. That is, by moving the movable member 1 to the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward one of the probabilistic winning openings is formed. Since the period in which the movable member is placed in the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot is as short as 1 second, if the time for the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the movable member is not shortened as much as possible, the inclination formed by the movable member will be obtained. Along the way, the movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probabilistic winning opening, and the game ball cannot enter the probabilistic winning opening. In the seventh embodiment, when the movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position, if the left-handed strike is performed, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than that when the right-handed strike is performed. When hitting, it becomes difficult to put the game ball into the left probability change winning opening 655La, while when hitting right, it becomes easy to put the game ball into the left probability changing winning opening 655La. On the other hand, if the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position and the right-handed strike is performed, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than that when the left-handed strike is performed, so that the right-handed strike is performed. While it becomes difficult to put a game ball into the right probability change winning opening 655Ra, it becomes easy to put a game ball into the left probability change winning opening 655Ra by hitting right. Here, in the first round of the jackpot, the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position is configured so as to be difficult for the player to detect in advance from the production mode and the like, so that the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to realize a novel playability in which the player is made to predict the possible firing direction (the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, any of the probabilistic winning openings can be entered in the first round of the jackpot (that is, one of the movable members can be changed to the protruding position), but the configuration is limited to this. However, the round for setting any of the probable winning openings to be in a state where the ball can be entered may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the round for setting the probabilistic winning opening to be in a state where the ball can be entered is not limited to one time, and may be set twice or more in one big hit. In this case, if the game ball can be entered into the probability variation winning opening in the first round in which the probability variation winning opening is set to be able to enter, the probability variation winning opening can be entered from the next time onward. In the round set to the state, the player may be notified (navigated) of the launch direction in which the game ball can enter.

In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the probabilistic winning opening is configured to be different depending on the launch direction of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handed hitting is more likely to win the left-handed change in a short period of time than the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handed hitting. The configuration was such that it was easy to reach the mouth 655La. Further, when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting the left side is more likely to win the right change in a short period of time than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting the right side. The configuration is such that it is easy to reach the mouth 655Ra, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a round in which the probability variation winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered, the launch direction in which the period required to reach the probability variation winning opening is shortened may be fixed. That is, in all jackpot types, right-handed hits may be configured so that the time required to reach the probabilistic winning opening is shorter than left-handed hits, or conversely, left. It may be configured so that the time required for hitting to reach the probabilistic winning opening is shorter.

In the seventh embodiment, the period until reaching the corresponding probability variation winning opening of 1 is different between right-handed and left-handed depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position. It is not limited to this. For example, the left probability variation winning opening 655La is placed at a position where a game ball may enter only when a left hit is made, and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra is entered only when a right hit is made. It may be configured to be arranged at a position where there is a possibility that the prize will be reached, and the period until reaching each probability variation winning opening may be different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the jackpot type of 1, the game ball launched by the left-handed hit is the left-probability change prize, rather than the period until the game ball launched by the right-handed hit reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra. While the time to reach the mouth 655La is configured to be shorter, in other jackpot types, the time it takes for the game ball fired by left-handed to reach the left probability change winning mouth 655La is shorter than the time to reach the left probability change winning mouth 655La. , The period until the game ball fired by right-handed hit reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra may be shorter. Further, in this case, the winning opening that can be entered by hitting right and the winning opening that can be entered by hitting left do not necessarily have to be both probabilistic winning openings, and the game ball can enter one or both of them. By doing so, it may be replaced with a specific winning opening in which only the prize balls are paid out. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the period until reaching the winning opening when hitting right and the period until reaching the winning opening when hitting left are not different, but reach. The period until this is done may be constant regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, by arranging nails, windmills, etc., it is configured so that the time to reach the winning opening is shorter when aiming at the winning opening on one side of right-handed or left-handing than when aiming at the winning opening on the other side. You may.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, two probabilistic winning devices (left probabilistic winning device 655L and right probabilistic winning device 655R) and one variable winning device can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. The winning device 65 is provided, and the type of the winning device capable of entering a ball is changed according to the round of big hits. That is, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra) is set to be in a state where the ball can be entered, while in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, a specific winning opening is made. The structure was such that the mouth 65a was set so that the ball could enter.

On the other hand, in this modification, only two probabilistic winning devices (left probabilistic winning device 655L and right probabilistic winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (probability changing switches) are provided inside the probabilistic winning device. After providing a flow path that is provided and a flow path that is not provided with a probability change switch), depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot, one of the probability change winning openings (left probability variation winning opening 655La, right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) It is configured to change the flow path to which the game balls that have entered are distributed. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the probabilistic winning opening in the first round of the jackpot is a flow path provided with a probabilistic change switch among a plurality of flow paths provided inside the probabilistic winning device. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the probability change winning opening after the second round of the jackpot are controlled so as to be distributed to the flow path not provided with the probability change switch. With this configuration, the round (1st round) in which the probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed by entering the probabilistic prize opening with only two probabilistic prize devices, and the game ball is launched into a specific area. It is possible to provide a round (after the second round) in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to do so.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the variable winning device 65 has been deleted, and the left probability variable winning device 655L. The internal structure of the right probability variation winning device 655R has been changed, and the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb have been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the seventh execution is performed. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

First, with reference to FIG. 133, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 133, the game board 13 in this modification is different from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is deleted. Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device (left probability variation winning device 655L and right probability variation winning device 655R) is also partially changed from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment. There is. Since other board configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device in this modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a specific area in the game board 13 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 134, in this modification, the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are inside the right probability variation winning device 655R, and on the back side of the base plate 60, the left probability variation winning opening 655La and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra are used. A plurality of flow paths through which the entered game ball flows down are provided. More specifically, the downstream side of the left probability variation winning device 655L is branched into two flow paths (probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 and normal induction flow path 655Ld2), and the probability variation is downstream of the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1. A probabilistic entry ball port 656a provided with a switch is provided. When the game ball is guided to the probability change entry ball port 656a by flowing down the probability change guidance flow path 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes through the probability change switch, so that the jackpot The game state after the end is set to the probabilistic game state. The game ball that has entered the probability change entry port 656a and has passed through the probability change switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging the game ball to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a probability change switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the big hit. In other words, regardless of the number of times the ball ejection port 656b1 has passed during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch even once, the probability change game will be the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed. If the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch even once, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, at the position where the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 are branched, the game ball is placed in one of the flow paths (probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2). A flow path distribution valve 655 Lc for distribution to any of) is provided. In the first round of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc is tilted to the left in the front view (a state in which a downward tilt is formed from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view) (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the left probability variation winning opening 655La is distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 in which the upstream side is open, and is guided to the probability variation entry opening 656a. Therefore, if the game ball can be entered into the left probability change winning opening 655La in the first round of the jackpot, the prize ball for entering the left probability variation winning opening 655La is given to the probability change switch. Since the game ball can be passed through, a probabilistic game state is given as a game state after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, when the first round of the jackpot is completed and the ball bleeding period elapses, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc tilts to the right in the front view. As a result, the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the left probability change winning opening 655La is distributed to the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2 whose upstream side is open, and is guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 on the downstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2. Will be done. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, even if the game ball is entered into the left probability variation winning opening 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probability variation switch, so that the entry into the left probability variation winning opening 655La is simply entered. Only the prize ball for the ball is given.

As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right probability variation winning device 655R is merely symmetrical with respect to the internal structure of the left probability variation winning device 655L. The flow path distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the probability variation winning device 655R is tilted to the right side in the front view, so that the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (normally, the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 and enters the probability variation entry slot 656a. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Rc is tilted to the left side in the front view, so that the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 is opened (the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Rd1 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability change winning opening 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot is distributed to the normal guide flow path 655Rd2 and enters the ball ejection port 656b2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the operation patterns (flow path switching patterns) of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc in the probability variation winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the change with time of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the opening pattern of the left V is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb, and the change with time of the switching of the flow path in the probability change winning device. It is a figure shown by.

As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of the jackpot, until 1 second elapses when the movable member 650Rb is projected to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc is each normal induction flow path (normal guidance flow path). It is held in an arrangement that distributes the game ball to 655Ld2, a normal guide flow path 655Rd2). Then, when one second has elapsed from the start of the first round of the jackpot and the movable member 650Rb moves to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc changes each probabilistic induction flow path (probability change induction flow path 655Ld1, probability change). It is movable in an arrangement (see FIG. 134) for distributing the game ball to the guide flow path 655Rd1). The arrangement of distributing the game ball to the probabilistic guidance flow path continues even after the first round is completed and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the immersive position, and 0.5 seconds from the end of the first round. After a lapse of time, the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are returned to the arrangement for distributing the game balls to the normal induction flow paths (normal guidance flow path 655Ld2, normal guidance flow path 655Rd2). The 0.5 second after the end of this one round is the so-called ball-draining period. That is, a sufficient period is set for the game ball that has entered the probability variation winning opening just before the end of one round to reach the probability variation entry opening 656a. By setting a ball brushing period of 0.5 seconds, a situation will occur in which the probable change state is not given after the big hit even though the ball has entered the probable change winning opening just before the end of one round. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall.

After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc does not change until the jackpot ends. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the probability variation winning opening (either the left probability variation winning opening 655La or the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot is guided to either the ball discharge port 656b1 or 656b2. To. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position even after the second round. That is, the movable member that has been moved to the protruding position in the first round is also moved to the protruding position in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the firing direction is fixed at one jackpot, which makes it easier to enter the probabilistic winning opening (the period from launching the game ball to entering the probabilistic winning opening is shortened). As a result, the player can easily recognize the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probabilistic winning opening in each round of the jackpot simply by confirming the type of the movable member that is moved to the protruding position in the first round. Therefore, for a player who wants to quickly digest a jackpot game, the game ball can be launched in a firing direction in which the period until the ball enters the probabilistic winning opening is likely to be shortened. On the other hand, for players who want to spend a longer time digesting the jackpot game (want to enjoy it carefully), launch the game ball in the launch direction where the period until entering the probabilistic winning opening tends to be long. Can be made to. This allows the player to select a game method according to the taste of each player.

In the jackpot where the opening pattern of the left V is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position in each round of the jackpot. That is, the flow path switching pattern (operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) inside the probability variation winning device is exactly the same as the jackpot in which the right V opening pattern is set.

As described above, in this modification, only two probabilistic winning devices are provided on the board surface, and whether the probabilistic winning switch can be passed or difficult to pass in each big hit round inside the probabilistic winning device. It is configured to switch (variate the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc). With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be deleted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of jackpot until any of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are moved to the protruding position. However, it is not limited to this. For example, at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% in the case of a big hit), a notification effect may be executed to notify the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening instead of the selection effect. .. With this configuration, the player can be pleased when the notification effect is executed.

In the seventh embodiment and its modified example, the two probabilistic winning openings are arranged so as to face each other in the left-right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of them is replaced with an entrance (second entrance) having the same function as the first entrance 64 (that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed when a game ball enters). The electric accessory 64a provided attached to the first ball entry port 64 may be deleted. Then, when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol, the movable member on the side where the ball can be entered into the second entrance may be moved to the protruding position. With this configuration, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently entered into the second entrance in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game efficiency in the time-saving state is further improved. be able to. In this case, during the probabilistic game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and the time reduction game state, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry port (after launching the game ball, the second ball entry port). It may be configured to notify the player of the direction (the period until entering the ball tends to be short). With this configuration, the game ball can be more reliably entered into the second entrance during the period in which the movable member is arranged at the protruding position by hitting the normal symbol.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is projected. The pachinko ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape in which two movable members are combined in the sixth embodiment is provided, and depending on the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b, The game balls that have reached a specific area (the area below the first ball entry port 64) can enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the types of the winning openings are different. Further, in the eighth embodiment, one specific winning opening 657a and one general winning opening 630 are provided in place of the two specific winning openings in the sixth embodiment. Then, by completely arranging the movable member 657b in the protruding position, the movable member 657b forms an inclination that can guide the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, while the movable member 657b moves from the buried position (immersion position) to the protruding position. At the intermediate position during the movement, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that a general winning opening 630 is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La, and the right specific winning opening 630 is provided. A specific winning opening 657a is provided in place of the opening 650Ra, a movable member 657b is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The sixth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. 109 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109 (b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109 (c) is a view of the movable member 657b from the left side when viewed from the front. It is a side view of the case. As shown in FIGS. 109A to 109C, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment forms a front-side tilting member 657bf that forms a downward inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction on the front side of the front view. Is provided, and a rear tilting member 657bb is provided on the back side of the front view to form a tilting downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), these front inclined members 657 bf and the rear inclined members 657 bb are joined at substantially the center of each side surface to form one member.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (c), two points on the inner side surface of the rear inclined member 657 bb project in a rod shape. Although not shown, a solenoid for a movable member for causing the movable member 657b to move in and out (variable operation) is connected to the tip of this protruding portion (the end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb). ing. In each round of jackpot, the solenoid for the movable member is driven to change the movable member 657b to the protruding position. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, but in the eighth embodiment, the appearance and appearance movements of the movable member 657b in each round are different depending on the jackpot type, and the general winning opening 630 is executed during the jackpot game. The configuration is such that a jackpot type in which a haunting motion that tends to increase the chances of winning a prize is set and a jackpot type in which an haunting motion that tends to decrease is set. During the jackpot game, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot increases as the game ball enters the general winning slot 630, so the chances of winning the general winning slot 630 tend to increase. The game can be played with the expectation that the type will be decided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the operation contents of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 110A is a diagram showing a case where the movable member 657b is arranged at an intermediate position temporarily arranged between the time when the movable member 657b is subjected to the projecting operation and the time when the movable member 657b is arranged at the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b protrudes and only the front tilting member 657bf protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60 (only the rear tilting member 657bb is buried), the front tilting member tilts to the front side. The inclination of the member 657bf from the upper right side to the lower left side temporarily forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630. In each round of jackpot, if a specified number (10) or more of game balls are detected in the specified winning opening 657a, or if a specified time (30 seconds) elapses before the specified number of balls are entered. No matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the end condition of the round will not be affected. That is, the more the game ball is inserted into the general prize opening 630, the more prize balls the jackpot will be. Therefore, the more the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 630, the more the player will be pleased. Therefore, it is possible to positively launch the game ball toward a specific area to the player while the position is in the middle position (see FIG. 110 (a)) that can be arranged during the projecting motion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

FIG. 110B is a diagram showing a state in which the movable member 657b is arranged at a protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position, in addition to the front inclined member 657 bb, the rear inclined member 657 bb also protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60. .. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear tilting member 657bb, and the specific winning opening is formed by the tilting of the rear tilting member 657bb from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. It is guided to 657a. That is, by arranging the movable member 657b at the protruding position (see FIG. 110 (b)), a state in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 657a is formed.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning openings for guiding the game balls that have reached the specific region are different depending on the arrangement (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b. In the intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be arranged until it reaches the protruding position, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guiding state) is formed, and the movable member 657b is in the protruding position. By arranging in, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a (second guidance state) is formed. As a result, as the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game state increases, so that the player is in the first guidance state. In the meantime, the game ball can be positively fired toward a specific area. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely match the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110 (a), the movable member 657b is arranged within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position. If so, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front tilting member 657bf. More specifically, for example, among the movable members 657b, the front inclined member 657 bf protrudes from the base plate 60 by about 70% of the whole, and the rear inclined member 657 bb protrudes from the base plate 60 by about 30% of the whole. Until the arrangement is reached, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

Next, the movable pattern of the projecting member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot. The movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which the opportunity for the game ball to enter the general winning opening 630 is larger than that of the movable pattern B (that is, the number of times in the first induction state is increased). First, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the change with time of the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts moving to the protruding position at the same time as the start of the big hit round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes 2 seconds for the movable member 657b buried inside the base plate 60 to protrude to the protruding position. Of the 2 seconds that move to this protruding position, about 0.7 seconds is a state in which the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guidance state, see FIG. 110 (a)). Therefore, by continuing to shoot the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state. In each round of big hits, an upper limit (10) is set for the number of balls that can be entered for the specific winning opening 657a, but there is no limit on the number of balls that can be entered for the general winning opening 630. The more the ball enters the general prize opening 630, the larger the number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to positively launch the game ball to the player.

As shown in FIG. 111A, the state of being arranged at the protruding position (the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a) continues for 2.5 seconds. During this 2.5 seconds, each time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so that the winning ball can be obtained for each entry into the specific winning opening 657a. Since the game balls can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds, by continuing to fire the game balls from the start of the round, 4 to 5 balls can be fired in 2.5 seconds. A degree of game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 657a.

As shown in FIG. 111A, when 2.5 seconds have passed since the movable member 657b was placed in the protruding position (that is, 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the round), the movable member 657b was placed in the buried position. Start moving to (immersion position). This variable operation to the buried position is performed over 2 seconds in the same manner as the variable operation to the protruding position. That is, since the operation completely opposite to the variable operation to the protruding position is executed, the first induction state is reached for about 0.7 seconds even during the variable operation to the buried position. Therefore, it is possible to allow one or two game balls to enter the general winning opening 630 by continuously firing the game balls into a specific area even during the variable operation to the buried position. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), it moves from the buried position to the protruding position over 2 seconds, and the state of being placed at the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and it takes 2 seconds from the protruding position. The operation of moving to the buried position is repeated twice at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A, the first induction state is set up to 6 times. The movable pattern A is forcibly terminated even if all the variable movements shown in FIG. 111A are not completed when 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 657a. The period during which the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 7.5 seconds (2.5 seconds x 3 times) in total, so by continuously firing the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 12 It is possible to reach about 13 game balls. Therefore, it is possible to reliably enter the specified number (10) of game balls into the specific winning opening 657a simply by continuously firing the game balls, and to set the first guidance state up to 6 times. Can be done. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the specified number of balls to be entered into the specific winning opening 657a, the prize balls based on the winning to the general winning opening 630 by being set to the first induction state up to 6 times can be obtained. .. Therefore, since the number of prize balls exceeding the predetermined number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, the satisfaction of the player can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

FIG. 111B is a diagram showing changes over time in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over 2 seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state in which the movable member 657b is placed in the protruding position is 26 at the maximum. It continues for a second (until 28 seconds have passed from the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have passed, it is moved to the buried position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. Therefore, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guidance state in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 630 is set only twice, immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times that the movable member 657b is in the first guidance state (the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. Is configured differently. If the number of times the first guidance state is set is large, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game is also large. You can have greater joy. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to the set movable pattern, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is the first in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the hit type selection table 202b. The configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment, except that the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed. Descriptions other than the hit type selection table 202b will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment defines five types of jackpots A8 to E8.

As shown in FIG. 112, “big hit A8” is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” (see 202b1 in FIG. 112). The "big hit A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probability variation game state (probability variation state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot ends. Further, in the case of "big hit A8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to increase). For this reason, the "big hit A8" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a probabilistic gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set), and the general winning opening 630 is reached during the jackpot. There will be more chances to enter the ball (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot will increase). Therefore, "big hit A8" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit A8" are "0 to 4". Since there are five, the rate at which "big hit A8" is determined when a big hit is won is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B8" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 29" (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). "Big hit B8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit B8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to increase). For this reason, the number of rounds of the "big hit B8" is the second largest after the "big hit A8", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous (that is, a probabilistic gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set), and during the jackpot. There will be more opportunities to enter the general prize opening 630 (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of big hits will increase). Therefore, "big hit B8" is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player next to "big hit A8". Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit B8" are "5 to 29". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B8" is determined when a big hit is won is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit C8" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 54" (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). "Big hit C8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit C8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small). For this reason, the number of rounds of "Big hit C8" is the second largest after "Big hit A8", and the game state after the big hit is advantageous, but the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is reduced (big hit). The number of prize balls paid out in each round of is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit C8" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player in the prize spherical surface as compared with the "big hit A8" and the "big hit B8". Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit C8" are "30 to 54". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C8" is determined when a big hit is won is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit D8" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "55-69" (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). "Big hit D8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a probabilistic gaming state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit D8", the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit D8" has an advantage in the game state after the big hit, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chances of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit are also reduced (each round of the big hit). The number of prize balls paid out to is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit D8" is a big hit type that is advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit, but is the most disadvantageous to the player in the prize spherical surface. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit D8" are "55-69". Since there are 15 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D8" is determined when a big hit is won is 15% (15/100).

Further, "big hit E8" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). "Big hit E8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and 100 times of time-saving gaming states are given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit E8", the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit E8" has a disadvantage in the game state after the big hit, the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is also reduced (paid out in each round of the big hit). The number of prize balls is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit E8" is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big hit and the prize spherical surface. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit E8" are "70 to 99". Since there are 30 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit E8" is determined when a big hit is won is 30% (30/100).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable patterns set in the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot game are configured differently according to the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the movable pattern A, which gives many chances to enter the general winning opening 630, will be the jackpot type (either jackpot A or B). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is the same as the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the specific winning opening.

Of the jackpot control processes 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022, the jackpot control process in the sixth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 of 6 (see FIG. 89) are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern (movable) corresponding to the jackpot type. The start of any of patterns A and B) is set (S1041), and the process shifts to S1006. More specifically, if the jackpot this time is either jackpot A8 or B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b, while if it is any of the jackpots C8 to E8, the movable member 657b is set. The movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern of.

Further, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot E8. It is determined whether or not there is (S1042), and if it is determined that the jackpot is E8 (S1042: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving gaming state, and the process is performed to S1013 to end the jackpot. And migrate. On the other hand, in the processing of S1042, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot E8 (one of the jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic gaming state. Then, the process is shifted to S1014 in order to end the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front tilting member 657bf forming an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. A movable member 657b having a shape in which the rear inclined member 657b forming the inclination of the above is combined in the front-rear direction is provided, and a specific region (first entry) is provided according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b. The game ball that has reached the ball opening 64 (the area below the ball opening 64) can enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the type of the winning opening is different. More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front inclined member 657 bf protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60 and the rear inclined member 657 bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the front upper right portion formed by the front inclined member 657 bf is formed. The inclination in the downward direction from the direction to the lower left forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 657b is completely protruded (the state where the movable member 657b is arranged in the protruding position), the movable member 657b is specified by the inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view formed by the rear inclined member 657 bb. It forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the region is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. The general winning opening 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you play, the more prize balls you can get. Therefore, in the intermediate position until the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position (the first guiding state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf), the game ball is positively moved. Since it can be fired to a specific area, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, as a movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot, a movable pattern in which the number of times the first induction state is likely to occur during one round tends to increase. One of two movable patterns, A and the movable pattern B in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to be reduced, is set. More specifically, when the jackpot is A8 or B8, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A in each round of the jackpot, whereas when it is any of the jackpots C8 to E8, the movable member 657b is moved. It is configured to be movable with the movable pattern B. As a result, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be either the jackpot A8 or B8, which increases the number of times the first induction state is reached, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, a movable pattern A and a movable pattern B, are provided, but the movable pattern is not limited to two types, and may be more than two types. It may be good or small. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, it is not necessary to perform control processing to select a movable pattern according to the jackpot type at the start of a new round, reducing the processing load during execution of the jackpot game. can do. In addition, by increasing the types of movable patterns more than two types (for example, five types) and diversifying the number of times the first induction state is reached, the game is played with more attention to the set movable patterns. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b is changed in each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the movable pattern may be switched according to the number of rounds. As a result, the movement of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, so that each time a new round is started, the game can be played by paying attention to the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b. ..

In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when the jackpot is A8 or B8, and the movable pattern B is set when the jackpot is C8 to E8. Not limited to this, the correspondence between the type of movable pattern and the type of jackpot can be arbitrarily determined. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A may be set when the number of rounds is a small number of jackpot types (for example, a jackpot of 7 rounds). With this configuration, if the jackpot type has a small number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot tends to increase, so the jackpot with a small number of rounds was decided. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The modified example of the eighth embodiment is different in that the rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be capable of rotating in the front clockwise direction with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating axis. By rotating the upper end of the rotating member 658 to a state in which the upper end is re-approached to the lower end of the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114 (c)), a state in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 657a is formed. That is, the inclination of the rotating member 658 from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific region is guided to the specific winning opening 657a. In each round of the jackpot, the rotating member 658 is controlled to rotate in a predetermined rotation pattern, so that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. Although the details will be described later, the rotation member 658 is inserted according to the rotation position (rotation angle) until the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114 (c)). The winning opening that can be played is variable. That is, the same operation as that of the eighth embodiment described above can be realized.

In the normal state, the rotating member 658 is in an upright state in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 114 (a). The game ball that has reached the specific area in this state is in the space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (on the left side of the front view of the rotating member 658), or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. Passes through the space (on the right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front) and flows down to the out port 66.

FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position temporarily arranged until the rotating member 658 rotates to a state in which the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the intermediate position, the rotating member 658 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area reaches the general winning opening 630. Form a state that is easily induced. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, it becomes easy to enter the specific winning opening 657a shown in FIG. 114 (c). When releasing the state in which the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 658a as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 114 (a). It will be returned to the original state.

As described above, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. The rotating member 658 is arranged to form an inclination that can guide the game ball to the general winning opening 630 (see FIG. 114 (b)) according to the rotation position (rotation angle), and to the specific winning opening 657a. At least an arrangement (see FIG. 114 (c)) that forms a tilt that can guide the game ball can be taken. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, at the intermediate position while the rotating member 658 is rotating until the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a, the game is temporarily moved to the general winning opening 630. The ball is placed in a state where it can enter. As a result, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

The rotating member 658 in the modified example of the eighth embodiment can also be diverted to the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above. More specifically, a rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left probability changing winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can be entered. In this case, the rotating member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise to form an inclination in a direction downward from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view. Further, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment can be entered, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise from the upper left side of the front view. A downward slope may be formed on the lower right side.

In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position, but the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 is The game ball is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured so that the game ball can be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning slot that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, a probabilistic winning slot that triggers a probable change state after the end of the jackpot, or a winning slot that triggers the start of a jackpot. (So-called two types of V winning openings) may be used. In addition, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an out port).

<9th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b that is movable in a predetermined movable pattern (any of the movable patterns A and B) during the execution of the jackpot game, The structure was such that the winning openings that could be won were variable. This makes it possible to change the winning opening in which the game ball is guided according to the timing when the game ball reaches a specific area, and to change the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. Was there.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of the ball entry port that is easy to enter can be changed according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is moved when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol. did. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which there is a high probability of winning in a lottery of ordinary symbols, it is possible to pay attention to the type of entry slot into which the game ball enters and perform the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 110 is provided in the main control device 110. The configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing to be executed has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 8 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the eighth embodiment described above, the description of the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the configuration is replaced from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (general winning opening 630, specific winning opening 657a, movable member). Since only 657b) has been described, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, the difference from the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment will be described in order to make the explanation easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is electrically provided with the first ball entrance 64 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment. The point that the accessory 64a is deleted, the point that the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are deleted and the variable winning device 65 is provided, and the point that the variable display device unit 80 is provided on the right side of the front view. A front view of the second entry port 640 in which the game ball can enter, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640, and the second entry port 640 with respect to the flow path. It differs from the general winning opening 63, which is provided on the left side and allows a game ball to enter. The second entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers a lottery of special symbols when a game ball enters. That is, it has the same performance as the first ball entry port 64. If the game ball enters the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is the same as the number of entry to the first entry opening 64. Separately held up to 4 times. Further, when the reserved ball for entering the first ball opening 64 and the reserved ball for entering the second ball opening 640 exist at the same time, the reserved ball for entering the second ball opening 640 is held. The lottery of special symbols based on the ball is preferentially executed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, but in the ninth embodiment, the second ball is provided along with the second ball entry port 640, and the second ball is hit when a lottery of a normal symbol is won. The traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is movable in an open state in which the game ball can enter the mouth 640. The traveling direction of the game ball for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 116.

FIG. 116 shows the flow path of the game ball when the game ball driven into the flow path provided in the right direction of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 by right-handed reaches the electric accessory 640a. It is a figure shown for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position), and FIG. 116 (b) shows the state. , The state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position where the second entrance 640 is opened, and FIG. 116 (c) shows the electric accessory 640a in the open position. It shows the state of being placed.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball launched toward the right side of the variable display device unit 80 by right-handed is closed second. The space between the ball entry port 640 and the general winning opening 63 flows down. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the plurality of nails arranged above the general winning opening 63 and forming an inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are the upper right of the general winning opening 63. It protrudes to the right from the plurality of nails that make up the downward inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Therefore, in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the possibility that the right-handed game ball will flow down toward the general winning opening 63 is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the intermediate position while the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, the right-handed game ball tends to collide with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. When the game ball collides with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a, the collided game ball is reflected in the left direction in the front view and is easily guided in the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. This makes it easier to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) based on the balls entering the general winning opening 63.

In the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement does not completely match the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b), it is within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position (for example, before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b)). If it is within a movable range of about 10%), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 63 can be further increased.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the open position (the state where the second entrance 640 is opened), the right-handed game ball is basically electric. It is guided to the second entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In the state where the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the electric accessory 640a descends from the upper right direction to the lower left direction of the front view, which is arranged at the upper right of the general winning opening 63, from the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. Of the plurality of nails that make up the orientation inclination, the height at which the upper end nail is arranged is higher. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second entry port 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a, but collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left in the front view, a plurality of them. It becomes difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 by passing above the nail. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the game ball that collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left passes through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a and flows downward. ..

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the game ball is likely to be guided to the general winning opening 63 or to the second entry opening 640 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a. It forms a state, or forms a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances. Therefore, in the case of winning in the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the game can be performed by paying attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. In the ninth embodiment, a ball entered in the general winning opening 63 is configured to receive more prize balls than a ball entered in the second entry opening 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at the intermediate position while the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a game playability that attracts more attention by the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is the second configuration with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11 (a)). The difference is that the hit type selection table 202ba is added.

The second hit type selection table 202ba is a data table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a when a hit is made in a lottery of ordinary symbols. The details of the second hit type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the second hit type selection table 202ba, the type of the opening pattern set in the electric accessory 640a and each opening pattern are determined for each state of the normal symbol. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is "0" for the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "0 to 94". An opening pattern that is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is defined in association with each other (see 202c1 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since the random value (counter value) is 95, which is "0 to 94", the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined in the low probability state of the normal symbol. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Since it is extremely difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 within 0.1 seconds when the electric accessory 640a is opened, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened five times, "0.1". It is almost impossible to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 while the opening pattern of "second x 5 times" is set.

Further, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is associated with the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "95 to 99". (See 202c2 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are five random numbers (counter values) of "95 to 99", the ratio at which the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined is 5 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. % (5/100). Since it is easy to put the game ball into the second entrance 640 within 2 seconds, the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" allows the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. It is an open pattern that is easy to ball.

In this way, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, and even if the normal symbol hits, most of them have an open pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it becomes extremely difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in an open pattern that is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the electric accessory 640a is continuously between the closed position and the open position in a short period of time. It is arranged at an intermediate position (see FIG. 116 (b)). Therefore, while the electric accessory 640a is being opened in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the general winning opening 63, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out by hitting right, is reached. And enter the ball at a high rate. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit right while the opening operation is performed in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times".

In addition, although the illustration is omitted, in the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. An extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. That is, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol is not executed for 5 minutes thereafter, which is a disadvantageous state. Therefore, in the low-probability state of a normal symbol, if you hit right while the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" (opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the second entry port 640) is performed, the game is played. It will be disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, an opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined, which makes it almost impossible to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In that case, while notifying the player to hit right (right-handed navigation effect), when the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" that makes it easy to enter the second entrance 640 is determined. Is configured not to produce a right-handed navigation effect. As a result, while giving the player the maximum opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is excessively disadvantaged in the low probability state of the normal symbol (a lottery of the special symbol is performed for 5 minutes or more). It can be prevented from becoming a disadvantageous situation).

In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the lottery of special symbols executed based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and the variable display are referred to as "lottery of first special symbols" and "lottery of first special symbols". The special symbol lottery, which is called the "variable display of the first special symbol" and is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and the variable display are the "second special symbol lottery" and the "second special symbol lottery". 2 It is called "variable display of special symbols".

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is "0.1 seconds x 5" for the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "0 to 29". An opening pattern that is opened "times" is defined in association with each other (see 202c3 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since there are 30 random values (counter values) of "0 to 29", the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The ratio is 30% (30/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the second hit type counter is "30 to 99", an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is defined in association with it (FIG. 117). (B) See 202c4). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are 70 random numbers (counter values) of "30 to 99", the ratio of the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined in the time saving state of the normal symbol is 70%. (70/100).

In this way, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, and when it hits the normal symbol, the opening pattern is "2 seconds x 1 time" at a rate of 70%, so it is normal. By continuing to hit right in the time-saving state of the symbol, it is possible to constantly enter the game ball into the second entry port 640. Further, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected, the game ball can easily enter the general winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Further, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shortened (it becomes equivalent to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), so that the second special symbol is drawn many times at short intervals. Can be done. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to hit right while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so the right-handed navigation effect is executed while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Continue to be done.

By continuing to hit right in the short-time game state and continuously executing the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time", it is possible to continuously execute the lottery of the second special symbol without reducing the number of balls held. can. In addition, if a lot of open patterns of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" are selected fortunately in the time saving state, the prize ball by entering the general winning opening 63 can be obtained without reducing the time saving number of times. .. Therefore, for the player, an opening pattern in which the period of being placed in the opening position is short during the time-saving gaming state (that is, an opening pattern in which the chance of entering the second ball opening 640 is relatively small) is provided. It is possible to realize a novel playability that the game can be played with the expectation that it will be decided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 (c) shows the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is a special symbol with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87 (b)). Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided, and instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, the first The difference is that the 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided. It is also different in that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 have the same configurations as the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. There is. That is, it has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value of is stored. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the above are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and are special based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. Judgments such as a lottery of symbols are made. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entry port 640. The maximum number of reserved balls (number of waits) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on (starting prize) is 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation processing 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. This special symbol variation process 9 (S141) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, as in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23). be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23) The same processes as those of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is determined. The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol is reserved. Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball count counter 203c2 (S223), and set the special figure 2 hold ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 after the update (S224). .. The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0), (S222: No). Then, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is larger than 0. (S227).

In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S227: No), the first Since neither the reserved ball of the 1 special symbol nor the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol exists, which means that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be newly started, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S228), and set the special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 after the update (S228). S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 30), as in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901).

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is performed. Move to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is detected.

In the start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entry slot 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variable display to be performed is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the first ball opening 64 has not won a prize (S421: No), or even if the game ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64, the process of S423 When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process shifts to S427. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is added by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later. Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203c1 from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 hold ball number command by the process of S425, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and processing is performed. Move to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similar to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entry opening 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (in the lottery of the second special symbol). The corresponding variation display hold count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). S429).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the process of S431, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the processing of S433. Move to. In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S433), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S433). In this look-ahead process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 in the start winning process 9 (see FIG. 119). If it is determined that no new ball has been detected (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not it is (S1502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time when the ball is detected (starting winning process 9 (FIG. 119)). Based on (see) S426 or various counter values stored in the process of S432), whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether or not it is a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its Predict the fluctuation pattern (S1503).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. This ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the variable display of a normal symbol and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S519, the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S501 to S519 is executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the embodiment of the main generation 9, when it is determined in the processing of S519 that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S519: Yes), the second hit type The opening pattern to be set for the electric accessory 640a is determined with reference to the selection table 202ba, and the electric accessory operation start process for starting the opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531). This process ends. The details of this electric accessory operation start processing (S531) will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned electric accessory operation start processing (S531). In this electric accessory operation start processing (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and the current normal symbol state and the second are obtained from the read table. The opening pattern corresponding to the value of the type counter per 2 is read out (S1602). Here, the current state of the normal symbol is determined to be the time saving state of the normal symbol if the probability variation flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e. Is off, and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state. As described above, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 94", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, while "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected. If the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "95 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern. Further, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 29", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, while the second hit. If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of "30 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern.

When the processing of S1602 is completed, next, the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a by the opening pattern read in the processing of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the present is the low probability state of the normal symbol (whether the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0) (S1604), and in the low probability state of the normal symbol. If there is (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the opening pattern set to start in the process of S1603 is the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the opening pattern set to start this time is the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605: Yes), the opening of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is opened. An open start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the pattern has started is set (S1606), and this process ends. By receiving the opening start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a right-handed navigation effect that urges the player to hit right. As a result, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set, which gives the player many chances to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is given an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63. Can be given with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1604: No), and when it is determined that the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set in the processing of S1605. (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

<Control processing of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4071) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4071) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the command determination in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing the unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

Of the command determination processes 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4918, S4901 to the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as each process of S4918 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the winning information command. (S4909: No), then determines whether or not the open start command is included in the unprocessed command (S4931), and determines that the open start command is included in the unprocessed command. If this is the case (S4931: Yes), a right-handed navigation effect of an effect mode for urging the player to hit right is set (S4932), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4931 that the release start command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4931: No), the processing is transferred to S4911.

By setting the right-handed navigation effect by the processing of S4932, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" that gives many chances to enter the general winning opening 63 is set, the general winning opening It is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to enter the ball into 63. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory 640a, which is moved to the open position when it is hit by a lottery of ordinary symbols, is temporarily moved to the open position. When the gaming ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position where it can be arranged, the board configuration makes it easy for the gaming ball to be guided to the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the second entry opening 640. did. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which there is a high probability of winning in a lottery of ordinary symbols, it is possible to pay attention to the type of entry slot into which the game ball enters and perform the game. Further, in the ninth embodiment, as an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, it is easy to be arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is large), but it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (the number of times the ball is arranged in the intermediate position is large). The opening pattern of the second ball opening 640 (the opening period of the second ball opening 640 is short) and the opening pattern, which is difficult to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times the ball is placed in the intermediate position is small), is easy to enter the second ball opening port 640 (the second ball opening port 640). An opening pattern (which has a long opening period of the entry port 640) is provided at least. By setting an open pattern that is easy to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times it is placed in the intermediate position is large), an opportunity to enter a game ball into the general winning opening 63 and obtain a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the opening pattern that makes it difficult for the player to enter the second entrance 640 is more difficult than the opening pattern that makes it easier for the player to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, the opening that is disadvantageous in a general gaming machine). It is possible to realize a novel playability of playing a game in a short-time game state in the expectation that it will become a pattern). Further, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position). When it is decided to execute the open pattern, a right-handed navigation effect (an effect suggesting that a game ball is launched toward the second entrance 640) is executed. With this configuration, in the most unfavorable gaming state for the player, it is possible to give an opportunity to win a prize ball by entering the general prize opening 63 every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a disadvantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal game state.

In the ninth embodiment, right-handed only when it is determined to execute the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is large) in the normal gaming state. It is configured to execute navigation, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute a right-handed navigation effect regardless of the open pattern when it hits a normal symbol, and it is difficult to arrange it in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is small), but the second The right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when the opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball entry port 640 (the opening period of the second ball entry port 640 is long) is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chance of entering the second ball entry port 640 in the normal game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the normal game state from becoming monotonous.

In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position, but is easily guided to the general winning opening 63. The state is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured so that the game ball can be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 within a movable range including the open position or the closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning slot that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, or it may be a winning slot that triggers the start of a big hit (so-called two-type V winning slot). In addition, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an out port).

In the ninth embodiment, the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when the normal symbol hits. It was configured to execute the right-handed navigation effect only when it was decided, but the execution timing of the right-handed navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, if the normal symbol hits during the time saving state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends after the time saving state ends, and the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is started, the "0.1 seconds x 5 times" opening pattern is started. It may be configured to extend the right-handed navigation effect that was executed during the time saving state until the opening pattern of "second x 5 times" is completed. As a result, the right-handed navigation effect is executed immediately after the player returns to left-handed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the ninth embodiment, the ball is easily entered into the general winning opening 63 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that opens and closes the second entry opening 640, and the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. The configuration is such that an easy state and a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances are switched, but this configuration is not limited to the second entrance 640. For example, the specific winning opening may have the same configuration as the second entry opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning opening 63 may be the same as in the ninth embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 during the big hit game, so that the number of prize balls given during the big hit game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, arrangement of wind turbines, etc.) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13. A game ball (a game ball hit to the right) fired toward the flow path and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) fired toward the flow path provided on the left side. The period from the launch of the ball to the arrival at the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) was configured to be substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the game ball (right-struck game ball) launched toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 is on the left side. It is configured so that the period until reaching a specific area is longer than that of a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) fired toward a flow path provided in. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the variable display device unit 80 is more than the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side is configured so that the rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a is higher.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The first implementation is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is the variable display device unit in the game board 13 with respect to the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a detour accessory 700 is provided on the right side of the 80 so that the play ball can enter the inside. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but in this detour accessory 700, the time until the right-handed game ball (launched on the right side of the game board 13) reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided to make it longer. In other words, in the detour accessory 700, the game ball fired by right-handed hit reaches the specific winning opening 65a rather than the period until the game ball fired by left-handed reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The flow time of the right-handed game ball can be lengthened so that the time of is longer. In the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The period until reaching is configured to be 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, the details of the detour accessory 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the upper portion thereof. The game ball launched by right-handed strike can enter the inside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710. Further, at the lower part of the detour accessory 700, an opening 720 is provided for discharging the game ball flowing down in the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700. Further, in the detour accessory 700, in order to prevent the ball that has advanced inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the peripheral portion 730 allows the front side, the back side, and the left-right direction of the front view. It is surrounded by four directions. Since the peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily visually recognize how the ball flows down.

Further, since the plane on the back side of the front view of the peripheral portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral portion 730, the flat surface on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, so that the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. By creating a gap between the two, it is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward of the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each guide flow path 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the inner wall on the back side of the front view and the inner wall on the front side of the front view). It is configured to be substantially the same as the distance between). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Further, the guide flow paths 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. Then, the guide flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detour accessory 700. That is, the flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction of the front view to the lower left direction and the flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction of the front view to the lower right direction are alternately provided.

The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guidance flow path 740, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 740. Then, when the game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 740, the game ball falls from the guidance flow path 740 toward the guidance flow path 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 in the lower right direction of the front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 750, the game ball falls into the guidance flow path 760 and flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 760.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720. Every time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows down changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). It is possible to reduce the momentum (flowing speed) of the ball flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the game ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is launched to the lower part of the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64 or variable winning), as compared with launching the game ball to the left side of the game board 13. The time to reach (the area where the device 65 is arranged) can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is pivotally supported by the flow path support shafts 714 to 791, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each flow path support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. Further, in the rotation operation, the lower surface of each guide flow path 740 to 790 is set with respect to the rotation stop members 742a to 792a provided under each guide flow path 740 to 790 or the rotation stop members 742b to 792b. It stops by touching. This rotation operation will be described by taking the induction flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the induction flow path 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the upper half of the guidance flow path 740 is downward. A force is generated in the direction of turning to. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 clockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates clockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much clockwise and causing the guide flow path 740 to tilt in the opposite direction.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a member having a substantially cylindrical shape, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position does not shift due to the impact when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact. The structures of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b are the same as those of the rotation stop members 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the lower half of the guidance flow path 740 is rotated downward. A directional force is generated. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the induction flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to suppress that the inclination of the guide flow path 740 becomes too large and the momentum of the game ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed can be surely flowed down to the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. .. If the game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide flow path 740 to 790 maximized, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640. The path length of 740 to 790 and the maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down while maintaining the maximum inclination angle of all the guidance flow paths 740 to 790, the time for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640 is surely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the slopes of the guided flow paths 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game balls, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the guided flow paths 740 to 790 can be changed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. Further, in the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guide flow path 740 has been described, but a state in which a plurality of balls travel on the same guide flow path may occur during the actual game. In this case, since the rotation operation of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be further irregular, the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners of the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners of the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each induction flow path 740 to 790 rotates, it is possible to make it difficult for the corner of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730. Therefore, since each guide flow path 740 to 790 can be arranged closer to the peripheral edge portion 730, a gap is created between each guide flow path 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge portion 730, and the game ball is formed in the gap. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each guide flow path 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination due to its own weight in a state where the game ball does not flow down. For example, in a state where the sphere does not flow down the guide flow path 740, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the rotation stop members 752a to 792a by their own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is rotating, or whether the game ball flows down while the rotation of each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the ball can be changed accordingly.

It should be noted that each of the guided flow paths 740 to 790 may not rotate under its own weight, but may be configured to rotate only by the passage of the game ball. Further, for example, each induction flow path 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 124. As shown in FIG. 124, a large number of nails below the detour accessory 700 so as to limit the flow direction of the game ball flowing out of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700. Is placed. With these nails, all the game balls that have flowed out of the detour accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65 (the first ball entry port 64). It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65, a relatively wide space (wider than one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (Flow path) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is open and the game ball is fired by left-handing, many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but some of the game balls (for example, 10). The ratio of one ball to the ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, the right-handed player has a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but the left-handed player has the specific winning opening 65a depending on the reflection direction of the game ball and the ejection situation. The possibility that the time to reach the ball will be long is not 0 (for example, when the game ball launched to the left temporarily stands still, or when the ball is clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. etc). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the left side. In other words, it tends to be longer (the game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side tends to have a shorter period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a).

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the rate at which the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and the left-handed game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a. It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to finish the jackpot game at an early stage), some loss (a waste of about 1 in 10 balls) is performed during the jackpot game. With the ball) in mind, it is possible to play a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting left. On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting right with the expectation that the period of the big hit game will be long. Can be made. Therefore, since each player can select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability according to the taste of each player. Each round of jackpots ends when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Even if you start firing the game ball by hitting right after each round of the jackpot starts, 10 game balls are passed through the detour accessory 700 before 30 seconds elapse, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage in the winning spherical surface (the round ends before a predetermined number of game balls win the specific winning opening 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed on the upper left side of the front view and the upper right side of the front view in the main display area Dm. , A display area HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display areas HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display area HR15 and the display area HR16. In the display area HR15, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and the characters "left-handed high-speed mode" and "the jackpot can be quickly digested" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit to the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, an image imitating a right-pointing arrow is displayed for the display area HR16, and the characters "right-handed low-speed mode" and "the jackpot can be thoroughly digested" are displayed. Characters and characters are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit right during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested over a relatively long time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively slow speed). Can be made to.

As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is being hit are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB imitating a treasure box containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR17, and at the upper right side inside the display area HR17, " A display area HR19 with the characters "big hit" is formed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot game is being executed. Further, on the upper left side inside the display area HR 17, a display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (prize balls up to now). Information indicating the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts) is displayed. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR18 make it possible for the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of the right-handed game ball to the specific winning opening 65a is set, and the left-handed game ball is the specific winning opening. It is configured to be higher than the rate of entering the ball in 65a. With these configurations, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to win a large number of prize balls in a shorter time), some loss (1 ball in 10 balls) during the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to play a game aiming at a specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side with a certain percentage of wasted balls). On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting right with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. Can be done. Therefore, since each player can select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability according to the taste of each player.

In the tenth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball launched by right-handed hit reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. It was configured so that the game ball fired by the player would be longer than the period until the game ball reached the variable winning device 65. That is, it is better to hit right by making the path length when the game ball launched by right-handed strikes down longer than the path length when the game ball launched by left-handed strikes down. It was configured so that the flow time was longer than that of hitting, but it is not limited to this. For example, a known croon means may be provided in place of the detour accessory 700 in the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. With this configuration, the period from reaching the crune means to passing through the crune means can be lengthened, so that the flow time of the game ball launched by right-handed can be lengthened. Further, for example, instead of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 may be provided. Of these, by forming the right side of the game board 13 with a substance having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side (for example, an elastic body such as rubber), the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is the base plate 60. It may be configured so that it is easily decelerated by the friction of. Further, instead of the detour accessory 700, by making the arrangement of the nails different between the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the flow path on the right side, it is better to flow down the flow path on the right side. It may be configured so that the period until reaching the lower region (the region where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) in the game board 13 is longer than when the game board 13 flows down the road.

In the tenth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the game playability when the left-handed hit is performed and the game playability when the right-handed hit is performed are displayed in the display area HR15 and the display area HR16, respectively. However, it is not limited to this, although it was configured to be displayed. For example, during the jackpot, only the image prompting left-handedness may be displayed, or only the image prompting right-handedness may be displayed. By displaying only the image that encourages left-handed hitting, the jackpot can be completed in a short time, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by displaying only the image that encourages right-handed hitting, it is possible to reduce waste balls (game balls that enter the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a). The profit of the player in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, in the case of notifying the player of the firing direction during the jackpot, the firing direction to be notified may be different depending on the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect executed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, when a probability variation jackpot is reached, a variable display effect (an effect mode that is executed only when a probability variation jackpot is reached) is executed in which the main symbols (probability variation symbols) with odd numbers are aligned. It is configured to decide by lottery whether to execute a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed when a normal big hit occurs) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. Then, when it becomes a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and the effect of aligning the normal symbols is determined by the lottery, the effect of notifying whether or not the probability variation jackpot is during the jackpot is executed. .. In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (for example, an effect in which it is not known whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and an immediate notification at the end of the first round. The player is made to select (that is, an operation means such as a button or a lever that can be operated by the player) between the effect mode to be performed and the effect mode in which the player does not know where to be notified in each round of the jackpot. May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and then the selection of the effect mode may be executed in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the jackpot of the normal symbol notification) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, the configuration suggests right-handed strike. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a longer period for the player to select the effect mode, so that the player can more reliably select the desired effect mode. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the probabilistic symbols are aligned), the left-handed hit may be notified during the jackpot. .. With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large number of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is achieved and a production in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot is executed in the first round of the jackpot. However, the effect may be such that an effect (operation effect) for urging an operation on the operating means is executed in the effect. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means, and an effect of urging the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period is executed. Then, the display mode changes according to the number of times the push button is pressed (for example, the gauge of the indicator accumulates), and the display mode changes to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge changes). It may be configured to notify that it is a probable change jackpot by accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, if it becomes a normal jackpot or a probable variable jackpot, and if the effect that the normal symbols are aligned is determined by the lottery (when the operation effect is executed), the right-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot. Since the round period of one round can be relatively long, it is possible to secure a longer period for performing the operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the operation effect. On the other hand, if it becomes a probability variation jackpot and the effect that the probability variation symbols are aligned is decided by lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the jackpot is made by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until the end can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, instead of letting the user select the effect mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (voice effect) played during the execution of the jackpot game is selected. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handed may be notified during the period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (directed by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the song selection menu screen. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be provided with an operation means such as a button that can be operated by the player in place of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content for the operation means. The image of 1 is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, the images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears to be lit, and the other images appear to be extinguished. It is configured as follows. Further, as an operation means, three types of buttons are provided: a button corresponding to the up movement (up button), a button corresponding to the down movement (down button), and a button corresponding to the decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting the pressing of the upper button during the song selection period, the image that was lit until just before the pressing is switched to the lit appearance, and the image arranged one above is switched to the lit appearance. (The image that looks like it is lit moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the lower button is detected, the lit image is configured to move downward by one. Further, by detecting the pressing of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is lit at the time of pressing is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. That is, it is set as a music to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the player's favorite music can be played during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

Under such circumstances, if the configuration is such that the left-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so that the song selection period is shortened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the playback by the enter button. On the other hand, one round is configured to notify the right-handed hit during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot (the jackpot in which the execution of the effect of selecting a song is determined) in which the song selection period is set. Since the round period of the eyes can be relatively long, the player searches for the desired song from the song selection menu screen (operates the up button and down button so that the corresponding image looks lit. It is possible to secure a longer period for making a decision (pressing the enter button). As a result, it is possible to reliably select a favorite song without irritating the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a song can be enhanced. In addition, by configuring the configuration to notify the left-handed hit during the first round of the jackpot for which the song selection period is not set (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot effect is executed), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and speedily. You can digest the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the effect mode executed during the jackpot.

Further, in the case where the effect (operation effect) for urging the player to operate the operation means, such as setting the song selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined ratio in the case of a big hit, the player's past The firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, when the jackpot with the operation effect set is started, the game is played over the jackpot with the operation effect set for the past predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) based on the stored past operation history. If the player is not performing the operation, the left-handed hit may be notified, while if the player is operating within a predetermined number of times, the right-handed hit may be notified. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even if an operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls are given in a short time by notifying the player of a left-handed hit and ending the first round of the jackpot earlier. While achieving the gameplay that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation production, the execution period of the operation production is extended by notifying the right-handed hit, and the player in the operation production It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the tenth embodiment, the right-handed hit is a prize spherical surface because the board surface configuration is such that the right-handed hit has a higher entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed hit. The configuration was set to be slightly advantageous, but the configuration for making right-handed hits advantageous on the prize spherical surface is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hit and the game ball fired by left-handed hitting into the specific winning opening 65a the same, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) is used. A general winning opening having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter and the game ball hit to the right can enter). That is, in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open, the game ball hit to the left basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. While flowing down to the mouth 66, the right-handed game ball may basically enter the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when a right-handed hit is made, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is the prize ball by the jackpot (that is, the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a). Since it is given in addition to the prize ball), it is possible to take advantage of the prize spherical surface by hitting right during the big hit. Therefore, the player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit right with the expectation that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, let them hit left during the jackpot with the expectation that it will be a little more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting on the prize spherical surface. Can be done.

In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the characteristics when the player simply hits the right side and the characteristics when the player hits the left side are displayed on the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126). ), Not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether the game board 13 is hit right or left at a predetermined position (for example, the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the middle of the flow path on the right side). The configuration may be such that the detection means such as the above is provided, and the direction in which the player is launching the game ball is determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the effect during the jackpot may be changed according to the determined firing direction. For example, when right-handed strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on, while when left-handed hit is detected, the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned on. It may be configured to have the appearance of being turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of game playability will be obtained depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the flow path provided on the right side of the game board 13 is larger than that of the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is easier for each player to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball opening 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) when the machine flows down. It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flow direction of the game ball, and the like. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by right-handed hitting rather than by firing the game ball by left-handed hitting. A game board 13 having a board structure is adopted so that it is easier to win (win a ball) in the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a big hit, a right probability variable winning device 659 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65. The right probability variation winning opening 659a of the right probability variation winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and is the same as the left probability variation winning opening 655La and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment described above. In addition, when the game ball enters during the big hit, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the big hit, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are given when the game balls enter. In addition, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right. Details will be described later, but hitting left in the first round. If you continue to do so, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation winning device 659 while the right probability variation winning opening 659a can be entered increases, but the percentage of the reached game balls entering the right probability variation winning opening 659a is It is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation winning device 659 while the right probability variation winning opening 659a can be entered is small, but the reached game balls. Is configured so that the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is high. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the ball entry rate is high instead of a small number of reached balls).

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed so as to be the same as the various control processes in the seventh embodiment. .. The tenth regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the tenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment, the curved surface member 810 is provided in place of the curved surface member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 124) in the tenth embodiment. It differs in that it is. As shown in FIG. 127, a probability variation winning device 659 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810.

The probability variation winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular right probability variation winning opening 659a in a substantially central portion thereof. This right probability variable winning opening 659a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot is started, the opening / closing door 659f1 is the jackpot. It is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a and the state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched by a specific switching pattern. Then, while the opening / closing door 659f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a), when the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is changed. , The probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol are set (the probability change flag 203e is set to on at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, if the game ball never enters the right probability change winning opening 659a in one jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol. It is set (100 is set in the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a than when the game ball never enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a during the jackpot. (The game state after the big hit is advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 127, since the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged along the curved path of the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour accessory 700 and has fallen to the curved member 810 By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the right probability variation winning opening 659a can be easily reached. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end of the curved surface member 810 on the upper surface and the left end of the right probability variation winning opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. Further, the curved surface member 820 provided below the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved surface member 810. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 127, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form a downward inclination from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when the game ball hit left and passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 820 Reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in the front view flows down to the lower right in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved surface member 810 can easily reach the right probability variation winning opening 659a by rolling the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 to the right in the front view. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the probability variation winning device 659 regardless of whether the player hits right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be launched in the desired direction.

Next, the structure of the probability variation winning device 659 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the probabilistic winning device 659 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is closed (a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right probabilistic winning opening 659a). In (b), the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is switched from the closed state to the open state (the game ball is switched from the difficult-to-enter state to the open-capable state in the right probabilistic winning opening 659a). It is a front perspective view of the winning device 659.

As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in a state where the right probability variation winning opening 659a is closed, the probability variation winning device 659 of the left end of the opening / closing door 659f1 that closes the right probability variation winning opening 659a and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810. It is smoothly connected to the part on the left side (left floor surface 810b) with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side of the front view passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 and rolling to the right is provided. It is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1, the game ball that has rolled on the opening / closing door 659f1 from the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 and rolls. The movement stops. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view, so that the game ball whose rolling is hindered by the convex portion 659g1 can be opened / closed. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows down toward the lower left of the front view. Then, the left floor surface 810b is rolled to the left in the front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. The game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the probability variation winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a stronger flow force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so that the opening / closing door 659f1 In the closed state, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659 g1 and flow down to the direction of the out port 66. By arranging the probability variation winning device 659 in an inclined manner in this way, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating on the upper part of the opening / closing door 659f1 during the period when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed, and to the out opening 66. It can be made to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right probability change winning opening 659a is switched to a state in which the ball can enter, the opening / closing door 659f1 blocking the upper part of the right probability change winning opening 659a The opening / closing door 659f1 is opened by sliding and moving to the left in the front view. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), while the opening / closing door 659f1 is being opened, the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side of the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 659 g1 and it becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 659. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, but when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b have almost the same height (almost smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow direction of the game ball that has reached the probabilistic winning device 659 will be described when the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is closed and opened. First, FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a probability variation winning device 659 and a curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the heights of the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1 and the left floor surface 810b are substantially the same. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction in the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659 g1. That is, the ball can be easily entered (winned) in the right probability variable winning opening 659a without being hindered by the convex portion 659g1. In addition, with respect to the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) with respect to the probability variation winning device 659, there is something that hinders the entry (winning) of the right probability variation winning opening 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right probability change winning opening 659a.

FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed, the right probability variable winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction when viewed from the front with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 has an inclination in the upward direction in the upper right direction formed by the opening / closing door 659f1, and the gravity in the downward direction acts in the lower left direction. , The momentum of rolling is reduced. Further, since the convex portion 659g1 protruding upward from the other part of the opening / closing door 659f1 is provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the momentum of rolling to the right is strong, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is almost the same. Even if it is possible to climb all the way up, the convex portion 659g1 prevents it from reaching the right floor surface 810a side. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1 and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction in the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 is in a state in which sufficient momentum is added to overcome the convex portion 659 g1 due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and pass through the opening / closing door 659f1. As a result, the curved surface member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 659f1 (right probability variation winning opening 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A11) in which the right probability variation winning opening 659a is set so that the ball can be entered for a relatively long period and the ball is entered for a relatively short period. A jackpot type (big hit B11) that is set to a possible state is provided. The longer the ball can be entered, the more chances that the game ball will enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, so the game state after the big hit is advantageous (the probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol). It is more likely to be set to state). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the gaming state after the jackpot is likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the opening pattern of the right probability variation winning opening 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 is referred to as an opening pattern capable of winning a V, and the right probability variation set in the first round of the jackpot B11. The opening pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V.

FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right probability change winning opening 659a when a V winning open pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot A11) is set. .. When the V winning open pattern is set, first, the right probability change winning opening 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right probability change winning opening 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right probability variation winning opening 659a until the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely opened. Therefore, it will be in a completely open state 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have passed (that is, 2.0 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right probability change winning opening 659a is started. .. This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round), similar to the opening operation. Then, when the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely closed, the state in which the right probability variation winning opening 659a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (that is, 2.8 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the right probability change winning opening 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds, and closed over 0.3 seconds.

After that, the state of being completely closed for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right probability change winning opening 659a is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is for 0.2 seconds. A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. By this repeated operation, in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated 6 times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the final opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 for lengthening the flow time of the game ball is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. .. When the right-handed game ball passes through the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the probability variation winning device 659, etc. are arranged). The period until reaching is 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right-handed hit is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 within a time of at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 around the start of the final opening period (8 seconds after the start of the first round) in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a only in the last opening period out of the six opening periods. be.

On the other hand, if the player continues to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (first ball opening 64, variable winning device 65, probability variation winning device 659) takes about 1 to 2 seconds. Since the game ball reaches the area where the balls are evenly arranged), if the game ball is immediately left-handed at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. .. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right probability change winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball that has rolled from the left side toward the right probability change winning opening 659a has an opening period of 1 (completely closed after the opening is started) as compared with the game ball that has rolled from the right side. In 0.8 seconds), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a is shortened. Further, when the player hits the left side, the number of game balls which cannot reach the probability variation winning device 659 increases as compared with the case where the player hits the right side. That is, when the game ball cannot reach the curved surface member 810 and enters the out port 66 by passing through between a plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, or when the ball enters the out port 66. 1 The ball may enter the ball entry port 64. Therefore, when the opening pattern that allows V winning is set, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is open by hitting the left in the first round is large, but it is entered. The ratio of balls is low, and the number of wasted balls is large. On the other hand, when a right-handed hit is made in the first round of a big hit, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability change winning opening 659a is open is small, but the rate of entering balls is high. Will be. Therefore, since the game playability of the first round can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot. In addition, the possibility that a game ball will enter during one round is almost the same (for example, about 80% ratio) regardless of whether a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot. As described above, the opening period, the board composition, and the like are set.

FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right probability variable winning opening 659a when an opening pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B11) is set, which makes it difficult to win a V. be. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the right probability variable winning opening 659a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after it is completely opened. To. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to put a game ball into the right probability change winning opening 659a while the right probability change winning opening 659a is open, regardless of whether the player hits the left or the right. The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player can be expected that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A11 (a V winning open pattern is set).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening / closing door 659f1 during the opening period of 1 when the V winning open pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability change winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball is placed against the right probability change winning opening 659a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 659f1, the opening / closing door 659f1 slides to the left in the front view and is housed inside the curved surface member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability change winning opening 659a that is not blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (FIG. 131). See (b)). As a result, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a. On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by the portion of the opening / closing door 659f1 that is not housed inside the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 659g1 makes it right. It is prevented from entering the probabilistic winning opening 659a. That is, the game ball that has rolled from the left side cannot enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, as in the state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 seconds. Then, after 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 659f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), so that the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659 g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1. (See FIG. 131 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side of the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a. That is, both the game ball rolled from the right direction (the game ball launched by right-handed hit) and the game ball rolled from the left direction (the game ball fired by left-handed hit) are both right probability change winning openings 659a. It will be in a state where it is possible to enter the ball. After that, until the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the game ball that has rolled from both directions (both right side and left side) can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a.

As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (opening / closing door). 659f1 is completely open) (see FIG. 131 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In this closing operation, the operation opposite to the opening operation is performed over the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, during the period from the start of the opening operation to the closing of the opening / closing door 659f1 again, the opening operation is started during the period during which the game ball can enter the probability variation winning device 659a. It is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after that to 0.1 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, in the case of left-handed hitting, it is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. That is, the rate at which the game ball that has reached the probability variation winning device 659 enters is higher when the player hits the right than when the player hits the left.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which the game ball is possible for the right probability variation winning opening 659a is the game ball that reaches the probability variation winning device 659 from the right side or the game that arrives from the left side. It is configured to be variable according to whether it is a sphere. As a result, when the game ball arrives at the probability variation winning device 659 from the right side, it can be expected to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a more strongly. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, more game balls are played against the probability variation winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot in the case of hitting left than in the case of hitting right. It is configured to reach. Therefore, when a left-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball, but on the right. When a ball is hit, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left probability change winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property with few chances of entering the ball. Therefore, since the game playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the first round.

In the eleventh embodiment, by providing the convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the period during which the game ball that has rolled from the left side can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a is changed from the right side. Although the structure is such that the moving game ball is shorter than the period during which the ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 659 g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the opening / closing door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131 (b)) due to the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1 in the upward direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right probability change winning opening 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the display mode of the jackpot A11 (the jackpot in which the V winning open pattern is set) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 is started, the characters "mode of hitting several hits by left-handed" and "mode of hitting several hits with left-handed hits" with respect to the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and ". The words "It's hard to get into V though the number of arrivals is large!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, if a left-handed hit is made, more game balls can be reached to the probability variation winning device 659, but it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a (V prize). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game becomes playable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR16, the characters "Right-handed one-shot deadly mode", "The number of arrivals is small, but it is easy to enter V!" And the arrow pointing to the right are imitated. The image that was created is displayed. According to these display contents, when the player hits right, the number of game balls reaching the probability variation winning device 659 decreases, while the game ball easily enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a (it becomes easy to win V). It is possible to easily make the player understand that it becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, an image imitating the probability variation winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed in the display area HR 17 in the third symbol display device 81. Further, on the front side of the front view of the right probability variation winning device 659, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet "V" is applied is displayed, and on the upper left side of the front view in the display area HR17, "Aim for V". The display area HR20 in which the characters "!!" are displayed is displayed. With these display contents, it is advantageous for the player to put the game ball into the probability variation winning device 659 which is decorated to imitate the character "V" (special after the big hit). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the symbol is in a probable change state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, the arrows pointing in the direction of the probabilistic winning device 659 are on the left side and the upper right side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the probabilistic winning device 659, respectively. The image is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the probability variation winning device 659 has the characters "hit a few hits", and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the front view. Is marked with the words "one-shot deadly". According to these display contents, when the player hits the left according to the display contents of the display area HR15 (the mode in which several hits are hit is selected), the game ball is displayed from the left direction of the front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the player is rolling. In addition, when the player strikes right according to the display content of the display area HR16 (selects the one-shot deadly mode), the game ball rolls from the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. This can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand which direction the player should pay attention to to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probability change winning opening 659a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, a privilege (prize ball) is given to the player when the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game (during the special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right probability variable winning device 659, are provided. The right probability variation winning opening 659a of the right probability variation winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot. The probability variation state of the symbol is given. Therefore, whether or not the game state after the big hit is advantageous to the player depends on whether or not the game ball enters the right probability change winning opening 659a. Therefore, in the first round of the big hit, the right probability change winning opening 659a is reached. It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

The right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right, and if the game ball continues to hit left in the first round, the right probability variation winning opening Although the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 increases while the 659a is in a state where the ball can be entered, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability variation winning opening 659a is low. .. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right probability change winning device 659 while the right probability change winning opening 659a can be entered decreases, but the reached game. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a is high. That is, in terms of the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 during a predetermined period (the period until the end of one round of opening pattern) (the number of opportunities to win a prize in the right probability variation winning opening 659a) ( The element) is configured so that left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed. Further, the aspect (element) of the ease of entering the ball (entry rate) with respect to the right-probability variable winning device 659 is configured so that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the ball entry rate is high instead of a small number of reached balls). Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability that suits the tastes of more players, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of a big hit, it is more advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate than when a left-handed hit is made (right). The game ball that has reached the probability variation winning device 659 can easily enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a). It was configured to be advantageous in terms of aspect (more game balls can easily reach the right probability variation winning device 659). As a result, the player can decide whether to hit right or left by making the advantageous side and the disadvantage side different between the case of right-handed hit and the case of left-handed hit. Although it has realized the playability that can be selected by, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed is not limited to this. For example, if the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), the entry of the game ball is detected at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when hitting left (for example, it is difficult to enter the ball when hitting right). A lot of prize balls are given when the ball is hit (for example, 15 per hit), and a specific prize opening is provided so that the game ball can easily enter when hitting right (difficult to hit when hitting left). A specific winning opening may be provided at a position where the opening time is long (for example, up to 5 seconds) but the number of prize balls given is small (for example, 3 per entry). Then, the specific winning openings to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely shortened (for example, 0.1 seconds). With this configuration, if you continue to hit left during the big hit, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening tends to decrease, but it will be given when you enter the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize playability in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right during the big hit, it is easier for more game balls to enter the specific winning opening, but less prize balls will be given when you enter the specific winning opening. Sex can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired playability and play the game. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where it is easy for a game ball to enter when hitting left (it is difficult to enter when hitting right), and a game ball enters when hitting right. The right probability variable winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball if left-handed), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period when the right probability variable winning device 659 is opened in one big hit. It may be configured to be shorter than the period. That is, if one continues to hit right at the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a and the probability variation state will be given after the jackpot, but the number of prize balls obtained will be reduced. If you continue to hit left, you will be able to win a large number of prize balls by having many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but it will be difficult to enter the right probability changing winning opening 659a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in this configuration, the superiority can be different for each firing direction during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device in which only the winning ball is given to the winning ball) and the right probability changing winning device 659 (the winning ball is given to the winning ball and the probability changing state). The positional relationship with the variable winning device) may be reversed. Further, setting a surface (element) that is more advantageous for right-handed hitting and a side (element) that is more advantageous for left-handed hitting is not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, in a normal game, an element in which a left-handed hit is more advantageous than a right-handed hit and an element in which a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a left-handed hit may be provided. More specifically, for example, a left-handed ball opening for a left-handed game ball and a right-handed right-handed game ball for a right-handed game ball are provided. When a game ball enters any of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. And, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, playing a game aiming at the right entrance with a right-handed hit is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left-handed hit, while playing a left-handed hit has an aspect of game efficiency. It is more disadvantageous than right-handed, but if you win a big hit, you can easily select the jackpot type (type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed. good.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of a big hit, the game ball reaching the right-right probability change winning device 659 is right-probability change as compared with the case of left-handed hit. While the configuration is such that it is easy to enter the winning opening 659a, when a left-handed hit is made, more game balls are more likely to reach the right probability variable winning device 659 than when a right-handed hit is made. It was composed. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the launch direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. Then, the corresponding effect may be executed according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left-handed hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 132) is such that the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. When right-handed hitting is detected, the display area HR 16 may be turned on and the display area HR 15 may be turned off so that the display mode looks like it is turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the playability selected by himself / herself.

In the eleventh embodiment, the opening / closing door 659f1 of the right probability variation winning device 659 is configured to be opened by sliding to the left in the front view, so that the game is rolled from the right side with respect to the right probability variation winning device 659. The ball is configured so that the ball can enter for a longer period than the game ball that has rolled from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the opening / closing door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured to be opened from the front side to the back side of the front view. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 659f1 on the right front side of the front view may be configured to be shorter than the length of one game ball or more on the front left side of the front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is stored in the back side of the front view, the game ball can enter the right side of the opening / closing door 659f1 earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. May be configured so that when the opening / closing door 659f1 faces forward and protrudes to the front side, the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball earlier. Even in this configuration, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the right probability variation winning device 659 enters the ball more than the game ball that has rolled from the left side. It can be configured to have a longer possible period.

In the eleventh embodiment, a surface in which left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than right-handed hitting due to the board surface configuration (that is, a game ball that has reached the right-handed probability-changing winning device 659 enters the right-probability changing winning opening 659a. (Ratio) and a surface where right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right probability variation winning device 659 in one round). Not limited. For example, it may be realized in a controlled manner. More specifically, for example, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured so that it can be detected whether the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit, and it is detected that the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit. The opening pattern may be different depending on the case. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the right-handed winning opening 659a is opened a small number of times, but the right-handed winning opening 659a is opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while a left-handed hit is detected. In this case, the right probability variation winning opening 659a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively short while the number of opening of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is relatively large. Further, the player may be allowed to select the game playability of the jackpot by operating an operating means such as a button instead of the firing direction of the game ball.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 151. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) in which a state in which a ball can be entered during execution of a jackpot game are set are arranged to face each other. In addition, a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is arranged between the specific winning openings, and the corresponding movable member is projected to form a downward inclination toward the corresponding specific winning opening. It was composed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry slot 640L having the same performance as the first entry opening 64 is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La. That is, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other. Then, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640La provided in place of the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is projected to move toward the left second ball entrance 640L. It is configured to form a downward slope.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit at a specific timing during the execution of the jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, 8 or 9 game balls are entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (that is, the remaining winning balls for 10 which is the upper limit winning number of each round). When the number of times is 2 or less), the normal symbol hits, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal symbol hit. The game ball is not guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second entry opening 640L, but instead the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are located around the intersection position. On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol elapses), the stored (accumulated) game ball is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it becomes possible to allow the game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra in excess of the specified number of the round.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that a left second ball entry port 640L is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La. The electric accessory 640La is provided in place of the movable member 650Lb, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is one. The part has been changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in the sixth embodiment is deleted, and at the same time, The appearance of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the right flow path has been changed from the sixth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 139, it has been changed to a mode in which the character "GO" is imitated. Further, in the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment, a left second entry slot 640L is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment. Further, the difference is that the electric accessory 64 provided accompanying the first ball entry port 64 is deleted, and the electric accessory 640La is provided in place of the movable member 650Lb. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640La is placed in the protruding position for a predetermined period (2 seconds x 1 time or 2 seconds x 2 times), so that a specific area (below the first ball entry port 64) is placed. The game ball that has reached the area) forms a state in which it is easy to enter the left second entry port 640L.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the game state (time-saving game state, probabilistic game state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set is reached, an image for notifying the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed (right-handed notification). The image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the time-saving state of the normal symbol (time-saving game state, probability variation game state), the right-handed notification image is displayed in a specific area by being hit to the right rather than the game ball that has been left-struck to reach a specific area due to the board configuration. This is because the game ball that has arrived has a shorter period until it enters the left second entry port 640L. The correspondence between the launch direction of the game ball and the period until the ball enters is the content described with reference to FIG. 95 in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment. With the 640La placed in the protruding position, the game ball that is hit right and reaches the specific area from the right direction rolls along the downward inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side of the electric accessory 640La. The ball enters the left second entrance 640L in a relatively short period of time. On the other hand, in the state where the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that is left-struck and reaches the specific area from the left travels in the direction opposite to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La (on the other hand). Roll in the direction of climbing the slope). After that, when the momentum of rolling is reduced by gravity and the momentum in the direction of climbing the slope becomes 0, the ball is guided to the left second entrance 640L along the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. In other words, for a game ball that is hit to the right and reaches a specific area from the right, a game ball that is hit to the left and arrives from the left has an extra period from climbing the slope to starting to descend the slope. Therefore, the period until reaching the left second entry port 640L tends to be long. For this reason, if a left-handed strike is performed in the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the protruding position) based on the hit of the normal symbol is performed. It may be difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area to go down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La and enter the left second entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player is urged to play the game by right-handed. .. With this configuration, the player can be made to hit right during the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area during the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol can be obtained. , Can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, it is possible to more efficiently perform the game in the time-saving state of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set, the firing direction is not particularly specified, including during the execution of the jackpot game. In each round of jackpots, if a specified number (10) of game balls can be inserted before 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the same number of prize balls can be obtained. Here, since the game balls can be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, the period required to fire 10 game balls is about 6 seconds. Further, until the game ball launched by left-handed hitting and reaching the movable member 650Rb from the left direction flows down the inclination in the direction toward the lower right formed by the movable member 650Rb and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The period of is about 1 second, and the game ball launched by right-handed hitting and reaching the movable member 650Rb flows down the inclination in the direction toward the lower right formed by the movable member 650Rb, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It takes about 3 seconds to enter the ball. For this reason, regardless of whether a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit is made during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game balls are continuously fired, 10 or more game balls will be given a right-specific prize in about 10 seconds. The ball can be entered into the mouth 650Ra. Therefore, regardless of the firing direction, a specified number (10) of game balls can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra within a specified time (30 seconds).

Even during the big hit game, if the game is hit by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the game ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640La is in the protruding position. It is moved to. That is, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La are arranged at the protruding positions. In this case, since the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La intersect at their intermediate positions, the game ball that has reached the specific region is on the upper half of the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La. It forms a state in which it is easy to stay in the region formed by the halves. That is, the game ball cannot be guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second winning opening 640La. This state is basically a disadvantageous state for the player because the game ball cannot enter any of the entry openings (left second entry opening 640L, right specific winning opening 650Ra). However, depending on the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, it may be in an advantageous state for the player. The relationship between the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position and the degree of advantage of the player will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 140.

In FIG. 140 (a), during the round period in the jackpot (during the period in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position), the normal symbol hits (that is, the opening period of the left second entrance 640L is open). It is a figure which showed the state which the electric accessory 640a was moved to the protruding position (beginning). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect with each other. In the vicinity of the intermediate position, the slopes formed by one side are obstructed (blocked together). In other words, it is in a state of forming an inclination in the downward direction from both the left and right sides toward the position where the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area is hindered by the upper half (right half) of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half (left half) of the movable member 650Rb, and also enters the left second entrance 640L. Since it is impossible to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball continues to remain in the specific area until at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb moves to the immersion position (buried position). .. While in this state (the state in which both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions), the game ball that has reached the specific area enters any entry port. It can be said that this is a disadvantageous state for the player as compared with the state in which only one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are both arranged at the protruding positions (the round period of the jackpot and the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol overlapped). The state) is referred to as a "protruding overlapping state".

When the game balls are continuously fired toward a specific area in the protruding overlapping state, a plurality of game balls are stored in the area (upper area) formed by the upper half of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half of the movable member 650Rb (upper area). Will be stopped). While a plurality of game balls were stored (stationed) in the upper region, at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb was moved to the immersion position (buried position), so that it was stored (stationed). The game ball flows down toward one of the entrances. Hereinafter, the flow path of the game ball stored (stayed) in the upper region will be described for each type of member (electric accessory 640La, movable member 650) that was previously moved to the immersion position (buried position) in the overlapping protruding state. do.

FIG. 140 (b) shows a case where the movable member 650Rb is moved to the immersion position (buried position) after the jackpot round is completed before the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol after the protrusion overlap state. It is a figure shown. When the jackpot round ends first, for example, just before 30 seconds have passed since the jackpot round started (for example, when 29 seconds have passed), the normal symbol hits and the electric accessory 640La When is moved to the protruding position, or just before the hit of the normal symbol, the 10th game ball rolls to the downstream side from the intermediate position of the movable member 650Rb, and immediately after the hit of the normal symbol, 10 This is the case when the first game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

When the movable member 650Rb is previously moved to the immersion position (buried position) in the protruding overlapping state, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is moved to the left second entry ball due to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La. It is guided to the mouth 640L. As a result, a plurality of game balls collectively enter the left second entrance port 640L. In addition, since the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the left second entrance 640L is set to one, the number of game balls as many as the number of balls entered will be returned as a prize ball as it is. It is not too much, and the number of balls held does not increase. That is, the degree of advantage is less than when a game ball is inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (when 10 prize balls are given to one winning ball). In particular, just before 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position, and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the immersion position before the electric accessory 640La is moved to the immersion position. In that case, less than the specified number (10) in the round can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so the electric accessory 640La cannot be moved to the protruding position. It is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained.

In FIG. 140 (c), after the protrusion overlap state, the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol ends before the round of the jackpot ends, and the electric accessory 640La is in the immersion position (buried position). It is a figure which showed the case which moved to. In addition, when the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol ends first, it is before 28 seconds have passed since the start of the big hit round, and the specified number (for the right specific winning opening 650Ra). This is the case where a normal symbol hits the ball when the game ball (10) has not entered. In this case, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. For this reason, a plurality of game balls will continuously enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, in particular, the number of game balls that have already entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the round and the upper part. When the total number of game balls stored in the area exceeds the specified number, the electric accessory 640La can be moved to the immersion position to allow more than the specified number of game balls to enter. That is, since it is possible to pay out the prize balls for the specified number of balls or more in one round, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit is larger than usual, which is advantageous for the player.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol hits during a big hit, an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set for the electric accessory 640La. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, three game balls can reach the front and rear upper regions within 2 seconds when the electric accessory 640La is placed at the protruding position. Therefore, if the electric accessory 640La is placed in the protruding position with 8 or 9 game balls inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, there is a high probability that the specified number of balls will be 10 in each round. A larger number of game balls can be entered into the right specific winning opening 640La. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the entry of a number of game balls exceeding the specified number of entry balls of 10 in each round into the right specific winning opening 640La is referred to as "over-winning". In the twelfth embodiment, an effect of notifying the player of the passing timing for the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, which is likely to cause an over-winning when it is assumed that the normal symbol is hit (right-handed navigation effect, right-handed navigation effect, FIG. 141 (a)) is configured to be feasible. If the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 according to this right-handed navigation effect and the normal symbol hits as intended, it will be in a state where over-winning is likely to occur (see FIG. 140 (c)). It is possible to further improve the interest of the person. If the player makes a right-handed hit according to the right-handed navigation effect and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, and the result is a hit of the normal symbol, the hit of the normal symbol is started (electric accessory). Based on the fact that 640La is moved to the protruding position), an effect of urging the game ball to be stored in the upper region (storage effect, see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. With this storage effect, the player can more easily aim for over-winning.

Although not shown, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the immersion position (buried position) with almost no time difference, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is on the left. 2 The ball cannot enter either the entry port 640L or the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and flows down to the out opening 66 provided below the game board 13. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the immersive position without a time difference (for example, within 0.5 seconds), the prize ball cannot be obtained and is held. Since the number of balls does not increase, it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned right-handed navigation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a). FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a right-handed navigation effect occurs. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), during the jackpot interval period, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR21 is formed below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm, and a vertically long display area HR21 is formed below the display area HR9. A rectangular display area HR22 is formed. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the characters "Right-handed and pass GO !!" are displayed inside the display area HR21. Further, inside the display area HR22, an image imitating a through gate 67 and an image imitating an arrow in a direction passing through the image imitating the through gate 67 are displayed, and an image imitating an arrow is displayed. The words "Pass through !!" are displayed inside. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is some advantage if the through gate 67 is hit right so that the game ball passes through.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation effect is executed for the first half of the two seconds set as the interval period. When a right-handed game ball is hit through the through gate 67 during this 1 second, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra and the normal symbol is displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the fluctuation time of is passed. That is, if it is a hit in the lottery of ordinary symbols, there is a high possibility that the electric accessory 640La will be placed in the protruding position with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It is configured to be. As described above, when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position while the eight to nine game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La are in the protruding position. It becomes a protruding overlapping state arranged in. If the game balls are continuously fired during this protruding overlapping state, about three game balls can be stored (retained) with respect to the upper region. When the opening period (2 seconds) elapses in this state and the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersion position, the stored game balls are collectively guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that an over winning may occur. The sex becomes high. Therefore, if an over-winning occurs as intended, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is 1/10. That is, when right-handed according to the right-handed navigation effect, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra at an average rate of once in 10 times, resulting in a protruding overlapping state. can do. As described above, about three game balls can be stored in the upper region during the protruding overlapping state. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersion position, three game balls are once on average. Enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. If 8 game balls have already entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra and 3 additional game balls enter, one more game ball than the specified number (10) will be added to the right specific winning opening. Since the ball will be entered into 650Ra, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be 10 more than usual (the number of prize balls to be paid out for the specified number of balls entered). In addition, if 9 game balls have already been entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra and 3 additional game balls are entered, 2 more game balls will be specified on the right than the specified number (10). Since the ball will be entered into the winning opening 650Ra, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be 20 more than usual (the number of prize balls to be paid out for the specified number of winning balls). Therefore, with a probability of 1/10, it is possible to win 10 to 20 more prize balls than usual. Therefore, during the jackpot interval period, each time according to the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). If you hit right and pass through the through gate 67, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game is higher. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively perform a right-handed strike when the right-handed navigation effect is executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned storage effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the storage effect is executed. In this storage effect, during each round of the jackpot, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position with 8 or 9 game balls inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra for 0.5 seconds. It is a production that is executed when it has passed. This storage effect is an effect for promoting the storage of the game ball in the upper region during the opening period of the electric accessory 640La, and forming a state in which over-winning is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b), when the storage effect is executed, the characters "The more balls are accumulated in the intersection !?" are displayed on the display area HR21. Further, an image imitating the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb in the protruding overlapping state is displayed on the display area HR22, and an arrow pointing at a position where the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect. An image imitating is displayed. Inside the image that imitates this arrow, the characters "Aim !!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to positively launch the game ball into the upper region during the protruding overlapping state. As a result, even a player who has not played much with the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment can easily generate an over prize. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the storage effect is executed after 0.5 seconds have elapsed instead of immediately executing the storage effect when the protrusion overlap state is reached is the specified number immediately after the protrusion overlap state is reached. The purpose is to prevent the storage effect from being executed when the game ball of No. 1 enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra and the round is completed. If there is a game ball flowing down the movable member 650Rb immediately before the protruding overlapping state, the game ball completely flows down the movable member 650Rb within 0.5 seconds after the protruding overlapping state is reached, and the right specific winning opening. Enter the ball into 650Ra. For this reason, if the round is not completed even after 0.5 seconds have passed since the protruding overlapping state, there is a possibility that the jackpot round will be completed until the opening period associated with the normal symbol hit has elapsed. Therefore, by storing the game balls in the upper region, it is an advantageous state in which an over-winning can be generated with a high probability. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the storage effect is executed only when the round is not completed even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the protruding overlapping state. As a result, the storage effect can be accurately executed only when the over-winning can be aimed at, so that the player's interest when the storage effect is executed can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a change with time of the effect mode in the case of hitting a normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, when the jackpot interval period is started, the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) is executed. This right-handed navigation effect is executed over one second. During this time, a right-handed hit is made to pass the game ball through the through gate 67, and if a hit is made by a lottery of ordinary symbols, a state in which an over-winning is easy to be formed is formed. Taking into account the period from the visual recognition of the right-handed navigation effect to the launch of the game ball and the period until the launched game ball passes through the through gate 67, the timing of passing through the through gate 67 is the latter half of the interval period (1). In most cases, it will be from the time when seconds have passed to the time when 2 seconds have passed. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 67 1.5 seconds after the start of the interval period as a result of right-handed striking during execution of the right-handed navigation effect.

One second after the right-handed navigation effect is executed, the right-handed navigation effect ends and the normal interval effect is switched to. Then, when another 1 second elapses, the interval period (2 seconds) elapses and the next round is started. When the round is started, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered. As described above, the firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, so if the player continues to fire the game ball at the shortest firing interval, it is about 0.6 for the right specific winning opening 650Ra. A game ball enters at intervals of seconds. Therefore, about 5 seconds after the big hit round is started, 8 to 9 game balls are already in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the twelfth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the execution of the jackpot game is set to 5.5 seconds, the fluctuation period of the normal symbol is set 4.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the start of the round. Elapses (if it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position). Therefore, if the lottery of the normal symbol is successful, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position with about eight game balls already entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position with eight game balls already entered (winning).

As shown in FIG. 142, if 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening period of the electric accessory 640La and the round period of the jackpot has not ended, the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) starts. Will be done. By firing the game balls during the execution of this storage effect, about three game balls can be stored (retained) in the upper region. The storage effect ends at the same time as the opening period (2 seconds, which is the period of being arranged at the protruding position) of the electric accessory 640La elapses. When the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersive position (buried position), the game balls stored in the upper region are guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra at once. Then, the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra with almost no time difference in about 0.5 seconds. As a result, it becomes possible to enter (win) a game ball in excess of the specified number of balls (10) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in one round of big hits. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is the storage effect standby flag 223ba with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that the standby period timer 223bb and the winning number counter 223bc are provided.

Whether or not the storage effect standby flag 223ba is a waiting period (0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the execution condition of the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) to the actual start of the storage effect. It is a flag indicating. When the storage effect waiting flag 223ba is on, it indicates that it is a waiting period until the storage effect is started, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a waiting period. As described above, in the storage effect, the electric accessory 640La is placed in the protruding position during the jackpot round period and with 8 or 9 game balls already inserted in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The execution condition is satisfied at, and the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to ON (see S5704 in FIG. 149). In this state, if the waiting period (0.5 seconds) elapses without the end of the jackpot round, the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to off (see S5610 in FIG. 147). .. Further, even when the jackpot round ends during the waiting period, the storage effect waiting flag 223ba is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The standby period timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the waiting period from the establishment of the execution condition of the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) to the actual start of the storage effect. A timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223bb at the start of the standby period (see S5705 in FIG. 149). During the waiting period, the waiting period timer 223bb is updated every time the jackpot processing is executed (see S5607 in FIG. 147), and when the timer value is updated to 0, the execution of the storage effect is started (FIG. FIG. See S5609 in 147). Further, the waiting period timer 223bb is reset to 0 when the round ends before the waiting period elapses (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The winning number counter 223bc is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in each round of big hits. The initial value of the winning number counter 223bc is set to 0, the winning (winning) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is detected by the main control device 110, and the winning is notified by the large open opening winning command. The value is added and updated by 1 each time (see S4972 in FIG. 150). Further, the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 every time each round of big hits is completed (see S5603 in FIG. 147). If the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position by hitting a normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, the counter value of the winning number counter 223bc is referred to, and if the value is 8 or 9 (that is, that is). If the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the round is 8 or 9, the waiting period is set (see S5704 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 12 (S151) executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 12 (S151) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523, the ordinary symbol variation processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) ( The same processes as those of S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523 of (see FIG. 26) are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the processing of S514, the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set. If it is determined (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 5.5 seconds (S541), and this process is terminated. As described above, this 5.5 seconds fluctuates when the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by right-handed hitting according to the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) executed during the jackpot interval period. It is a variable period in which it is highly possible that eight or nine game balls have already been entered in the right specific winning opening 640Ra at the end timing.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the processing of S520, the time reduction of the normal symbol is not performed (the probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 0). (S520: No), an opening time of "2 seconds x 1 time" and an opening pattern of the number of times are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640La (S542), and the process proceeds to S523. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the time reduction of the normal symbol is in progress (the probability variation flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 1 or more) (S520: Yes), the motor is operated. As the opening pattern of the accessory 640a, an opening time of "2 seconds x 2 times" and an opening pattern of the number of times are set (S543), and the process shifts to S523.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S523 is completed, it is voiced that the opening period (state in which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position) is started. A normal map release command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S544), and this process is terminated. The normal map release command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal figure opening command, is it in a state where eight or nine game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra at the jackpot (that is, an electric motor at the timing when the over winning can be aimed at). It is determined whether the object 640La has been moved to the protruding position), and if it is the timing for aiming for over-winning, the waiting period for the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 151, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the main process 12 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. The main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 33) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the main treatments 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the treatments S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019, the main treatments in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 33), respectively. The same processes as those of S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019 are executed. Further, in the main process 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S4011 is completed, the effect is updated instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The process 12 is executed (S4081), and then the command determination process 12 is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (S4082), and the process is transferred to S4014. And migrate. Details of the effect update process 12 (S4081) and the command determination process 12 (S4082) will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 151, respectively.

First, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process 12 (S4081) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The effect update process 12 (S4081) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the display mode and the like are displayed during the execution of various effects. This is a process for updating. Of the effect update processes 12 (S4081) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S4301 to S4311, the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) of S4301 to S4311 respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 12 (see FIG. 146) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variation display is not being executed (S4301: No), the effect mode is updated during the jackpot. (S4351) is executed during the jackpot processing for the purpose, and this processing is terminated. The details of this jackpot processing (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium processing (S4351). In this jackpot middle process (S4351), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (S5601), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (S5601: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5601, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being executed (S5601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the jackpot round (S5602), and the end timing of the round is determined. If it is determined to be (S5602: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 (S5603). Next, the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to off, the timer value of the standby period timer 223bb is reset to 0 (S5604), and it is determined whether or not the finished round is the final round (S5605).

If it is determined in the process of S5605 that the finished round is not the final round (S5603: No), it means that it is the start timing of a new interval period, so that it is a right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). ) Is set to start (S5606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5605, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the final round (S5603: Yes), the next round does not exist, and even if the player hits right and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, an over prize is won. Can not be generated, so the process of S5606 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5602, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round period in the jackpot (S5602: No), then whether the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (that is, the execution start of the storage effect is started. It is determined whether or not it is a waiting period (S5607). If it is determined in the process of S5607 that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is off (S5607), it means that it is not a standby period and there is no possibility of executing the storage effect, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5607, when it is determined that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (S5607: Yes), the value of the standby period timer 223bb is first updated by subtracting 1 (S5608), and then subtracted. It is determined whether or not the later timer value becomes 0 (S5609).

In the process of S5609, when it is determined that the timer value after subtraction becomes 0 (S5609: Yes), it means that the waiting period has elapsed, so the start of the storage effect is set (S5610), and the storage standby flag is set. 223ba is set to off (S5611), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5609, when it is determined that the timer value of the waiting period timer 223bb after subtraction is not 0 (S5609: No), it means that it is not the start timing of the storage effect, so S5610 and S5611. Each process of is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this jackpot processing (see FIG. 147), it is possible to accurately determine the passage of the waiting period and set the execution of the storage effect. By executing the standby effect, over-winning can be generated more easily, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the command determination process 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 148. This command determination process 12 (S4082) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is controlled according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for performing. Of the command determination processes 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4910 and S4918, S4901 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of ~ S4910 and S4918 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the winning information command (S4909). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the received command includes the normal figure release command (S4961). If it is determined that the normal figure release command is included in the processing of S4941 (S4961: Yes), it means that the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol is started. The general map release command process for executing the control according to the start timing is executed (S4962), and this process is terminated. The details of this general map release command process (S4962) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the normal figure release command in the process of S4691. Case (S4961: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a hit-related command (S4963). In the processing of S4943, when it is determined that the hit-related command is included in the unprocessed command (S4963: Yes), the hit-related command processing for controlling according to the type of the hit-related command 12 Is executed (S4964) to end this process. The details of the hit-related command processing 12 (S4964) will be described later with reference to FIG. 150.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received in the process of S4943 (S4963: No), then the main control device It is determined whether or not the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from 110 (S4965). This state command is a command indicating that the game state has been changed. Specifically, when the probabilistic jackpot ends and the probabilistic gaming state is set, a state command indicating the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is output, and when the normal jackpot ends and the time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving game state is set. A state command indicating the transition to the gaming state is output, and when the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed in the time-saving gaming state and the transition to the normal gaming state is completed, the status command indicating the transition to the normal gaming state is output.

If it is determined in the processing of S4965 that a state command is included in the unprocessed command (S4965: Yes), the state command processing for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command is performed. Execute (S4966) to end this process. The details of this state command processing (S4966) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. On the other hand, in the process of S4965, when it is determined that the state command is not included in the unprocessed command (S4965: No), the process is shifted to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above-mentioned normal figure opening command processing (S4962) will be described. As described above, this normal figure release command process (S4962) is a process for executing control according to the start timing of the release period. In this general map release command processing (S4962), first, whether or not a jackpot is being hit (S5701), if it is determined that a jackpot is being hit (S5701: Yes), and then during the jackpot round period. It is determined whether or not there is (S5702). In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the round period is in progress (S5702: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 223bc is either 8 or 9 (S5703), and the counter. If the value is 8 or 9 (S5703: Yes), the waiting period for the storage effect is set by setting the storage effect standby flag 223ba to ON (S5704). Then, a timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223bb (S5705), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed in the processing of S5701 (S5701: No), or when it is determined that the round period is not in progress in the processing of S5702 (S5702: No), a prize is won in the processing of S5703. If it is determined that the value of the number counter 223bc is neither 8 nor 9 (S5703: No), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the waiting period for the storage effect.

By executing this normal figure opening command processing (see Fig. 149), when the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position by hitting the normal symbol at the timing when the over prize can be aimed, the execution of the storage effect is set. can do. This makes it easy for the player to understand that there is a chance of over-winning.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing 12 (S4922) will be described with reference to FIG. 150. As described above, the hit-related command process 12 (S4964) is a process for performing control according to the type of the hit-related command received from the main control device 110. Of the hit-related command processes 12 (S4964), each of the processes S4911 to S4917 was executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each process of is merely ported as it is, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 150) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 does not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the large open opening winning command is included in the unprocessed command (S4971). As described above, the large open opening winning command is output from the main control device 110 every time a ball (winning) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is detected during the execution of the big hit game in the twelfth embodiment. Command.

In the processing of S4971, if it is determined that the large opening winning command is included in the unprocessed command (S4971: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223bc (S4972). End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4971 that the large opening winning command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4971: No), the processing is shifted to S4916. By executing this hit-related command process 12 (see FIG. 150), each time a game ball wins a prize in the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the number of winnings can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well.

Next, the above-mentioned state command processing (S4966) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. As described above, this state command process (S4966) is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command. In this state command processing (S4966), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state notified by the state command is the time-saving gaming state (S5801), and it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the time-saving gaming state. If (S5801: Yes), the process is transferred to S5803. On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the transition to the time-saving gaming state (S5801: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802). ), If it is a command indicating the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802: Yes), the process is shifted to S5803. In the processing of S5803 executed when the transition to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is notified, the display of the right-handed notification image indicating the start of the right-handed state is set (S5803), and this processing is terminated. ..

The reason why the right-handed notification image is displayed in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set and the probability variation game state is to allow the game ball to enter the left second entrance 640L more efficiently. Is. That is, as described above, if the left-handed strike is performed while the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, the opening period based on the fact that the normal symbol is hit (the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the protruding position). It may be difficult for a game ball that has reached a specific area during the period) to go down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La and enter the left second entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. There is sex. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player is urged to play the game by right-handed. .. With this configuration, the player can be made to hit right during the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area during the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol can be obtained. , Can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the time-saving state of the normal symbol more efficiently.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the transition to the normal gaming state. (S5804), if it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the normal gaming state (S5804: Yes), the display of the image for notifying that the right-handed state has ended is set (S5805), and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5804 that it is not a command indicating the transition to the normal gaming state, the process of S5805 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and when a normal symbol is hit, the left second entry opening is placed. By projecting the electric accessory 640La provided between the two entrances 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra, a downward inclination toward the left second entrance 640L is formed. It is supposed to be. Then, in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and in the probabilistic gaming state, in order to match the direction of inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La with the flow direction of the game ball, the player is asked. It is configured to notify the right-handed hit (display the right-handed notice image). With this configuration, the period required for the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640La to flow down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La can be minimized, so that the launched game ball can be made more efficient. It is possible to enter the ball into the left second entrance 640L. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently advance the game in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit at a specific timing during the execution of the jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, 8 or 9 game balls are entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (that is, the remaining winning balls for 10 which is the upper limit winning number of each round). When the number of times is 2 or less), the normal symbol hits, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal symbol hit. The game ball is not guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second entry opening 640L, but instead the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are located around the intersection position. On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol elapses), the stored (accumulated) game ball is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it becomes possible to generate an over prize. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the firing timing to the through gate 67 is set to the right, where there is a high possibility that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol will elapse with 8 or 9 game balls winning in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It is configured to notify the player by hitting navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). As a result, the game ball can be positively fired at the through gate 67 every time the right-handed navigation effect is executed for the player, so that the jackpot game is prevented from becoming monotonous (suppressed). )can do.

In the twelfth embodiment, the game method (launch method) is not specified except when the right-handed navigation effect or the storage effect is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured to notify the player to perform a left-handed stroke except when the right-handed navigation effect is executed. With this configuration, the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb can be matched with the flow direction of the game ball incident on the specific region, so that the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The period of can be shortened. Therefore, the jackpot game can be advanced more speedily. Further, since the through gate 67 is provided only in the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, it is notified to perform left-handed movement except when the right-handed navigation effect is executed. , It is possible to prevent frequent hits of ordinary symbols during big hits. As described above, if a normal symbol hits during the big hit round period, a protruding overlapping state (see FIG. 140 (a)) occurs, and a game ball is placed in both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It becomes impossible to enter the ball. For this reason, except in the state where 8 or 9 game balls have already been entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game balls cannot be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and an over-winning is given. Since it becomes difficult to aim, it becomes an unfavorable state for the player. On the other hand, if the right-handed navigation effect is not executed and the left-handed is notified, it will be a wasteful hit (that is, at a timing when it is difficult to aim for over-winning). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from being prevented from entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

In the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided in the middle thereof and the movable member 650Rb are movable. The structure is such that the entrance port (the degree of advantage for the player) that allows the ball to enter is variable according to the combination of positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second entry opening and the specific winning opening may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the entry opening for easy entry may be changed depending on the combination of the open / closed states of the entry openings. More specifically, for example, a second entry port is provided upstream of the flow path 1 and a specific winning opening is provided downstream, and when the second entry opening is open, the specific winning opening is provided. Regardless of whether or not is open, the game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter into the specific winning opening. On the contrary, when the specific winning opening is arranged on the upstream side and the second entry opening is arranged on the downstream side and the specific winning opening is open, it does not matter whether the second entry opening is open or not. , The game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter into the second entrance. Further, when the entrances are arranged vertically side by side, the two entrances may be configured such that it is more advantageous for the player not to enter the ball than to enter the game ball. Specifically, for example, it is composed of entrances (1 or 0) in which the number of prize balls given to the entrance of the game ball is small, and the game ball is downstream of each entrance. There may be a configuration in which a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 10) is arranged for each of the winning balls. With this configuration, it is most difficult to win a general winning opening when both entrances are open. That is, it is more difficult for the game ball to reach the general winning opening than when only one entrance is open or both entrances are closed. Therefore, the state in which each entrance is open can be regarded as the most disadvantageous state for the player, and the game can be played with the expectation that each entrance will not be opened. Playability can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second entry port 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and an electric accessory 640La and a movable member 650Rb are provided between them. It was composed. Then, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position to form a downward inclination toward the left second entry port 640L, while the movable member is formed during the big hit round period. By arranging the 650Rb at the protruding position, it is configured to form an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Further, both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions by hitting the normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, and in the upper upper region of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb. It forms a protruding overlapping state in which the game ball can be stored (retained). The game ball is in a protruding overlapping state with 8 or 9 balls already entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and by storing multiple game balls in the upper area, the right side when the opening period of the electric accessory 640La has elapsed. It was configured so that the game balls could be won in excess of the specified number (10 pieces) to the specific winning opening 650Ra. As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to the timing when the normal symbol hits.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 6400La, which can be opened and closed at the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra, which are arranged so as to face each other, And the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is provided. The opening / closing plate 6400La and the opening / closing plate 6500Rb have a structure that does not interfere with each other, and even if the hit of the normal symbol and the round period of the big hit overlap, one of the opening / closing plates goes to the other entrance. It is configured so that it can be opened without hindering the entry of the ball. With this configuration, when a normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game (that is, the opening condition of the left second entry opening 640L and the opening condition of the right specific winning opening 650Ra are satisfied in duplicate. Even in the case of), it is possible to allow the game ball to enter both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, the game can be efficiently advanced during the execution of the big hit game regardless of the frequency of hitting the normal symbol.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 13 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, in this modification, an inclined member 6500b having a substantially triangular shape in front view is arranged between the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As shown in FIG. 152, the left and right side surfaces of the inclined member 6500b form an inclination in the lower left direction and the lower right direction, so that the game ball that has reached the specific region is formed by the inclined member 6500b. The inclination guides the user to the lower left direction of the front view or the lower right direction of the front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the left second ball entry port 640L in the present modification is provided with an opening / closing plate 6400La capable of opening and closing the left second ball entry port 640L. The opening / closing plate 6400La is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction so as to prevent the game ball from entering from the right direction in the front view. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the opening / closing plate 6500La tilts to the right toward the tilting member 6500b, thereby forming a downward tilt toward the left second entry port 640L. As a result, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the left second entrance 640L is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the right specific winning opening 650Ra in this modification is provided with an opening / closing plate 6500Rb capable of opening and closing the right specific winning opening 640Ra. The opening / closing plate 6400Rb is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction so as to prevent the game ball from entering from the left direction in the front view. On the other hand, when the jackpot round is started, the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is tilted to the left toward the tilting member 6500b, thereby forming a downward tilt toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As a result, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the opening / closing plates 6500La and 6500Rb are open will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 153 (a), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153 (a), when the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the opening / closing plate 6500Rb leans against the right side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the inclined member 6500b and the opening / closing plate 6500Rb form an inclined downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In this state, the game ball that has reached the right side of the inclined member 6500b is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the left side of the inclined member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening / closing plate 6500La and the inclined member 6500b and flows down to the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153 (b), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening / closing plate 6500La is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), when the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened, the opening / closing plate 6500La leans against the left side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the inclined member 6500b and the opening / closing plate 6500La form an inclination in the downward direction toward the left second entry port 640L. In this state, the game ball that has reached the left side of the inclined member 6500b is guided to the left second entry port 640L. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the right side of the inclined member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening / closing plate 6500Rb and the inclined member 6500b and flows down to the out port 66.

As described above, in this modification, if the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened, the game ball can easily enter the left second entry port 640L regardless of whether or not the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened. It is configured to form. Similarly, if the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the game ball is easily entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra regardless of whether or not the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened. With this configuration, even in a situation where the opening condition of the left second entrance opening 640L and the opening condition of the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be satisfied at the same time, such as during the execution of a jackpot game, the opening condition is always opened. It is possible to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance. That is, as in the protruding overlapping state of the twelfth embodiment described above, it is possible to temporarily form a state in which the game ball cannot enter both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Since there is no such thing, the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, since the game can be performed without feeling the stress of being unable to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be enjoyed by the player.

<Second variant of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided between them is arranged at a protruding position. The structure is such that a downward inclination is formed toward the left second entry port 640L so that the game ball can easily enter the left second entry opening 640L. Further, by arranging the movable member 650Rb provided between the left second special winning opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra at the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra is formed. However, the structure is such that the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Further, while both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are in the protruding overlapping state in which they are arranged at the protruding positions, a state in which the ball cannot enter any of the entrances is temporarily formed. Was supposed to be. That is, in the protruding overlapping state, it becomes difficult to allow the game ball to enter various entrances, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, the central second entrance 640C is located at the intersection of the electric accessory 640Ca provided in place of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Ra. It is easier for the game ball to enter the central second entrance 640C in the case where the protrusions overlap than when only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged in the protrusion position. It was configured as follows.

The flow direction of the game ball around the specific region (the region below the first entry port 64) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the protruding position and the movable member 650Ra is arranged at the buried position. It should be noted that this state is formed mainly when a normal symbol hits in a state other than a big hit. That is, it is a state that is likely to be formed in a time-saving gaming state (1 / 1.2) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high, or in a probabilistic gaming state.

When only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged in the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the game ball moves downward to the left due to the downward inclination of the electric accessory 640Ca formed by the electric accessory 640Ca. Be guided. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), in the second modification, since the central second entry port 640C is provided at a substantially intermediate position of the electric accessory 640Ca, the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca is formed. A part of the game ball flowing down along the ball enters the central second entrance 640C, and a part passes through the central second entrance 640C. In the second modification, since the entry port is not provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 640Ca, the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 640Ca falls downward and flows down to the out port 66. Therefore, since only a part of the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the central second entrance 640C, even if the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is set, the central second entrance 640C is reached. It is relatively difficult to carry out a lottery based on entering a ball.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 154 (b), in the protruding overlapping state, the game ball flowing down along the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca directly enters the central second entrance 640C, and also in the center. The game ball that has passed the position of the second entry port 640C and has rolled to the inclination on the movable member 650Ra side is also finally guided to the central second entry port 640C. More specifically, the game ball that has rolled to the inclination on the movable member 650Rb side climbs the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb until the momentum becomes zero. Then, when the momentum becomes 0, the movable member 650Ra rolls in the lower right direction along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Ra. As a result, the game ball is guided again to the intersection position where the central second entry port 640C is provided. Even if the ball passes through the central second entrance 640C again and proceeds to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca, it climbs on the electric accessory 640Ca and the momentum is 0 as in the case of climbing the movable member 650Rb. Then, it goes down on the electric accessory 640Ca in the lower left direction and is guided to the central second entry port 640Ca. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area during the protruding overlapping state is always guided to the central second entrance 640C unless the protruding overlapping state is released on the way. Therefore, in the second modification, the protruding overlapping state makes it easier to enter the central second entry port 640C than the state in which only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the protruding position. From the viewpoint of the ball entry rate to the second ball entry port 640C, the protruding overlapping state is the most advantageous state.

In particular, the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery based on the entry into the central second entry opening 640C) is better than the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery based on the entry into the first entry opening 64). If the configuration is such that it is easy to be advantageous (it is easy to determine the advantageous jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot), it may make you want to store more reserved balls of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively pass through the through gate 67 and play the game while expecting that the protruding overlapping state occurs. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

In the second modification, the time-saving gaming state is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, and the probabilistic gaming state is continued until the next big hit. It is not limited to. For example, the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state may be limited to the period until the special symbol lottery is executed four times. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, when only the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is drawn in a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state. The number of lottery will be subtracted. Therefore, for a player who wants to make all the lottery executed while the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state is set into an advantageous second special symbol lottery, more second game is being executed during the jackpot game. It can make you want to get a reserved ball with a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to form a situation in which the ball can easily enter the central second entrance 640C by making the protrusions overlap more times during the execution of the jackpot game. You can play the game by paying attention to the lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, the central second entry port 640C is provided at the intersection of the electric accessory 640Ca and the movable member 650Rb, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second entrance and the specific winning opening may be exchanged. With this configuration, if the normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game, it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening at the intersection position, so that the normal symbol hits during the jackpot. You can play the game with a strong expectation that you will become.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set for the variation display of 1, but it is not always necessary to keep the continuous transformation effect within the variation time of the variation display of 1, and the variation of a plurality of variation displays. You may perform a continuous transformation effect over time. That is, when there are a plurality of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, whether or not to set the continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (whether or not each reserved ball is correct, the type of fluctuation, etc.), and whether or not to set the continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the continuous transformation effect is to be set, it may be configured to determine which of the reserved balls the continuous transformation effect is to be continued until the variable display corresponding to the holding ball. Further, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect may be calculated from the look-ahead result of each reserved ball, and the upper limit number of transformations may be set according to the effect time. With such a configuration, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be lengthened, so that the upper limit number of success notification modes can be increased. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player more opportunities to display the success notification mode, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game when the continuous transformation effect is executed. In addition, by configuring the continuous transformation effect to continue over a plurality of variable displays, it is more difficult for the player to predict how long the success of the transformation (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) will continue. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In addition, when the continuous transformation effect is continued over the fluctuation time of a plurality of fluctuation displays, the progress status of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the number of remaining fluctuations, the fluctuation time of the reserved ball, etc.) Depending on the configuration, the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous transformation effect, the upper limit number of success notification modes, and the like may be increased or decreased. Regarding this, at the start of the fluctuation, a continuous transformation effect is executed over the display period of the fluctuation display of 3 times (the fluctuation + 2 holding balls) including the fluctuation, and the jackpot is notified by the 3rd fluctuation display. Then, the case where it is determined will be described more specifically by taking as an example. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 almost at intervals from the start of the operation valid period, most of the operation valid period is shortened, and the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed in the middle of the second variation display. If it is finished, the continuous transformation effect may be completed in the second variable display. Then, in the third variable display, which was originally supposed to continue the continuous transformation effect, an effect completely different from the continuous transformation effect may be executed. Further, when the last operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect ends immediately after the start of the third variation display, for example, by increasing the upper limit number of transformations, the effect time of the third variation display is left over. It may be configured to prevent it from being stored. In this way, by flexibly changing the effect mode according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, the effect mode can be further diversified.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuous transformation effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot (for example, 1 to 5 rounds). In this case, for example, whether the continuous transformation effect is a jackpot (that is, jackpot A or jackpot B) notified by the stop display of the same normal symbol (main symbol imitating an even number) is displayed. It may be configured to be executed in (when it is difficult to identify). Then, the larger the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) in the continuous transformation effect, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be in a probable change state after the end of the jackpot (this jackpot is the jackpot A). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining promotion, and to make the game during the jackpot more enjoyable.

In this case, the condition for terminating each operation valid period may be, for example, a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a instead of pressing the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in a continuous transformation effect simply by firing a game ball at the specific winning opening 65a in order to win a prize ball during a big hit. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the description has been made on the premise of a continuous transformation effect in which the effect of whether or not the character 811 is transformed is executed one or a plurality of times. Is not limited to the application of. For example, it may be configured to be applied to an effect (single-shot effect) in which any one of two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, confirmation, loss, etc.) is notified in a single shot. That is, the configuration may be such that the subsequent display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like can be changed depending on whether or not the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period set in the one-shot effect. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like depending on whether or not the press is detected. In a part or all of the operation valid period, the notification mode is exactly the same when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when the operation valid period ends without detecting the press. For example, the success notification mode) may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation valid period). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the press is detected may be different, and the determination timing and the display timing of the notification mode may be common. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it is not always necessary to notify that the pressing is detected. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is executed as one of the hobby effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as a kind of hobby effect during the execution of the jackpot, may be executed as a kind of so-called hold notice effect, or may be executed during the so-called demo effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the effect time of the transition effect or the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol match, but it is necessary to completely match the end timing. However, it may have a degree of freedom. Specifically, for example, the effect time of the transition effect or the like so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol are within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). It may be configured to set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the calculation of the production time such as the transition effect about, so that it is possible to reduce the processing addition required for the calculation.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Make the total validity period longer than the production period)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode in the effect period of 1, an upper limit number of times setting means for setting an upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the specific effect of 1. Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions in the effect period, the first condition is satisfied in the specific period setting means for setting the specific period and the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The first aspect display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the above, and the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. Based on this, the specific display mode is provided with a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode, and the specific period setting means displays the specific display mode only by the first mode display means in the production period of 1. When this is done, the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the specific period of the length at which the effect period ends is set before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit of the number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the specific effect of 1 is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. Based on the fact that a predetermined setting condition is satisfied in the production period, a specific period is set by the specific period setting means, and the first condition is satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, in the specific period, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied. In the production period of 1, when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period of the length at which the effect period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed is It is set by a specific period setting means.

As a result, if a specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one effect period, the effect period of the specific effect ends before the specific display mode of the maximum number of times is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game hoping that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the first aspect display means displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific period, and the second aspect display means during the specific period. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific display mode is displayed after the specific period is completed based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the elapse of the specific period, while the second mode is displayed during the specific period. Based on the condition being satisfied, the second aspect display means ends the specific display mode and displays the specific display mode. Therefore, the earlier the timing when the second condition is satisfied, the earlier the specific display mode is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to end a specific period at an early stage. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of times a specific display mode is displayed in one effect period. Therefore, for a player who wants to display a specific display mode more. There is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the second condition will be satisfied at an early stage.

The gaming machine A1 or A2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the second aspect display means is specified based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations with respect to the operating means are detected in the specific period of 1. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the display mode of the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second aspect display means is based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations for the operating means that can be operated by the player are detected in one specific period. Since the specific display mode is displayed, the player who wants to display more specific display modes can positively operate the operating means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the specific production can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means can set the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. The period and the display period of a specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, as the specific period ends earlier, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed can be increased, so that the specific period can be set for the player who desires to display more specific display modes. When set, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second condition will be satisfied sooner.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminant means. The upper limit number setting means is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing the above, and the upper limit is one of a plurality of times including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number. The first number of times is set as the number of times, and when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the ratio set by the upper limit number of times setting means is higher than that of the second number of times. A game machine A5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. The number of times of 1 is set as the maximum number of times by the upper limit number of times setting means from a plurality of times including at least the first number of times and the second number of times different from the first number of times. The first number of times is configured so that when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the ratio set by the upper limit number of times setting means is higher than that of the second number of times.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, the setting ratio of the first number of times is increased as the upper limit number of times, so that the player can guess the discrimination result by the discrimination means from the upper limit number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who wants to know the upper limit number of times can play the game during the specific production with a strong expectation that the second condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the first number of times is larger than the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, since the first number of times is larger than the second number of times, it is expected that a specific display mode of at least a larger number of times than the second number of times is displayed. Then, the player can be made to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be expected that the second condition is satisfied more times.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the above-mentioned dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the specific effect executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. While the game machine A7 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. While the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect.

This has the effect of suppressing the player from getting bored between the time when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed and the time when the information is dynamically displayed.

In the gaming machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect different from the specific effect and the effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means are set. The gaming machine A8 comprising a second effect time determining means for determining based on the remaining dynamic display time.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A7, a second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means after the end of the specific effect. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined by the second effect time determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect is completed, the second effect can be executed with the remaining dynamic display time, so that the player can execute the second effect from the end of the specific effect to the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. Has the effect of suppressing boredom.

<Characteristic B group> (Control that the period until transformation becomes longer as the number of button PUSHs decreases during the transformation production of 1)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in the effect period of 1, and predetermined during the display of at least the previous predetermined effect mode in the effect period of 1. The display includes a condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, and a display time setting means for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on the determination result by the condition determination means. In the time setting means, the ratio of setting a long display time is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine B1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B1, a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. In the production period of 1, it is determined by the condition determination means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at least during the display of the previous predetermined production mode, and based on the determination result by the condition determination means, the predetermined production mode is determined. The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. When it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied by the condition determining means, the ratio of setting a long display time by the display time setting means is higher than when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, if the specific conditions are not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect mode tends to be long, so that the number of times of the predetermined effect mode executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to expect a player who wants to display a predetermined effect mode a larger number of times to satisfy a specific condition each time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied by the player operating the operating means, so that the display time of the predetermined effect mode is shortened. It is possible to positively operate the operating means for the player who wants to play the game every time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to participate more actively in the game.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in the effect period of 1, and the display period setting means determines. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the larger the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of setting a long display time.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one effect period, the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the condition determination means. The greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determination means, the higher the proportion of the long display time set by the display period setting means.

As a result, the longer the display time is set easily as the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied is continuous, the number of times of the predetermined effect mode that can be displayed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who wants to display more predetermined production modes can play the game with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied each time the predetermined production mode is displayed. be.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 is provided with an upper limit number of times setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times that the predetermined effect mode is displayed in the effect period of 1.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times a predetermined effect mode is displayed in one effect period is set by the upper limit number of times setting means, so that the upper limit of the number of times is set. It is possible to make people want to display more production modes within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value. The display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on the determination by the terminal determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined effect mode is to be completed after the threshold value. The gaming machine B5, which is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding this.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are played. Based on the fact that the display time is determined by the display time setting means, it is determined by the cycle determination means whether or not the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value, and the end determination means thereof. The avoidance means avoids setting the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the determination that the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value.

This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the production time of the specific production becomes too long.

In the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means, the setting determination for determining whether to set the display time having a length shorter than the display time in which the setting is avoided is determined. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means, the display time is set to be shorter than the display time that was avoided. Since it is determined by the setting determination means, there is an effect that more predetermined effect modes can be displayed within a range in which the effect time of the specific effect does not become too long.

In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the shortest display time that can be set based on the determination that the display time of the short length is set by the setting determination means. The gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the shortest length that can be set by the display time setting means based on the determination that the display time of the short length is set by the setting determining means. Since the display time of is set, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the production time of a specific effect from becoming too long.

A game characterized in that any of the gaming machines B5 to B7 is provided with an end determination means for determining whether to end the specific effect when the avoidance means avoids setting the display time. Machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when it is avoided that the display time is set by the avoiding means, it is determined by the ending determining means whether to end the specific effect. Therefore, if the display time exceeding a predetermined threshold value is determined, the end determination means may determine the end of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in the hope that the display time is set as short as possible.

<Characteristic C group> (Control that makes the transformation success rate higher when the button PUSH is performed than when the effective period has passed without PUSH)
The specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect, the determination period number determination means for determining the number of times the determination period is set for executing the predetermined determination in the effect period of the specific effect 1, and the specific effect 1 In the effect period, whether the discrimination period setting means for setting the discrimination period of the number of times determined by the discrimination period number determination means and the predetermined specific condition as the predetermined discrimination are satisfied during the discrimination period. The condition discriminating means for determining whether to display a specific display mode based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition discriminating means, and the condition discriminating means for determining whether to display a specific display mode. The second aspect display determination means for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on the elapse of the determination period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the means, and the first aspect display determination. As a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the means, a ratio setting means for setting a ratio higher than the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second aspect display determining means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. In the effect period of 1 specific effect, the number of times the determination period is set for executing a predetermined determination is determined by the determination period number determination means. In the effect period of the specific effect of 1, the determination period of the number of times determined by the determination period number determination means is set by the determination period setting means. As a predetermined determination, whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the determination period is determined by the condition determination means, and a specific display is made based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. Whether to display the aspect is determined by the first aspect display determining means. The second mode display discriminating means determines whether to display a specific display mode based on the elapse of the discriminating period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition discriminating means. As the ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the first aspect display determining means, a ratio higher than the ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the second aspect display determining means is set by the ratio setting means. Will be done.

As a result, when the specific condition is satisfied during the discrimination period, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher rate. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who wants to display a specific display mode play a game with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied, it can be expected that a specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected. Pachinko machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, when an operation on an operating means that can be operated by the player is detected, it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied. By operating the operating means during the period, the ratio of displaying a specific display mode can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. The specific effect executing means includes a game executing means, and the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the discriminating means. It is executed based on the specific discrimination result rather than the execution of the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the ratio of being determined to display the specific display mode is set higher when the specific effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is executed, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. The specific effect executed based on the specific judgment result is more than the execution of the specific effect executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a deviation judgment result different from the specific judgment result. The rate of execution is set to be higher when it is determined that a specific display mode is displayed by the rate setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained, a specific display mode is easily displayed. Therefore, when a specific display mode is displayed, a feeling of expectation that the privilege game will be executed for the player. It has the effect of being able to embrace.

In the game machine C3, when the ratio setting means displays the specific display mode by the first mode discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discrimination. The first ratio is set as the ratio to be discriminated, and the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discrimination. The first aspect is set during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the fact that a second ratio lower than the first ratio is set as the ratio determined to be displayed and the result of the deviation determination is obtained. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is set as the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the display determination means, and the identification executed based on the result of the deviation determination. A fourth ratio lower than the second ratio is set as a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining means during the execution of the effect. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the difference between the ratio and the third ratio is larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are played. That is, as a ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the first mode discriminating means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discriminating result, the first mode setting means is used. The percentage is set. A ratio lower than the first ratio as a ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the second mode display determining means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. The ratio of 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third ratio, which is lower than the first ratio, is determined to display a specific display mode by the first mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the deviation determination. The ratio of is set by the ratio setting means. The fourth ratio, which is lower than the second ratio, is determined to display a specific display mode by the second mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the deviation determination. The ratio of is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is set to be larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

As a result, the degree of expectation of the privilege game is higher when it is determined that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the first aspect display determination means than when it is determined that the specific display mode is displayed by the second aspect determination means. Can be made to be recognized by the player when the value is high. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific display mode will be displayed after the specific conditions are satisfied during the determination period.

In the gaming machines C3 or C4, the determination period number determination means is executed based on the specific determination result rather than the specific effect executed based on the deviation determination result. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the specific effect makes it easier to set a large number of times as the number of times of the determination period.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, it was executed based on the specific discrimination result rather than the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result. Since it is easier to set a larger number of times for the specific effect by the means for determining the number of discriminant periods, there is an effect that the larger the number of discriminant periods, the higher the expectation of the player for the privileged game.

Based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determining means or the second aspect display determining means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect The gaming machine C6, which is provided with a specific effect ending means for ending the game.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is determined that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determining means or the second aspect display determining means. Based on this, since the specific effect is terminated by the specific effect end means, it is possible to make the player who wants to enjoy the specific effect for a longer time more strongly expect that the specific display mode is displayed. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger desire that the specific condition is satisfied during the discrimination period.

In the gaming machine C6, a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and an operation of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time setting means for setting the dynamic display time of the target display, and the specific effect executing means is said to be specified within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamics are based on the determination that the effect is executed and that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display discriminating means or the second mode display discriminating means. Based on the remaining time determining means for determining the display time and the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect of the effect to be executed after the specific effect is completed by the specific effect end means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized by comprising a production time determining means for determining the time.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. .. Within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination means based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determination means or the second aspect display determination means. Based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect time determining means determines the effect time to be executed after the specific effect is completed by the specific effect end means.

As a result, in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the remaining dynamic display time after the end of the specific effect, regardless of the end timing of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine C7, the effect time determining means determines one effect time from a plurality of predetermined different effect times within a range in which the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C7, the production time determination means is used within a range in which the end timing of the production does not exceed the dynamic display time from among a plurality of predetermined different production times. Since the effect time of 1 is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (The possibility of transformation and the mode of production after the transformation are changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time of button PUSH and the number of transformations)
Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect composed of at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect executed after the end of the first effect. And the upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times of the said specific display mode to be displayed in the said first effect of 1, and the specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the said first effect. The discriminant period setting means that is set once or a plurality of times during execution, the first aspect display means that displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific discriminant period, and the specific discriminant period. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the second aspect display means for ending the specific determination period and displaying the specific display mode, and the specific display displayed during the execution of the first effect of 1. Based on at least one of the aspect display number counting means for counting the display number of the aspect, the display number counted by the aspect number counting means during the execution of the first effect, and the remaining effect period. The gaming machine D1 is provided with an effect time determining means for determining the effect time of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine D1, a specific effect composed of at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect executed after the end of the first effect. Is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect of 1 is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. The specific determination period for determining whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. Based on the elapse of the specific determination period, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific determination period, the specific determination period is terminated by the second aspect display means, and the specific display mode is displayed. The display count of the specific display mode displayed during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the mode display count counting means. During the execution of the first effect, the effect time of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining effect period.

As a result, the effect time of the second effect is variable according to the situation of the first effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the specific effect can be diversified.

The gaming machine D1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the discriminating period setting means sets a period during which the operation on the operating means is valid as the specific discriminating period. , The gaming machine D2, which is established when an operation on the operating means is detected.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, as the specific determination period, the period during which the operation for the operation means is valid is set by the determination period setting means. A specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected.

This has the effect that the player who wants to display the second effect with a longer effect time can positively operate the operation means.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the above, and the specific effect executing means is within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The specific effect is executed, and the effect time determining means of the second effect is based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized in that it determines the production mode.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. .. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect time determination means based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect within the range of the dynamic display time during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the player's interest during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information can be improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect time determining means has a plurality of different effect times defined as the effect time of the second effect, before the end of the effect period of the specific effect. The gaming machine D4, which determines the longest production time in the range in which the second production ends.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the production period of the specific production is more than the end of the production period of the specific production from among a plurality of different production times defined as the production time of the second production. Since the longest effect time in the range in which the second effect ends before is determined by the effect time determining means, the effect time of the second effect can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determining means. The gaming machine D5 is provided with a third effect time determining means for determining the effect time of the third effect based on at least one of the effect time and the remaining effect period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, the specific effect includes a third effect that is different from both the first effect and the second effect. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determination means based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determining means and the remaining effect period.

As a result, it is possible to execute a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect during the execution of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect modes during the execution of the specific effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started, and the third effect time determining means is the first effect. The feature is that the effect time of the third effect is determined based on the difference between the remaining effect period at the time when one effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means. Pachinko machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on the difference between the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means.

This has the effect that the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed according to the effect period of the specific effect.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 is provided with an effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the second effect based on the display number of times counted by the aspect number counting means. ..

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect mode determining means based on the display number counted by the mode number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that the first effect and the second effect are related to each other. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game in the specific production can be improved.

In the gaming machine D7, the execution information used to execute the second effect is stored in the storage means stored for each effect mode of the second effect, and based on the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Of the execution information selected by the selection means based on the selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means and the effect time determined by the effect time determination means, the second of the present times. It is characterized by comprising a specific means for specifying a range used for executing the effect, and a second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the execution information in the range specified by the specific means. The gaming machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution information used to execute the second effect is stored in the storage means for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage means by the selection means. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determining means, the range used for the execution of the second effect of this time is specified by the specific means among the execution information selected by the selection means. The second effect is executed by the second effect execution means based on the execution information in the range specified by the specific means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of second effects having different effect times from each execution information, so that the execution information is stored as compared with the case where the execution information is individually stored for each effect time. It has the effect of reducing the storage area required for storage.

<Characteristic E group> (The suggestion mode of the degree of expectation is different depending on the tendency of the button PUSH)
Based on a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times in one effect period, and a predetermined display condition being satisfied during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. The effect mode setting means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of predetermined effect modes and the display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means. At least one of the means, the specific discriminant means for executing the specific discriminant in the effect period of 1, and the effect mode having a high ratio of being determined by the effect mode determining means according to the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a determination ratio variable means that is variable when the predetermined effect mode is determined.

According to the gaming machine E1, a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. Based on the fact that the predetermined display condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. To. The display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is set by the effect mode setting means. In the production period of 1, a specific discrimination is executed by the specific discrimination means, and a production mode having a high ratio of being determined by the production mode determination means according to the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is at least one predetermined production mode. When deciding, it is varied by the determination ratio variable means.

As a result, it becomes easy to determine a different effect mode according to the determination result by the specific determination means, so that the impression of the specific effect can be changed according to the result of the specific determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a production that is hard for the player to get bored.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means is 1 as the specific determination. The determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in the effect period is discriminated, and the determination ratio variable means is the specific determination unit in the effect period of 1. With respect to the predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode to be discriminated by, the effect mode in which the ratio determined by the effect mode determining means is high is changed. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. As a specific determination, the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period is determined by the specific determination means. In the production period of 1, the ratio of the predetermined production mode set by the production mode setting means after the predetermined production mode to be discriminated by the specific discrimination means is determined by the effect mode determining means is high. Is variable by the determination ratio variable means.

As a result, while the predetermined effect mode to be discriminated by the specific discriminating means is displayed, the game can be performed while paying attention to the discriminating situation by the specific discriminating means, while the predetermined setting is set thereafter. In the effect mode, the game can be performed by paying attention to which effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since the points to be focused on can be changed according to the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it determines the number of times of the predetermined effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period. Since the number of times of the predetermined effect mode is determined by the specific determination means, it is possible to change the effect mode that is easy to set according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while a predetermined effect mode is displayed. The production mode can be changed depending on whether or not the person operates the operating means. Therefore, since the effect mode can be changed by the player's selection, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is more difficult to get tired of.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination by the discriminant means resulting in a specific discriminant result. The specific effect executing means is provided with a privilege game executing means for executing the specific effect, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the discriminating means, and the determination ratio variable means is described. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, it is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined effect mode, the ratio of determining the first aspect is variable so as to be higher than that of the other effect modes, and the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is different from the first discrimination result. When the specific effect is being executed, which is the second determination result and is executed based on the specific determination result, the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times is determined. At the same time, the ratio of determining the second aspect different from the first aspect is variable so as to be higher than that of the other effect modes, and the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and the specification. When the specific effect executed based on the discriminant result different from the determination result of the above is being executed, when the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times is determined, the first The ratio of determining the two modes is variable so as to be higher than that of the other production modes, and the execution is performed based on the fact that the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and the deviation discrimination result is obtained. When the specific effect is being executed, the ratio of determining the first aspect is higher than that of the other effect when determining the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times. The gaming machine E5 characterized by being variable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. To. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, the predetermined number of times to be displayed is predetermined. The determination ratio is variable by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio of determining the first aspect when determining the effect mode is higher than that of the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, the specific number of times is executed. When determining a predetermined effect mode displayed on the screen, the rate of determining the table 2 mode different from the first mode is changed by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio of determining the table 2 mode is higher than that of the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result is being executed, it is displayed at the specific number of times. When determining a predetermined effect mode to be performed, the rate of determining the second aspect is varied by the determination ratio variable means so as to be higher than the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the deviation determination result is being executed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is displayed. At the time of determination, the determination ratio variable means is changed so that the ratio of determining the first aspect is higher than that of the other effect modes.

As a result, it is possible to make the player estimate the degree of expectation of the privileged game according to the determination result by the specific determination means and the predetermined effect mode of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means is the present time as the specific determination. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. As a specific determination, the determination is executed by the specific determination means based on the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the present specific effect.

As a result, the effect mode in the present specific effect changes depending on the determination result of the condition determination means in the previously executed specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means has the number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect of this time, and the specific condition by the condition determination means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which it is determined that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the number of predetermined effect modes displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect this time, and the specific condition by the condition determination means. Since the discrimination is executed by the specific discriminating means based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine E7 includes an identification means for identifying a player playing a game, and the specific determination means is displayed while the same player is identified as playing a game by the identification means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode and the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined by the condition determination means to satisfy the specific condition. ..

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the player playing the game is identified by the identification means. The number of predetermined effect modes displayed while the same player is identified as playing a game by the identification means, and the number of predetermined effect modes determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the determination is executed by the specific determination means.

As a result, it is possible to make the tendency of the effect mode that is easy to set different according to the game result for each player, so that there is an effect that the effect according to the player can be provided.

<Characteristic F group> (Adjust the connection between the first half of the production and the second half of the production)
During the execution of the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect composed of at least the first effect and the second effect executed after the first effect within one effect period, and the execution of the first effect, The first effect of terminating the first effect based on the end condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied. The length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect by the end means and the first effect end means is set based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a period setting means for starting a second effect, and an effect starting means for starting the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine F1, at least a specific effect composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect execution means. During the execution of the first effect, it is determined by the end condition determining means whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means, the first effect is performed. The first effect is terminated by the termination means. The length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect by the first effect end means is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means, the second effect is started by the effect starting means.

As a result, the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be changed according to the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed. be.

In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect as the length of the period between the end of the first effect and the end of the second effect. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the length at which the production ends is set.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the end of the first effect. Since the length at which the 2 effects are completed is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the specific effects can be more preferably executed.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the second effect, a type selection means for selecting one effect type from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect times is provided, and the period setting means is selected by the type selection means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is set based on the effect time of the effect type.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selection means from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the effect time of the effect type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the first effect is set by the period setting means.

As a result, the start timing of the second effect can be set according to the effect time of the second effect, so that there is an effect that the second effect can be executed more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the first effect of 1 and the first effect of 1 during execution of the first effect. A number counting means for counting the number of times a specific condition is satisfied is provided, and the end condition is when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or more than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is at least established.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, in the first effect of 1, the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. The number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the number counting means. At least the end condition is satisfied when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means.

This has the effect that even if the end timing of the first effect changes according to the number of times of the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, the start of the second effect can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine F4, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period that enables an operation on the operation means once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect, and an operation validity period setting means thereof. The first aspect display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the elapse of the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, and the operation valid 1 set by the operation valid period setting means. A second aspect display means for ending the operation valid period and displaying the specific display mode based on the detection of an operation on the operation means during the period is provided, and the specific condition is the specific condition. The gaming machine F5, which is established when the display mode of the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation validity period for validating the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is set once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect by the operation validity period setting means. Based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the fact that the operation for the operating means is detected during the one operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, the operation valid period is terminated by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. .. A specific condition is satisfied when a specific display mode is displayed.

As a result, the end timing of the operation valid period changes according to the timing when the player performs an operation on the operation means, so that even if the end timing of the first effect changes, the start of the second effect is suitably set. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third effect executing means for executing a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means, and a third effect executing means. The effect data of 1 from the effect data storage means based on the effect data storage means for storing the effect data for executing the third effect and the length of the period set by the period setting means. Of the data reading means for reading the data and the effect data of 1 read by the data reading means, the data in the range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is used for the third effect. The gaming machine F6 is provided with a data range setting means for setting data to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are played. That is, a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect is executed by the third effect executing means in the period of the length set by the period setting means. The effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the fact that the length of the period is set by the period setting means, the effect data of 1 is read out from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Of the 1 effect data read by the data reading means, the data in the range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as the data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means. Will be done.

As a result, when the third effect is executed, it is possible to set data having different effect periods based on the effect data of 1, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data for executing the third effect. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting means is the period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the range of data for executing the third effect is set so that the display time of the specific still image is variable according to the length.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting means so that the display time of the specific still image changes according to the length of the period set by the period setting means.

As a result, even if the production time of the third effect is variable, the display time of a specific still image is only variable, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content. ..

It is executed by the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means thereof in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. A dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information is provided, and the specific effect executing means determines the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determining means. Based on the above, the gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed within the determined dynamic display time.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the determined dynamic display time.

This has the effect that the specific effect can be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Characteristic G group> (Adjust the mode after the production with an indefinite production time is completed)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period, and a predetermined end condition before the elapse of the effect period during the execution of the first effect. An effect ending means for terminating the first effect and an effect ending means for terminating the first effect based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means for determining whether or not the above is satisfied. The present invention is characterized by comprising an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period at least based on the length of the remaining effect period. Game machine G1 to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. During the execution of the first effect, it is determined by the end condition determining means whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied before the effect period elapses. The first effect is terminated by the effect ending means based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means. The effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period by the effect end means is set by the effect mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the length of the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, as the effect mode set by the mode setting means, a type selection means for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the effect mode having at least different effect times is provided. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, as an effect mode set by the mode setting means, at least one type is selected from a plurality of types of effect modes having different production methods by the type selection means. Since it is selected, there is an effect that the production mode of the production time suitable for the length of the remaining production period can be set.

In the gaming machine G2, the effect time is set by the effect mode setting means after the first effect is completed, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining effect period. The gaming machine G3 is provided with a period setting means for setting a period until the effect mode is started.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the production is performed after the first production is completed based on the production time of the production mode selected by the type selection means and the Nagasato of the remaining production period. Since the period until the effect mode set by the mode setting means is started is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interval between the first effect and the effect mode can be suitably set. ..

In the gaming machine G3, the period setting means sets the period so that the timing at which the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means ends and the timing at which the effect period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means ends and the timing at which the effect period ends are within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect mode can be appropriately set.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means is the difference between the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selection means. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the period of is set as the period.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the type of effect selected by the type selection means. Since the difference period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect period and the end timing of the effect mode can be matched.

The gaming machine G1 includes a storage means for storing the effect data used to execute the effect mode, and the effect mode setting means corresponds to the length of the remaining effect period of the effect data of 1. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the range of data to be played is selected and set.

According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the effect data used to execute the effect mode is stored in the storage means. Of the effect data of 1, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of effect modes having different effect times from one effect data, so that there is an effect that the amount of data for displaying the effect mode can be reduced.

The gaming machine G6 is provided with a data selection means for selecting one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from a plurality of effect data stored in the storage means, and the effect mode setting. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the means is to select and set a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period from among the effect data of 1 selected by the data selection means. ..

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means is selected by the data selection means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means. Of the 1 effect data selected by the data selection means, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

This has the effect that the production mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine G7, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privileged game execution for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminating means. A gaming machine G8 comprising means and means, wherein the data selection means selects the effect data of 1 from the storage means at least based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. .. At least based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, the effect data of 1 is selected from the storage means by the data selection means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game will be a privileged game from the effect mode, so that there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode and play the game.

<Characteristic H group> (The period until the right-handed ball reaches the attacker is longer than the left-handed case)
A first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path. A ball entering means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the ball and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and a predetermined ball based on the entry means of the gaming ball entering the ball entering means. The second flow path is provided with a privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above, and the second flow path is launched in the second direction rather than the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period until the gaming ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In the conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is awarded to the large winning opening during the hit state, so that the player can play the game with one pleasure in the hit state. Can be made.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that it became.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction flows down the first flow path, and the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction flows down the second flow path. Flow down. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. Second, the period until the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the entry means is longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. The flow path is configured.

As a result, it is possible to launch the game ball aiming at the first flow path for the player who wants to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible, while the game ball takes a relatively long time. It is possible to launch a game ball aiming at the second flow path to a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since it is possible to select a preferred firing direction for each player and perform the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine H1, the ball-entry means is at a position where the rate at which the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters is higher than the rate at which the game ball flowing down the first flow path enters. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the rate at which the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path enters is higher than the rate at which the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path enters. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when the ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier to enter the ball entry means, but the period until reaching the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the firing direction that suits each player's taste.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the gaming machine H1 or H2 is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball launched in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until the ball means reaches the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it can be changed to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is obtained, the variable means performs the discrimination from the second position a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine H4 comprising: a variable gaming execution means for executing a variable gaming variable to a first position.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means.

In the gaming machine H4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and the variable means using the second variable means during execution of the variable game. The first variable that causes the variable means to be changed to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position. The variable means is referred to as the first variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the control means and the variable game. A second variable control means that is variable to two positions is provided, and during the specific period, the gaming ball is launched in the second direction at the specific firing interval after the gaming ball is started to be launched in the second direction. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the specified number of gaming balls is at least longer than the period until the second flow path is completely flowed down.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means becomes the first based on the fact that after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means. 1 It is variable to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Will be done. At least a specific period from the start of launching the game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction flowing down the second flow path at specific firing intervals. Is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction during the execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be entered into the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. It has the effect of suppressing the loss of a person.

In the gaming machine H4, the variable game executing means has a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after elapse is controlled to be variable by the variable means in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times, and one or more in the specific variable pattern. The execution period of the first variable operation is such that the game ball launched in the first direction can be reached after the specific variable pattern is started, and the first variable pattern is started. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that a gaming ball launched in two directions is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the first position, and after a predetermined first period elapses, the variable means is changed to the second position. The variable means is controlled to be variable by the variable game executing means in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or more first variable movements in a specific variable pattern is such that the game ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can be reached, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the chance of the game ball entering the ball entry means is reduced as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the first direction. It has the effect of being able to remind you.

In the game machine H6, as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the first game state is set when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. The game is characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when the game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine H7.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H6, as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the game is played when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be performed during the execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and the second flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the third direction. The variable means is configured to allow the gaming ball to flow down the upper surface of the variable means while being variable to the second position, and the pachinko ball is made to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the above. The fourth direction side is inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position. In a state where the gaming ball can enter from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the upper portion is closed by the variable means, and the variable means is The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that it can be changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, the game ball flowing down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. To reach. While the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means is tilted so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Are arranged. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entering means is blocked by the variable means. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in the direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball arriving from the third direction side to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball arriving from the fourth direction side enters the ball. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than the game ball is launched in the first direction during the execution of the variable game. It has the effect of being able to be raised.

<Characteristic I group> (Right-handed during a big hit is more advantageous than left-handed on one side, but more disadvantageous than left-handed on another side)
Specified by a launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and discrimination by the discrimination means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, and the first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means, in which it is more advantageous for the player to keep firing the game ball in the first direction than to keep firing the game ball in the second direction during a specific period, and the first. It is advantageous for the player that the second element different from the element is continuously fired in the second direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising two-element advantageous means.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In the conventional gaming machine, by winning a game ball into the large winning opening during the hitting state, a predetermined privilege such as a prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is hit. The state can be made to play a game in one fun.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the launching means is configured so that at least the gaming ball can be launched in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. The first factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the second element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball can be launched in the first direction to the player who wants to make the first element advantageous during the execution of the privilege game, while the second element can be made to be advantageous to the player who wants to make the second element advantageous. The game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide playability that suits the taste of each player.

In the game machine I1, to the ball entry means provided at least at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the ball entry means thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the gaming ball, a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means, and the entry means rather than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a variable that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine I2 comprising a control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is variable by the variable control means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the privilege game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the first element advantageous means is a method in which the gaming ball continues to be launched in the first direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, it is better that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction than the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased by the first factor advantage means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high rate of entering the ball entry means. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively launched in the first direction.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element advantageous means is such that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the first direction during the specific period. The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the number of gaming balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, it is more likely that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction than that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction during a specific period. Since the number of game balls that reach the ball entry means is increased by the second factor advantage means, the player who wants to make more game balls reach the ball entry means is positively directed to the second direction. Has the effect of being able to fire a game ball.

In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during the specific period, and in the second element advantageous means, the gaming ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific period is the first number of times. It is intended to suppress the arrival of the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, and at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is a period during which the gaming ball launched in the second direction can be reached after the start.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are played. That is, the first variable operation, which is changed to the second position after the predetermined first period elapses after the variable means is changed to the first position, is executed the first time by the variable control means during the specific period. Will be done. The second factor advantage means means that the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means between the start of the specific period and the end of the execution period of the first variable motion of a predetermined number of times. It is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable motion of a predetermined number of times is composed of a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can be reached after the specific period is started.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the game ball reaches the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable motion more times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

In the gaming machine I5, in the second element advantageous means, the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means is before the gaming ball launched in the second direction. The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed so as to be longer than the period until reaching the entry ball means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, the game ball launched in the second direction enters the ball during the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. Since the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantageous means so that the period until reaching the means is longer, the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed. , It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball entering means from being reached before the end of the first variable operation a predetermined number of times. Therefore, launching the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of more reliably entering the ball into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine I5 or I6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is variable so as to be in the second period, and the first element advantageous means is such that the gaming ball launched in the second direction enters the ball entry means during the second period. It is easier for the gaming ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entry means during the second period than to reach the ball entry means. Characteristic gaming machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means so that the period from the start of the variable from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is variable. The game ball launched in the first direction reached the entry means during the second period than the game ball launched in the second direction reached the entry means during the second period. It is easier to enter the ball entry means by the first element advantage means.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position is also performed. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball into the ball entry means, it is possible to prolong the period during which the ball can enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the first direction, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine I7, the gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow down, and the flowing gaming ball can reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and in the second direction. The variable means includes a second flow path in which the launched game ball can flow down and the flowed-down game ball reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While the position is variable to the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball-entry means is configured so that the gaming ball can enter from above in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, and the variable means is the second position. In the state of being variable to, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is said to be oriented from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction through the first flow path. The game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is variable to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball from above with respect to the ball entry means, while in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the ball entry means. The upper part of is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state where the ball can enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that the ball is launched in the first direction and is launched from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to facilitate the entry of a game ball that has reached the entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the ball entry rate when the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably than the game ball launched in the second direction.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, when the gaming ball does not enter the ball-entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. 1 Game state setting means for setting a game state and setting a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1. A gaming machine I8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, the gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to whether or not to play the game while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic J group> (Variable attacker who can easily win a game ball that has reached the same area)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach, and a first entry ball provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter. To the means, the second ball entry means, the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means that grants a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the ball entering the game ball, and a game ball that has reached the specific area enters the first ball entering means. A first position that makes it possible and difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position that makes it difficult to enter the first ball entry means and allows the ball to enter the second ball entry means. The position, at least the variable means that can be changed, and the variable means are changed to the first position based on the establishment of the first condition, and the variable means is changed to the first position based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. The gaming machine J1 is provided with a variable control means that can be changed to a second position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, a specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched by the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball can reach. A first ball entry means and a second ball entry means are provided at positions where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. The first privilege is given by the first privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. A second benefit that is different from the benefit of. The variable means allows the game ball that has reached a specific area to enter the first ball entry means, and the first position where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means is difficult to enter. It is configured to be at least variable to a second position where the ball can enter the second ball entry means. While the variable means is variable to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. It is variable to.

As a result, it is possible to make the ball entry means different so that the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the ball according to the variable position of the variable means. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance, and the variable means is the first ball entry means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it is arranged between the second ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance. The variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

This has the effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the variable means are separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable means has the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter any of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. , At least variably configured, the variable control means changes the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the first position. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it is variable from the third position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the two conditions.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the variable means is variably configured at the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The variable means is variable from the third position to the first position based on the condition of the first condition, while the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position based on the condition of the second condition. It is variable by variable control means.

As a result, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Therefore, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that is established.

In the gaming machine J3, the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entry means is the first ball entry means with respect to the specific area. The first position is provided in a second direction different from the direction, and the first position is a position where the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific region tends to be in the first direction. The second position is a position where the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific area. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the position tends to be different from any of the direction of the above and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, the second ball entry means is in the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. It is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the first direction, while when it is arranged at the second position, the game that has reached the specific area. The traveling direction of the sphere tends to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific region tends to be different from both the first direction and the second direction.

As a result, in the first direction and the second direction, it is less likely that the game ball that has reached the specific area advances in the state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration between the specific area and the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

In the game machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the first direction from the specific area is difficult to enter, and the second ball entry means. Is a gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is difficult for a gaming ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the second direction from the specific region to enter.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that it is difficult for a gaming ball traveling from a specific area to a traveling direction other than the first direction to enter the ball. , Since the second ball entry means is configured so that it is difficult for a gaming ball that has traveled from a specific area to a traveling direction other than the second direction to enter the ball, the game is played in a state where the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied. There is an effect that the ball can be suppressed from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first position is such that the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board and the second variable member is buried in the board. The second position is the second position. The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. The third position is the first variable member and the first variable member. The two variable members are arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the first variable member can guide the gaming ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. The second variable member constitutes a flow path capable of guiding a gaming ball that has reached the specific region to the second ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. A gaming machine J6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are played. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. In the first position, the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board surface, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. At the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. At the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are embedded in the board surface. By projecting the first variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific region to the first ball entry means is configured. By projecting the second variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific region to the second ball entry means is configured.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

In the gaming machine J6, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view, and the first ball entry means is The game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and the game ball arriving from the other direction is difficult to enter. 2 The ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The gaming machine J7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view. The first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter.

This has the effect of suppressing the game ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means in the state where the variable means is arranged at the third position.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the variable means from the third position to the third position based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J8 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times at one position or the second position.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6 or J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J8, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the third position to the first position during the execution of the variable game. A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege is a gaming machine J9 characterized in that it is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of variable games executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the variable game, and the variable means are in the third position. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is variable to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

As a result, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than the second variable game is executed. Therefore, the game is performed by paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determination means. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed the first number of times from the third position to the first position, and in the second variable game, the variable means is the first. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the second number of times is variable from the third position to the second position, which is less than the first number of times.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed the first number of times from the third position to the first position, while in the second variable game, it is variable. Since the means is variable from the third position to the second position a second number of times less than the first number, when the first variable game is executed, a first privilege that is more advantageous than the second privilege is given. In addition to being easy to do, the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position also increases. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view, and the variable The means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction in the front view between the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means, and the variable means is the first in the first position. The second position is a position close to the ball entry means, the variable means is a position close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is the position of the first position and the second position. The gaming machine J11 characterized by being in the middle position.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view. The variable means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction in the front view between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. When the variable means is placed in the first position, the variable means is close to the first ball entry means, while when the variable means is placed in the second position, the variable means is close to the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

As a result, the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means to the left or right, so that there is an effect that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms an inclination in the direction in which the left side surface descends from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, and the right side surface forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. In the first ball-entry means, a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball-entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction is difficult to enter. The second ball-entry means is such that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball-entry means can enter the ball and the game ball arrives from another direction. Is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball, and in the first position, the gaming ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means is on the side of the second entry means. It is possible to flow down so as to reach the first ball entry means from the direction, and in the second position, the gaming ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means is said to be the first. The gaming machine J12 is characterized in that it can flow down so as to reach the second ball entry means from the direction of the ball entry means side.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, and the → side surface of the variable means forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. .. The first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the first entry means from the direction of the second entry means side. It will be possible. When the variable means is arranged at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the second entry means from the direction of the first entry means side. It will be possible.

As a result, the game ball can be entered into both the first entry means and the second entry means by simply letting the game ball flow down along the inclination of the side surface of the variable means. Has the effect of being able to be simplified.

In the gaming machine J12, the third position has a distance of one game ball or more between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means, and the right end of the variable means. The gaming machine J13 is characterized in that a distance equal to or greater than the width of one gaming ball is provided between the second ball entry means and the gaming machine J13.

According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the width of one game ball between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means. Since the above distance is vacant and the distance between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means is at least the width of one gaming ball, the variable means is arranged at the third position. , There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the second entry means.

<Characteristic K group> (The period until the game ball that has reached a specific area enters the attacker is changed in the launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means, and a launching ball in the second direction. A game is provided to a specific area provided at a position where the game ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and the ball entry means. The privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering, the first position at which the ball can enter the ball entering means, and the first position different from the first position, and the ball entering means. Based on the fact that at least a variable means that can be changed to a second position that allows the ball to enter the ball and a third position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a predetermined specific condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period, and a second variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. A variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable by any of a plurality of variable movements including at least a plurality of variable movements is provided, and in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the first position is provided. A gaming ball launched in one direction and reaching the variable means has a shorter period of time to enter the ball entry means than a gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means. The gaming machine K1 characterized by being easy to become.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured so that the gaming ball can be launched at least in the first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter, and a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means. .. The first position that allows the ball to enter the ball entry means, the second position that is different from the first position and allows the ball to enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means become difficult. At least the variable means is variably configured at the third position. The first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period and the variable means are changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific conditions. The variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be changed by any of a plurality of variable movements including at least the second variable movement. In the state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the variable means enters the ball more than the game ball launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means. It is configured so that the period until the ball enters the means is likely to be shortened.

As a result, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game method of launching the game ball in the first direction to a player who wants to put the game ball into the ball entry means in a short period of time is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to let a player who does not want to immediately enter the game ball into the ball entry means select a game method of launching the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, it is difficult for the gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means variable to the first position and enter the ball entering means during the predetermined period. A gaming machine K2 characterized by a period of a certain length.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the variable means variable to the first position and enters the ball entering means for a predetermined period. Since it is composed of a period of length that makes it difficult to ball, when the variable means is changed to the first position, if the game ball is not launched in the first direction, the game ball becomes the entry means. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to realize the playability of launching the game ball in the first direction by predicting the timing of changing to the first position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means is launched in the first direction and said. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the game ball that has reached the variable means, and during the predetermined period, the game ball launched in the second direction is in the first position. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it is a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach the variable means and enter the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means is more likely than the game ball launched in the first direction and reached the variable means. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means tends to be shortened. The predetermined period is composed of a period of length in which it becomes difficult for the game ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means variable to the first position and enter the ball entry means. ..

As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that allows the player to quickly determine the launch direction that facilitates entry into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the variable by the variable control means based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminant means. A gaming machine K4 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result. Since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game executing means, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means. ..

In the game machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. When a state is set and the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed is from the first game state. The gaming machine K5 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, when the gaming ball enters the ball-entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the variable game is executed. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end, pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means. It is possible to play a game while the variable game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player for the variable game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game is the first. The variable game type determining means is provided, which is determined by the ratio of the above and the variable means determines the second variable game controlled by the second variable operation at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. The gaming machine K6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4 or K5, as a type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game. 1 The variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, while the second variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined at a ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction when the variable game is executed. .. That is, since it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the launch direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by using the ratio of the type determined by the variable game type determining means as a clue, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine K6, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the entry of a pachinko ball into the ball is provided, and the variable game executing means obtains the variable ball entering means during execution of the variable game. The number of times predetermined according to the type of the variable game is changed from the second state to the first state, and the first of the periods during which the variable ball-entry means is in the second state. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be variably operated by one variable operation or the second variable operation.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game executing means causes the variable control means to control the variable ball entry means so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game executing means causes the variable control means to control the variable means so that the variable means operates variably in the first variable operation or the second variable operation in the predetermined period of the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be entered into the variable entry means during the execution of the variable game, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable entry means is given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who could not enter the ball into the ball entry means from being discouraged.

In the gaming machine K7, in the first variable game, the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state more frequently during the variable game of 1 than in the second variable game. The gaming machine K8, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, in the first variable game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times the game is played increases, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that it will be the first variable game.

<Characteristic L group> (During the V round, the direction in which the V prize is likely to be won is predicted and the game ball is fired)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means, and a launching ball in the second direction. A specific area provided at a position where the pachinko ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern. A game ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied as a variable means capable of and a variable pattern set for the variable means. A first variable pattern is determined in which a gaming ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means, and a second condition different from the first condition is determined. Based on the establishment, the game ball launched in the second direction and reached the specific area enters the ball entry means rather than the game ball launched in the first direction and reaches the specific area. Based on the fact that the variable pattern determining means for determining the second variable pattern that facilitates ball formation and the first condition or the second condition are satisfied, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured so that the gaming ball can be launched at least in the first direction and in the second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. The variable means is configured to be capable of variable operation with a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, the first condition is higher than that of the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area by the variable pattern determining means based on the fact that the predetermined first condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the first variable pattern, which makes it easier for a game ball launched in a direction to reach a specific area to enter the ball entry means, is determined, while a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The second variable pattern is variable, which makes it easier for the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area to enter the ball entry means than the game ball launched in the first direction and reached the specific area. It is determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the fact that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the specific effect of the effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the production mode whether the variable means is variable by the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, so it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to enter the ball. It is possible to realize the playability of launching a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern allows a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied, and the first variable pattern is described. A gaming ball launched in the second direction during a specific period makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern is the second variable pattern for the specific period after the second condition is satisfied. In the meantime, the game ball launched in the first direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for at least the specific period.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, the game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the first condition is satisfied becomes Uto for the entry means and the specific period. In the meantime, the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied, and the second variable pattern is set. A game ball launched in two directions can enter the ball entry means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for at least a specific period.

As a result, it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to enter and to launch the game ball in the predicted direction during a specific period, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the gaming machines L1 or L2, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the variable determined by the variable pattern determining means based on the specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminant means. A gaming machine L3 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determining means is used based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition yields a specific discrimination result. Since a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means is executed by the variable game executing means in the determined variable pattern, the game is expected to have a specific discrimination result each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. It has the effect of being able to do.

In the game machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. When a state is set and the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed is from the first game state. The gaming machine L4 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, when the gaming ball enters the ball-entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the variable game is executed. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set as the game state after the end by the game state setting means, the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game. You can play the game by paying attention to whether or not you do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved while the variable game is being executed.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during the execution of the variable game is the first. The variable game type determining means for determining the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is provided at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A game machine L5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during the execution of the variable game as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means. 1 The variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, while the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the second ratio, it may make the player think that it is easier to enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction when the variable game is executed. can. That is, since it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the launch direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by using the ratio of the type determined by the variable game type determining means as a clue, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine L5, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the entry of a pachinko ball into the ball is provided, and the variable game executing means obtains the variable ball entering means during execution of the variable game. The variable means is variable by a variable operation that changes from the second state to the first state and a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game. A gaming machine L6 characterized by performing an operation.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable operation for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means. The variable operation in which the variable means is changed is executed by the variable game execution means.

As a result, even if the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable entry means is given. It has the effect of suppressing the discouragement of the player who could not get the ball into the ball.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on the avoidance means for avoiding this and the avoidance of the execution of the specific effect by the avoidance means, the information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is notified. A gaming machine L7 comprising: a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are played. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the avoidance means avoids the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. Based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect is avoided by the avoiding means, the notification effect executing means executes the notification effect for notifying the information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to specify the firing direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by executing the notification effect, so that the game can be performed in anticipation of the notification effect being executed. effective.

<Characteristic M group> (The attacker who can easily win a prize changes according to the movable position from the start to the end of the attacker's movement)
A game is performed in the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, the first position in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball becomes difficult to enter, and the variable means are determined from the second position to the first position based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The second ball entry means includes a variable control means for controlling the period to be variable, and the second ball entry means is described according to a variable position between the second position and the first position. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that the ease of entering a gaming ball that has reached a variable means is variable.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the first position where the game ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter into the first entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable. Based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. The ease of entering the game ball that has reached the variable means into the second entering means varies according to the variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

As a result, it is variable whether it is easy to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means according to the variable position of the variable means, so pay attention to the variable position of the variable means. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, the second ball-entry means reaches the variable means in a state where the specific range from the second position to the first position is variable. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that a ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the gaming ball that reaches the variable means in a state where the variable means changes a specific range from the second position to the first position. Is able to enter the second ball entry means, so that the game can be played by devising a way to make the game ball reach the variable means while the variable means is variable in a specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured in a range that does not include at least the first position, and the second ball entry means is the variable means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the gaming ball that has reached is difficult to enter.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured in a range not including at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range, the variable means Since it becomes difficult for the gaming ball that has reached to enter the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the timing of launching the gaming ball can be further devised.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means is the first ball entry means. With a first inclined member provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means and forming an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball entering means is provided. The first position is at least composed of a second inclined member that forms an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entering means is provided. The game ball that has reached the variable means is at a position where it is easy for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and it is difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the second inclined member. The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is at a position where it is difficult for the first inclined member and the second inclined member to flow down.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. A first tilting member that is provided between the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means and that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball-entry means is provided, and a first (2) At least the variable means is composed of a second inclined member forming an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the ball entering means is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the variable means tends to flow down the first inclined member, and it becomes difficult for the variable means to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means has a second. When arranged at the position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member.

As a result, the game ball can flow down to each entry means by the inclination formed by each inclination member, so that complicated control for guiding the game ball to each entry means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface, and the first position is on the front side of the first inclined member and the first inclined member. Both of the second inclined member provided in the machine are arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second position is the first inclined member and the second inclined member. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that both of the above and the above are buried in the board.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, both the first tilting member and the second tilting member provided on the front side of the first tilting member are on the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. It will be a protruding arrangement.

This has the effect that it is possible to change the ball entry means that allows the ball to enter by a simple control of causing the variable means to appear and disappear.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, as a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means, a first variable pattern in which the number of times of variable from the second position to the first position tends to increase is likely to occur. A variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variables including at least a second variable pattern in which the number of changes from the second position to the first position is likely to be smaller than that of the first variable pattern is provided. A gaming machine M6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means is often changed from the second position to the first position. 1 variable by a variable pattern determining means from a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern that tends to be and a second variable pattern that tends to change from the second position to the first position less frequently than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

In the gaming machine M6, the specific condition is determined during one execution period based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination by the discrimination means that results in a specific discrimination. A gaming machine M7 comprising: a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which a number of times is established.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the discrimination by the discriminant means executed based on the establishment of the discriminant condition yields a specific discriminant result during the execution period of 1. Since the variable game in which the specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. , There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M7, as the types of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific condition is satisfied, and a first variable game. A variable game type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M8 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M7, as a type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied. One type by the variable game type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied. Since the number of times the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry means is changed according to the type of the variable game, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable game.

In the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is characterized in that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the variable game of 1 is more likely to be smaller than that of the second variable game.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, in the first variable game, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the variable game of 1 is likely to be smaller than that in the second variable game. In this case, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being discouraged by the fact that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is small.

<Characteristic N group> (It is easier to win more prize balls in the open pattern where it is difficult to win the electric chew than in the open pattern where it is easy to win the electric chew during the electric support)
A ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and a ball-entry means that allows the game ball to enter the ball-entry means. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the first position to be, the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position, and the establishment of the predetermined first condition. As the variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable pattern for which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern thereof. Also includes a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that facilitates the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and the first variable. While the variable means is controlled by the pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern. Machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determining means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

As a result, the variable pattern expected by the player can be made different depending on whether the ease of satisfying the second condition is prioritized or the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means is prioritized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern has a larger number of times the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is the total of the periods during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern, as compared with the first variable pattern. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the variable means is changed to the first position more times from the start to the end of the variable pattern 1 than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern is longer than that of the first variable pattern.

This has the effect that it is possible to easily distinguish between the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern according to the number of times the pattern is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the gaming ball can enter the ball, and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. More than the predetermined privilege based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball is easily guided by the variable means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege, which is more than the predetermined privilege, is given by the second privilege granting means.

As a result, since the first variable pattern can be set to obtain more opportunities to acquire the second privilege, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the first variable pattern will be set. Can be done.

In the game machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means variably operates within the predetermined range. If so, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down to the variable means is in an area where it is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to a specific area. A specific area is configured so that a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means at least in a state where the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, it is possible to make the game play by devising to reach the variable means while the game ball is variably operating within a predetermined range, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entering means, and the first discriminating means by the first discriminating means. The second is based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above and the entry into the ball entry means. The variable control means is provided with a second discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, and the variable control means determines the variable pattern by assuming that the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means and the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable by a variable pattern determined by the means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game is based on the fact that the first discrimination means is executed by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The privileged game that is advantageous to the person is executed by the privileged game execution means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the entry into the ball entry means. The variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable pattern is variable according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means, assuming that the second determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, since the first determination is executed by entering the ball entering means, the game ball enters the ball entering means while the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the ball enters.

In the gaming machine N5, as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the first game state, and the privilege. The type of the award game is determined from a plurality of a plurality including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the game is completed is set to a second game state different from the first game state. A gaming machine N6 comprising a privilege game type determining means, wherein the first gaming state is less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the first game state, and after the execution of the privilege game is completed. The type of the privileged game is determined by the privileged game type determining means from among a plurality of the second privileged games in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The first gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination is less likely to result in the second discrimination than in the second gaming state.

This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means.

In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern has a larger number of times the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is the total of the periods during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern, as compared with the first variable pattern. The first game state is the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the determination ratio of is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the variable means is changed to the first position more times from the start to the end of the variable pattern 1 than the second variable pattern. In the first gaming state, the determination ratio of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means is higher than that in the second gaming state when the discrimination by the second determining means gives the second determination result.

As a result, in the first game state, the game ball enters the ball entry means relatively frequently, so that the first determination can be efficiently executed. Further, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first gaming state, the second condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable pattern.

In the gaming machine N7, a game in which a gaming ball can enter and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball is easily guided by the variable means, and a second ball having more than the predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above and the first discrimination by the first discriminating means when the gaming ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter and the gaming ball enters. The first direction is based on the specific ball-entry means in which the above is executed, the second discrimination result in the second gaming state, and the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determining means. It is provided with a suggestion effect executing means for executing a second direction suggestion effect suggesting that the game ball is launched in a second direction different from that of the ball entering means. A gaming machine N8 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege granting means grants a second privilege that is greater than the predetermined privilege. A specific ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and when the game ball enters, the first determination by the first determination means is executed. It is suggested that the game ball is launched in the second direction different from the first direction based on the second determination result in the second game state and the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means. The second-direction suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter.

As a result, when the first variable pattern is determined, there is an effect that the player can be surely given an opportunity to acquire the second privilege.

<Characteristic O group> (Navigation in the direction of electric support is generated at the time of unfavorable electric support opening pattern)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means can enter, and a gaming ball entering the ball entering means. Based on this, the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position, a variable control means that controls the variable means to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a variable control means thereof. As the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the above, a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. A variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from the variable patterns, and at least while the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control means, the gaming ball is launched in the specific direction. The gaming machine O1 is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine O1, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. The variable means is variably configured in a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. There is. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. 1 variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means from the variable patterns of. At least while the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first variable pattern, a suggestion effect suggesting the launch of the game ball in a specific direction is executed by the effect executing means.

This has the effect of giving the player the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine O1, the gaming ball enters the second entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and the second entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege based on a ball, a first gaming state in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first gaming state thereof. The effect executing means includes a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the second game state is the second game state. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means in the set state.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. From a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which a specific condition is likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means. Based on the fact that the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means in the state where the second gaming state is set, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, the launch direction of the game ball can be changed according to the game state, so that there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of striking the launch direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine O2, a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine O3 is characterized by comprising a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the above.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, a specific discrimination result is determined by the discrimination means executed based on the ball entering the ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Since the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the above, there is an effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained each time the determination by the determination means is executed.

In the game machine O3, the game state setting means sets one game state by assuming that the condition for ending the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is satisfied and the predetermined setting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine O4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O3, the game state 1 is set by the game state setting means, assuming that the predetermined setting condition is satisfied that the end condition of the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is satisfied. Is set, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the game state set after the end of the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range while changing from the second position to the first position, the number is larger than the predetermined privilege. 3 The gaming machine O5 characterized in that it forms a state in which benefits are easily given.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range while changing from the second position to the first position, it is predetermined. Since a state is formed in which a third score, which is more than the privilege of, is likely to be given, it is possible to play the game by devising to reach the variable means while the predetermined variable range is variable. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine O5, a position where the gaming ball can enter and the gaming ball that reaches the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means changes the predetermined movable range. It is characterized by being provided with a third ball entry means provided in the above, and a third privilege granting means for granting the third privilege based on the ball entering the third ball entry means. Pachinko machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third variable means capable of entering the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is changing a predetermined movable range. .. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, the third privilege is granted by the third privilege granting means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entry means.

In the game machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means variably operates the predetermined movable range. In this case, the flowing game ball is easily reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down to the variable means is in a region where it is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the game ball is variably operating in a predetermined movable range, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to a specific area by the variable means. In the specific area, at least the variable means is in a state where the game ball flowing down to the variable means is arranged in the first position or the second position while the variable means is arranged in the first position or the second position. It becomes difficult for the game ball that has flowed down to reach.

As a result, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the path of the game ball, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (Two members can be moved independently by one drive source)
A first variable means that can be changed to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a second variable means that can be changed to a third position and a fourth position different from the third position. By driving the first variable means from the first position to the second position by driving in the first direction from the specific reference position, the first variable means is changed from the specific reference position to the first direction. P1 is a gaming machine P1 comprising: a driving means for changing the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position by driving in different second directions.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like, such as an opening / closing plate for opening / closing a specific winning opening. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large opening openings that are opened when a lottery is won based on a starting prize are provided, and large opening openings that are opened according to the type of winning and the number of rounds are provided. By switching, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes complicated, so that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation for a plurality of variable members. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the first variable means is variably configured in the first position and the second position different from the first position. The second variable means is variably configured in the third position and the fourth position different from the third position. The first variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by driving the driving means in the first direction from a specific reference position as a starting point. On the other hand, the second variable means is changed from the third position to the fourth position by driving the driving means in a second direction different from the first direction from a specific reference position as a starting point.

As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means can be changed by the driving means, so that there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In the gaming machine P1, the driving means drives the first variable means from the second position to the first position by driving the first variable means in the second direction in a state where the first variable means is variable to the second position. The second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position by driving the second variable means in the first direction in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. A gaming machine P2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, when the driving means is driven in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Further, when the driving means is driven in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position.

As a result, the variable direction of each variable means can be switched by simply switching the drive direction of the drive means, so that there is an effect that the configuration of the drive means can be further simplified.

The gaming machine P2 includes variable suppression means for suppressing the second variable means from changing from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine P3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, it is variable that the second variable means is variable from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. Since it is suppressed by the suppressing means, there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In the gaming machine P3, the second variable suppressing means for suppressing the first variable means from changing from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the first variable means is variable from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. Since it is suppressed by the two variable suppressing means, there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means are provided, and the first position is the said. It is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, and the second position is easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. The third position is a position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position than the third position. 2. The gaming machine P5 characterized in that the gaming ball is easily entered into the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable means is in the first position, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the second position, while in the second position, the first ball is entered rather than the first position. A game ball can easily enter the means. When the second variable means is in the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the fourth position, while when the second variable means is in the fourth position, it is the third position than in the third position. 2 It becomes easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means.

As a result, the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball changes according to the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the driving means is composed of a motor that can be rotationally driven in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction. The gaming machine P6 is characterized in that the first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are played. That is, the driving means is composed of a motor that can be rotationally driven in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction. The first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

As a result, the movement of each variable means can be controlled only by switching the rotation direction of one motor, so that there is an effect that the configuration for changing each variable means can be simplified.

In the game machine P6, a first gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first variable means, a second gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second variable means, and the above. It comprises a first gear and a third gear that is meshed with the second gear and is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, wherein the driving means is at the particular reference position. While rotating in a first rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the first rotation direction with the starting point, mesh with the third gear and outside the first rotation range. It is configured so as not to mesh with the third gear while rotating, and the second gear is such that the driving means rotates in the second rotation direction with the specific reference position as a starting point. While rotating in a second rotation range that can be arranged while rotating, it meshes with the third gear, and while rotating outside the second rotation range, it engages with the third gear. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it is configured so as not to mesh with each other.

According to the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6. That is, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first variable means by the first gear. The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second variable means by the second gear. A third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor is configured to be meshable with the first gear and the second gear. While the drive means is rotating in a first rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the first rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the first gear and the third gear mesh with each other. The first gear is configured so that the first gear and the third gear do not mesh with each other while rotating outside the first rotation range. While the drive means is rotating in a second rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the second rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the second gear and the third gear mesh with each other. The second gear is configured so that the second gear and the third gear do not mesh with each other while rotating outside the second rotation range.

As a result, the first gear and the second gear can be driven only by the first third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, so that the configuration for varying each variable means can be further simplified. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the driving means drives the first variable means in the second direction in a state where the first variable means is variable to the second position, whereby the first variable means is driven by the second variable means. The second variable means is driven from the fourth position to the first position by changing the position from the position to the first position and driving the second variable means in the first direction in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. It is variable to three positions, and is variable to prevent the second variable means from changing from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. A suppressing means and a second variable suppressing means that suppresses the first variable means from changing from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. The first variable means is provided with a second driving means capable of varying the first variable means between the first position and the second position regardless of the variable position of the second variable means. The variable means is characterized in that it is variable by the second driving means while the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied, and is variable by the driving means while the specific conditions are not satisfied. Amusement machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are played. That is, the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position by driving the driving means in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position. Further, the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position by driving the driving means in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. While the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position, the variable suppression means suppresses the change of the second variable means from the third position. While the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position, it is suppressed by the second variable suppressing means that the first variable means is variable from the first position. Regardless of the variable position of the second variable means, the first variable means is changed between the first position and the second position by the second driving means. While the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable means is variable by the second driving means, while the first variable means is variable by the driving means while the specific condition is not satisfied. To.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom when moving the first variable means.

In the gaming machine P8, the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined first determination condition. The first variable means is variable for a predetermined period from the first position to the second position based on the first discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means for executing the above and the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The variable control means for controlling the slingshot, the second discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating means for discriminating by the second discriminating means. The first variable game execution means is provided with the variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the second variable means is changed from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the above. The position is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, and the second position is a position where the game ball enters the first ball entry means rather than the first position. The third position is a position where it is easier to enter the ball, the third position is a position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position. This is a position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means, and the variable control means is the second drive when the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game. When the first variable means is controlled to be variable by the means and the first determination result is obtained while the variable game is not executed, the first variable means is changed by the drive means. The gaming machine P9, which is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the predetermined first determination condition. Based on the result of the first determination in the determination by the first determination means, the first variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period. The discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. 2 The variable game in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means. When the first variable means is changed to the first position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, while when it is changed to the second position, it is more difficult than the first position. It becomes easy to enter the first ball entry means. When the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, while when the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, It is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. If the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game, the variable control means is controlled so that the first variable means is variable by the second driving means, while the variable game is not being executed. When the first determination result is obtained, the variable control means is controlled so that the first variable means is variable by the drive means.

As a result, the driving means for changing each variable means can be switched depending on whether or not the first variable means and the second variable means may move at the same time, so that the movable means is more preferable. It has the effect of being movable.

<Characteristic Q group> (There are a variable pattern that allows entry regardless of the launch direction and a variable pattern that has a different entry rate depending on the launch direction).
A launching means capable of launching a game ball with a first firing intensity and a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity, and a launching means launched by the launching means can enter. A first position where the ball means and the game ball fired at the first firing intensity and the second firing intensity are provided at least at a reachable position and can enter the ball entering means, and in front of the ball means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first variable pattern that sets a first variable pattern for the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. A second variable pattern setting that sets a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern for the variable means based on the establishment of the variable pattern setting means and the second condition different from the first condition. The first variable pattern comprises means, and the first variable pattern includes a game ball that has reached the variable means from a first direction in which a game ball launched at the first firing intensity is likely to advance, and the second firing intensity. The game ball that has reached the variable means from the second direction in which the game ball launched in the above is easy to advance can enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern is the first variable pattern. Compared to the variable pattern, the gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that a gaming ball that has reached the variable means from at least the second direction is less likely to enter the ball entering means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the launching means is configured so that the game ball can be launched at least with a first firing intensity and a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. It is difficult for the variable means to enter the ball entry means at the first position where the variable means can enter the ball entry means at least at the position where the game ball launched with the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity can reach, and the ball entry means. It is configured to be variable to the second position. A first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the first variable pattern setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. Based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, the second variable pattern setting means different from the first variable pattern is set for the variable means. When the first variable pattern is set, the game ball launched at the first firing intensity reaches the variable means from the first direction in which the game ball launched at the first firing intensity is likely to proceed, and the game ball launched at the second firing intensity becomes A game ball that has reached the variable means from the second direction, which is easy to move, can enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, the game ball that reaches the variable means from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the game ball that reaches the variable means from the second direction.

As a result, the firing intensity of the game ball can be made different depending on whether the first variable pattern is set or the second variable pattern is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine Q1, the ball-entry means is composed of at least a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means. In the variable means, as the first position, a first ball entry position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second ball entry position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. The first variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position during the first period, and is configured to be variable to the two ball entry positions. The variable pattern of the gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the variable means is a variable pattern that is variable to the second ball entry position in a second period different from the first period.

According to the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1. That is, the first position is variable between the first ball entry position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second ball entry position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. The means are configured to be variable. When the first variable pattern is set, the variable means is changed to the first ball entry position in the first period, while when the second variable pattern is set, the variable means is different from the first period. In the second period, it is changed to the second ball entry position.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the game ball will enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine Q2, at the second entry position, the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity is fired more than the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity. The gaming machine Q3, characterized in that the period from the time of entering the ball to the first ball entry means is likely to be shortened.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q2, when the variable means is changed to the second entry position, the first firing intensity is higher than that of the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity. When the variable means is changed to the second entry position, the launched game ball tends to have a shorter period from the launch of the game ball to the entry into the first entry means. In addition, there is an effect that the player can launch the gaming ball with the first firing intensity.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity and reaches the variable means is the second entry means. The period required to enter the ball is likely to be shorter than that of the second period, and the variable means is launched at the second launch intensity in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position. Q4 is a gaming machine characterized in that the period required for a gaming ball that has reached the variable means to enter the second entry means is likely to be longer than the second period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the period required for the game ball launched at the first firing intensity and reaching the variable means to enter the second entry means is required. , While it tends to be shorter than the second period, the period required for the game ball launched at the second firing intensity to reach the variable means to enter the second entry means is longer than the second period. Also tends to be long.

As a result, when the game ball is launched with the second firing intensity while the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the variable means is changed to the second position before entering the second entry means. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball will be launched, the game ball can be launched with the first firing intensity. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, a passing means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can pass, and a predetermined means based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball. The second variable pattern setting means includes a passage determination means for executing the determination of the above, and the second variable pattern setting means sets the second variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the passage determination means. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, a passing means is provided at least at a position where the gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can pass. A predetermined determination is executed by the passage determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means. The second variable pattern is set by the second variable pattern setting means based on the fact that the discrimination by the passage discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the passage discrimination means.

In the gaming machine Q5, based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied, the first gaming state that becomes the specific determination result is set with the first probability by the determination by the passage determination means, and the first setting is made. A gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that results in the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the condition, and a gaming state setting means thereof. It is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for urging the game ball to be launched with the first firing intensity based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means. Game machine Q6.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied, the game state setting means sets the first game state, which is the specific determination result with the first probability by the determination by the passage determination means, while the first game state is set. Based on the fact that the second setting condition different from the setting condition of 1 is satisfied, the game state setting means sets the second game state, which is a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. Will be done. Based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect for urging the game ball to be launched with the first firing intensity.

As a result, when the second game state is set, it is possible to perform a game method that makes it easy to enter the second ball entry means, so that the player can efficiently perform the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means and the discrimination by the discrimination means have resulted in the first discrimination result. Based on this, the gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that the variable means includes a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable in the first variable pattern a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entering means. Based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means, the variable game execution means executes the variable game in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times by the first variable pattern.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in the first discrimination result.

In any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first variable entry position is such that the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board and the second variable member is buried in the board. The ball entry position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member projects toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second position is the second position. The 1-variable member and the 2nd variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the 1st variable member is a first-entry-type gaming ball that reaches the variable means by projecting from the board surface. The second variable member constitutes a flow path that can be guided to the ball means, and the second variable member can guide the gaming ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. A gaming machine Q8 characterized in that it constitutes a flow path.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. When the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position, the first variable member projects toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second variable member is embedded in the board surface. When the variable means is variable to the second ball entry position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. When the variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface. By projecting the first variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the variable means to the first ball entry means is configured. By projecting the second variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path is formed in which the game ball that has reached the variable means can be guided to the second ball entry means.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

<Characteristic R group> (The degree of advantage changes according to the opening timing between the attacker and the electric chew)
A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first position on which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means. A first variable means that changes to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a third position thereof. The second variable means, which is variable to a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and the first variable means, are said to be the first from the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. The first variable control means that changes the first position to one position and the second variable means are changed for the second period from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the said. The state in which the second variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the fourth. The gaming machine R1 characterized in that the state of being variable to the position is one in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, the first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable means is configured to be variable. The second variable means is variably configured at a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. .. Based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition, the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the first variable control means for the first period. Based on the establishment of the predetermined second condition, the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means for the second period. The first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is the third position. The variable state and the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position are configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player.

As a result, the degree of advantage varies depending on the combination of the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so that there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable positions of each variable means.

In the gaming machine R1, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position. Moreover, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, rather than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the player has a higher degree of advantage to the player.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the first. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, rather than a state in which the second variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. Since the method has a high degree of advantage for the player, a novel playability that makes the player wish to avoid allowing both the first and second ball entry means to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to provide.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine R3 is variable and is characterized in that it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is the first variable means. Is variable to the second position, and it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the second variable means is variable to the third position, so that a novel operation can be realized. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is the first variable means. A game characterized in that the game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is the first. Since it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the state where the 1 variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, a novel operation is realized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. The gaming machine R4 is characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege more than the first privilege based on the entry of a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effects are played. That is, the first privilege is given by the first privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege, which is larger than the first privilege, is given by the second privilege granting means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine R4, the number of gaming balls that have entered the second ball entry means after the second variable control means has been changed to the third position by the second variable control means is a specific number or more. Based on this, the gaming machine R5 is provided with a third variable control means that changes the second variable means to the fourth position regardless of whether or not the second period has elapsed. ..

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R4, the gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry means after the second variable means has been changed to the third position by the second variable control means. Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the third variable control means regardless of whether or not the second period has elapsed based on the number of the number being equal to or more than the specific number, the game ball. Can prevent the ball from being excessively entered into the second ball entry means and the second privilege being given too much. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

In the gaming machine R5, the gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the first period is composed of a period having a length that allows a plurality of gaming balls to reach the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, the length of the first period is configured to be a length that allows a plurality of gaming balls to reach the first variable means. When the first period elapses with a plurality of gaming balls reaching the first variable means, a plurality of gaming balls can be entered into the second entry means at one time. Therefore, since the second privilege can be continuously acquired in a short period of time, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine R5 or R6 includes a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, and a first determining means for executing the first determination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the first variable. The control means is characterized in that the first variable means is variable to the first position, assuming that the first determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine R7.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R5 or R6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The first variable means is changed to the first position by the first variable control means, assuming that the first condition is satisfied by the discrimination by the first determination means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result by the first discrimination means and perform the game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R7, a second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination result by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. A game characterized by comprising a variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable control means. Machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R8, the second discrimination is performed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means. Based on the result, the variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable control means is executed by the variable game executing means. You can play the game by paying attention to the result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic S group> (The winning state of each winning opening is set regardless of the state of the other winning opening by the distribution member provided between the two winning openings).
A first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entry means, and a second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the above-mentioned first. A first position provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position. A first variable means that is variable to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, a game ball provided between the first entry means and the second entry means, and the second entry means has a game ball. A second variable means that changes to a third position where the ball can enter, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the first variable means, which are predetermined. The first variable control means that changes from the second position to the first position for the first period based on the satisfaction of one condition, and the second variable means are said to be the second variable means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second condition. A second variable control means that changes from a fourth position to the third position for a second period is provided, and the first condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means. The gaming machine S1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball is provided with a predetermined distance from the first entry means capable of entering the game ball. .. Between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. A first variable means configured to be variable is provided at the second position. In addition, between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the game ball enters from the third position. A second variable means configured variably is provided at a difficult fourth position. The first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for the first period by the first variable control means based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. The second variable means is variable for a second period from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means based on the establishment of the predetermined second condition. The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the state of the two variable means provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means, so that the first variable means and the second variable means mutually. Since it may be changed regardless of the arrangement of the above, there is an effect that the control can be simplified.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position. The second variable means is variable and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. The state is a gaming machine S3 characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means. Is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. However, since the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other, the game can be played by paying attention to the combination of the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S3, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the first variable means is variable to the first position. Moreover, the gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the second variable means is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the first variable means is the first variable means in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Both the first and second ball-entry means are configured to be variable to one position and more advantageous to the player than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the player expect the player not to be in a state where the ball can be entered.

In the gaming machine S4, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position. Further, the gaming machine S5 is characterized in that it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball-entry means than in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S4, the first variable means is the first variable means in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. Since the second variable means is configured to be more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the state where the second variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is the second. The game can be played with the expectation that the first condition will be satisfied while the position is variable to four positions. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S5, in a state where the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, the first variable means and the second variable means S6 is a gaming machine S6, which forms a holding region capable of holding the reached gaming ball without flowing down.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S5, the reached gaming ball is caused to flow down by the first variable means and the second variable means in a state where the first variable means is changed to the first position. Since a holding area that can be held without being formed is formed, a game ball can be entered depending on whether the first entry means becomes difficult to enter or the second entry means becomes difficult to enter. It is possible to change the means of entering the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the operation of each variable means.

In the gaming machine S6, the gaming ball enters the first privilege granting means and the second entering means, which grants the first privilege based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entering means. The gaming machine S7 is characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege less than the first privilege based on the above.

According to the gaming machine S7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S6. That is, the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, while the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Based on the above, the second privilege granting means grants a second privilege less than the first privilege.

This has the effect that when the game ball is held in the holding area, it can be expected that the second variable means is first changed to the fourth position.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a passing determining means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the first ball entering means. The second variable means is the second variable based on the fact that the ball entry discriminating means that executes the discrimination based on the ball entering the game ball and the discrimination by the ball entry discriminating means results in the first discrimination result. The first variable control means includes a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to the third position a predetermined number of times by the control means, and the first variable control means is determined by the passage determination means to obtain a second determination result. The gaming machine S8 is characterized in that the first variable means is changed to the first position based on the fact that the first variable means has been changed.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, the following effects are played. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, the determination by the passing determination means is executed. Discrimination by the ball entry discriminating means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. A variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable means is executed by the variable game executing means based on the determination result of the first determination result by the ball entry determination means. To. The first variable control means changes the first variable means to the first position based on the second determination result obtained by the discrimination by the passage determination means.

As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to the discriminant result by the passing discriminating means and the discriminating result by the ball entry discriminating means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic T group> (Move the distribution member provided between the two winning openings so that the winning states do not overlap)
A first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entry means, and a second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the above-mentioned first. A first traveling direction provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the traveling direction of the reached gaming ball is easily entered into the first ball entering means, and the second entering. Any of a plurality of directions including at least a second traveling direction in which it is easy to enter the ball means and a third traveling direction in which it is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The first state in which the distribution means for distributing in the traveling direction and the state of the distribution means are more likely to be distributed in the first traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period. The state of the first state setting means set to 1 and the state of the distribution means are set to the second state in which the reached game ball is more likely to be distributed in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the second period. The second state setting means for setting is provided, and the distribution means is suppressed from being set to the first state by the first state setting means at least while being set to the second state. A gaming machine T1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like, such as an opening / closing plate for opening / closing a specific winning opening. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large opening openings that are opened when a lottery is won based on a starting prize are provided, and large opening openings that are opened according to the type of winning and the number of rounds are provided. By switching, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes complicated, so that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation for a plurality of variable members. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball is provided at a predetermined distance from the first entry means capable of entering a game ball. There is. Between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the traveling direction of the reached game ball is the first traveling direction in which it is easy to enter the first ball entry means, and the ball enters the second ball entry means. A swing that distributes to one of a plurality of directions including at least a second traveling direction that is easy to enter and a third traveling direction that is difficult to enter into either the first entry means or the second entry means. Separation means are provided. While the state of the distribution means is set by the first state setting means to the second state in which the reached game ball is more likely to be distributed in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period. The second state setting means is set to the second state in which the reached game ball is easily distributed in the third traveling direction as well as in the second traveling direction during the second period. At least while the sorting means is set to the second state, the first state setting means suppresses the sorting means from being set to the first state.

This has the effect that the state of the sorting means can be suitably set.

The gaming machine T1 is characterized in that the distribution means is suppressed from being set to the second state by the second state setting means at least while being set to the first state. Pachinko machine T2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, the sorting means is set to the second state by the second state setting means at least while the sorting means is set to the first state. Since it is suppressed, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means can be set more preferably.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the distribution means has a first position in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a first position thereof. A first variable member that can be changed to a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than a position, and a game ball that can enter the second ball entry means and the first entry means. It is composed of at least a third position that makes it difficult to enter the ball means and a second variable member that can be changed to a fourth position that makes it difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, and the second state setting means The gaming machine T3, characterized in that the second variable member is variable from the fourth position to the third position during the second period.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means is composed of at least a first variable member and a second variable member. The first variable member is in the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and which makes it difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and in the first ball entry means rather than the first position. It is variably configured with a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball. The second variable member is at a third position where the game ball can enter the second entry means and is difficult to enter the first entry means, and at the second entry means rather than the third position. It is variably configured with a fourth position that makes it difficult to enter the ball. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, while the second state setting means changes the second variable member during the second period. Is variable from the 4th position to the 3rd position.

As a result, each state can be set by a relatively simple control of changing the variable member corresponding to the state, so that there is an effect that the processing load when switching the state can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the first ball entry means reaches the distribution means from the first direction at least when the distribution means is set to the first state. A game ball arriving from a second direction different from the first direction is easier to enter than a game ball, and at least the distribution means is said to be the second ball. When the two states are set, the game ball arriving from the first direction is easier to enter than the game ball arriving at the distribution means from the second direction. A gaming machine T4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the following effects are played. That is, at least when the distribution means is set to the first state, the ball arrives from the second direction different from the first direction than the game ball arriving at the distribution means from the first direction. The first ball entry means is configured so that the game ball is easier to enter. Further, at least when the distribution means is set to the second state, the second game ball arriving from the first direction is easier to enter than the game ball arriving from the second direction. The means of entering the ball is configured.

As a result, depending on the state of the distribution means, the player can adjust the direction of the game ball when reaching the distribution means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means according to the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine T4, the distribution means has a length from the first period until the game balls arriving from the second direction are distributed in the first traveling direction and reach the first ball entry means. Also, the length of the game ball arriving from the first direction until it is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entry means becomes longer than the second period. The gaming machine T5, which is configured to be easy to use.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T4, the length until the gaming ball arriving from the second direction is distributed in the first traveling direction and reaches the first ball entry means is the first period. In addition, the length of the game ball arriving from the first direction until it is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entry means is liable to be longer than in the second period. Since the distribution means is configured in, the case where the gaming ball reaches the distribution means from the second direction in the first state and the case where the game ball reaches the distribution means from the first direction in the second state. Then, it becomes difficult for the pachinko ball to enter each entry means. Therefore, since the direction of arrival of the game ball with respect to the distribution means can be adjusted more seriously to the player according to the state of the distribution means, the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. There is.

In the gaming machine T5, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privileged game execution for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminating means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the means and the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first state setting means includes a type determining means for determining the type, and the first state setting means sets the distribution means to the first state based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means. The second state setting means is characterized in that the distribution means is set to the second state based on the determination of the second privilege game by the type determination means. Gaming machine T6.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific determination result. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. Is determined. Based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the distribution means is set to the first state by the first state setting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the distribution means is set to the second state by the second state setting means.

As a result, the direction of arrival of the game ball with respect to the distribution means for allowing the game ball to enter any of the ball entry means can be changed according to the type of the privilege game. It is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by selecting a corresponding arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T6, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, the game ball enters either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game. Based on this, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set, and the gaming ball does not enter either the first entry means or the second entry means during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine T7 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T6, a first gaming state advantageous for the player is set by allowing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed, the state set for the distribution means can be predicted more seriously, and the game can be performed so as to be in the corresponding arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine T6 or T7 includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a launching means that can launch the game ball into the gaming area with a firing intensity according to the operation content for the operating means. The period until the launched game ball reaches the distribution means from the first direction and enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from the second direction until the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the second ball entering means is from the second period. The gaming machine T8, which is characterized by being easily shortened.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine T6 or T7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means with the firing intensity according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. The period from the first direction until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from the second direction until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the second entering means tends to be shorter than the second period.

As a result, when the game ball is launched after the distribution means is set to the first state or the second state, the game ball enters the corresponding ball entry means regardless of the arrival direction of the game ball with respect to the distribution means. Since the ball is impossible, it is possible to realize the game property of launching the game ball by selecting the direction to reach the distribution means before being set to the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine fuses a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
640L Left second ball entry port (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
640La electric accessory (first variable means, second variable means)
650Ra Right specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Rb movable member (first variable means, second variable means)
S542 1st variable control means, 2nd variable control means S1021 1st variable control means, 2nd variable control means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them are aimed at improving the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 25144417

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the player may end up with a task of simply continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction aiming at the big winning opening while the hit state is reached. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in playing games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter and a predetermined distance from the first entry means. A second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, the first ball-entry means, and the second ball-entry means are provided, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A first variable means that changes to a first position, a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A second position that is provided between the two and is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The variable means, the first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and the second variable. The means is provided with a second variable control means that changes the means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, and the first condition is the second condition. It can be established regardless of the arrangement of the variable means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter and the first ball-entry means are provided at a predetermined distance from each other, and the game ball enters the ball. A first position provided between the possible second entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means, and the game ball can enter the first entry means. A first variable means that changes to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and between the first entry means and the second entry means. Further, a second variable means that is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the above-mentioned. The first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for the first period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined first condition, and the second variable means are predetermined. A second variable control means that changes from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of the second condition is provided, and the first condition is the arrangement of the second variable means. It can be established regardless.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three symbol display devices in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of failure of transformation in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the transition effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the time-dependent change of the effect mode of the development effect. It is a figure. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the time course of the effect mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern table for jackpot. It is the figure which showed, (c) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is a figure shown schematically. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the development effect mode selection table in the first embodiment. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transformation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transformation effect start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a valid period to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the success notification mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the failure notification mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during transition effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the numerical command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the time course of the effect mode when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect with the maximum number of transformations of 4 is set is executed in the second embodiment. Is. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the transformation effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp control in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the apparatus, (c) is the definition of the period selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the contents schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 2 during the valid period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process during the display period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the development effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the development effect mode selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the transformation possibility determination table set in the ROM of a control device, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the defined content of the push tendency table in 4th Embodiment (c). d) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 4 during the valid period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the search effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (A) is an effect when the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed while the player who is determined to have a low participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time-dependent change of an aspect schematically, and (b) is a state which the player who was determined to have a high participation frequency to a continuous transformation effect in 5th Embodiment is playing a game. It is a figure which schematically showed an example of the time-dependent change of the effect mode when the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the number of valid periods set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transformation effect start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the flowchart in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process 5 during the valid period executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which showed the transformation setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the processing in the notification mode executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the transition effect | process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing tendency update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed an example of the time-dependent change of the effect mode of the transition effect in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a case where the left specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is in a state where the ball can be entered, and (b) is a front perspective view showing the case where the right specific winning opening in the sixth embodiment is entered. It is a front perspective view which showed the case where the ball is possible. (A) is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Rb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. , (C) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is arranged at a protruding position. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table, and (b) is the main control in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the moving member in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (c) is the sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of the modification, and (d) is the front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member and the left specific winning opening are close to each other in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow direction of a game ball in a state where a moving member and a right specific winning opening are close to each other. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the probability variation winning device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation winning device in the XCIV-XCIV line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player strikes left, and (b) and (c) are views. In the seventh embodiment, the opening pattern of the right V is determined, and it is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball when the player hits right. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect executed in the 1st round of a jackpot in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the right V opening pattern is set in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the time change of the left V in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern is set. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the closing command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a front view of the movable member according to the eighth embodiment. It is a side view when viewed from the left side of the front view. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at an intermediate position, and (b) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged in a protruding position. It is a front perspective view which showed the state. (A) is a figure showing the time-dependent change of the movable position when the movable member in the eighth embodiment is moved by the movable pattern A, and (b) is the figure which showed the time-dependent change in the movable member in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern B. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position when it was moved by. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed the structure of the rotating member in the modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. FIGS. (A) to (C) are views showing the flow path of the game ball hit to the right in the ninth embodiment for each movable position of the electric accessory. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a second type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an electric accessory operation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the detour accessory in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in eleventh embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being done. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the time course of the state of the right specific winning opening when the opening pattern capable of V winning is set in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the change with time of the right specific winning opening. In the embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the time-dependent change of the state of the right specific winning opening in the case where the opening pattern which is difficult to win V is set. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which showed the state of the opening / closing door in 1 opening period in the case where the opening pattern which can win V is set in more detail. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device at the start of 1 round of a jackpot where a V winning open pattern is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the probability variation winning apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the state of the movable member, and each flow path distribution valve in the big hit game in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the modification of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of each movable member in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the positive direction in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a top view of each movable member when the drive motor is driven in the negative direction in the modification of. It is a front view of the game board in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the game ball in the case of the protruding overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is movable first after the protruding overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the traveling direction of a game ball when a member is moved to an immersive position, and (c) is the figure which the electric accessory is moved to the immersive position first after the protrusion overlap state in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the traveling direction of a game ball in the case of. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the right-handed navigation effect executed during the jackpot interval period in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the right-handed navigation effect during the jackpot round period in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the storage effect which is executed when the protrusion overlap state by hitting a normal symbol. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the effect mode during execution of the jackpot game in the twelfth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an effect update process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot middle processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure opening command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a state command process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball during the jackpot round period in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball during the hit period of the normal symbol in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball of. (A) is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball when only the electric accessory is arranged in the protruding position in the 2nd modification of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the 12th. In the second modification of the embodiment, it is a figure which showed the flow direction of the game ball in the case of the protruding overlap state.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "sandy beach stage" → "deep sea stage" "→" Sandy beach stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower plate 50 in front view. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. A lottery for the design) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, waits for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won a prize. ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, the hit / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. It will be easy. That is, when it hits a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the first entry port 64, and as a result, a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is "big hit A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit of the special symbol. On the other hand, after the end of "Big Hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times as an added value.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time reduction state" (during the normal symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not the "normal state of the normal symbol" is called the "normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state (the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time reduction).

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the "high probability state of the special symbol" is obtained after the end of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot. It is changing whether it becomes "normal symbol time saving state". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol time reduction state" may be obtained may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is lengthened, or the number of times for opening the electric accessory 64a per hit of the normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the change is not executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Will be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is composed of 10 types of special symbols that imitate the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbol composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "probability variation symbol". When "big hit A", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot, occurs, the same combination of probability variation symbols may be stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbol composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "normal symbol". When "big hit B", which is a 16R normal big hit, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always displayed as a stop. Further, even in a part of the case where "Big hit A" is obtained, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be expected that the jackpot A has been achieved.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. This small display area Dm4 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is urged to be pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, the effect can be displayed in a larger main display area Dm to provide a more understandable effect. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a numerical value.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous transformation effect, which is one of the display effects in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a reach state occurs during the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the reach state refers to a state in which the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 are stopped and displayed with the main symbol having the same number, and only the middle symbol column Z2 is in the variable display. In the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical symbols are aligned, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. Can be done.

The continuous transformation effect is an effect performed to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit after the reach state occurs, and the details will be described later, but the boy's displayed in the main display area Dm. Character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (n is a natural number of 1 or more) according to the passage of time or the operation (pressing) of the player's frame button 22 (the mode is changed). It is a production. In this continuous transformation effect, basically, the higher the number of transformations of the character 811, the higher the expectation that the character 811 will be a big hit, and the character 811 may be transformed five times at the maximum.

The maximum number of transformations (effect type of the continuous transformation effect) in the continuous transformation effect of 1 is determined in advance before the start of the continuous transformation effect. More specifically, any number of 1 to 5 times is determined by a lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A) described later. This continuous transformation effect ends when the transformation of the predetermined upper limit number of times is successful, or when the effect time specified for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect is reached before reaching the upper limit number of times. To. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. That is, the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the production type of the continuous transformation effect, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the maximum number of transformations can be determined before the continuous transformation effect is started. Just do it. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the previous jackpot. If the upper limit is increased as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel the merit of continuing to be out of the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol lottery can be performed many times in a row. Even if a state of continuous disengagement (so-called addiction) occurs, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. In addition, if the upper limit is increased as the number of fluctuations is smaller, if the jackpot is won at short intervals (so-called consecutive villa state), there are merits other than winning the prize ball. Because it can be done, the player can be more entertained. Further, if the upper limit number of times is increased in a specific range (for example, the number of fluctuations is in the range of 100 to 200), the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the transformation development mode indicating that the continuous transformation effect is started (developed into the continuous transformation effect) is displayed. be. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, the boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and the horizontally long rectangular display area is displayed above the character 811. HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, the characters "continuous transformation chance" and the characters "expectation increases as the number of transformations increases!" Are displayed. The "continuous transformation chance" is a production name indicating a continuous transformation effect. These characters displayed in the display area HR1 make it easy for the player to understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation effect) is started. This transformation development mode is continuously displayed for 1 second, and after 1 second, the continuous transformation effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 for simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol is formed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm. Will be done. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display is continued. This simple display of the third symbol continues during the continuous transformation effect and the subsequent development effect.

In the continuous transformation effect set after the display time of the transformation development mode has elapsed, an effect urging the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) to be pressed is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR2 is displayed on the left side of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and a frame button 22 is imitated inside the display area HR2. The image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Further, below the PUSH button PB inside the display area HR2, a scroll bar SB with diagonal lines whose length becomes shorter with the passage of time is displayed. This scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period in which the operation for the frame button 22 is valid. In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is set to 5 seconds, so that the scroll bar SB has a length of 0 over 5 seconds after the operation valid period is started. By displaying the scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the operation valid period.

In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the end of the operation valid period is displayed (suggested) by the length of the scroll bar SB, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a numerical value as it is, and the countdown may be performed according to the passage of time so that the remaining operation valid period can be recognized by the player. Further, for example, the coloring of the PUSH button PB imitating the frame button 22 may be changed according to the remaining operation validity period to suggest the remaining time to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. It is displayed in green, and if the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in yellow, and if the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the PUSH button PB is displayed. If the color is displayed in orange and the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in red. Further, it is not always necessary to indicate to the player the remaining time until the operation valid period ends. By omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the operation valid period, the display control can be simplified, so that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the display area HR2, a balloon-type display area HR3 with the characters "Transformed by PUSH!" Is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 811. Depending on the display contents of the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, the player is made to recognize that the character 811 may be transformed (the aspect of the character 811 is changed) by pressing the frame button 22. Can be done.

Further, on the lower right side of the display area HR3, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR4 for showing the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in this continuous transformation effect is formed. In this display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the characters "transformation x 0" are displayed. This character will be updated according to the number of successful transformations. Specifically, if the character 811 succeeds in transformation once, it is updated to the character "transformation x 1", and if it succeeds in transformation twice, it is updated to the character "transformation x 2". Similarly, when the number of transformations is 3, the characters are updated to "transformation x 3", and when the number of transformations is 4, the characters are updated to "transformation x 4 times". When the number of times becomes 5, it is updated to the character "transformation x 5 times". By confirming the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect of this time.

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation valid period and the character 811 succeeds in transformation. be. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the operation valid period, the display area HR2 is changed to the appearance as if the PUSH button PB is pushed, and the operation valid period ends. .. Further, the aspect of the character 811 is changed to, for example, an aspect imitating an adventurer possessing a sword and a shield. Further, in the display area HR4, 1 is added to the character indicating the number of transformations and the character is updated. FIG. 6A exemplifies the case where the update is made to “transformation × 1”. The mode of notifying the success of this transformation (success notification mode) continues for 1 second, and after the success notification mode is completed, the operation validity period is set again. After that, the operation valid period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of transformations reaches the upper limit or the effect period elapses.

On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player does not press the frame button 22 within the set valid period and the transformation is successful. As shown in FIG. 6B, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached, and the production time remains for a predetermined period or longer (the remaining fluctuation time is predetermined). If it is determined that the time is equal to or greater than the lower limit time), the success notification mode is executed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the effect type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

Even if the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation valid period has elapsed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the remaining fluctuation time has not been reached. If it is equal to or longer than the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, when all the transformations are executed with the elapse of the operation valid period, the effect period elapses before the upper limit number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set so that it becomes. In other words, the operation valid period is set so that the sum of the operation valid periods for the maximum number of times (and the effect period of the success notification mode for the maximum number of times) is longer than the effect period for the continuous transformation effect.

With this configuration, in each operation valid period set in 1 continuous transformation effect, if the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses by pressing the frame button 22, the effect type It becomes impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each. Further, the shorter the period from the start of the operation valid period until the frame button 22 is pressed, the earlier the start timing of the operation valid period set after that can be accelerated, so that the number of feasible transformations can be determined. , Can be increased within the range of the upper limit. Therefore, the player who wants to perform the transformation of the upper limit number of times (desiring to perform as many transformations as possible) can positively press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example in which the success notification mode is transformed into a mode different from that of the adventurer. In the example of FIG. 7A, the case where the character 811 is transformed into a mode imitating a gunman is illustrated when the number of transformations is the third time. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes according to the number of transformations are prepared, such as a mode imitating this gunman and a mode imitating the adventurer described above.

In the first embodiment, the mode when the transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of transformations, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like each time the success notification mode is performed. As a result, the variation of the continuous transformation effect can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the continuous transformation effect can be improved. In addition, when the mode of the success notification mode is determined by lottery or the like, it is easy to determine the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display that is the big hit of the special symbol, or in the case of the variable display that is the big hit of the special symbol. It may be configured to provide an aspect, an aspect that can be easily determined in the case of a variable display that is out of the special symbol, and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to perform the game during the continuous transformation effect by paying attention not only to the number of transformations but also to the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the transformation fails, the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed in a manner of being split in two, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. Further, on the upper right side of the character 811 is a display area HR5 in which the characters "End ..." are displayed. By these displays, it is possible to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has ended (the number of transformations has been determined).

In the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process shifts to the development effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. A plurality of types of development effects are provided, and one type of development effects is selected and executed according to the remaining fluctuation time and the success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol this time. The details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B.

First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a display mode of a transition effect showing a transition from a continuous transformation effect to a development effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image in which the character 811 and the monster 812 are glaring at each other is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an image is displayed between the character 811 and the monster 812. The display area HR6 with the characters "VS" is displayed. In addition, the characters "defeat the enemy !!" are displayed in the display area HR1. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the character 811 becomes a big hit by defeating the enemy (that is, the monster 812).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. In this display area, one or a plurality of stars indicating the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed after the end of the transition effect is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two stars are displayed. The number of these stars is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect. Although not shown, the aspect of the monster 812 is also changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). That is, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the appearance of the monster 812 (that is, the appearance that the character 811 is likely to win), and the smaller the number of stars, the stronger the appearance of the monster 812 (that is, the more likely it is that the character 811 will win). That is, the character 811 is displayed with an appearance that makes it easy to win. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the impression that the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the subsequent development effect are linked. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) in the continuous transformation effect suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit.

In this transition effect and the above-mentioned failure notification mode (see FIG. 7B), the length of the display period is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is the last time since the continuous transformation effect is started, while the effect period of each development effect is fixed (any of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds). This is because the period required for the operation valid period to end is variable according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining fluctuation time is determined at the timing when the operation valid period ends (that is, the start timing of the failure notification mode), and the development effect of the longest effect period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. do. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the period of difference between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, the variation in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, so that the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort. It should be noted that the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A is shown during the period in which the transition effect is set so that the switching to the development effect does not become unnatural no matter how many seconds the effect time of the transition effect is set. On the other hand, it is configured so that a large change in mode does not occur. That is, the image illustrated in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the change is limited to the extent that the character 811 and the character 812 periodically raise and lower their shoulders in accordance with their own breathing and the like ( No special action is taken). As a result, the display mode when switching to the development effect can be made the same regardless of the execution period of the transition effect, so that the player feels uncomfortable when switching from the transition effect to the development effect. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, changes over time in the production mode of the development effect will be described. Here, in the first embodiment, 12 types of hit development effects A to F and off-development development effects A to F are provided as development effects. Both the hit and miss development effects A are display effects with an effect period of 30 seconds, and the hit and miss development effects B are both display effects with an effect period of 33 seconds. Similarly, the hit and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects for the effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect of the longest effect period is selected within the range not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first embodiment, the data of the display effect (base effect) which is the basis for executing the development effect is prepared. This original display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds, and the corresponding effect is achieved by executing the effect from the beginning or in the middle of this original display effect (base effect). It is configured to be feasible for the development of the period. That is, the development effect is not prepared as a separate effect for each effect period, but is configured to generate the development effect data for each display period using the data of the base effect of 1. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data for executing the development effect, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the character 811 is zoomed in for the first 3 seconds of the base effect. Then, in the next 3 seconds, the effect that the character 811 attacks the monster 812 is executed. Next, the display mode in which the enemy monster 812 is zoomed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then the display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, after displaying the display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoomed for 3 seconds, the character 811 and the monster 812 fight each other violently, and the battle is won or lost. The effect of notifying (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. As described above, the base effect is roughly divided into five display modes for 3 seconds and one display mode for 30 seconds. By starting the display effect from the delimiter position of any of these display modes, the development effect can be displayed without discomfort.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the hit and miss development effect A is executed, the display mode for 30 seconds after the lapse of 15 seconds in the base effect is displayed. A development production with a production period of 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, when the hit and miss development effect B is executed, the display mode for 33 seconds after the lapse of 12 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect C is executed, the base is displayed. The display mode for 36 seconds after the lapse of 9 seconds in the production is displayed. Further, when the hit and miss development effect D is executed, the display mode for 39 seconds after the lapse of 6 seconds in the base effect is displayed, and when the hit and miss development effect E is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after the lapse of 3 seconds in is displayed. On the other hand, when the hit and miss development effects F are executed, the development effects for 45 seconds are executed by displaying the base effects from the beginning to the end.

In addition to the above-mentioned monster 812 battle mode, a plurality of display effects are prepared for the base effect. It is decided by lottery which display effect is used as the basis for executing the development effect. In addition, each of the original display effects is prepared with a mode for a big hit and a mode for a miss.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base effect can be diverted even after the continuous transformation effect is executed. That is, after the reach state occurs, it is possible to notify whether or not it will be a big hit by executing the base effect directly or through another notice effect without going through the continuous transformation effect. .. As a result, the versatility of the base effect can be increased, and the data required to execute the effect can be reduced. Further, even when the base effect is executed without going through the continuous transformation effect, the effect can be executed from the beginning or the middle of the base effect according to the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect using the base effect even for the variable display of different variable times.

As described above, in the first embodiment, a base effect for displaying the development effect is prepared, and the number of places where the effect is well separated is set in the base effect for the number of the development effect. Each division point is set so that the remaining production time matches the production time of each development production. As a result, it is possible to provide a display effect having a natural appearance over the effect time of each development effect. Further, by configuring a plurality of development effects having different production times from the original one production mode so as to be feasible, as compared with the case where different production data are prepared for each type (production time) of the development production. , It is possible to reduce the data required to display each development effect. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of development effects having different production times can be executed based on the base effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display effect having a completely different display mode may be executed according to the effect time of the development effect. With such a configuration, the development and production can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the change over time in the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, a case where a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is 3 times is set will be described as an example. First, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a timekeeping change of the effect mode when the player never presses the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variation effect (super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds. In the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the variation (see FIG. 4B). Then, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach state is generated and the transformation development mode (see FIG. 5A) that suggests to the player that the continuous transformation effect is developed is over 1 second. Is displayed.

When the display period of the transformation development effect has elapsed, the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation is set. If the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation valid period continues for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation). Then, when the operation valid period has elapsed, the first success notification mode is displayed. This success notification mode continues for 1 second, and when 1 second elapses (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the success notification mode ends and the operation validity period corresponding to the second transformation is set. To. This second operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (over 17 to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation) if the frame button 22 is not pressed. Then, after the success notification mode for 1 second is set, the third operation valid period is set. This third operation valid period also continues for 5 seconds (over 23 to 28 seconds after the start of fluctuation) if the frame button 22 is not operated. Then, at the timing of 28 seconds (the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) after the fluctuation start when the operation valid period ends, the remaining fluctuation time is small (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds set as the lower limit value). ), And even if the upper limit of the number of transformations has not been reached, the failure notification mode for 1 second is set. That is, even though the upper limit of the number of transformations is set to 3, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of transformations is 2.

The conditions for determining whether or not there is sufficient effect time remaining to set the success notification mode are defined by the transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15A), which will be described later. Specifically, the lower limit (threshold value) of the remaining fluctuation time in which the success notification mode can be set is defined according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the production type of the continuous transformation effect). There is. If the operation valid period ends with the remaining fluctuation time exceeding the lower limit, the success notification mode is set on condition that the upper limit of the number of transformations has not been reached. On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends after the remaining fluctuation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether or not the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is 3 is set, and the time lapse of the effect mode when the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Explain the changes.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the player's pressing on the frame button 22 is detected at the time when 1 second has elapsed (12 seconds after the start of fluctuation) in the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation, The operation validity period is terminated, and the first success notification mode is displayed. When 1 second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, the operation valid period corresponding to the second transformation is set (at the time of 13 seconds from the start of the fluctuation). In this second operation valid period, if the press on the frame button 22 is detected again when 1 second has elapsed (14 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the operation valid period is similarly terminated and the second operation is valid. The success notification mode of is displayed. Then, when 1 second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses (15 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the third operation valid period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the third operation valid period (17 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the remaining fluctuation time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, the third success notification mode is displayed. After that, when the display period of the third success notification mode has elapsed, the fourth operation valid period is set. If the press on the frame button 22 is detected again when 2 seconds have elapsed (20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) in this fourth operation valid period, the upper limit of the number of transformations of this continuous transformation effect has already been set. Since it has already been executed, the failure notification mode is set.

The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition effect after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect. As described above, as the type of development effect, the type of the longest effect time is selected within the range not exceeding the remaining fluctuation time. When the remaining fluctuation time is 40 seconds, a maximum of 38 seconds can be used for the development effect by adding the failure notification mode and the shortest display period of the transition effect of 2 seconds. However, as described above, as the production time of the development effect, only 6 types of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds are prepared. Therefore, the development effect (development effect C) for 36 seconds, which has a shorter effect period than 38 seconds, is set as the development effect this time. Then, 4 seconds, which is the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds and the effect period of the development effect C of 36 seconds, is set as the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect. Specifically, 4 seconds are equally divided, and 2 seconds are set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

In this way, by absorbing the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development production by the display period of the failure notification mode and the production period of the transition production, the variation of the production time of the development production is made. Even if the number is small, the timing of the fluctuation stop and the timing of the end of the development effect can be surely matched. As a result, the variation in the production time of the development effect can be reduced, so that the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect can be reduced. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the start timing of the failure notification mode is reached with the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds, 2 seconds each is set as the display time of the failure notification mode and the transition effect. .. Then, after the transition effect is completed, the development effect C having an effect time of 36 seconds is executed. As a result, the timing at which the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) and the end timing of the development effect can be exactly matched.

In this way, by the player positively pressing the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be shortened and more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In the present embodiment, by varying the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect, the gap between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect can be absorbed. , Not limited to this. For example, the effect period of the failure notification mode may be fixed and only the display time of the transition effect may be changed, or conversely, only the effect period of the failure notification mode may be changed. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and a part of the effect period of the development effect (for example, the period in which the third symbol is definitely displayed) may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or changes by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As the stop symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is used only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (as in the case of the first ball entry port 64). For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches with, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11 (b)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is specified in association with each other. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5-204" is defined as the determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entry ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the probabilistic state of the special symbol, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9", and "0 to 9". If it is any of 9 ”, it is determined that it is a big hit. The first hit random number counter C1 has 400 possible values of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that becomes a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first, there is only one judgment value of "200" that is a big hit, so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A" (FIG. 11). (B) See 202b1). Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 11 (c)). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (d). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12 (c)). ) And the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12 (d)) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (b). FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 12 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2. The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the out-of-reach, various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds) are in the range where the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", and various out-of-range super reach are in the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3. The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is out of order in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-bounds reach (front-back out-of-front reach, non-front-back out-of-reach reach) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the value returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer is interrupted, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (of a normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28" (FIG. 11 (c). ) 202c1). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the opening of the first ball entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 28) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation flag. It has at least 203e and a time-saving / medium-time counter 203f.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. It is (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is made. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. It should be noted that the various information corresponds to whether or not the information is correct, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S603: No in FIG. 27).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability change flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probabilistic state, and if the value of the probabilistic flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability change flag 203e is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot A of the special symbol (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, it is set to off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 23).

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for the high probability time, while the probability variation flag 203e state. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110, and each time a jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f and the state of the probability-changing flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability-changing flag 203e is ON. If so, it is determined that the time is shortened for a normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined to be the normal state of the normal symbol, and based on the second random number table for low probability time, A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is connected to various commands and controls via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and a development effect mode selection table 222c.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify a detailed display mode of the variation effect based on a rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main control device 110. Be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation) from the variation patterns specified in the variation pattern table 222a is received. (Detailed display mode of the effect) is extracted (specified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Among the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7) for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the super reach having a fluctuation time of at least 60 seconds. It also contains information to indicate.

The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table referred to for determining the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when the variation pattern accompanied by the continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. The details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a).

FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the transformation effect selection table 222b, the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect is defined for each type (whether or not) of the fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. There is. As shown in FIG. 15A, five types of continuous transformation effects A to E are set as the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect.

The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is one, and the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is not set. Therefore, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, the failure notification mode is displayed once after the success notification mode is displayed, regardless of whether or not the player presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15A, the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of hit super reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is “0”. .. That is, if the maximum number of transformations is one, it is determined that the continuous transformation effect A will be a big hit in the set variable display. As described above, in the continuous transformation effect, basically, the higher the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed), the higher the expectation of the jackpot, but in the case of the continuous transformation effect A (when the maximum number is 1). Only, the jackpot is exceptionally fixed. This makes it possible to provide an unexpected effect.

The continuous transformation effect B is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is two, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "1 to 19". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 44". Since the effect counter 223n is a loop counter updated in the range of "0 to 99", the continuous transformation effect B has a ratio of 19% (19/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of the out-of-order super reach where the continuous transformation effect is determined. For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect B is determined is higher in the out-of-order super reach (the expectation of a big hit is lower).

Further, in the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect starts at the time when the remaining fluctuation time is 49 seconds (when 11 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the second operation valid period is suppressed within 8 seconds (49 seconds-41 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions is stopped once. That is, if the operation valid period set for the first and second operations is not terminated in the middle by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time that can be transformed in the middle of the second operation valid period is set. It will be below. As a result, if the operation valid period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation effect B is set, probably because the continuous transformation effect A is set and the number of transformations is one. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether the number of transformations is one. As described above, the continuous transformation effect A is an effect in which the jackpot is fixed, while the continuous transformation effect B is an effect in which the expectation of the jackpot is low. Therefore, by distinguishing whether it is the continuous transformation effect A or the continuous transformation effect B, the expected degree of the jackpot can be accurately known. Therefore, during the operation valid period, the frame button is positively given to the player. 22 can be pressed.

The continuous transformation effect C is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 3 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "20 to 44". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect C is determined at a rate of 25% (25/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 45 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (45/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect C is determined is higher in the out-of-order super reach (the expectation of a big hit is low). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the hit super reach is higher than that of the continuous transformation effect B, the expectation that the continuous transformation effect C will be a big hit is higher than that of the continuous transformation effect B.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. This is because if each operation valid period is expired without pressing the frame button 22, the second operation valid period ends exactly after 11 seconds have elapsed (the first operation valid period is 5 seconds + 1). The second success notification mode 1 second + the second operation valid period 5 seconds). As a result, if the operation validity period is not terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, it is a continuous transformation effect C, or a continuous transformation effect D or E with a higher expectation of a big hit than the continuous transformation effect C described later. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether it exists. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

The continuous transformation effect D is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 4 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 79". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-order super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "90 to 98". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 9 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (9/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect D is determined is higher in the hit super reach (the expectation of the big hit is higher). Further, as compared with the continuous transformation effects B and C, the ratio determined in the case of the winning super reach is higher, and the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-order super reach is lower. Compared to C, the expectation of a big hit is higher.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect D, the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effect C. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. Further, even if the period until the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed to 11 seconds or less, if the period until the end of the fourth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode. The number of times of display of is stopped at 3 times. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation effects C to E is, unless the operation valid period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 5 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "80 to 99". Be selected. On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-order super reach, it is selected only when the value of the effect counter 223n is "99". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of the per-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while it is 1 in the case of the off-super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. It is determined at a rate of% (1/100). For this reason, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect E is determined is higher in the hit super reach (the expectation of the big hit is higher). Further, since the ratio determined in the case of the out-of-order super reach is extremely low as compared with the continuous transformation effects B to D, the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher than that of the continuous transformation effects B to D.

This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which the transformation can be executed the largest number of times among the effect types of the continuous transformation effect. In the continuous transformation effect E, if the transformation is successful five times, the failure notification mode is not displayed after that, and the direct transition effect is performed after the display period of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed (FIG. 8). (See)) is started.

Further, in the continuous transformation effect E, the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as the continuous transformation effects C and D. Therefore, unless the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed within 11 seconds (49 seconds-38 seconds), the success notification mode is used. The number of impressions stops at 2 times. Further, even if the period until the end of the third operation valid period is suppressed to 11 seconds or less, if the period until the end of the fourth operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode. The number of times of display of is stopped at 3 times. Furthermore, even if the end timing of the operation valid period up to the 4th time is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the end timing of the 5th operation valid period exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is 4 It will stop. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish which of the continuous transformation effects C to E is, unless the operation valid period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the expected degree of the variation display this time from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

As described above, the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment is provided with five types of effect. Each effect type is configured to have a different upper limit of the number of transformations, and is configured to be able to suggest a jackpot expectation degree by the number of transformations of the character 811 (the number of times the character 811 is displayed). Further, regarding the continuous transformation effects B to E, the transformation of the maximum number of times cannot be displayed unless the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to terminate the operation valid period. It is configured. As a result, the player who wants to know the expectation level of the continuous transformation effect can positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be improved.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. Therefore, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 14 (a). The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table in which the development effect mode is defined. This development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of the development effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. The details of the development effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b).

FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the defined contents of the development effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15B, in this development effect mode selection table 222c, the remaining fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time T) and the type of the current fluctuation display (outside super reach or hit super reach) are displayed. For each), the type of development effect to be selected is specified.

Specifically, if the residual variation time T is in the range of 32 seconds ≦ T <35 seconds at the end of the last operation valid period, the development effect with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, if the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect A with an effect time of 30 seconds is selected, and if the effect time is 30 seconds, the out-of-development effect A is selected.

Further, if the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≤ T <38 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect B with a production time of 33 seconds is selected, and the deviation super reach. If so, the development effect B with an effect time of 33 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≤ T <41 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect C with a production time of 36 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development effect C with an effect time of 36 seconds is selected.

Similarly, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 41 seconds ≤ T <44 seconds and the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the development effect D with an effect time of 39 seconds is selected, and the out-of-order super reach is selected. If so, the development effect D with an effect time of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≤ T <47 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect E with a production time of 42 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development production E with a production time of 42 seconds is selected. If the remaining fluctuation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≤ T <48 seconds and the fluctuation display this time is a hit super reach, the development effect F with a hit time of 45 seconds is selected, and if it is out of the super reach. , The development effect F with an effect time of 45 seconds is selected.

As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the variation display from being different from the end timing of the development effect, the remaining variation time T and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are changed according to the difference between the two. Thereby, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variation display regardless of the length of the remaining variation time T. Therefore, it is possible to provide a production that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d, which are valid. The period flag 223e, the valid period timer 223f, the transformation count counter 223g, the transformation effecting flag 223h, the success notification mode timer 223i, the failure notification mode timer 223j, the transition effect time timer 223k, and the development effect storage area 223m. And at least the effect counter 223n is provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially. It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (see S4002 in FIG. 33) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

The valid period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. If the valid period flag 223e is on, it means that the operation is valid, and if it is off, it means that the operation is not valid. This valid period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous transformation effect has come (see S4403 in FIG. 37 (a)). It is also set to ON when the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and it is determined that the number of display times (transformation number) of the success notification mode is less than 5 (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, it is set to off when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when 5 seconds set as the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While the validity period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) for the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the valid period flag 223e is on, the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is executed.

The valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. When the start condition of the valid period is satisfied (when the start timing of the continuous transformation effect or the end timing of the success notification mode is reached), the timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds for this valid period timer 223f. ) Is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the valid period timer 223f is 1 or more, the valid period processing executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 37 (b). ), The value is subtracted (updated) by 1. Based on the value of the valid period timer 223f, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed, and if it is determined that the operation valid period has elapsed, the transformation setting for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. The process (see FIG. 35) is executed.

The transformation count counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times that the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7 (a)) is displayed (character 811 succeeds in transformation) in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The counter value of the transformation count counter 223g is added (updated) by 1 each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the continuous transformation effect in the first embodiment, the transformation is performed depending on whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223 g becomes the upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. It is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of times has been reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, if the success notification mode for the upper limit of the number of transformations is displayed and the operation valid period ends after that, the failure notification is performed regardless of whether or not the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time has been reached at the end time. The aspect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations in each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, so it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations.

The transformation effect flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the continuous transformation effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed. It means not inside. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means from the end timing of the transformation development mode (start of the first operation valid period) to the end timing of the transition effect (start of the development effect). This transformation effect flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change, which is the start timing of the transformation effect, in the variation display in which the execution of the continuous transformation effect is determined ( See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is set to off when it is determined that the display period of the transition effect has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set for the success notification mode timer 223i. As described above, the condition for displaying the success notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number of times set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and at the end of the operation valid period. The remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has come, the timer value (1000) corresponding to one second is set in the success notification mode timer 223i (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process in the success notification mode executed every 1 millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). ..

The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set for the failure notification mode timer 223j. As described above, the condition for displaying the failure notification mode is that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or greater than the upper limit set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, or the operation valid period ends. The remaining fluctuation time at the time point is less than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. The failure notification mode timer 223j determines that the display timing of the failure notification mode has come, and when the effect mode of the development effect is selected, the display time is set according to the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect. The corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process in the failure notification mode executed every 1 millisecond (see S4701 in FIG. 39). ..

The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the display condition of the transition effect is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the transition effect is set for the transition effect time timer 223k. The transition effect starts to be displayed when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed or when the display time of the fifth success notification mode has elapsed in the continuous transformation effect E. In the transition effect time timer 223k, a timer value corresponding to the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect executed after the transition effect is set at the start of the transition effect (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. See S4704 of 39). Then, in the effect update process of the main process (see S4012 in FIG. 33), the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process during the transition effect executed every 1 millisecond (see S4801 in FIG. 40).

The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of development effect. In this development effect storage area 223m, development effect is performed from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) according to the remaining fluctuation time based on the end of the last operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect. When the effect mode of is selected, the data corresponding to the effect mode is stored. At the start of the transition effect, the mode (effect time) of the development effect is determined from the data stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, and the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect is displayed. Set as time. Further, at the end of the transition effect, the type of the development effect to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m.

The data corresponding to the type of development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data, and for example, the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area for storing data indicating the fluctuation time, and the 4th bit is used as an area for storing data indicating whether or not the result is correct. .. Specifically, if the 1st to 3rd bits are "001B", the production time is 30 seconds, and if it is "010B", the production time is 33 seconds. If so, it indicates a developmental production with a production time of 36 seconds. Further, "100B" indicates a development effect with an effect time of 39 seconds, "101B" indicates an development effect with an effect time of 42 seconds, and "111B" indicates an development time with an effect time of 36 seconds. Show the development production. If the most significant bit (4th bit) is 1 (high), it means that the development effect corresponds to the hit, and if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 0 (low), it is out. It means that it is a development production corresponding to. Therefore, for example, if the data "1010B" is stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, the development effect this time is a development effect (that is, a hit development effect B) that is a hit in the effect time of 33 seconds. Means.

The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223n is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. .. The effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each type of effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, for example) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. It is composed of 2 kilobytes). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type flash memory 234d, specifically, after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided to store a part of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. Set in the bank of, and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 was first set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c from the program and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR-type flash. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type flash memory 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs are NOR type flash. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program excluding the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. A program of the work RAM 233 for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the program and its control program. It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 17, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 17 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 17 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 17 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 18 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 18, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "sandy beach stage" or the "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed sandy beach stage is displayed in the rear image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage has a resident video RAM 235 containing only a part of the back surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed by scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers “0” to “9” of the third symbol are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311 and a female character 312 and a male character 313 are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and the player is notified of the game value (normal symbol time reduction period) given to the player after the jackpot ends, or the special symbol is suspended. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so that the chances of lottery of the normal symbol will increase and the chance of winning the normal symbol will increase. .. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory 64a to be opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the first entry port 64, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the reduced working hours of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory 64a is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the first. The easier it is to enter the entrance 64, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Further, the display data table corresponding to each game menu screen is also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table (variation display data table) for variable effect among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table corresponds to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of an image and a character used for various effects, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or the back different from the backs A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, in the example of FIG. 20). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 55 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the drawing instructions. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 21) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol) and various comments.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (the backmost drawing hierarchy), and the last drawn sprite is the frontmost side (the frontmost drawing hierarchy). It can be placed in. When the comment display function is turned on, the image arranged on the frontmost side (the foremost drawing hierarchy) is a character image constituting the comment. By arranging the comment on the frontmost side (the foremost drawing hierarchy), the comment can be visually recognized more clearly by the player.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S7802 of FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 31. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first The start winning process accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No) ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a big hit A or a big hit B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the big hit. (S214). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S216), and the process shifts to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the processing of S216 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol is set (S217), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start process, first, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a are acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change is made. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

When the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first value for high probability. Based on the random number table per unit, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "200", it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit A). , The jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B), and "50". If it is in the range of "~ 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12). When the processing of S307 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the normal reach is achieved by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12). Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as super reach. When the processing of S309 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 30). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering (winning) into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (winned) in the first entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of pending times of variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing (whether or not a big hit) of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this processing is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0. If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second random number table for high probability time are used. Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 11 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a hit of the normal symbol (S511), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S511: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process is shifted to S514. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S511: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514), and if it is in the normal symbol time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is performed. To finish. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, so it is normal. The lottery frequency of symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols increases, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the first entry opening 64. It becomes a state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S517 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the processing of S518, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit and the display mode is set by the processing of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S518, and then the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S519). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state (S520), and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. (S520: Yes) sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64, and shifts to the processing of S523. On the other hand, in the processing of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64. As a setting, "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set, and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 is set (S523), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the electric accessory 64a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If is less than 4 (S603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S812 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S812. As will be described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 30, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S833, S814) is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S83, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 26). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 28 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 30). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S214 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and the end timing of the ending effect is inside. If it is determined (S1011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1011 when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012).

In the processing of S1012, if it is determined that the jackpot is not A (that is, the jackpot is B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f, so that 100 times of normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The time saving period is set to be given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on so that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1013 or the processing of S1015 executed after the processing of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol (whether it is the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol) after the jackpot is completed is voiced. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4018 (see FIG. 33) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4018. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4017 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

In the process of S3902, if the power off processing flag is off (S3902: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 was completed, or only the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110). It was started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the data shifts to S3908.

If the power off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4018, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3904 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3906). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4018 is executed (see S4017 in FIG. 33). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4018 is executed, the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3909), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3910), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S3911) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S3908 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S3908 is performed via the processing of S3904 to S3906. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S3910, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S3910), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S3911), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S3909 is that when the processing of S3908 is reached from S3904 via the processing of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3904. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4001 this time was executed (S4001), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4012. In the process of S4001, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S4002 to S4012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4013 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4014 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by each process of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4004). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the processing of S4005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4007). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is set. That is, it is a process for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4008), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4009, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4010), and then the menu setting process is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the menu setting process, processing according to the operation content of the player when the game menu screen is displayed is executed.

After the processing of S4011, during the execution of the variation display, the effect update process for changing the effect mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the values of various timers, etc. is executed (S4012), and the process shifts to S4013. .. The details of this effect update process (S4012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the process of S4013, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. Then, when the command determination process is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S4014). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the processing of S4014 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4017), and the power-off process is executed (S4018). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to the process of S4001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4016: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing. As described above, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101), and if it is off (S4101: No), it is not the operation valid period. Since it means, this process is terminated as it is. This is because there is no possibility of displaying the failure notification mode or the success notification mode even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected unless the operation is valid.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation valid period is reached, so that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected next. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4102). If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the transformation setting process for setting the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is executed (S4103), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the transformation setting process (S4103) described above will be described. In this transformation setting process, first, the valid period flag 223e is set to off, and the valid period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). This sets the end of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect.

When the processing of S4201 is completed, next, the value of the transformation count counter 223g is read (S4202), and the read transformation count (display count of the success notification mode) is the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect executed this time. (S4203). In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g matches the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining fluctuation is specified. The effect mode of the development effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15B) (S4205).

When the processing of S4205 is completed, the data corresponding to the effect mode of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), the remaining fluctuation time specified in the processing of S4204, and the development selected in the processing of S4205. The display time of the failure notification mode this time is calculated from the difference from the production time of the production (S4207). Specifically, half the time obtained by subtracting the effect time of the development effect from the remaining variation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the display time of the specified failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number (S4203: No), the remaining fluctuation time (T) is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed. It is determined whether (whether it is a value equal to or higher than the lower limit value corresponding to the current production type) (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S421 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. That is, 1 is added to the value of the transformation count counter 223g to update (S4210), a success notification mode is set according to the value of the transformation count counter 223g (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is set to 1 second. The corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining variation time T is less than the lower limit value specified in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No). , The process of S4204 to S4208 described above for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this process is terminated.

By this transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within the range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time set for each production type, the success notification mode is set up to the upper limit of the number of transformations. It can be displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether or not the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached. As a result, the player can be made to want to display more success notification modes within a range not less than the lower limit remaining fluctuation time, so that the frame button 22 can be positively pressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process (S4012) will be described. This effect update process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the variation display, the remaining variation time, the values of various timers, and the like are used. This is a process for changing the effect mode accordingly. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this effect update process.

In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display is being executed (S4301), and if it is determined that the variation display is not being executed (S4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Return to the main process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variable display is in progress (S4301: Yes), then whether or not the transformation effect flag 223h is on (that is, whether the continuous transformation effect is being executed). (S4302). If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect flag 223h is off (S4302: No), the transformation effect start for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time. The determination process is executed (S4303), and this process is terminated. The details of this transformation effect start determination process (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 (a).

Further, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the transformation effect flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is being executed. Therefore, first, whether or not the validity period flag 223e is on. (S4304), if it is on (S4304: Yes), the process during the valid period for determining whether or not the operation valid period has expired is executed (S4305), and the present process is terminated. The details of the treatment during the valid period (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the flag 223e during the valid period is off (that is, it is not during the operation valid period) (S4304: No), then the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is larger than 0. (S4306), if it is a value larger than 0 (S4306: Yes), it is determined whether or not (whether the success notification mode is being displayed) or not, and the process during the success notification mode for determining whether it is the end timing of the success notification mode. (S4307) to end this process. The details of this process in the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), then the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is set. It is determined whether or not it is larger than 0 (whether the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308), and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S4308: Yes), the end timing of the failure notification mode is determined. The process in the failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process is terminated. Details of this failure notification mode processing (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is larger than 0. (That is, whether or not the transition effect is being executed) is determined (S4310), and if it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not to switch from the transition effect to the development effect. The process during the transition effect for the purpose is executed (S4311), and this process is terminated. The details of the process during the transition effect (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4310 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33).

By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 36), appropriate control can be executed according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, so that it is possible to preferably update the effect mode in the continuous transformation effect. can.

Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process (S4303) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 (a). As described above, this transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining fluctuation time.

In the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (the timing when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) (S4401), and the continuous transformation effect is performed. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and this process is terminated.

By executing this transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)), the continuous transformation effect is accurately executed at the same timing each time the variable display set to execute the continuous transformation effect is executed. be able to.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing (S4305) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 (b). As described above, the process during the valid period (S4305) is a process for determining whether or not the operation valid period has expired.

In the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting one (S4501). Since the processing during the valid period (see FIG. 37 (b)) is executed every 1 millisecond, the value of the valid period timer 223f is decremented by 1 every 1 millisecond.

When the processing of S4501 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction in the processing of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and if the value of the valid period timer 223f is not 0 (S4502). S4502: No) Since it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction becomes 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the remaining fluctuation time ( According to T), the above-mentioned transformation setting process (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and this process is terminated. Since the details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described with reference to FIG. 35, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned success notification mode processing (S4307) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. As described above, the process during the success notification mode (S4307) is a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode.

In this process during the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is determined whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction becomes 0. Determine (S4602). If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (the success notification mode continues), so this processing is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. , The processing of S4603 to S4611 for setting the effect mode after the display period ends is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5. (S4603).

If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 5, (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period, the display control device 114 executes the display mode corresponding to the operation valid period (see FIG. 5B) in the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4604 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the start of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to ON (S4605). This process ends. As a result, a new operation validity period can be started.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), the success notification mode of 5 times has already been displayed, and it is necessary to set the operation valid period any longer. Since it means that there is no such thing, the development effect and the transition effect of the mode according to the remaining fluctuation time (T) are determined. Specifically, the remaining fluctuation time (T) of the variation display is specified (S4606), and the effect mode of the development effect corresponding to the specified remaining variation time (T) is set in the development effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). Select from (see (b)) (S4607).

When the processing of S4607 is completed, next, the data corresponding to the effect mode of the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4608), the remaining fluctuation time (T), and the development selected in the processing of S4607. The difference from the production time of the production is specified as the production time of the transition effect (S4609). Then, the timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), the display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and the present process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned failure notification mode processing (S4309) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. As described above, the process in the failure notification mode (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode.

In the process during the failure notification mode (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is subtracted by 1 (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the subtraction becomes 0 (see FIG. 39). S4702). In the process of S4702, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the failure notification mode, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j becomes 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the end timing of the failure notification mode has come, so that the remaining fluctuation time (T). ) And the effect time of the development effect of the mode indicated by the data stored in the development effect storage area 223 m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and this process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. Upon receiving the display command for notifying the start of the transition effect, the display control device 114 starts the transition effect (see FIG. 8A) on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the transition effect in-process (S4311) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As described above, the process during the transition effect (S4311) is a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect.

In the transition effect in-process (see FIG. 40), first, the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is subtracted by 1 (S4801), and it is determined whether the subtracted timer value becomes 0 (S4802). If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, it is the end timing of the transition effect) (S4802: Yes), the data is then stored in the development effect storage area 223 m. Set the start of the development effect corresponding to the existing data (S4803). Then, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to off (S4804), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and this process is terminated. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display exactly match. Therefore, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be ended at the end timing of the fluctuation. Therefore, the effect mode can be preferably executed.

Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S4901). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S4902: Yes). S4903), return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4907). When the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4908). Further, in the process of S4908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S4908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4908. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4907, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4909, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4911). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), the display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4911, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4913). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted round number to the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts the round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4916). Then, when the ending command is received (S4916: Yes), the ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S4917), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4916, if the ending command is not received (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By executing this command determination process, it is possible to execute an appropriate process according to the command output from the main control unit 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4014). This variation display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S5001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5008 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002), and then the variation pattern is processed in S4903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41). Based on the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command, the variation display mode of the current variation display is determined from the variation pattern table 222a (S5003).

Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variation pattern type is an aspect accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004), and if it is determined to be an aspect accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), the transformation effect selection table. The mode of the continuous transformation effect is determined based on 222b (see FIG. 15A) and the value of the effect counter 223n (S5005), and the process shifts to S5006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 is an aspect that does not accompany the continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5006.

In the process of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S5003 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S5006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the processing of S5007, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5008.

In the process of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S5008). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5008: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009), and then in the processing of S4906 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5011), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type flash memory 234d, whereby the NOR type flash memory. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, so when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , Of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to display the image of S6304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504 is updated, and the pointer 233f is set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, by the processing of S6502. Transfer data table The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is clocked by using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the time is measured in the variation display data table. When it is determined that the variation effect is finished, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variable type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front-back off reach, non-front-back off reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6603, and the identification thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6705), the present processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). .. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7002 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418). S6418: Yes), the transformation effect related command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

The commands related to the continuous transformation effect are, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation valid period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and the start of the transition effect. A display command indicating the start of the development effect, a display command indicating the start of the development effect, and the like can be mentioned. The display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b in the same manner as the variable display data table and the like. By executing the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode in which the display start is instructed, the display time, etc. are determined from the commands related to the continuous transformation effect, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d.

Here, the details of the transformation effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a command process related to the transformation effect. This transformation effect-related command process executes the process corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the transformation effect-related command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time indicated by the command is set in the clock counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing. The continuous transformation effect is a kind of effect mode set during the execution of the variation display, and the fact that the continuous transformation effect is executed means that the variation pattern command is set (variation pattern command processing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47)). a) Executed after (see)) and before the end of the variation pattern. Therefore, since the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are already set to off in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)), these flags are set in the transformation effect related command processing (see FIG. 51). There is no need to turn it off again.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7302), S7303 and S7304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45B), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the expanded warning image is specified based on the expanded warning image data, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7305.

In S7305, the pointer update process is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer is used. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7505), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7506). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 52 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the definite display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S7317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that it is displayed.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (any of FIGS. 17B and 17C) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7601 (S7601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7702). In the process of S7702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7810), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7812, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is the one of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The discrimination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7902 (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 45B) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of performing a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation effect is an effect in which the character 811 transforms 1 to 5 times in the third symbol display device 81, and basically, the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of a big hit. be. During the execution of this continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period during which the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is valid is set a plurality of times. When the press on the frame button 22 is detected during this operation valid period, or when the operation valid period (5 seconds) has elapsed, an effect (success notification mode) in which the character 811 succeeds in transformation is executed. There is a possibility. More specifically, when either of the above two types of conditions is satisfied, the upper limit of the number of transformations predetermined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect has not been reached, and the remaining fluctuation time has not reached. , If it is equal to or more than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type, the character 811 succeeds in transformation (success notification mode is displayed). On the other hand, if the upper limit of the number of transformations has been reached or the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit, the effect of the mode in which the transformation fails (failure notification mode) is executed and the continuous transformation effect ends. ..

The length of the operation valid period varies depending on the game method of the player. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated at that time and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, for each operation valid period, when all success notification modes are displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed, the continuous transformation effect production period is set before the success notification mode for the maximum number of times is displayed. Set to elapse. In other words, when all transformations are executed with the lapse of the operation valid period, the length of the production period elapses before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production time (the lower limit remaining fluctuation time defined for each production type) is set. As a result, when the operation valid period is started, the frame button 22 must be positively pressed to end the operation valid period at an early stage, or the transformation cannot be performed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to confirm the transformation of the upper limit number of times in the continuous transformation effect, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

Further, depending on the player's game method (whether or not the frame button 22 is positively pressed during the operation valid period) during the execution of the continuous transformation effect, the subsequent effect mode (display timing of the success notification mode and the display timing of the success notification mode) may be determined. Since the number of impressions) can be changed, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between a production type with a low expectation (the maximum number of transformations is small) and a production type with a high expectation (the maximum number of transformations is large), and it is continuous in a manner corresponding to a relatively low expectation. You can perform a transformation effect. Therefore, even if the mode corresponds to an apparently low degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the number of cases that lead to a big hit, so that even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. can.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the development effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. This development production is provided with a plurality of types having different production times. Here, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect is variable according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Therefore, the timing at which the continuous transformation effect ends is not constant, and the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the continuous transformation effect ends is variable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the final operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining fluctuation time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed with the remaining variation time is selected. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the period of difference between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the variation in the production time of the development effect, and thus it is possible to reduce the capacity of various data for displaying the development effect. In addition, by dynamically changing the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect according to the remaining variation time, there is a discrepancy between the remaining variation time at the start time of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. That is, since the remaining fluctuation time is longer, the fluctuation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development production is completed, or conversely, the production period of the development production is longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development effect does not end when the change of the third symbol ends. Therefore, since the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol can be matched, it is possible to provide a display effect without a sense of discomfort.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. However, the operation valid period The conditions for censoring (shortening) are not limited to this. For example, when a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the operation valid period may be terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated (shortened) and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. , Not limited to this. For example, the operation valid period may be terminated based on the detection that the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the operation valid period. Further, in this case, the same number of presses may be set each time as the number of presses required to terminate the operation valid period, or the number of presses may be randomly selected by lottery each time the start timing of the operation valid period is reached. It may be a predetermined configuration. With this configuration, the player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. Furthermore, when determining the number of presses required to terminate the operation validity period, the operation type of the continuous transformation effect being executed, whether or not the maximum number of transformations has been reached, the lottery result of the special symbol, etc. The number of presses that can be easily selected may be changed according to the situation when setting the validity period. Specifically, for example, a variable display that is a big hit may be configured so that a smaller number of presses can be easily selected than a variable display that is off. Further, for example, a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum number of transformations is large may be configured so that a small number of presses can be easily selected, and the upper limit of transformation is higher than when the maximum number of transformations has been reached. It may be configured so that a smaller number of presses is more likely to be selected when the number of presses has not been reached. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be pressed by paying attention to the number of presses until the operation valid period ends, so that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the continuous transformation effect is further improved. Can be made to.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to terminate the operation valid period. Further, for example, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of frame buttons 22 are provided, and when a press is detected, the operation valid period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display) for each operation valid period. , The operation valid period may not be terminated even if the press is detected (or the operation valid period may be terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect while thinking about which frame button 22 should be pressed to terminate the operation validity period, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the operation valid period is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the operation valid period ends unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, but the configuration is limited to this configuration. Instead, there may be a case where the operation valid period is terminated without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, each time the operation valid period is set, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to terminate in the middle of the period. Further, for example, corresponding to the type of continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and the operation valid period even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. May be configured to provide a type that is terminated in the middle.

In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number may be arbitrarily set. By narrowing the range of the maximum number of times that can be set (for example, 1 to 3 times), the difference in the expectation of big hits for each transformation number can be reduced, so that the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations. Even in this case, the player can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit. On the contrary, by widening the range of the upper limit number of times that can be set (for example, setting it to 1 to 10 times), it is possible to give the player a chance to press (operate) the frame button 22 more times. .. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. Further, in the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation effect, the transformation is successful at least once (success notification mode is displayed), but the upper limit number of transformations is 0 in at least some production types. It may be configured to be set to times (no successful transformation). Further, not only the maximum number of transformations, but also the length of the operation valid period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

In the first embodiment, in all the types of continuous transformation effects, when the frame button 22 is never operated (that is, there is no operation valid period interrupted in the middle), the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type is obtained. The operation validity period of the length at which the continuous transformation effect ends before the success notification mode of is displayed (character 811 succeeds in transformation) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some types of continuous transformation effects, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the maximum number of times corresponding to the type. With this configuration, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, even a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 and plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 can enjoy the continuous transformation effect.

In the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of transformations) has not reached the upper limit regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period, and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period is the lower limit. If it is longer than the above time, the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed may be changed according to the end condition of the operation valid period (whether the time set as the operation valid period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

In the first embodiment, when the display time of the 1st to 4th success notification modes in the continuous transformation effect of 1 has elapsed, the operation valid period of 5 seconds is newly set, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. At the start of the continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period of 1 is set, and when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period is interrupted (the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). good. If the number of times the success notification mode is displayed does not reach the upper limit, the suspended operation valid period is restarted (the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f is restarted) after the display time has elapsed. good. Further, the length of the operation valid period may be changed according to the number of times of display of the maximum success notification mode. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the validity period timer 223f every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even if the period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected continues for a predetermined period, the success notification mode may be displayed within a range in which the upper limit number of times is not reached. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first embodiment. Instead of interrupting the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f, the subtraction of the valid period timer 223f may be continued even during the display time of the success notification mode. Then, during the display time of the success notification mode, even if the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press may be treated as invalid. Even in such a configuration, the same operation as that of the first embodiment can be realized.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the transition effect is changed so that the end timing of the subsequent development effect and the end timing of the variable time are matched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the end of the development effect (or as a part of the development effect), the difference between the set effect time of the development effect and the remaining fluctuation time is compensated. It may be configured to execute the effect for the purpose. In this way, by adjusting the time at the end of the effect, it is possible to match the end timing of the effect with the end timing of the variation display with simpler control than simply setting the remaining variation time to the effect time. can.

In the first embodiment, when the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification) is immediately (before the operation valid period elapses). The configuration is such that the mode) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). In this case, the player may be notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed during a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By setting a predetermined period between the detection of pressing the frame button 22 and the display of the notification mode, an opportunity for the player to imagine which notification mode will be displayed during the predetermined period. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this case, a predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. It may be a variable configuration. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, 1 second is set when there is a margin of 1 second or more until the end timing of the operation valid period, and a frame is set in a state of less than 1 second until the end timing of the operation valid period. When a press on the button 22 is detected, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period from the setting of the operation valid period to the display of the notification mode to be longer than that when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the operation valid period regardless of the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

In the first embodiment, it is better to press the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period than to allow the operation valid period to elapse without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation valid period elapses. The configuration is such that the display timing of the mode is earlier, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of continuous transformation effects, pressing the frame button 22 may delay the display timing of the notification mode. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a predetermined pressing effect indicating that the pressing is detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the press effect may be set so that the press effect ends after the timing when the originally set operation valid period ends. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, but rather the display timing of the notification mode can be delayed. Therefore, the frame button can be provided. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is better to press 22 each time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the first embodiment described above, the transition effect of the length corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed is executed. In addition, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a moving image whose mode does not change significantly) is displayed until the start timing of the development effect is reached, and the end timing of the transition effect (length of the execution period). Regardless of this, the configuration was such that it was possible to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development effect.

On the other hand, in this modification, the transition effect is composed of an effect mode in which the change in mode is relatively large and an effect mode in which the change in mode is small (no). Then, the end timing of the transition effect is configured to be within the period in which the effect mode with relatively little change in mode is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the display mode during the execution of the transition effect. By increasing the degree of freedom of the transition effect, the configuration is such that only the effect time of the transition effect covers the difference time between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining fluctuation time. That is, in this modification, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second.

The transition effect in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In this modification, the data of the base effect which is the basis for executing the transition effect is prepared as in the development effect in the first embodiment described above. The display period of the base effect is 4 seconds, and the transition effect of the corresponding effect period can be executed by executing the effect from the beginning or the middle of the base effect.

As shown in FIG. 83, the data of the base effect for executing the transition effect of this modification includes data of four types of display modes in one data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for one second (first section) at the beginning of the base production is composed of data corresponding to the production in which the character 811 searches for the target (monster 812) to fight in the development production. ing. Further, the data corresponding to the time when 1 second has passed to the time when 2 seconds have passed (second section) of the base effect is composed of the data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to the production of a mode in which it is unclear to the player which type the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 this time is. With this effect, it is possible to make the player imagine which type of monster 812 will be fought.

In addition, the data corresponding to the time when 2 seconds have passed to the time when 3 seconds have passed (third section) of the base production is composed of the data corresponding to the production in which the type of the monster 812 fighting with the character 811 is clarified in this development production. ing. That is, the silhouette of the monster 812, which was displayed as a silhouette, is removed, and the data corresponds to the effect of displaying the mode of the monster 812 fighting the character 811. With this effect, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed after that according to the type of the monster 812.

In this way, the effect corresponding to the beginning to the time when 1 second elapses (first section), the effect corresponding to the time when 1 second elapses to 2 seconds (the second section), and the time when 2 seconds elapses to 3 seconds elapses. The effect corresponding to (third section) is composed of an effect in which the change in the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, a part of the display contents such as the character 811 moving to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appearing in front of the character 811, and the silhouette of the monster 812 displayed in the silhouette disappearing. Is changed to a completely different content.

On the other hand, the data corresponding to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 4 seconds have passed (4th section) of the base effect is the stillness in which the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type notified in the effect of the 2nd section confront each other. The image (see FIG. 8A) is composed of data corresponding to the display effect. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to the effect of the mode in which the display mode does not change (relatively small) even after the passage of time. By executing the transition effect so that the timing of switching to the development effect comes within the range of this third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance when switching to the development effect from becoming unnatural. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, in this modification, three types of start timings (start positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timings is set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. Since all of these start timings are set in places where the division of the production is good, even if the transition production is started from any start timing, the player should confirm the transition production without making the player feel uncomfortable. Can be done. Here, in the present modification, as in the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the production time of the development effect is within the range of 2 seconds to 5 seconds. The production time (production type) of the development production is determined. In this modification, as described above, since the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, the effect period of the transition effect is within the range of 1 second to 4 seconds. In this modification, the base effect of the transition effect is determined from which start timing based on the effect period of the transition effect.

More specifically, when the effect period of the transition effect is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data from the third start timing (the beginning of the third section) of the base effect data is used this time. It is set as data for executing the transition effect of. As a result, the end timing of the transition effect (timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, in the effect period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the effect of 1 second of the 3rd section is first executed, and then the effect (still image) of the 4th section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. .. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

If the effect period of the transition effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data from the second start timing (the beginning of the second section) of the base effect data will be used for this transition effect. Set as data to execute. As a result, the end timing of the transition effect (timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section, as in the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds. can. That is, in the effect period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the 1-second effect of the 2nd section and the 1-second effect of the 3rd section are executed, and then the 4th section until the end timing of the transition effect. Display the effect (still image) of. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

Furthermore, if the effect period of the transition effect is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data from the first start timing (the beginning of the first section) of the base effect data will be used for this transition effect. Set as data to execute. Thereby, as in the other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. That is, in the production period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the production for 1 second for each of the 1st section to the 3rd section is executed, and then the production of the 4th section (still image) until the end timing of the transition production. Is displayed. As a result, the timing of switching to the development effect (the end timing of the transition effect) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the effect can be switched with a natural appearance for the player.

As described above, in this modification, the effect data (first section) corresponding to the mode in which the display mode changes relatively significantly when the transition effect, which is the effect of connecting the continuous transformation effect and the development effect, is executed. The transition effect is executed using the base effect data composed of the effect data of the third section) and the effect data corresponding to the aspect in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small). .. Further, the start of the transition effect is set from the start timing of any one of the plurality of start timings preset for the base effect according to the effect time of the transition effect. In other words, the range of data used to execute the transition effect is selected according to the effect time of the transition effect. In this way, by configuring the transition effects having different production times by using the base effect of 1, the display data for executing the transition effects can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Can be reduced.

Further, in this modification, the end timing of the transition effect is set during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small) regardless of the effect time of the transition effect. , It is configured to select the start timing. With such a configuration, when the transition effect is ended and the development effect is switched to, the player can have a natural appearance.

In this modification, three start timings are set for the base effect, but the present timing is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set.

In this modification, by adjusting the production time of the transition effect, the time difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development effect is filled, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the first embodiment, the remaining effect time may be adjusted between the failure notification mode and the transition effect. In this case, the failure notification mode may be configured to provide a base effect as in the transition effect. Then, among the effect data of the base effect, the effect data in the range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode may be used to display the failure notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation between the failure notification mode and the transition effect.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. In the first embodiment described above, if it is assumed that the frame button 22 is never pressed during the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the success notification mode of the maximum number of times is continuously displayed before the success notification mode is displayed. The configuration was such that the operation validity period of the length at which the transformation effect was completed was set. In other words, when all the transformations are executed with the lapse of the operation valid period, the production period becomes the length before the transformation of the upper limit number of times (success notification mode) is executed. Was configured to set. Further, in the operation valid period, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the operation valid period is terminated, so that only when the game method is performed in which the frame button 22 is positively pressed to terminate the operation valid period. , The configuration was such that the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times could be displayed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period, the success notification mode is used until the period set at the start of the operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is impossible to shorten the period from the setting of the operation valid period to the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Further, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation valid period, and the more the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is continuous, the more the set operation valid period is set. It has a long structure. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of transformations can reach the upper limit set for each effect type only when the player positively presses the frame button 22. It is possible.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the continuous transformation effect of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Further, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player positively presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. be.

Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the super reach fluctuation in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the first operation valid period is set 11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. To. In the second embodiment, since the operation valid period is not terminated in the middle, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation valid period at the start of the operation valid period is included. The mode is determined in advance. That is, at the start of the operation valid period, the display start of a series of effect modes that summarizes the effect mode during the operation valid period and the notification mode is set. Hereinafter, the effect mode composed of 1 operation valid period and 1 notification mode set after the valid period is referred to as a transformation effect mode.

Regarding which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is to be set, the transformation effect mode is set at the start of the transformation effect mode (at the start of the operation valid period). It is determined by determining in advance the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the notification mode ends (the time when the notification mode ends). Specifically, first, the display period of the transformation effect mode is determined by using the period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60) described later. Next, the remaining variation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect mode predicted from the determined display period is compared with the lower limit of the residual variation time defined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect mode is a value 5 seconds or more larger than the lower limit value, the success notification is displayed as the notification mode displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. The configuration is such that the transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed is selected. On the other hand, in other cases, the failure notification mode is set. Note that 5 seconds is the shortest time from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the display of the notification mode (minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode). That is, if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the end of the notification mode, it is possible to secure a display time for displaying at least one new transformation effect mode accompanied by the failure notification mode, so that the success notification can be performed. Display the aspect. On the other hand, if it is predicted that the margin for the lower limit value is less than 5 seconds after the end of the transformation effect mode, it is not possible to secure a display period sufficient to display the new transformation effect mode, so that the transformation accompanied by the failure notification mode is performed. By setting the effect mode, the continuous transformation effect is terminated. As a result, the type of transformation effect mode can be changed flexibly according to the remaining fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode in which the display period is 5 seconds (operation valid period is 4 seconds) is set. As a result, the predicted value of the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed is 44 seconds. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but in this continuous transformation effect (continuous transformation effect D2 in which the maximum number of transformations is 4 times), the lower limit residual fluctuation time is set to 24 seconds, which is predicted. The remaining fluctuation time is a value that is 5 seconds or more larger than the lower limit. Therefore, as the first transformation effect mode, a transformation effect mode accompanied by a success notification mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the first success notification mode is displayed when the 4 seconds set as the operation valid period have elapsed. Although the details will be described later, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the continuous number of operation valid periods in which the frame button 22 is never pressed is counted by the non-pressed number counter 223r described later. The length of the operation valid period (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) to be set is variable according to the counter value of the non-pressed number counter 223r (the larger the counter value, the longer the period is set. , See FIG. 60 (c)). Since this is the first operation valid period, 1 is set for the non-pressed number counter 223r.

When the display period of the first success notification mode (display period of the transformation effect mode) has elapsed (16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of this second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1 which is the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r. The remaining fluctuation time at the end of the second transformation effect mode is 37 seconds, and there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit, so the second transformation effect mode is also set to include a success notification mode. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the operation valid period of 6 seconds has elapsed, the success notification mode for 1 second is displayed.

At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (23 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the third transformation effect mode, 9 seconds corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r (of which the operation valid period is 8 seconds) is selected. The remaining fluctuation time at the time when the third transformation effect mode is completed is 28 seconds, and the margin for the lower limit value of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, the third transformation effect mode is accompanied by a failure notification mode. Set to the aspect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the operation valid period of 8 seconds and the failure notification mode of 1 second are displayed, and then the transition effect is executed. That is, the continuous transformation effect is completed only by performing the transformation two times without performing the transformation four times (displaying the success notification mode) which is the upper limit number of times. In the second embodiment, the production time of the development production is predetermined for each production type of the continuous transformation production. For the transition effect, the time difference between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect is set. In the example of FIG. 58 (a), after the transition effect of the effect time of 5 seconds is set, the development effect for 23 seconds (hit development effect D2) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the continuous transformation effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period, the effect period of each of the 1st to 5th transformation effect modes is set. Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. As a result, the maximum number of transformations of 4 times can be contained within the production period of the continuous transformation effect.

In this way, the player can positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period to set a short operation valid period, so that more success notification modes can be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it becomes easy to perform the transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so that the expected degree of the effect can be predicted more accurately from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation is high (the upper limit of the number of transformations is large). Even in this case, the production period of the continuous transformation effect will elapse with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations is small, the number of transformations is large (that is, the expectation of a big hit is high), but the number of transformations is small as the production period elapses. Can be generated. As a result, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big hit can be increased.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. First, FIG. 59 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a new period selection table 222d added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (a)). It differs in that. In addition, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c have been partially changed.

The period selection table 222d is a data table referred to when setting a new transformation effect mode, and the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode and the length of the operation valid period are determined for each value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. It is a data table that specifies.

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), the value "0" of the non-pressed count counter 223r is defined by "5 seconds" as the display period of the transformation effect mode and "4 seconds" as the operation valid period. Has been done. Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set when the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 0, the transformation effect mode of 5 seconds including the operation valid period of 4 seconds is selected. The non-pressed count counter 223r becomes 0 when the press on the frame button 22 is detected at the start of the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect or in the operation valid period one time before. be.

Further, with respect to the value "1" of the non-pressed number counter 223r, "7 seconds" is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode, and "6 seconds" is defined as the operation valid period. Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set while the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 1, the transformation effect mode of 7 seconds including the operation valid period of 6 seconds is selected. The value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 1. In the continuous transformation effect of 1, the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation valid period two times before, and the press is detected in the operation valid period one time before. It is a case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, or a case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected during the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect.

Further, for the value "2 or more" of the non-pressed number counter 223r, "9 seconds" is defined as the display period of the transformation effect mode, and "8 seconds" is defined as the operation valid period. As a result, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, when the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is not detected is continuous twice or more and the value of the non-press count counter 223r is 2 or more, it is 8 seconds. The transformation effect mode of the display period of 9 seconds including the operation valid period is set. When setting the transformation effect mode, the remaining fluctuation time at the time when the transformation effect mode to be set is completed is determined (predicted). Then, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit set for each effect type, the shortest operation valid period is set regardless of the specified contents of the period selection table 222d. .. As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the development production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is set, the operation set before the operation valid period to be set in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The length of the display period (operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined in consideration of the operation status of the frame button 22 in the valid period, and the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 was not detected in the past. If is present, the set operation validity period tends to be long. More specifically, the larger the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, the longer the display period (operation valid period) is set. As a result, if the player does not positively press the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode is reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can positively press the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when the operation for the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is reset to 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, 1 may be subtracted from the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r increases, it becomes difficult to shorten the subsequent operation valid period. Therefore, the frame button 22 is used for the player during each operation valid period. You can get the motivation to press. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is 2 or more, the transformation effect mode of the same length (9 seconds) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is larger than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be lengthened as the counter value increases.

Next, the details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). Similar to the transformation effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the transformation effect selection table 222b provides an effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern accompanied by a continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. A data table referenced to determine.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment defines five types of effects, continuous transformation effects A2 to E2. The continuous transformation effect A2 is an effect type corresponding to the continuous transformation effect A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated effect counter 223n are the continuous transformation effect A. It is the same. Similarly, the continuous transformation effect B2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect B in the first embodiment, the continuous transformation effect C2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect C in the first embodiment, and the continuous transformation effect D2 corresponds to the first implementation. Corresponding to the continuous transformation effect D in the form, the continuous transformation effect E2 corresponds to the continuous transformation effect E in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the value of the associated effect counter 223n. Is the same as.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the continuous transformation effect A2, the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time is set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation valid period, notification mode) is set so that the remaining variation time at the timing when the final notification mode of the continuous transformation effect A2 ends is 39 seconds or more. Similarly, in the continuous transformation effect B2, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time is set to 34 seconds, in the continuous transformation effect C2, the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time is set to 29 seconds, and in the continuous transformation effect D2, the lower limit of the residual variation time is set. Is set to 24 seconds, and the lower limit of the remaining fluctuation time of the continuous transformation effect E2 is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit of these residual fluctuation times is set to a value obtained by adding 1 second to the effect time of the development effect corresponding to each effect type. That is, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, a transition effect of at least 1 second is performed, and a time during which the corresponding development effect can be executed is set. When the frame button 22 is pressed during all the operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, in addition to being able to display the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times, the remaining variation time is displayed on the transformation effect selection table 222b. It is configured so that the continuous transformation effect ends at the timing when it matches the specified lower limit value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60 (b), the details of the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. The development effect mode selection table 222c is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode of the development effect to be executed after the continuous transformation effect is completed, similarly to the development effect mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment. be.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment, the type of continuous transformation effect, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the effect mode (effect time) of the development effect are paired. It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, the development effect with an effect time of 38 seconds is selected. That is, if the variation display this time is a hit super reach, the hit development effect A2 with an effect time of 38 seconds is selected, and if the effect time is 38 seconds, the out-of-development effect A2 is selected.

Similarly, when the continuous transformation effect B2 is executed as the effect type, the hit development effect B2 or the out-of-development effect B2 is selected for the effect time of 33 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect C2 is executed, the continuous transformation effect C2 is executed. A development effect C2 with an effect time of 28 seconds or an out-of-development effect C2 is selected. Further, when the continuous transformation effect D2 is executed as the effect type, the hit development effect D2 or the out-of-development effect B2 is selected for the effect time of 23 seconds, and when the continuous transformation effect E2 is executed, the effect is produced. The development effect E2 with a time of 18 seconds or the out-of-development effect E2 is selected. In this way, by defining the effect type of the continuous transformation effect and the effect mode of the development effect in association with each other, the processing load when selecting the effect type of the development effect can be reduced.

Next, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment has a timer 223p during the display period and a non-pressed count counter with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the 223r, the pressed flag 223s, and the transition effect flag 223t are added. It is also different in that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

The timer 223p during the display period is a timer that measures the period from the start of the transformation effect mode of 1 to the end of the display period of the transformation effect mode. The value of the timer 223p during the display period is updated by 1 in the valid period process 2 executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

The non-pressed number counter 223r is a counter for counting the continuous number of times during the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The non-pressed count counter 223r adds 1 to the value when the frame button 22 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period (see S4514 in FIG. 63). The length of the display period (and operation valid period) of the transformation effect mode is determined based on the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r and the specified contents of the period selection table 222d.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of 1, and if it is on, it means that the press on the frame button 22 has been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has never been pressed during the operation valid period. The pressed flag 223s is set to ON when the push of the frame button 22 is first detected during the operation valid period in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Further, it is set to off after updating the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r at the end of the operation valid period (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the transition effect should be set when the display period of the transformation effect mode being executed ends. If this transition effect flag 223t is on, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the timing when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and if it is off, a new transformation effect mode is set. Means that it should be. This transition effect flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined that the transformation effect mode is the last transformation effect mode in the continuous transformation effect this time when setting a new transformation effect mode. That is, it is set to ON when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit of the residual fluctuation time specified for each effect type (see S5116 in FIG. 64). ..

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. The frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S4021) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and monitors the pressing of the frame button 22. , It is a process for performing control according to the pressed situation.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, in each process of S4101 and S4102, S4101 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , The same process as each process of S4102 is executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), then the pressing is performed. It is determined whether or not the completed flag 223s is on (S4111). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is on in the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes), it means that the pressing detected this time is not the first pressing in the operation valid period, so this processing is terminated as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4111, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4111: No), it means that the first pressing in the operation valid period is detected. Therefore, first, the pressed flag 223s is turned on. Is set to (S4112). Then, the value of the non-pressed count counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), the pressing effect corresponding to the pressing is set (S4114), and this process is terminated. The pressing effect is an effect for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed, for example, displaying an image in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is pressed. It is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and like the effect update process (see FIG. 36), the variable display is being executed. In this process, the effect mode is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time, the values of various timers, and the like.

Of the effect update processes 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311, the effect update processes (see FIG. 36) S4301 to S4304 in the first embodiment, respectively, The same processing as each processing of S4310 and S4311 is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the valid period flag 223e is on (S4304: Yes), during the valid period in the first embodiment. Instead of the process (see FIG. 37 (b)), the process 2 is executed during the valid period (S4321), and the present process is terminated. The valid period processing 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period, as in the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the first embodiment. The details of the process 2 (S4321) during the valid period will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is off in the process of S4304 (S4304: No), then the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0. (S4322), and if it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4322, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is larger than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process during the display period is executed (S4323), and this process is terminated. The process during the display period (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing 2 (S4321) will be described. As described above, the process 2 (S4321) during the valid period is a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period.

In the valid period processing 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the display period timer 223p are both subtracted by 1 and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (whether the operation valid period has reached the end timing) (S4512), and if it has not become 0 (S4512: No), this is the case. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4512, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f becomes 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off in the processing of S4513 (S4513: No), it means that the pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected during the current operation valid period, so that it is not. 1 is added to the value of the press count counter 223r to update (S4514), and the process shifts to S4515.

On the other hand, in the process of S4513, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is on (S4513: Yes), the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at least once during the operation valid period. , The process of S4514 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S4515. In the process of S4515, the end of the operation valid period is set by setting the valid period flag 223e to off, and the pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4515) to end this process.

By executing the process 2 during the valid period (see FIG. 63), the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r indicating the continuous number of times of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected can be appropriately updated. .. Therefore, the subsequent operation validity period can be set to an appropriate length.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the above-mentioned display period processing (S4323) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the processing during the display period (S4323).

In the display period processing (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the timer 223p during the display period is subtracted by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223p during the display period after the subtraction is 0. (S5102). If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the value of the timer 223p during the display period after subtraction is not 0 (S5102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the value of the timer 223p becomes 0 during the display period after subtraction (S5102: Yes), it means that the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is on (S5103), and if it is determined to be on (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. Therefore, first, the mode of the development effect corresponding to the current effect type is selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60B), and the data corresponding to the read development effect mode is developed. It is stored in the effect storage area 223 m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect to be set this time (S5105), and this process is performed. finish. By executing the process of S5105, the difference between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining variation time can be covered by the effect time of the transition effect, so that the end timing of the variation display and the end timing of the development effect can be covered. Can be matched with.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), it means that a new transformation effect mode should be set. Therefore, first, the non-pressed count counter 223r The display period of the transformation effect mode corresponding to the value of and the operation valid period are read from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether the read display period is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect set this time (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the current remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type.

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the display period of the transformation effect mode exceeds the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: No), the display period of the transformation effect mode is included in the effect period of the continuous transformation effect. Set the shortest display period of 5 seconds. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f (S5108). Next, the transformation effect mode of the type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), the transition effect flag 223t and the validity period flag 223e are both set to ON (S5110), and this process is performed. finish. That is, when a long operation valid period is selected and it is determined that the end timing of the transformation effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous transformation effect, the display period is switched to the shortest and the continuous transformation effect is terminated. ..

If it is determined in the process of S5107 that the end timing of the transformation effect mode is within the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read in the process of S5106 is displayed. In addition to setting the timer 223p during the period, the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the operation validity period is started by setting the validity period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

When the processing of S5112 is completed, next, the timing at which the display period read in the processing of S5106 elapses (the end timing of the transformation effect mode) is 5 seconds or later before the end of the effect time of the continuous transformation effect (lower limit). (S5113), and if it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more for the production period when the display period elapses (S5113:). No), the value of the transformation count counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the success notification mode, which ends in the display period set in the process of S5111, is set (S5115). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is 5 seconds or later before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation valid period set this time. The transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4 (S5117), and if it is determined that the value is 4, the process is shifted to S5114 and the fifth success. Set the execution of the notification mode. Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is five, and after the fifth success notification mode is set, the direct transition effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5117 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is not 4 (3 or less) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the processing of S5111 elapses, which is a failure. The execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the notification mode is set (S5118), and this process is terminated.

By executing the process during the display period, the length of the operation valid period can be changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect, and the frame button 22 is not pressed. The longer the operation validity period is continuous, the longer the operation validity period is set. With this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) is set for each production type only when the player positively presses the frame button 22. It is possible to reach the maximum number of times. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to perform the transformation up to the upper limit number of times, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the display period of the transformation effect mode of 1 is associated with each value of the non-pressed number counter 223r, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the tendency of the selected display period can be made different depending on the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. For example, it should be selected for each value of the non-pressing number counter 223r. It may be configured to specify a plurality of display period candidates in association with each other. Then, a display period of 1 may be selected from the candidates by lottery. Further, in the lottery for the display period, the larger the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r, the higher the ratio of selecting the longer display period may be. With this configuration, randomness can be added to the length of the set display period. Further, in this case, the display period that is easy to be selected may be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed but also to the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the second embodiment, the length of the operation valid period to be set is changed according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. It suffices if the player presses the frame button 22 so that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is more likely to be set. For example, the configuration may be such that the number of consecutive operation valid periods when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is counted. .. Then, the length of the set operation valid period may be shortened as the number of consecutive counts increases. Then, if the frame button 22 is positively pressed to increase the count value of the number of consecutive times and a shorter operation valid period is not set, the number of continuous transformations is continuously set before reaching the upper limit of the number of transformations set for each effect type. It may be configured so that the transformation effect is completed. With this configuration, as in the second embodiment described above, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to display more success notification modes. That is, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production.

In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected is counted within the continuous transformation effect of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is continuous in the past continuous transformation effect. It may be configured to take over the number of times and count. That is, the counter value of the non-pressed count counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect is held, and in the next continuous transformation effect, counting is started from the held value of the non-pressed count counter 223r. May be. In this case, the non-pressed number counter 223r itself may be held in the state at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect, or the value of the non-pressed number counter 223r is stored in a predetermined storage of the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous transformation effect. It may be configured to be saved in the area and the saved counter value may be set again for the non-pressed number counter 223r at the start of the continuous transformation effect. With this configuration, the player's operation status in the continuous transformation effect of 1 can be inherited from the next time onward, so that the influence when the operation is not performed can be further increased. Therefore, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of transformations is set for each production type of the continuous transformation effect, and the number of transformations is less than the upper limit and the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or more than the lower limit. When the operation validity period ends, the transformation is always successful (success notification mode is displayed).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of transformations is less than the upper limit, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode. In addition, the rate at which the success notification mode is displayed is configured so that the variable display that is a big hit is higher than the variable display that is out of order. As a result, when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is further improved as compared with the first embodiment. Further, the lottery executed by pressing the frame button 22 has a higher rate of displaying the success notification mode than the lottery executed by the elapse of the operation valid period.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. (See FIG. 14A) is different in that the transformation possibility determination table 222e is added.

The transformation possibility determination table 222e is referred to for determining whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the display condition of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied. Data table. The details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b).

FIG. 65B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the transformation possibility determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the transformation possibility determination table 222e, the variation type (whether it is a hit super reach or a missed super reach) of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and the operation is valid. The range of the counter value (random value) of the effect counter 223n, which determines the display of the success notification mode, is defined in association with each end condition of the period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a hit super reach and the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is used. The range of "0 to 79" is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 80, so the operation is performed during the execution of the hit super reach. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 80% (80/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of range and the super reach is detected and the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. ing. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

In this way, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%, whereas even if the operation valid period ends during the execution of the off super reach, the success notification mode is displayed. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50%, the higher the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the possibility that the hit super reach is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation effect in the hope that the success notification mode will continue more times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the variation type is a hit super reach and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is "0 to 49". The range of "is specified. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 50, so the operation is performed during the execution of the winning super reach. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 50% (50/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of range and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the button 22, the range of "60 to 99" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223n. .. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) that are determined to display the success notification mode is 40. The rate at which the success notification mode is displayed when the validity period ends is 40% (40/100).

In this way, when the operation valid period ends during the execution of the winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%, whereas even if the operation valid period ends during the execution of the off super reach, the success notification mode is displayed. The success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. That is, the difference in the ratio at which the display of the success notification mode is determined between the case of the hit super reach and the case of the off super reach, as compared with the case where the operation valid period ends due to the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22. Is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the frame button 22, the jackpot expectation is not so high even if the success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to estimate the jackpot expectation more accurately during the execution of the continuous transformation effect.

Further, when the operation valid period is elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even during the execution of the hit super reach. That is, it is more difficult to display the success notification mode than when the operation valid period ends by detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 so much plays a game, even if a big hit occurs, the continuous transformation effect can be easily completed with a relatively small number of display times of the success notification mode. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of cases where a big hit is achieved with a small number of display times of the success notification mode, even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of display times of the success notification mode, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S4031).

The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is an operation valid period. This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when a press on the frame button 22 is detected during the period.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66), in each of the processes S4101 and S4102, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 34) S4101 and S4102 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed. Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the first embodiment is performed. Instead of the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the form, the transformation setting process 3 is executed (S4121), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 33). The details of the transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 3 (S4121). This transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is a process for setting the display of the corresponding notification mode according to the remaining fluctuation time, the number of transformations, and the like, as in the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. be.

Of the transformation setting processes 3 (see FIG. 67), in each of the processes S4201 to S4208 and S421-S4212, the transformation setting processes (see FIG. 35) S4201 to S4208 and S421-S4212 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number of transformations corresponding to the effect type of the continuous transformation effect this time. (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is within the period in which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value specified for each effect type.

In the process of S4221, when it is determined that the period during which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformed) is not possible (S4221: No), the process is performed to set the failure notification mode and select the effect type of the development effect. To S4204. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4221 that the display of the success notification mode is within the settable period (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation possibility determination table 222e (see FIG. 66 (b)) is displayed. The value of the effect counter 223n is read out (S4222). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the display determination (successful transformation) of the success notification mode defined in the transformation possibility determination table 222e (S4223).

In the process of S4223, if it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process shifts to S4210 in order to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process shifts to S4204 in order to display the failure notification mode.

By this transformation setting process 3, whether or not to display the success notification mode can be drawn with a lottery probability according to the type of variable display and the end condition of the operation valid period, so that it is based on the number of times the success notification mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the result of this variation display will be a hit. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the operation valid period ends and to play the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined differs depending on the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and the case becomes a big hit. The configuration is such that the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of disconnection. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed and perform the game. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible, and the player who wants to more accurately determine the expected degree of the jackpot is positively pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production.

Further, also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, by pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period, the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times set for each effect type. It is configured to be possible. That is, in the third embodiment, when the player positively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period in the middle and continues to win the lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode. , The configuration is such that the success notification mode can be displayed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, as compared with the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be smaller. In other words, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to be relatively small regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, so even if the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of times, there is a sense of expectation that it will be a hit. Can be embraced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the continuous transformation production.

Further, in the third embodiment, the operation valid period ends based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22, and the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode is different. Then, when the operation valid period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, there is a difference in the lottery probability in which the display of the success notification mode is determined between the case of winning super reach and the case of losing super reach. It is configured to be less. With this configuration, if the operation valid period has elapsed without pressing the frame button 22, the jackpot expectation will not be so high even if the success notification mode is displayed, so the continuous transformation effect is being executed. It is possible to positively press the frame button 22 for a player who wants to estimate the jackpot expectation more accurately.

In the third embodiment, if the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode is missed, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation effect is terminated, but the continuous transformation effect is not necessarily terminated. You don't have to. For example, instead of setting the number of times to display the success notification mode, the upper limit of the number of times to set the operation validity period is set, and the continuous transformation effect is continued even if the failure notification mode is displayed until the upper limit is reached. It may be configured to be set (a new operation validity period is set after the end of the failure notification mode). With this configuration, the lottery for displaying the success notification mode can be performed more times. Further, by positively pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the operation valid period, it is possible to perform the display lottery of the success notification mode more times. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict whether the success notification mode is a hit or a miss from the displayed ratio. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be pressed more positively in the continuous transformation effect.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the success notification mode is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed, as compared with the case where the operation valid period elapses without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. The winning probability in the lottery of whether to display or not was configured to be high, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, but the lottery of the special symbol is missed. May be configured so that the winning probabilities are the same regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation can be further increased, so that the player can press the frame button 22 more positively. Can be made to. Further, for example, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while when the special symbol lottery is missed, the frame button 22 is pressed to win. It may be configured so that the probability is low. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the jackpot expectation can be further increased. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode may be configured to depend only on the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, whether or not to display the success notification mode with the same probability regardless of whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period or the operation valid period elapses without detecting the press of the frame button 22. It may be configured to perform a lottery.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. In the third embodiment described above, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode, and when the lottery is won, the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, the lottery probability that the display decision of the success notification mode is made is set higher in the execution of the winning super reach than in the execution of the out-of-order super reach. As a result, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the player's expectation for a big hit can be further improved.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during the predetermined period (operation valid period of the first half two times) in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the pressing state (player's operation state) for the frame button 22 is determined, and the said The rate at which the success notification mode is set is variable according to the discrimination result. That is, in the continuous transformation effect, it is determined whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 when the operation valid period is set, and the degree of expectation of whether or not the player is a hit is suggested according to the determination result. The method (selection rate when selecting the notification mode) is different.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The third is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. First, the details of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. First, FIG. 68A is a block diagram showing a development effect mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the development effect mode selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment corresponds to the development effect mode to be selected for each value of the transformation number counter 223 g and the variation type of the variation display. It is specified with.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the development effect can be determined according to the value of the transformation count counter 223 g, as in the above-described second embodiment, in the fourth embodiment, the operation valid period is not interrupted in the middle. This is because it is said. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the operation valid period is always set to 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the value of the transformation count counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining fluctuation time. For example, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is 3 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is 2 times, so that the failure notification mode is displayed. The elapsed time at the time of setting is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 3 + 1 seconds x 2 until the continuous transformation effect is started). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, if 1 second, which is the display period of the failure notification mode, and 1 second, which is the display period of the transition effect, are added, if the effect of 30 seconds is executed as the development effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the development effect Can be matched with.

Similarly, if the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation valid period for 5 seconds is 5 times and the success notification mode for 1 second is 4 times. The elapsed time at the time of setting the display is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 5 + 1 seconds x 4). That is, the remaining fluctuation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, by executing the development effect of 18 seconds in which the failure notification mode and the effect time of the transition effect are reduced, the end timing of the development effect can be adjusted to the end timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the development effect mode selection table 222c, the development effect with an effect time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value “2” of the transformation number counter 223 g. That is, the hit development effect A4 having an effect time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect A4 having an effect time of 30 seconds is defined with respect to the out-of-super reach.

Similarly, with respect to the value "3" of the transformation count counter 223 g, a development effect with an effect time of 24 seconds is defined in association with the value "3". That is, the hit development effect B4 having an effect time of 24 seconds is associated with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect B4 with an effect time of 24 seconds is specified with respect to the out-of-super reach. Further, the development effect with an effect time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the value "4,5" of the transformation number counter 223 g. That is, the hit development performance C4 having an effect time of 18 seconds is defined in association with the hit super reach, and the out-of-development effect C4 having an effect time of 18 seconds is defined with respect to the out-of-super reach.

In this way, by referring to the development effect mode selection table 222c, the type of development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time can be determined according to the value of the transformation number counter 223 g, so that the end timing of the development effect can be determined. And the end timing of the variable display can be matched.

Next, the details of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (d). First, FIG. 68B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the transformation possibility determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment is determined when it is determined that the player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game. , When it is determined that the pressing tendency table 222e1 used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode and the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 are playing the game, the success notification is performed. It is composed of at least a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used for determining whether or not to display an aspect.

In the fourth embodiment, after the start of the continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player is determined over the two operation valid periods. That is, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing the game. In addition, in order to determine the tendency of the player, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end in the first two operation valid periods. That is, it is configured so that the failure notification mode is displayed before the tendency of the player is determined, and the continuous transformation effect is not terminated.

FIG. 68 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the pressing tendency table 222e1 is determined to display the success notification mode for each of the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect of 1 and the variation type, the effect counter 223n. The value of is specified in association with each other.

Specifically, when the variation type is a hit super reach, "0 to 79" is defined as the range of the value of the effect counter 223n for the 3rd to 5th operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. There is. As a result, when the third to fifth operation valid periods of the continuous transformation effect are completed, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of the range and the super reach is specified, "0 to 59" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. "0 to 39" is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and "0 to 19" corresponds to the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation valid period. It is specified with.

Therefore, when the out-of-order super reach is executed, it becomes difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode as compared with the hit super reach. Further, as the operation validity period increases, it becomes more difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode. Therefore, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases. Therefore, it is possible to have the player who tends to press the frame button 22 play the game with the expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

FIG. 68 (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)). That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the value of the effect counter 223n, which is determined to display the success notification mode, is associated with each of the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect 1 and the variation type. It is stipulated.

Specifically, when the variation type is a hit super reach, "0 to 39" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth time. "0 to 79" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the operation valid period of, and "0 to 39" is defined as the value range of the effect counter 223n with respect to the fifth operation valid period. Is specified in association with each other. That is, during the execution of the hit super reach, it becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation valid periods, while the end of the even-numbered (fourth) operation valid period. Sometimes it becomes easier to set the success notification mode.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of the range and the super reach is specified, "0 to 69" is defined in association with the value range of the effect counter 223n for the third operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. “0 to 49” is associated with the period as the value range of the effect counter 223n, and “0 to 69” corresponds to the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation valid period. It is specified with. That is, during the execution of the out-of-order super reach, contrary to the case of the hit super reach, the success notification mode is likely to be set at the end of the odd-numbered (third and fifth) operation valid periods, while the even-numbered super reach is executed. At the end of the (fourth) operation validity period, it becomes difficult to set the success notification mode.

Therefore, after the odd-numbered operation valid period ends, the expectation that the failure notification mode is displayed will be a big hit, while the success notification mode will be displayed after the even-numbered operation valid period ends. The expectation that it will be a big hit will increase. Therefore, in the odd-numbered operation valid period, the game can be played with the expectation that the failure notification mode will be displayed after the end of the period, while in the even-numbered operation valid period, after the end of the period. The game can be played with the expectation that the success notification mode will be displayed.

As described above, the lottery method (table used for the lottery) for displaying the success notification mode is different between the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to not press it easily. As a result, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a game property in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases. On the other hand, when a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 is playing a game, the jackpot expectation decreases when the success notification mode is displayed at odd-numbered times, and the success notification mode is displayed at even-numbered times. If this is done, it is possible to provide a playability that improves the expectation of a big hit.

Further, during the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot (gaming property) can be switched, the player can be made to select the preferred suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method according to the taste of each player. Further, even if one is tired of the suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, only the continuous transformation effect having a maximum number of transformations of 5 is used as the type of continuous transformation effect so that the expectation of a big hit can be more accurately determined from the display timing of the success notification mode. It is configured to be set. With this configuration, the case where the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to the case where the success notification mode display lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e is missed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment has the pressed flag 223s and pressed with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). It differs from the number counter 223u in that it is provided.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period of 1, as in the second embodiment. Further, the press count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation valid periods in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected, out of the operation valid periods of the first half of the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the press count counter 223u, the tendency of the player (whether or not the player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing the game) is determined.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. This frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, and the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored and the pressing is performed. This is a process for displaying the corresponding effect when it is detected.

Of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S4101 and S4102, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4101 and S4102 is executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), is the pressed flag 223s turned on? If it is determined whether or not the button is pressed (S4131) and the pressed flag 223s is on (S4131: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4131, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed flag 223s is set to on (S4132), and then 1 is set to the value of the pressed count counter 223u. Add and update (S4133). Then, a pressing effect for notifying the player that the pressing has been detected is set (S4134), and this processing is terminated. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the pressing number counter 223u can be updated in response to the pressing of the frame button 22, so that the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 can be determined. It can be determined according to the value of the press count counter 223u.

Next, the process 4 (S4331) during the valid period will be described with reference to FIG. 71. This valid period processing 4 (S4331) is a process executed in place of the valid period processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the end of the operation valid period. This is a process for performing the corresponding control at the timing.

Of the treatments during the valid period 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the treatments of S4501 and S4502 are the same as the treatments during the valid period (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment, respectively. Will be executed. Further, in the process 4 during the valid period (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction is 0 in the process of S4502 (S4502: Yes), then , The pressed flag 223s is set to off (S4531), and the transformation setting process 4 is executed (S4532). This transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting a notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, as in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. The details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the processing of S4532 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2. (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, after the first and second operation valid periods have ended, the success notification mode is always displayed (successful transformation). Then, the tendency of the player is determined by the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 in the two operation valid periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to determine the tendency of the player to press (whether it is the timing when the operation valid period of the first two times has ended).

If it is determined in the process of S4533 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 2, it is not the timing to determine the tendency of the player to press, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4533, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), whether or not to determine the tendency of the player to press and display the success notification mode. The processes of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for the lottery are executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534), and when it is determined that the value of the press count counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), the success notification mode is set. A pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68 (c)) is set as a table used for a lottery (determination of whether or not transformation is possible) for display or not (S4535), and this process is terminated. When the value of the press count counter 223u is 2, it means that the player presses the frame button 22 both times during the operation valid period of the first half of the continuous transformation effect, so that the frame button is positively pressed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player who presses 22 is playing the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4534 that the value of the press count counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), it is highly possible that a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 is playing the game. As a table used for lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode, a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68 (d)) is set (S4536), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the transformation setting process 4 (S4532) described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 4 (S4532). In each of the transformation setting processes 4 (S4532), S4201, S4202, S4206, and S421-S4212, S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 of the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S4212 is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation count counter 223 g read in the process of S4202 is 2 or more (see FIG. 72). S4231). If it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), either of the operation valid periods of the first half of the continuous transformation effect 4 is performed in the transformation setting process 4 this time. It means that it was executed when it was finished. As described above, the success notification mode is always displayed after the first half of the two operation valid periods has expired. In this case, the processing of S421 to S4212 for setting the success notification mode is executed, and this processing is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4231 that the value of the transformation count counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), it is set in the process 4 (see FIG. 71) during the valid period in the transformation possibility determination table 222e. The table (either the pressing tendency table 222e1 or the non-pressing tendency table 222e2) and the value of the effect counter 223n are read out (S4222). As described above, by referring to the pressing tendency table 222e1 to determine whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed, the gameability (suggestion of the degree of expectation) increases as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases. Method) can be realized. On the other hand, by determining whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed by referring to the non-pressing tendency table 222e2, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation validity period, the jackpot expectation is lowered, and the even-numbered operation is performed. When the success notification mode is displayed after the valid period, it is possible to realize a playability (method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high.

When the processing of S4222 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the read effect counter 223n is the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) specified in the table (S4223), and succeeds. If the counter value corresponds to the display of the notification mode (successful transformation) (S4223: Yes), the process of S421 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4223, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is out of the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the development effect mode selection table. From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of the development effect corresponding to the variation type of the variation display of this time are read out (S4322). Next, the data corresponding to the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and the failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and this process is terminated.

By executing this transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), the method of suggesting the degree of expectation that is a big hit can be changed according to the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22, so that the game becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being lost.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, whether or not the player who is currently playing the game tends to press the frame button 22 during the predetermined period in the continuous transformation effect. Is configured so that it can be discriminated (identified). The method of suggesting the degree of expectation (playability) in the continuous advance notice effect is different between the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 during the operation valid period and the player who does not. That is, when it is determined that the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game, the larger the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of times the transformation is successful), the bigger the hit. It is configured to set a suggestion method that raises expectations. On the other hand, when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, if the success notification mode is displayed after the odd-numbered operation valid period, the expectation of a big hit decreases. , When the success notification mode is displayed after the even-numbered operation validity period, a suggestion method for improving the expectation of a big hit is set.

With such a configuration, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, during the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. That is, since the method of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot (gaming property) can be switched, the player can be made to select the preferred suggestion method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method according to the taste of each player. Further, even if one is tired of the suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined during the first half of the two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect, but the method for determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. The tendency of the player may be determined by the pressing state in the first operation valid period. Thereby, in the continuous transformation effect, it is possible to execute the suggestion method according to the tendency of each player for a larger number of times. Further, on the contrary, the configuration may be such that the tendency of the player is determined according to the pressing state over the operation valid period of three times or more. With such a configuration, the tendency of the player can be determined more accurately. Further, a period for determining the tendency of the player may be provided separately from the operation valid period set in the continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before starting the continuous transformation effect, an effect (pressing effect) for urging the frame button 22 to be pressed is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing status in the one or more pressing effects, the effect is displayed. It may be configured to determine the tendency of the player. With this configuration, it is possible to set all the notification modes of the continuous transformation effect to the suggestion method according to the tendency of the player.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to 5 times. That is, the failure notification mode is displayed only when the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, is missed. It is not something that can be done. Similar to each of the above embodiments, a plurality of types having different maximum number of transformations may be provided. With this configuration, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, but the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the failure notification mode may be displayed. Therefore, assuming that the failure notification mode is determined by the lottery based on the transformation possibility determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at the timing when the expectation of the jackpot becomes low, the player's expectation for the jackpot is high. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the fourth embodiment, the player who positively presses the frame button 22 is configured so that the higher the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation that the frame button 22 will be a big hit, while the frame button 22 For players who tend not to press too much, the expectation that a big hit will be high when the continuous transformation effect is completed at the odd number of times is not limited to this. It suffices if the method of suggesting the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the player actively presses the frame button 22 or the player who does not press the frame button 22 so much. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect is completed in the even number of times, the expectation of a big hit is high, while for the player who does not press the frame button 22, the expectation of a big hit is so small that the continuous transformation effect is completed with a small number of transformations. May be configured to be high. In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to making the tendency of the number of transformations different, the player can refer to the law of the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is increased when the transformation is successful (success notification mode is displayed). It may be configured to be different according to the tendency of. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811. That is, the rear image may be configured so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of wilderness → mountain → sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who tends not to press the frame button 22, the rear image may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation by the facial expression of the character 811 instead of setting it randomly. That is, the facial expression of the character 811 may be configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of expressionless → smiling → angry face. Further, for example, instead of changing the suggestion method during the execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the tendency of the player, or in addition, the content of the development effect may be different according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who positively presses the frame button 22, the more the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the development effect, the higher the expectation that it will be a big hit, while the frame In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the expectation of a big hit may be.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82. In the fourth embodiment described above, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the method of notifying the jackpot expectation degree is different depending on the discriminating result.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the mode of the continuous transformation effect is changed from the situation where the player presses the frame button 22 in the past continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for the player who positively presses the frame button 22, the effect mode in which the operation valid period is set a relatively large number of times is executed. On the other hand, for the player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22, instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set, a long development effect is set. As a result, the player who positively presses the frame button 22 is given an opportunity to press the frame button 22 more times, while the player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is given an opportunity to press the frame button 22. Instead of reducing it, you can entertain the development production for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the taste of each player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous transformation effect, if the set number of times (2 times or 5 times) of the operation valid period remains, the continuous transformation effect is terminated. The configuration is such that the operation validity period is set again without doing so. That is, it is prevented (suppressed) that the operation valid period ends in a small number of times even though the player who tends to positively press the frame button 22 is playing the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The fourth regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22, and the tendency to positively press the frame button 22 according to the determination result (participation frequency is high). The configuration is such that a larger operation validity period is set for the player of (tendency). Further, for the player who tends not to press the frame button 22 so much (the tendency that the participation frequency is low), the number of times the operation valid period is set is reduced, while the effect time of the development effect is extended. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the development effect (development effect for low participation frequency) in which the effect time is extended, the character 811 searches the cave and collects items. Is configured to execute. The discovered item favors the character 811 in the subsequent battle with the monster 812. The effect of exploring this cave (search effect) is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811 (the more items there are, the easier it is to win the monster 812). is doing). That is, when the operation valid period is set to a small number of times for a player who participates infrequently, the number of executions of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is reduced depending on whether or not the character 811 is transformed, but the search effect is performed. The number of items discovered by the character 811 can be used to suggest the degree of expectation. As a result, even when the number of times the operation valid period is set is small, it is possible to give an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the number of times of setting is large.

FIG. 73A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the above-mentioned search effect. As shown in FIG. 73A, when the search effect is started, the effect that the character 811 progresses toward the depth of the cave is displayed. Further, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, the characters "search mode" and the characters "expectation level UP as the item is GET!" Are displayed. Further, the characters "item x 0" are displayed in the display area HR4 displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm. The characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811. The character 811 can discover up to three items in one search effect.

FIG. 73B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 discovers an item during the execution of the search effect. In this case, the effect that the character 811 opens the treasure box displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and the item appears from the treasure box. Further, on the right side of the treasure box, a display area HR5 for notifying the type of the acquired item is displayed. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the characters "power-up drink GET !!" are displayed for the display area HR5. Further, the characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated to "item x 1". The numbers displayed in the display area HR4 can indicate the degree of expectation that the player will be a big hit. In the search effect, there is a possibility that the character 811 finds the treasure box, but the item does not appear. That is, in the search effect, the treasure box is basically found three times, and the degree of expectation is suggested by how many times the item is found out of the three times.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the player's participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect is low, the search effect is executed instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect. In this search effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811. As a result, even when the number of times the operation valid period is set is small, it is possible to give an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation equivalent to the case where the number of times of setting is large.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the time course of the effect mode will be described when it is determined that the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is low and when it is determined that the participation frequency is high. First, with reference to FIG. 74 (a), a change with time of the effect mode when the participation frequency of the player is low will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, the operation valid period is set only twice. That is, the operation valid period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not completed until the operation valid period of the specified number of times is set. .. This makes it possible to more accurately estimate the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed.

When the display period of the second notification mode ends, a one-second transition effect is then set. When the transition production is completed, the development production is started. In the development effect when the participation frequency is low, first, a search effect for 15 seconds (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be a big hit is executed depending on the number of items discovered by the character 811. Then, when the production period of 15 seconds elapses, the production in which the battle with the monster 812 is performed is executed. In the example of FIG. 74 (a), the hit development effect A5 in which the monster 812 is defeated is executed during the effect period of 23 seconds.

In this way, when the participation frequency is low, the two operation validity periods set in the continuous transformation effect give two opportunities to suggest the jackpot expectation. In addition, the search effect gives three chances to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, a total of 5 opportunities are given to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the change with time of the effect mode when it is determined that the participation frequency of the player is high will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the player frequently participates, the operation valid period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed 5 times each. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, the success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and the failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. The success notification mode is displayed as the fourth and fifth notification modes. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the fifth embodiment, the operation valid period is not terminated even when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period. As a result, the production time of the continuous transformation effect can be fixed, so that the production time of the development effect executed after that can also be fixed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare various modes for each production time of the development effect, the storage capacity for displaying the development effect can be reduced.

When the display period of the fifth notification mode ends, the transition effect is displayed, and then the development effect A5 with an effect time of 23 seconds is displayed. In this way, when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation validity period is always set 5 times in the continuous transformation effect, so there is an opportunity to suggest the jackpot expectation as in the case where the participation frequency is low. Given times.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. First, FIG. 75A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment in that the validity period number table 222f is added.

The valid period number table 222f is a data table in which the number of operation valid periods set in the continuous transformation effect is defined for each state of the pressing tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period). If the pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player actively participates in the continuous transformation effect, and if it is off, it means that the player is a player who participates less frequently in the continuous transformation effect. ..

The details of the valid period number table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), "5 times" is defined as the number of times the operation valid period is set for the state "on" of the pressing tendency flag 223y. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation valid period is set five times in the continuous transformation effect. .. Of the notification modes displayed after the set five operation validity periods have expired, the number of times (ratio) that the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot to the player. ..

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, in the case of a big hit, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after each operation valid period ends, but it is out of the question. In this case, the transformation possibility determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the state "off" of the pressing tendency flag 223y is defined by associating "twice" as the number of times the operation valid period is set. Therefore, when the player who participates in the continuous transformation effect infrequently (the frequency of pressing the frame button 22 is low) is playing the game, the operation valid period is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. Of the notification modes displayed after the set two operation validity periods have expired, the number of times (ratio) that the success notification mode is displayed can indicate the degree of expectation for the jackpot to the player. ..

When the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the number of times the operation valid period is set is reduced by 3 times as compared with the case of a player who participates frequently. That is, the number of times the jackpot expectation is suggested in the continuous transformation effect is reduced. In order to cover this decrease in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) that suggests the degree of expectation in the development effect. As a result, even for a player who participates less frequently, it is possible to guarantee the number of suggested jackpot expectations equivalent to that of a player who participates more frequently. Further, by lengthening the effect time of the development effect instead of reducing the number of times the operation valid period is set, it is possible to provide an effect mode that suits the taste of the player who does not want to press the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment has a valid period number counter 223w, a notification mode timer 223x, and a pressing tendency flag 223y with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69). And a total number of presses counter 223aa and a total valid period counter 223ab are added at least. Further, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j have been deleted.

The valid period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times the operation valid period is set in the continuous transformation effect of 1. The value of the valid period number counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Further, each time a new operation validity period is set, the value is added by 1 (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the valid period number counter 223w is used for determining whether to newly set the operation valid period or set the transition effect each time the display period of the notification mode elapses. That is, if the value of the valid period count counter 223w is less than the set number of operation valid periods specified in the valid period count table 222f, a new operation valid period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the valid period number counter 223w matches the set number of times specified in the valid period number table 222f, the start of the transition effect is set.

The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the operation valid period ends. The notification mode timer 223x is set with a timer value corresponding to 1 second each time the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation valid period or a transition effect. ..

The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If this pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively press the frame button 22), and if it is off, it means that the player has a tendency to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. It means that the frequency of participation in continuous transformation production is low. The participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of times the player has pressed (participated in) the frame button 22 to the number of times the total operation valid period has been set. Specifically, when the operation validity period when the player presses the frame button 22 exceeds 80% of the total, the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game. Determine. The pressing tendency flag 223y is updated every time the continuous transformation effect of 1 is completed, according to the participation status of the player (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

The total number of times of pressing counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of times of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. That is, the number of operation valid periods accompanied by pressing all the frame buttons 22 after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted by the total pressing number counter 223aa. The ratio of pressing the frame button 22 based on the counter value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the number of all operation valid periods set after the power is turned on (counter value of the total valid period counter 223ab described later). (Tendency of the player) is determined. The total number of presses counter 223aa is updated every time the continuous transformation effect of 1 is completed, according to the participation status of the player (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

The total valid period count counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation valid periods. That is, the number of times of all operation valid periods after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted by the total valid period number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab and the value of the total pressing number counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (the tendency of the player) is determined. Similar to the total number of presses counter 223aa, the total valid period counter 223ab responds to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect each time one continuous transformation effect is completed. (See S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, the effect update process 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The effect update process 5 (S4051) is the same as the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), during the execution of the variation display, the remaining variation time and the values of various timers. It is a process for changing the effect mode according to the above.

Of the effect update processes 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310, the effect update processes (see FIG. 36) S4301, S4302, respectively, in the fourth embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S4304 and S4310 is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is on (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is set. The transformation effect start determination process 5 for determining is executed (S4341), and this process ends. The details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (a).

Further, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is on in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes), the end timing of the valid period is determined. This process is terminated by executing the process 5 during the valid period (S4342). The details of the process 5 (S4342) during the valid period will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), then it is determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is larger than 0 (S4343). If it is a value larger than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that the display period of the notification mode is in progress. End the process. The details of the processing in the notification mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

If it is determined in the process of S4343 that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), is the value of the transition effect time timer 223k larger than 0 (during the display time of the transition effect)? (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is larger than 0 (S4310: Yes), the transition effect in-process 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this process is terminated. The details of the transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). The transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect, as in the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37 (a)) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process for.

Of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4401, S4402, and S4404, the transformation effect start determination process (FIG. 37 (a)) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. )) The same processes as those of S4401, S4402, and S4404 are executed.

Further, in the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f. At the same time, the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set in the value of the valid period count counter 223w (S4412), and the process shifts to S4404.

By executing the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78 (a)) in the fifth embodiment, the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set at the same timing each time (at the time when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), and the start of the continuous transformation effect can be set. The count of the valid period count counter 223w can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78 (b), the details of the above-mentioned in-valid period processing 5 (S4342) will be described. Similar to the valid period processing 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the valid period processing 5 (S4342) determines the end timing of the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period ends, the operation valid period ends. This is a process for displaying the corresponding notification mode.

Of the effective period treatment 5 (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S4501, S4502, and S4531, the effective period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4501, S4502, and S4531 is executed. Further, in the process 5 during the valid period (see FIG. 78 (b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4502 is completed, the fourth mode is set in order to set the display of either the success notification mode or the failure notification mode. Instead of the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, the transformation setting process 5 is executed (S4541), and this process is terminated. The details of the transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the transformation setting process 5 (S4541). In each of the transformation setting processes 5 (S4541), S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233, S4201, S4202, and S4210 of the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. , S4211, S4222, S4223, S4233, and the same processing as each processing is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4233 or S4211 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x (see FIG. 79). S4241), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the above-mentioned processing in the notification mode (S4344) will be described. As described above, the processing in the notification mode (S4344) is a processing for determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

In this notification mode processing (see FIG. 80), first, the value of the notification mode timer 223x is subtracted by 1 (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the subtracted timer value becomes 0 (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 in the processing of S5202 (S5202: No), it means that the display time of the notification mode (1 second) has not elapsed. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after subtraction becomes 0 (S5202: Yes), a process for setting either a new operation valid period or a transition effect is performed. Run. Specifically, the pressing tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are read out (S5203), and these are compared with the specified contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

As a result of comparison by the processing of S5204, it was determined whether or not the value of the valid period count counter 223w matches the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205), and it was determined that the value matches the upper limit value. In that case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, the timer value corresponding to 1 second is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), the display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the valid period counter 223w does not match the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation valid period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the value of the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the valid period count counter 223w (S5209), and this process is terminated.

By executing this processing in the notification mode (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of transition effect or new mode) is performed. Operation validity period can be set).

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the above-mentioned transition effect processing 5 (S4345) will be described. This transition effect in-process 5 (S4345) is executed in place of the transition effect in-process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the transition effect processing 5 (see FIG. 81), the processes S4801 and S4802 are the same as the processes S4801 and S4802 of the transition effect process (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

Further, in the transition effect in-process 5 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after subtraction becomes 0 (S4802: Yes). Next, it is determined whether the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). If it is determined in the process of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is on (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is started from the effect time after the search effect (search mode) is completed. (S4812), and the process shifts to S4814.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4811 that the pressing tendency flag 223y is off (S4811: No), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process is transferred to S4814.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether to start the development effect from the search effect or after the end of the search effect, depending on the state of the pressing tendency flag 223y (the tendency of the player). As a result, it is possible to execute a development effect that matches the remaining fluctuation time.

After the processing of S4812 or S4813, the pressing tendency updating process for updating the player's tendency (state of the pressing tendency flag 223y) according to the participation frequency of the player in this continuous transformation effect is executed (S4814). ). The details of this pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. 82. After the processing of S4814, the transformation effect flag 223h is set to off (S4815), the value of the transformation count counter 223g and the value of the valid period counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the details of the above-mentioned pressing tendency updating process (S4814) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this pressing tendency update process (S4814). In the pressing tendency update process (S4814), first, by adding the value of the valid period count counter 223w to the value of the total valid period count counter 223ab, the number of operation valid periods set in this continuous transformation effect is set. It is reflected in the set number of times of the total operation validity period (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the press count counter 223u to the value of the total press count counter 223aa, the number of times of the operation valid period in which the press on the frame button 22 is detected in this continuous transformation effect is pressed against the frame button 22. Is reflected in the total number of detected operation valid periods (S5302).

When the processing of S5302 is completed, next, a value obtained by dividing the value of the updated total number of presses counter 223aa by the value of the updated total valid period counter 223ab is calculated (S5303), and the calculated value is 0. It is determined whether the value is larger than .8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, if it is determined that the calculated value is larger than 0.8 (S5304), when the operation valid period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (That is, the player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game), so the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), the player who presses the frame button 22 relatively infrequently during the operation valid period is the game. Therefore, the pressing tendency flag 223y is set to off (S5306), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pressing tendency update process (see FIG. 82), each time the continuous transformation effect is completed, the player's tendency can be updated in consideration of the participation status of the player in the continuous transformation effect. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect (the ratio of the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of operation valid periods) is used. Therefore, the configuration is such that the production mode in the continuous transformation production is different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the number of times (5) in the continuous transformation effect is relatively large. Instead of setting the operation validity period of (times), it is configured to shorten the production time of the development production. On the other hand, when a player who does not participate much in the continuous transformation effect (does not press the frame button 22 much during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the operation is performed a relatively small number of times (twice) in the continuous transformation effect. Instead of setting the validity period, it is configured to lengthen the production time of the development production. With this configuration, players who tend to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect can be given more opportunities to participate in the continuous transformation effect. On the other hand, for players who tend not to participate in the continuous transformation production very much, the chances of participating in the continuous transformation production can be reduced, and the development production can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, the effect can be suitably set according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the tendency of the player is determined by the ratio of the operation valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected to the number of times of all the operation valid periods set after the power is turned on. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a function for identifying a player who is playing a game, and each time it is determined (authenticated) that a different player has started the game, the tendency of the player is renewed. It may be configured to discriminate between. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started the game, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab may be reset to 0. As a result, the tendency of each player can be determined more accurately, so that it is possible to realize an effect that is more in line with the tendency of the player. Examples of the function for identifying the player who is playing the game include a known face authentication function, a fingerprint authentication function, a voiceprint authentication function, and the like. Further, the information of the player who is currently playing the game may be obtained from the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, while the information indicating the type of the card inserted in the card unit (for example, the serial number of the card or the member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 side can output the information. , The type of card can be identified from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be determined that the same player is playing the game while the same card is inserted.

Further, for a known gaming system composed of a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, tablet, etc.) possessed by a player, a server capable of communicating with the mobile terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 capable of communicating with the server. May be applied. That is, in the server, individual information for each player (game history, type and number of generated effects, etc.) is accumulated, and the information accumulated in the server is stored in the corresponding mobile terminal (for each player). For a gaming system configured to be able to browse through a mobile terminal that accessed the server with the assigned login ID and password, and to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on the accumulated information. May be applied. More specifically, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab described above are included in the game history information accumulated on the server side. Then, when the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa stored (stored) in the server and the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab are used as the value of the pachinko machine 10 to start the game. By reflecting on the above, it is possible to reflect the percentage of players participating in the continuous transformation effect on different days or on different platforms. Therefore, even if the date and time when the game is played or the table (hall) where the game is played is changed, the tendency of each player can be accurately determined and the effect mode suitable for the player's tendency can be set.

In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting the server information on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on the coding rules common to the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. The method can be mentioned. That is, when starting a game, a mobile terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts the game history and the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the above-mentioned coding rules. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into the value of the total number of presses counter 223aa, the value of the total valid period counter 223ab, etc., and set in the RAM 223, etc., based on the above-mentioned coding rule. do. As a result, the operator of the mobile terminal can start the game from the state of the game history immediately after the previous game is finished. When ending the game, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the end of the game (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the end of the game on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10). Etc.). Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the value of the current total number of presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-mentioned coding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 To display. The displayed password is output to the server by the mobile terminal connected to the server. On the server side, the password is converted into the information corresponding to the game history, and the information corresponding to the operator of the connected mobile terminal is updated. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 and the server can share and update individual information for each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the continuous transformation effect is set depending on whether or not the number of operation valid periods in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of operation valid periods. Although the display is configured to change the effect mode (the number of times the operation valid period is set and the mode of the development effect), the threshold value for changing the effect mode is not limited to 80% and may be arbitrarily set. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the effect mode to be set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and the case of 80% or less. Although it was configured to switch between the effect mode set to (easily set), the player's tendency may be discriminated more finely and the effect mode may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, when the ratio of the operation valid period in which the press of the frame button 22 is detected is 20% or less, the continuous transformation effect in which the operation valid period is set once is set and the frame button 22 is pressed. When the ratio of the operation valid period that detected is more than 20% and 40% or less, the operation valid period is set to the continuous transformation effect twice, and the operation valid that detects the pressing of the frame button 22. When the ratio of the period exceeds 40% and is 60% or less, the continuous transformation effect is set in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is 3 times, and the ratio of the operation valid period when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is 6. When it exceeds the percentage and is 80% or less, the number of times the operation valid period is set is set to 4 times for continuous transformation effect, and the ratio of the operation valid period when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%. In this case, a continuous transformation effect may be set in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is five. That is, one type may be set from five types of production modes in which the number of operation valid periods and the production time of the development production are different according to the tendency of the player (frequency of participation in the continuous transformation production). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect mode that is more matched to the tendency of each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined by the ratio of the operation valid period in which the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected, but the method of determining the player's tendency is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with another effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the ratio of the player pressing the frame button 22 in the other effect is also taken into consideration. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the player has a tendency to press the frame button 22 (a tendency to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 89. In the first to fifth embodiments described above, as the specific winning opening (large opening opening) opened during the execution of the jackpot game (privilege game), a single specific winning opening 65a is directly under the first entry opening 64a. Was configured to be provided. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the lower center of the front view of the game board 13, the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. Both the game ball fired toward (left-handed) and the game ball fired (right-handed) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 enter. It was a structure to get.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of specific winning openings having different benefits (number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters are provided. Specifically, a left specific winning opening 650La, in which seven prize balls are given each time a game ball enters, is provided on the left side of the area below the first entry opening 64, and ten prizes are awarded. The right specific winning opening 650Ra to which the ball is given is provided on the right side of the area below the first entry opening 64. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are provided symmetrically in the lower center of the front view of the game board 13. These two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are normally set in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and when the jackpot round is started, one of them is specified. The winning opening will be ready for entry. Further, as will be described in detail later, when each specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to be able to enter, the left-struck game ball is also right-struck. The structure is such that both game balls can be entered. As a result, the player can freely select the desired firing direction during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 84, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball opening 64. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning opening 650La on the left side surface of the front view where a game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning opening 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, and a game ball that has reached the left variable winning device 650L from the right direction in the front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails forming an inclination in the downward direction in the front view of the left variable winning device are arranged, and most of the left-struck game balls are below the first entrance 64 through the inclination. Since it reaches the region of, the game ball flows down in the lower right direction in the region below the first entry port 64. That is, since the ball flows down in the direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in the normal state. Further, the arrangement of the nails and the like on the game board 13 is symmetrical, and an inclination in the downward direction to the lower left is formed above the right variable winning device 650R, but the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device are formed. Since it is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that a game ball that is hit right and flows down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R directly enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface provided with the opening) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured such that the upper side side protrudes toward the right side in the front view from the lower side side. As a result, even if the game ball flows down substantially vertically from above, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the left specific winning opening 650La by being obstructed by the protruding portion. The right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is symmetrical with the left variable winning device 650L and 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, two variable members 650Lb and 650Rb capable of appearing and appearing (variable movement) on the front side and the back side of the front view. Is provided. Since these variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried in the back side of the front view (that is, buried in the back side of the base plate 60), they are moved to the region below the first ball entry port 64. The progress of the game ball that has flowed down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, the variable member 650Lb forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower left direction of the front view by performing a projecting motion toward the front side of the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side surface of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, the variable member 650Rb forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower right direction of the front view by performing a projecting operation toward the front side of the front view. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

In each round of the jackpot, the variable member according to the jackpot type protrudes toward the front side of the front view, so that the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening different according to the jackpot type. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot A6 (16 rounds probability variable jackpot), the variable member 650Rb protrudes, so that the game ball moves to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, which has a relatively large number of prize balls (that is, 10). It becomes easier to enter the ball. On the other hand, in each round of the jackpot B6 (7 rounds probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot C6 (7 rounds time saving jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so that the prize balls are relatively few (that is, 7) left. It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 650La.

As shown in FIG. 84, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are almost all game balls that reach below the first entry port 64 from above in a protruding state (a state in which they are arranged at the protruding positions). It is a structure that can be received. As a result, when either the movable member 650Lb or 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are received by the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in a protruding position. Then, it is guided to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb) from the inclination formed by the movable member. Therefore, even if the left movable member 650Lb becomes a jackpot type that performs an infestation motion (variable motion), or the right movable member 650Rb becomes a jackpot type that performs an infestation motion (variable motion), the launch direction of the game ball Regardless, just by continuing to shoot the game ball in the desired firing direction, the game ball can be entered into the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). .. Therefore, each time a jackpot is reached, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the jackpot.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening in which the game ball can be entered during the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot type. Then, regardless of the type of the specific winning opening where the game ball can be entered, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are guided to the specific winning opening where the ball can be entered. To. That is, there are two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening) for the area that can be reached by both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball (the area below the first entry opening 64). The mouth 650Ra) is provided. Then, each movable member for guiding the game ball to each specific winning opening moves to the corresponding specific winning opening for almost all the game balls that have reached the area (specific area) below the first entry opening 64. It is configured to operate variably so that it can be guided. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening regardless of the launch direction of the game ball during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is placed in the protruding position, the firing strength that can reach the game area (at least the firing strength that allows the game ball to fly beyond the return ball prevention member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that reach a specific area without entering the first entry port 64 or the general winning opening 63) can be entered into the specific winning opening. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that cannot be won (winned) to the specific winning opening and flow down to the out opening 66, so that the game efficiency during the execution of the jackpot game can be reduced. Can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

Further, the two specific prize openings are configured to have different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) given when a game ball enters each other. Then, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased. That is, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of the game state that shifts after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given each time the ball is entered into the specific winning opening is also the type of the jackpot. Since it can be made different according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value indefinitely, and must be set within the range of the upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to the difference in the prize spherical surface to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the range of the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively disadvantageous type, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The more disadvantageous types of jackpots are, the shorter the period. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or voice effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the number of rounds is set by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) and different specific winning openings that can be entered according to the jackpot type. (That is, while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in an advantageous type of jackpot, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. In the case of a jackpot of an unfavorable type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the left specific winning opening 650La) with a small privilege (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without reducing the number of rounds of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type too much. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness to each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (left variable winning device 650L, right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. FIG. 85A is a front perspective view when the left specific winning opening 650La of the left variable winning device 650L is in a state where a ball can be won (winning), and FIG. 85B is a right variable winning device. It is a front perspective view in the case where the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state where a ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 85A, in the state where the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is in a state of protruding toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85A, the portion of the movable member 650Lb protruding toward the front side of the front view from the base plate 60 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction. A game ball that has reached the area below the first entry opening 64 (specific area) is guided to the lower left direction of the front view provided with the left specific winning opening 650La to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be done. Further, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is blocked by the movable member 650Lb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is surely limited to the left specific winning opening 650La. Can be entered into.

On the other hand, in the state where the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the movable member 650Rb is in a state of protruding toward the front side of the front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb protruding toward the front side of the front view from the base plate 60 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. , The game ball that has reached the area below the first entry opening 64 (specific area) is guided to the lower right direction of the front view provided with the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be made to. Further, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is blocked by the movable member 650Rb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is surely limited to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be entered into.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the detailed configuration of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb described above will be described. In the description of FIG. 86, the lower side of the figure shows the front side direction of the game board 13, and the upper side shows the back side direction of the game board 13. First, FIG. 86A is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86A, the movable member 650Lb has a horizontally long rectangular base member 650Lb1 and a shape protruding from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 toward the back side of the game board 13. , The protruding portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are provided, respectively. Although not shown, the ends of these protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 on the opposite sides of the base member 650Lb1 are connected to a solenoid for a left variable winning device (not shown). By driving the solenoid for the left variable winning device (setting the solenoid on), the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the front view via the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60. It is variable so that it protrudes from the base plate 60 toward the front side. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the left variable winning device is turned off, the base member 650Lb1 is moved toward the back of the front view and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 86A, a notch portion 650Lb5 is provided in the center of the base member 650Lb1 from the front side of the front view toward the back side, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side of the front view is provided. The left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected to each other without being separated from each other. The width of the notch portion 650Lb5 is at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although the details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch portion 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be independently moved to appear and disappear without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 86A, the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb except that the orientation (arrangement) of the notch portion 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch portion 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side of the front view toward the front side, and is provided on the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side of the front view. It is connected to the right side without separating. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb are in a state of being housed behind the base plate 60 in a state of intersecting each other. At this time, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are in a state in which the notch portion 650Lb5 and the notch portion 650 are engaged with each other. That is, the connecting portion 650Lb5 of the movable member 650Lb and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb are housed in a state of facing each other. By storing in this way, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

FIG. 86B is a top view of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86B, when the movable member 650Rb performs a protruding operation, almost the entire base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed on the front side of the base plate 60. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that has reached the lower region (specific region) of the first entry opening 64 is along the inclination. You will be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

FIG. 86 (c) is a top view of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs a protruding operation. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connecting portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connecting portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the operation progresses. In this protruding operation, the connecting portion 650Lb continues to come into contact with the connecting portion 650Rb2, and the connecting portions come into contact with each other, so that the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb is hindered and the operation is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the movable member 650Lb is in a state in which at least the connecting portion 650Lb2 is housed behind the base plate 60 at the protruding position. Even if a part of the base portion on the back side (the range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is stored, the game ball sufficiently passes through the range protruding toward the front side from the base plate 60. The possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) is surely left specific winning opening by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. It can be guided to 650La.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 87, the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment defines three types of jackpots A6, B6, and C6.

As shown in FIG. 87, "big hit A6" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". "Big hit A6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probable change state of a special symbol is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit A6" is reached, the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Rb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit A6" has the largest number of rounds, and the game state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of the special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), and during the big hit. The benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each ball entered will also increase (to 10). Therefore, "big hit A6" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit A6" are "0 to 4". Since there are five, the rate at which "big hit A6" is determined when a big hit is won is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B6" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 49". "Big hit B6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a probable change state of a special symbol is given after the big hit is completed. Further, when the "big hit B6" is reached, the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the "big hit B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of the special symbol which is more advantageous than the time saving state of the normal symbol is set), and the big hit is in progress. The privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to each ball is relatively small (to 7). Therefore, "big hit B6" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, but at least in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot, it is more disadvantageous to the player than "big hit A6". Become. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit B6" are "5 to 49". Since there are 45 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B6" is determined when a big hit is won is 45% (45/100).

Further, "big hit C6" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". "Big hit C6" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a time saving state of a normal symbol is given only until the variable display of 100 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit. Further, in the case of "big hit C6", the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered in each round of the big hit (that is, the movable member 650Lb is variable to the protruding position). For this reason, the number of rounds of "Big hit C6" is relatively small, the game state after the big hit is disadvantageous, and the privilege (number of prize balls to be paid out) given for each entry during the big hit is relatively small (7). (Individually). Therefore, the "big hit C6" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit C6" are "50 to 99". Since there are 50 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C6" is determined when a big hit is won is 50% (50/100).

Since the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment has not been changed except for the contents of the type selection table 202b per first, the description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. There is.

The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member to be moved (protruded) in each round of the jackpot. When a big hit occurs, data indicating a movable member according to the big hit type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot A6 is determined, "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either the jackpot B6 or C6 is stored. When it is determined, "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During the execution of the jackpot game, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified every time the start timing of a new round is reached, and the protruding operation of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). See S1021). Further, the initial value of the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is set to "00H", and the data is reset to the initial value even at the end of the big hit (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value "00H" means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol change start processing 6 (S221) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. This special symbol variation start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and is special. Similar to the symbol change start processing (see FIG. 24), a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (Win / fail determination) is performed, and the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S301 to S311, each of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the jackpot type in the processing of S306 (S306), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A6. If it is determined whether or not (S321) and it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A6 (S321: No), "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S321). S322), the process shifts to S307.

On the other hand, in the process of S321, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). , The process shifts to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started in the jackpot, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the protruding position. To.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S921). The jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31). ), This is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the specific winning opening when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol.

Of the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016, the jackpot control processes in the first embodiment (FIG. 31) The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016 are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that the start timing of a new round has come (S1004: Yes), the movable type storage area 203aa is set. The projecting motion of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, it is set so that the ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by setting the protruding operation of the movable member 650Rb. .. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, it is set so that the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650La by setting the protruding operation of the movable member 650Lb. When the processing of S1021 is completed, the processing is transferred to S1006.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening opening (specific winning opening) is satisfied in the processing of S1007 (S1007: Yes), it is movable. The burial operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and this process is terminated. That is, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersive operation of the movable member 650Rb is set so that the ball cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersive operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 is completed, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is then reset to "00H" (S1024). ), The process is transferred to S1016. By this jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89), the variable operation of each movable member is possible so that the specific winning opening corresponding to the jackpot type can be entered among the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Can be controlled appropriately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to provide two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) having different benefits given to the specific area. , The configuration is such that the specific winning openings that can be entered are variable according to the type of jackpot. More specifically, the movable member 650Lb forming an inclination that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La by performing the projecting motion, and the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area are on the right. A movable member 650Rb forming an inclination leading to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the jackpot type (big hit B6, C6) in which the left specific winning opening 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650Ra can enter the ball, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to perform a protruding operation in each round of the jackpot.

Both the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all game balls that have flowed down to a specific region in a state of being arranged at a protruding position. Therefore, in the state where any of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can almost certainly be entered into the corresponding specific winning opening. Here, the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) can be reached by almost all game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 63 or the first entry opening 64, regardless of the launch direction. It is configured in. That is, most of the left-handed game balls and the right-handed game balls (90% or more) reach a specific area. Therefore, regardless of whether the left movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position or the right movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position, the jackpot type is supported regardless of the launch direction of the game ball. The game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). Therefore, each time a jackpot is reached, the player can select a preferred firing direction and play the game during the jackpot.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a surface on which a game ball can be entered (left specific winning opening 650La, The right specific winning opening 650Ra) is arranged so as to face each other. Then, each movable member forms an inclination in the downward direction toward each specific winning opening, thereby forming a state in which the game ball can enter each specific winning opening. In other words, it is possible to enter each specific winning opening by providing each specific winning opening in a direction in which the game ball does not normally advance and changing the traveling direction of the game ball in a direction different from the normal direction by each movable member. It is in a state of being. As a result, the configuration of the specific winning opening 65a according to the first embodiment described above (provided in the middle of the flow path in which the game ball travels even in normal times, so that most of the game ball flowing down the flow path flows in. Compared to the open structure), each specific winning opening can be made more compact. That is, since each specific winning opening can be configured with an area of one game ball or more and less than two, it is possible to realize a small area of the specific winning opening. Therefore, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area indicated by the two variable winning devices on the board surface can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in board surface configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of large winning openings (specific winning openings) that are opened and closed during the execution of a big hit game are provided on the board, each large winning opening is used as a flow path in which the large winning opening is provided. It is generally configured so that it can be opened with substantially the same width as. In addition, a plurality of large winning openings are arranged side by side in the vertical direction of the front view in one flow path, and the game balls can be placed in any of the large winning openings simply by continuously firing the game balls into the same flow path during the big hit. Generally, it is configured so that the ball can enter. However, in this configuration, as the number of large winning openings increases, the installation area increases, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in board configuration is reduced. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be compactly configured, so that the degree of freedom in board configuration can be improved.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are privileged when the game balls enter each other (the number of prize balls to be paid out). Is configured differently. Then, the type of the specific winning opening that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased. That is, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of the game state that shifts after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out) given each time the ball is entered into the specific winning opening is also the type of the jackpot. Since it can be made different according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. In particular, the number of rounds of the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value indefinitely, and must be set within the range of the upper limit value (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to the difference in the prize spherical surface to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the range of the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds of the jackpot of the relatively disadvantageous type, so the difference in the degree of advantage is increased. The more disadvantageous types of jackpots are, the shorter the period. Therefore, in particular, when performing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or voice effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In such a case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effect (display effect or voice effect) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, the number of rounds is set by providing a plurality of specific winning openings with different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) and different specific winning openings that can be entered according to the jackpot type. (That is, while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in an advantageous type of jackpot, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) having a large number of benefits (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. In the case of a jackpot of an unfavorable type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the left specific winning opening 650La) with a small privilege (number of prize balls) is set to be able to enter. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without reducing the number of rounds of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type too much. Therefore, it is possible to give a sharpness to each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, an independent drive source is provided for each movable member, but two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb may be configured to be controllable by one drive source. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) with each movable member 650 Lb arranged at the immersion position (buried position). By driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction), only the movable member 650Rb can move toward the protruding position, while only the movable member 650Lb can move toward the protruding position. You may. That is, two types of a left tilting gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Lb and a right tilting gear for transmitting the driving force to the movable member 650Rb are provided for the rotation axis of one motor. The left tilt gear is arranged so that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the positive direction at the immersion position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in a range in which the gear on the movable member 650Lb side and the gear for tilting to the left engage only when the motor rotates in the normal direction. Further, the gear for tilting to the right has teeth arranged so that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the immersion position of each movable member. That is, the teeth are arranged in a range in which the gear on the movable member 650Rb side and the gear for tilting to the right engage only when the motor rotates negatively. With this configuration, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved separately with one drive source, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a game ball hit to the right with one of the movable members arranged at a protruding position. , Almost all may be configured to be guided to a specific winning opening. On the contrary, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and one of the movable members is left-handed in a protruding position. Almost all game balls may be configured to be guided to a specific winning opening. Since the space on the right side flow path and the left side flow path of the variable display device unit 80 is narrower than that in the area below the first ball entry port 64, each variable winning device and each movable member are on the board surface. The area it occupies can be made smaller. In this case, the width and the inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modified example of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is projected to provide a specific winning opening. The game ball that has reached a specific area (the area below the first entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the two movable members, a single moving member 650b capable of translating in the left-right direction in the front view is provided between the two specific winning openings in the specific area. Although the details of the moving member 650b will be described later, the left side of the moving member 650b forms an inclination toward the lower left of the front view, while the right side of the moving member 650b forms an inclination toward the lower right of the front view. When the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where the ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel to the left in the front view so as to be adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the left side of the moving member 650b is tilted. The game ball can be guided to the left specific winning opening 650La. On the contrary, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view, and the right side tilt of the moving member 650b leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Configure the game ball to be movable. As described above, by moving the single moving member 650b in parallel to the left and right, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 in this modification, the moving member 650b is replaced with the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 84) of the game board 13 in the above-described sixth embodiment. It differs in that it is provided.

As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b has a substantially triangular shape, and is in a stationary state at an intermediate position of each specific winning opening in a normal state (when the jackpot game is not being executed). In this state (see FIG. 90), there is a space of one game ball or more between the moving member 650b and each specific winning opening. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) in the normal state is the flow path between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific winning opening. It flows down the flow path between the port 650Ra and is guided to the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 91A is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91B is a front view of the moving member 650b. FIG. 91 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCI-XCI shown in FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a horizontally long substantially rectangular flat plate-shaped projecting portion 650 bb projects on the back surface side of the substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the protrusion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction to move the protrusion 650bb to the left in the front view. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel to the left in the front view. Further, when the motor for the moving member is driven in the negative direction, the driving force in the right direction in the front view is transmitted to the protrusion 650bb, and the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction in the front view.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 having a width of one game ball or more are provided on the right side of the moving member 650b and the left side of the front view, respectively. There is. The game ball that has reached the moving member 650b from above flows downward along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

FIG. 91 (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91 (d), the protruding portion 650 bb of the moving member 650 b is included in the back side of the base plate 60 via the left-right moving hole 650 ba formed in the base plate 60. The end of the protrusion 650 bb on the far side of the front view is connected to the motor for the moving member as described above. When a driving force in the left-right direction acts on the moving member 650b by the moving member motor, the protruding portion 650bb moves in the left-right direction along the left-right moving hole 650ba, and as a result, the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the left-right direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92A is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view. As shown in FIG. 92A, when the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view and is adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball reaches the specific area from the left direction. (That is, the game ball hit to the left) falls to the slope on the left side of the front view of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R and is directed toward the out port 66. Flow down. As a result, in the state where the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction, the game ball can be entered only into the left specific winning opening 650La.

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the moving member 650b is translated to the right in the front view and is adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball reaches the specific area from the right direction. (That is, the game ball hit to the right) falls to the slope on the right side of the front view of the moving member 650b, and flows down along the slope to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and is directed toward the out port 66. Flow down. As a result, in the state where the moving member 650b is translated in the right direction, the game ball can be entered only into the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, a single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction to correspond to the moving direction. It is configured to form a state in which a game ball can enter into either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra). With this configuration, one drive source (motor for moving member) can switch the states of the two specific winning openings (switching between a state in which the ball can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball). Therefore, as compared with the sixth embodiment described above, the number of drive sources can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening on the side close to the moving member 650b due to the inclination provided on both the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. By simply visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the launch direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right side in the front view and is in a state close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball can be easily entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra by hitting right. You can make it a ball. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left side in the front view and is in a state close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can be easily entered into the left specific winning opening 650La by hitting left. You can make it a ball.

Further, in the present modification, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a game ball can be entered. The surfaces (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are arranged so as to face each other. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, it is sufficient to secure an area of one game ball or more as the area of each specific winning opening, and it is possible to realize a small area of the specific winning opening. That is, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area indicated by the two variable winning devices on the board surface can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in board configuration can be increased.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, each specific winning opening is arranged in the left-right direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the left-right direction between the specific winning openings, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, each specific winning opening may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the moving member 650b may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. Further, in this case, the inclination of the side surface of the moving member 650b on the side opposite to the side surface on which the specific winning opening is arranged may be deleted. With such a configuration, the area occupied by each variable winning device and the moving member 650b on the board surface can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further increased.

<Second variant of the sixth embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, a drive source (solenoid) for driving (appearing and appearing) two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is provided separately (independently) for each movable member. When the movable condition of each movable member is satisfied, the movable member is variably operated (appearance operation) by driving the corresponding drive source.

On the other hand, in the second modification, a plurality (two) movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be controlled by one drive source. More specifically, only a single motor (driving motor 6500) is provided as a drive source for variable operation (appearance operation) of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and each movable member 650Lb and 650Rb are both provided. By driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction while being placed in the buried position, the movable member 650Lb variably operates in the protruding position, while by driving the drive motor 6500 in the negative direction, the movable member The configuration is such that the 650Rb variably operates at the protruding position. As a result, since the plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a small number of drive sources, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that the configurations of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a perspective view showing the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in the second modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 shows a state in which the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are both arranged at the buried position. As shown in FIG. 137, in each movable member 650Lb in the second modification, the protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 provided on the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment are deleted, and instead, the movable member 650Lb is replaced. A substantially cylindrical projecting portion 650Lb6 is provided so as to project to the back side of the front view, and a gear member 650Lb7 connected to an end opposite to the movable member 650Lb in the projecting portion 650Lb6 is provided. Similarly, for the movable member 650Rb, the protruding portions 650Rb3 and 650Rb4 are deleted, and instead, a substantially cylindrical protruding portion 650Rb6 provided so as to project to the back side of the front view with respect to the movable member 650Rb and its protrusion. A gear member 650Rb7 connected to an end opposite to the movable member 650Rb in the portion 650Rb6 is provided.

In addition, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 137, there is a circular shape between the gear member 650Lb7 provided on the movable member 650Lb and the gear member 650Rb7 provided on the movable member 650Rb. A gear tooth is provided on the side surface on the back side of the front view, and a circular gear 6500a without a gear tooth is provided on the side surface on the front side of the front view. The circular gear 6500a is joined to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 arranged below, and when the drive motor 6500 is driven, the drive shaft rotates in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive shaft. Rotate in the same direction and at the same cycle. In this circular gear 6500a, the side surface provided with the gear teeth is arranged on the back side in the front view, and the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 and the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 are not meshed with each other. The arrangement (see FIG. 137) is set to the initial arrangement. In the initial arrangement of the circular gear 6500a, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are arranged in the immersion position. Further, the circular gear 6500a rotates in a direction in which the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other by driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction. By driving the drive motor 6500 in the negative direction, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a rotate in the direction of meshing with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the operation of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the circular gear 6500a rotates in the positive direction and the negative direction will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 138 (a), the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb and the circular gear 6500a when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the positive direction and the circular gear 6500a joined to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 rotates counterclockwise, the circular gear 6500a The gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 arranged on the left side in the front view and the gear teeth provided in a part of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other. Therefore, the rotational force that the circular gear 6500a rotates in the counterclockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and the driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7. work. As a result, the movable member 650Lb joined to the gear member 650Lb7 also exerts a driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view, and the movable member 650Lb projects toward the front side of the front view. As a result, the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb is variably operating from the immersion position to the protruding position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating counterclockwise by about 180 degrees). Since the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not arranged at the position where the gear member 650Rb meshes with the gear teeth, the gear member 650Rb7 is not movable. Therefore, while the movable member 650Lb moves from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb does not perform a variable operation. When moving the movable member 650Lb from the protruding position to the immersive position (buried position), the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise to the origin position by driving the drive motor 6500 to the origin position in the negative direction. At the same time, the gear member 650Lb7 returns to the immersion position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a do not mesh with each other, so that the movable member 650Rb7 does not move.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction and the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise, the gear arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the circular gear 6500a. The gear teeth of the member 650Rb7 and the gear teeth provided in a part of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other. Therefore, the rotational force that the circular gear 6500a rotates in the clockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Rb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and a driving force acts on the gear member 650Rb7 in the direction toward the front side of the front view. .. As a result, the movable member 650Rb joined to the gear member 650Rb7 also exerts a driving force in the direction toward the front side of the front view, and the movable member 650Rb projects toward the front side of the front view. As a result, the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb is in a variable operation from the immersion position to the protruding position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating about 180 degrees clockwise). Since the range of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not arranged at the position where the gear member 650Lb meshes with the gear teeth, the gear member 650Lb7 is not movable. Therefore, while the movable member 650Rb moves from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb does not perform a variable operation. When moving the movable member 650Rb from the protruding position to the immersive position (buried position), the circular gear 6500a rotates counterclockwise to the origin position by driving the drive motor 6500 in the positive direction to the origin position. While performing the operation, the gear member 650Rb7 returns to the immersion position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a do not mesh with each other, so that the movable member 650Lb7 does not move.

As described above, in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the plurality of movable members can be independently and variably operated according to the drive direction of the drive motor 6500. More specifically, by rotating the drive motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the positive direction from the origin position of the rotational operation, the movable member 650Lb is immersed while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the immersion position (buried position). While it is possible to variably operate from the position (buried position) to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is immersed (buried) by rotating the drive motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the negative direction from the origin position of the rotational operation. The movable member 650Rb can be variably operated from the immersion position (buried position) to the protruding position while being arranged at the position). With this configuration, a plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a smaller number of drive sources, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are movable only by one drive source (drive motor 6500), but the present invention is not limited to this. , Another drive source may be additionally provided. More specifically, for example, for one movable member, a second drive source is provided separately from the drive motor 6500, and the movable member on the side where the second drive source is provided is provided. In at least a part of the case where the movable condition is satisfied, the second drive source may be driven to move the second drive source. With the drive motor 6500 alone, while one movable member is movable (while being arranged at a position different from the immersion position), the other movable member cannot be moved (gear teeth of the corresponding gear member). And the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a cannot mesh with each other), so that it is impossible to move a plurality of movable members to positions other than the buried position at the same time. On the other hand, by providing the second drive source, both movable members can be normally moved when the movable condition of the other movable member is satisfied while one movable member is being moved. can. In this modification, in particular, either one of the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R has the same performance as the first ball opening 64 (that is, when a game ball enters the ball). It is effective when the second ball entrance (which triggers the lottery of special symbols) is used and the corresponding movable member is configured as an electric accessory that moves to a protruding position when a hit is made in the lottery of ordinary symbols. Even during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the game ball will hit the normal symbol by passing through the through gate 67, so the electric role based on the round period of the jackpot and the hit of the normal symbol. This is because there is a possibility that the opening period of the object overlaps.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved by one drive source (drive motor 6500), but a plurality of movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved by one drive source. The technique for moving the member is not limited to the application to the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening. For example, the drive motor 6500 having the configuration of this modification may be adopted when moving a plurality of accessories for production.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is set with respect to the flow direction (vertical direction in the front view) of the game ball. By arranging them in orthogonal directions, it was configured to prevent (suppress) the game balls from entering each specific winning opening during normal times (states other than when the jackpot game is being executed). , Not limited to this. For example, an opening / closing door for opening / closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot game state, only the opening / closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening / closing plate attached to the specific winning opening that facilitates the guidance of the game ball that has reached the specific area by the movable member) may be opened. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball from entering the specific winning opening and being paid out even though it is not in the big hit game state at normal times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in this case, the movable member may be configured to be moved periodically or randomly regardless of the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of launching the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily guided by the movable member to the specific winning opening with the opening / closing door open. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In order to realize this playability, the player understands to which specific winning opening the game ball is more likely to be guided by using the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is more effective because it becomes easier. The period during which the movable member is moved periodically or randomly may be only during the execution of the jackpot game, or the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be constantly moved while the power is turned on. May be good. In addition, in the case of performing the modification of providing the opening / closing door for each specific winning opening in the modification of the sixth embodiment described above, the arrangement of the moving member 650b is arranged at the intermediate position between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. By tilting each opening / closing door toward the moving member 650b, the side surface of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening / closing door form a flow path toward the specific winning opening. Each specific winning opening may be configured to be in a state where the ball can be entered. With this configuration, the range in which the game ball can be guided to the corresponding specific winning opening is widened in the state where the ball can be entered into each specific winning opening, so that the possibility of wasteful balls is reduced. can do. Therefore, the profit of the player can be increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, 10 prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra, while 10 prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La. Although the configuration is such that seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of benefits given when a game ball enters each specific winning opening can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, it is not always necessary to increase the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra to be larger than the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the left specific winning opening 650La. .. For example, the number of prize balls to be given may be matched, or the number of prize balls given to the left specific winning opening 650La may be larger than that of the right specific winning opening 650Ra. good. In addition, the benefits given when a ball is entered into each specific prize opening are not limited to the prize ball. For example, if a game ball enters one of the specific winning openings during the execution of a jackpot game, only the winning ball is paid out, while if the game ball enters the other specific winning opening, the prize is awarded. Instead of paying out the ball, or in addition, the probability change state of the special symbol may be given as a privilege after the end of the jackpot.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, two specific winning openings are provided in a specific area, and the specific winning openings that are in a state where the ball can be entered are switched according to the jackpot type, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning openings provided in the specific area may be used as an entry opening (second entry opening) that triggers a lottery of special symbols. That is, at least one of the two specific winning openings may be configured by a second entrance opening having the same function as the first entry opening 64. In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (moving member 650b) may be moved in a predetermined movable pattern when a winning result is obtained by a lottery of ordinary symbols. In addition, when transforming into a combination of the specific winning opening and the second entry opening, the condition that each winning opening (specific winning opening and the second entry opening) can enter the ball can be satisfied at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is desirable that the movable member for forming a state in which the ball can be entered into each winning opening can be independently operated. The through gate 67 is in a state where the game ball can always pass through, and the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the same manner as in the normal time even during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, during the round game of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is arranged at the protruding position), the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol, and the movable member corresponding to the second entry opening protrudes. There is a possibility that the condition to move to the position is satisfied. Therefore, if a movable member such as the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment that can form a state in which the ball can be entered only in one of the entrances is adopted, at least one of the winnings is won. Even though the condition for allowing the ball to enter the mouth is satisfied, there may be a problem that the state of being able to enter the ball cannot be achieved. Therefore, as illustrated in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the separate movable members corresponding to the winning openings can be independently movablely controlled, each winning opening can enter the ball. Even if the conditions are duplicated, the movable member corresponding to each winning opening can be moved at the same time. Even though the condition that the ball can be entered into at least one winning opening is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be entered.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the two specific winning openings are arranged to face each other on the left and right in the specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64), and the two specific winning openings are directed toward each specific winning opening. The configuration was such that the game ball that reached the specific area was guided to the corresponding specific winning opening by forming an inclination, but the arrangement of the specific winning opening and the configuration for allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening are , Not limited to these. For example, in the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable winning devices having different numbers of prize balls may be vertically arranged in a specific area. Then, the specific winning openings that are opened may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

In the sixth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the specific winning openings that can be entered are different depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the specific winning openings that can be entered may be different depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot. As a result, the degree of freedom of control can be further increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. That is, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening La were arranged side by side, the left specific winning opening 650La was configured to face right in the front view, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra was configured to face left in the front view. It is not necessary to face each specific winning opening. It is possible to enter the ball while the movable member 650Lb is arranged in the protruding position (easy to enter the ball), and while the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the protruding position, and each movable member is in the buried position (immersion position). The left specific winning opening 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter the ball while it is arranged (it is difficult to enter the ball), and it is possible to enter the ball while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position (entry). (Easy), and while the movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position and while each movable member is placed in the buried position (immersion position), the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the entry spherical surface of the left specific winning opening 650La and the entrance spherical surface of the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be arranged so as to be parallel to each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific winning opening 650La composed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and the movable member 650Rb is provided on the lower right side. The right specific winning opening 650Ra, which is composed of a through hole penetrating the base plate 60, may be provided. Further, for both the person who guides the game ball that has flowed down the movable member to the specific winning opening while the corresponding movable member is arranged at the protruding position with respect to the circumference of each specific winning opening, the corresponding movable member is provided. The outer edge portions 650La1 and 650Ra1 may be provided to prevent (suppress) the game balls that have flowed down in the state of being arranged in the immersion position (buried position) from reaching the specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially inverted "U" -shaped peripheral edge portion 650La1 is provided around the left specific winning opening 650La. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral edge portion 650La1. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower left through the movable member 650Lb is formed from the lower left side of the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650La1 to the lower left. The downward inclination leads to the left specific winning opening 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially "U" -shaped peripheral edge portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down during normal times is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball flowing down to the lower right through the movable member 650Rb is from the upper left side of the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. The downward inclination to the lower right side leads to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As described above, even if the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are not configured to face each other, the same playability as the above-mentioned sixth embodiment can be realized.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, in each round of the jackpot, by moving the corresponding movable member to the protruding position, the ball can be entered into the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening. It was configured to form a state in which a ball can enter 650Ra, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the ball can be entered in the left specific winning opening 650La and a state in which the ball can be entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of the game ball. In this case, a movable member whose state (arrangement) is structurally switched each time the game ball passes may be adopted, or a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball may be provided for controllability. It may be configured to be realized.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 108. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left) in which the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters a specific area (the area below the first entry opening 64) is different from each other. The specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and the type of the specific winning opening that can be entered in each round of the big hit is changed according to the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the big hit game, so that the probable change game is performed after the big hit is completed. It is configured to provide two probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra) that trigger a state (probability changing state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probable winning openings is set so that the ball can be entered for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). That is, by moving the movable member 1 to the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward one of the probabilistic winning openings is formed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. Of the game balls that have been hit to the left and reached a specific area, one is capable of entering the probabilistic winning opening and the other is difficult to enter. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player predicts the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening and launches the game ball.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 93, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is left instead of the left variable winning device 650L with respect to the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84). A variable winning device 655L is provided, a right variable winning device 655R is provided in place of the right variable winning device 650R, and a variable winning device is provided below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that the device 65 is provided.

The left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are provided with a left probability variation winning opening 650La and a right probability variation winning opening 655Ra having the same shape as the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, respectively. There is. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area in the normal time (a state other than the execution of the jackpot game) does not enter the left probability variation winning opening 655La or the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra, and the out opening 66. It flows down in the direction of. Further, in the state where the movable member 650Lb is projected, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination in the direction toward the left probability variation winning opening 655La (inclination in the direction from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction), so that the movable member 650Lb can be moved to a specific area. The game ball that has reached is guided to the left probability change winning opening 655La. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 650Rb is projected, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination in the direction toward the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra (inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view), so that a specific area is formed. The game ball that has reached the right is guided to the right probability change winning opening 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the protruding position only for one second (predetermined period) in one round, so that while any of the movable members is arranged in the protruding position. Even if the game ball reaches a specific area, if it cannot reach the corresponding probability variation winning opening within 1 second after being placed in the protruding position, the movable member must be immersed. The game ball flows down in the direction of the out port 66.

The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment or the like. That is, a specific winning opening 65a through which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is composed of (not shown) and. The specific winning opening 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which a game ball can be entered in each round after the second round of the jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the protruding position for only one second depending on the jackpot type. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in an immersive state, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is opened to the front side to the specific winning opening 65a. And the game ball forms an open state where it can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, or 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. In the first round of the jackpot, the game ball enters one of the probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La or right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra), and after the jackpot ends, the probabilistic game state (probability changing state of the special symbol, In addition, while the normal symbol time saving state is given, if the game ball does not enter the probability change winning opening even once during the jackpot game, the time saving game state (special) is 100 times after the jackpot ends. A low-probability state of the symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol) are given. Therefore, since the degree of advantage after the end of the big hit changes depending on whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation winning opening, the game ball enters the probability variation entry opening for the player in the first round. It can be noticed depending on whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is an enlarged front view of a specific region portion of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. 94 (a). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are connected to each other on the back side of the base plate 60. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), a game ball provided inside the left probability variation winning device 655L and entering the left probability variation winning opening 655La is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharged. The left probability variable flow path 655Ld for guiding and the right probability variation flow path 655Rd for guiding the game ball entering the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharging the ball are on the back side of the base plate 60. Meet at. Further, at a position where the left probability variable flow path 655Ld and the right probability variation flow path 655Rd meet, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. Although not shown, the discharge port 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probability change switch) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. By detecting the passage of the probability change switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the probability change winning openings, and the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change game state.

In this way, the probabilistic winning devices are merged internally, and the game ball that has entered one of the probabilistic winning openings is discharged by the discharge port 656, and the passage of the discharge port 1 is monitored. By doing so, the number of probabilistic change switches can be minimized by configuring the configuration to determine whether or not the game ball has entered any of the probabilistic winning openings. That is, when a probability change switch is provided for each probability change winning device, it is necessary to provide at least two probability change switches, but by the configuration of the seventh embodiment, only one probability change switch is used to provide two probability change winning openings. It is possible to accurately determine that the game ball has entered either of the two. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of probabilistic switches. Further, by merging the probabilistic winning devices internally, it can be treated as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of winning devices that can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, as in the seventh embodiment, by treating the two probabilistic winning devices as one winning device, the number of winning devices in the game rules can be reduced, so that the game rules can be more easily satisfied. The pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, regarding the flow direction of the game ball in the first round when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment. explain. For the sake of simplification of the explanation, in the following description, the movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position is defined as an open pattern in which the left probability variation winning opening 655La is easily won. Opening pattern ". On the other hand, a movable pattern (opening pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at a protruding position is referred to as an "opening pattern of the right V" in the sense of an opening pattern that makes it easy to win a prize in the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra.

FIG. 95A is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the open pattern of the right V (movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position) is determined and the player strikes left. be. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the game ball hit to the left falls on the movable member 650Rb from the left direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb is inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view, the momentum of the flow of the game ball (momentum in the lower left direction) is not reduced. Therefore, the ball can be relatively easily entered into the right probability change winning opening 655Ra within 1 second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position.

FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c) are views showing the flow direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the game ball hit to the right falls on the movable member 650Rb from the right direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), since the game ball has a momentum (momentum) toward the left side of the front view, until the momentum is reduced (the momentum becomes 0). , Rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction of the front view. Then, when the momentum of rolling in the upper left direction is lost due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (the momentum becomes 0), the game ball rolls in the lower right direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. To start. However, since it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for the momentum of the game ball to become 0, after that, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state of 0 to reach the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra. There is no time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), one second elapses while the game ball is rolling on the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction in the front view, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. That is, since the inclination in the direction toward the right probability change winning opening 655Ra disappears, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out opening 66. Therefore, when the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right, the movable member 650Rb reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra within 1 second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. It will be extremely difficult to make it.

When the opening pattern of the left V is determined, the operation is essentially the same as the opening pattern of the right V, only the left and right operations are opposite to the opening pattern of the right V. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted and briefly described, when the right-handed hit is performed when the open pattern of the left V is determined, the game ball has a momentum from the right direction to the left in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the game proceeds in this state, the ball is entered (winning) into the left probability variation winning opening 655La along the inclination of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum. On the other hand, if a left-handed strike is performed when the open pattern of the left V is determined, the game ball proceeds in a state of having a momentum from the left direction to the right direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction in the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination. Therefore, as in the case where the opening pattern of the right V is determined and the player hits the right (see FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c)), the movable member 650 Lb is immersed before reaching the left probability change winning opening 655 La. Then, the game ball flows down to the out port 66.

Here, the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment takes about one second for the launched game ball to reach the specific area regardless of whether the game is left-handed or right-handed. It takes. Therefore, in the method of launching the game ball after confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot, before the game ball reaches the specific area or immediately after reaching the specific area. After 1 second has passed, the movable member is returned to the immersion position. That is, even if the game ball is launched after confirming the type of the movable member, it is not possible to insert the game ball into the probabilistic winning opening. Therefore, for a player who wants to enter the game ball into the probability variation winning opening, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the movable members is moved to the protruding position before being moved to the protruding position. It is possible to predict the type of movable member and launch the game ball in the predicted firing direction. As a result, if the movable member predicted by the player to be placed in the protruding position and the movable member actually placed in the protruding position match, the game ball can be entered into the probability variation winning opening. On the other hand, when the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the protruding position, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the probabilistic winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each jackpot, the type of movable member placed at the protruding position (the launching direction that makes it easier to enter the ball with respect to the probabilistic entry port) is predicted more seriously and the game ball is launched. Since it is possible to provide a novel playability, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 (b), but in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot of the left V opening pattern (opening pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position) in the first round. The ratio at which the type is determined is configured to be higher than the ratio at which the jackpot type of the right V opening pattern (opening pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position) is determined. On the other hand, the average number of rounds of each jackpot type in which the left V opening pattern is set is smaller than the average number of rounds of each jackpot type in which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, by hitting right every time, a probable change game state is given after the jackpot ends at a high rate (70% rate), but the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds (10 rounds or more). When the type is decided, the probabilistic game state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, if a game method is performed in which the opening pattern is predicted and the firing direction is changed each time, the transition to the probabilistic game state is confirmed, and a larger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) of jackpot games are performed. However, depending on the accuracy of the player's prediction, the rate of transition to the probabilistic gaming state will be significantly reduced (for example, the rate of 50% or less). ) There is a risk.

With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game method in the first round of the jackpot according to what element the player prioritizes in the jackpot. More specifically, for players who place the highest priority (priority) on the rate at which the probabilistic game state is set, a high rate of about 70% is achieved by hitting right each time in the first round of the jackpot. You can select the game method to which the probability change state is given. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds such as 16 rounds and 10 rounds more advantageous (the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous), this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the number of rounds has a large number of big hits, and to select a game method in which the firing direction of the game ball is different according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first hit), while emphasizing the setting ratio of the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot won during the probabilistic gaming state (so-called consecutive villa). For the hit), the game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, and for the first hit, predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, while for the consecutive villas, the setting ratio of the probabilistic game state (that is, the consecutive villas) It is possible to let the player select various game methods, such as a game method in which the player strikes right with an emphasis on (ratio). Therefore, since it is possible to select and play a game according to each player's favorite playability, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability according to different tastes for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that can be received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when a big hit occurs, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR8 and a display area HR9 are formed with respect to the upper left portion and the upper right portion in the main display area Dm, respectively. Inside the display area HR9, the characters "big hit" indicating that the big hit game is currently being executed are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds, the display indicating the maximum number of rounds, and the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in one jackpot can be obtained. Display indicating the maximum number of prize balls) is displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained are kept secret from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, "ROUND: 01 / ???" is displayed as a display showing the number of rounds, and "GET: 0000 / ???" is displayed as a display showing the number of prize balls. Will be done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls are displayed first, the jackpot type will be recognized by the player who visually recognizes the displayed contents, and the type of movable member (probability change prize). This is because there is a risk that the launch direction in which the ball can enter the mouth) will also be specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, information that can specify the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls, is concealed until at least one round is completed. This eliminates the clue for the player to identify the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position, so more seriously, the type of movable member that can be moved to the protruding position (entering the probable change winning opening). It is possible to select the launch direction in which the ball is possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) for urging the player to select whether to perform left-handed or right-handed is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, the display area HR10 is formed in the substantially central portion of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Choose !!" are displayed inside the display area HR10. Further, in the lower part of the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (the left half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR11 in which the characters "Expected degree Low" are displayed and "the number of rounds" are displayed. A horizontally long substantially elliptical display area 12 in which the characters "High" are displayed, and a left-pointing arrow image YG1 in which the characters "left-handed" are displayed and imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area HR9 in the main display area Dm (the right half of the main display area Dm), a horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR13 in which the characters "Expectation High" are displayed and a "round". The horizontally long substantially elliptical display area HR14 in which the characters "number Low" are displayed, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed, and the right-pointing arrow image YG2 imitating the right-pointing arrow is displayed.

According to these display contents, if you hit left, the expectation that the game ball will enter the probable change winning opening is low, but if the game ball enters, it may be a big hit of a type with a large number of rounds. Can be made to understand to the player that is high. Also, if you hit right, there is a high expectation that the game ball will enter the probable change winning opening, but if the game ball enters, there is a high possibility that it is a big hit of a type with a small number of rounds. Can be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each launch direction, it is possible to predict the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening and launch the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, an opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 97A is a diagram showing the time course of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern of the right V is set, and FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time course of the movable position of each movable member, and FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the time course of the opening pattern of the left V. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable position of each movable member in the case.

As shown in FIG. 97A, when the opening pattern of the right V is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. The protruding state of the movable member 650Rb continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60. After that, the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a buried state until the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the movable member 650Lb is consistently maintained in a buried state during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when one round is started, the selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when the start timing of one round is reached and the main control device 110 outputs a round number command indicating the start of the first round to the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 113 displays and controls the display. The device 114 is instructed to start executing the selection effect. When the player who visually recognizes this selection effect hits the left side, the game ball can enter the right probability change winning opening 655Ra through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the protruding position. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a right-handed hit, the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right probability change winning opening 655Ra, so that the game ball is inserted into the right probability change winning opening. It is not possible to enter the ball into 655Ra.

As shown in FIG. 97B, when the opening pattern of the left V is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position one second after the start of one round. The protruding state of the movable member 650Lb continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed after being moved to the protruding position, the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60. After that, the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a buried state until the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movable member 650Rb is consistently maintained in a buried state during the jackpot. When the player who visually recognizes the selection effect displayed from the start of the first round makes a right-handed hit, the game is played to the left probability change winning opening 655La through the inclination formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the protruding position. The ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect makes a left strike, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left probability change winning opening 655La, so that the game ball is inserted into the left probability change winning opening. It is not possible to enter the ball into 655La.

<Electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (a). FIG. 98A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is an open pattern with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11 (a)). The difference is that table 202aa has been added. It is also different in that the contents of the first type selection table 202b have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 202 in the above-described sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The open pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines variable operations to be set for the movable member in each open pattern (open pattern of right V and open pattern of left V). At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the data for the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as the variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (b). FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), "big hit A7" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" (FIG. 98 (b). See 202b1). This "big hit A7" has the largest number of rounds, 16 rounds, and is a big hit type in which the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 5 random values (counter values) are associated with "big hit A7". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of "big hit A7" being determined as a big hit type is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B7" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 29" (see 202b2 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit B7" has 10 rounds, which is the second largest after "big hit A7", and is a big hit type in which the right V opening pattern is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit B7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit B7" determined as the big hit type is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit C7" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 69" (see 202b3 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit C7" has 7 rounds, which is less than "big hit A7" and "big hit B7", and is a big hit type in which the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round of the big hit. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit C7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit C7" determined as the big hit type is 40% (40/100).

Further, "big hit D7" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 89" (see 202b4 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit D7" has 5 rounds, and is the jackpot type with the second smallest number of rounds among all the jackpot types. Further, "big hit D7" is a big hit type in which the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit D7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit D7" determined as the big hit type is 20% (20/100).

Further, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99", "big hit E7" is defined in association with it (see 202b5 in FIG. 98 (b)). This "big hit E7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is the smallest, 2 rounds, and the open pattern of the left V is set in the first round. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 random values (counter values) are associated with the "big hit E7", so the jackpot is specified. In the case of, the ratio of "big hit E7" determined as the big hit type is 10% (10/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the right V opening pattern is set when "big hit A7" or "big hit B7" is obtained, while "big hit C7" to "big hit E7" are obtained. In this case, the left V opening pattern is set. Since the ratio of determining either "big hit A7" (distribution 5%) or "big hit B7" (distribution 25%) is 30%, the ratio (30%) in which the right V opening pattern is set is , The left V opening pattern is configured to be lower than the set ratio (70%). Therefore, for the player who places the highest priority (priority) on the rate at which the probability change game state is set, by hitting right every time in the first round of the jackpot, the probability change state is as high as about 70%. You can select the game method to be given. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds such as 16 rounds and 10 rounds more advantageous (the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous), this time. It is possible to predict whether or not the number of rounds has a large number of big hits, and to select a game method in which the firing direction of the game ball is different according to the prediction result. In addition, for example, for the jackpot won in the normal state (so-called first hit), while emphasizing the setting ratio of the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot won during the probabilistic gaming state (so-called consecutive villa). For the hit), the game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, and for the first hit, predicts the jackpot type and switches the launch direction, while for the consecutive villas, the setting ratio of the probabilistic game state (that is, the consecutive villas) It is possible to let the player select various game methods, such as a game method in which the player strikes right with an emphasis on (ratio). Therefore, since it is possible to select and play a game according to each player's favorite playability, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability according to different tastes for each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that can be received by everyone can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (c). FIG. 98 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 98 (c), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has the probability change setting flag 203ba and the probability change passage counter with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 87 (b)). The difference is that 203bb, a winning number counter 203bc, a remaining ball timer flag 203bd, a remaining ball timer 203be, and an ejection number counter 203bf are added.

The probability change setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the probabilistic winning opening during the jackpot game. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned probability change switch provided in the discharge port 656, the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, this probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). The probability variation setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch before the power off is cut off, and it can be determined that the game ball has passed. The probability variation setting flag 203ba may be officially set to on and restored. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203bb, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage to the hall by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203ba to be turned on and determining an illegality in which the power is turned on again in the state where the power is turned off.

The probability variation passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch after the end of one round (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won in the probabilistic winning opening in the first round have been ejected from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203bb and the ejection number counter 203bf described later. The probability variation passage counter 203bb is updated by adding one value each time it detects the passage of the probability variation switch in a predetermined period (so-called ball brushing period) after the end of one round (S1409 in FIG. 104). ). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the probabilistic winning opening and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 104). The probability variation pass counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the probabilistic winning openings 655La, 655Ra or the specific winning openings 65a in each round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned probability variable switch provided in the probability variation winning device. It is added and updated by 1 (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 and the probabilistic winning device (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the probabilistic passing counter 203bb) and the number of ejected (discharging number). After it is determined whether or not it matches the value of the counter 203bf), it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203bd is a ball brushing period for ejecting the remaining game balls when the game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device at the end of the round. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is. When the remaining ball timer flag 203db is set to on, it means that the ball is in the ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203be, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

The remaining ball timer 203be is a variable winning device 65 or a probabilistic winning device (left probabilistic winning device) when one round is completed and the specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening 655La, 655Ra changes to a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the remaining game ball to be discharged has elapsed when the game ball remains inside the 655L, right probability variation winning device 655R). The time required for the game ball to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the seventh embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203be (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), does the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device match the number of ejected balls? Is executed (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device. In addition, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the probability change winning device and suppress the fraudulent act of causing the game ball to flow down to the probability change switch at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203ba is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The discharge number counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the probabilistic winning device in each round of the jackpot. The ejection number counter 203bf allows the game ball to pass through the ball ejection port for ejecting the game ball from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or the probability variation winning device) (ball ejection provided in the ball ejection port). The value is incremented and updated by 1 each time the exit switch is turned on by passing the game ball (see S1403 in FIG. 104). This discharge number counter 203bf wins a variable winning device 65 or a probability variable winning device. After the match between the number of game balls and the number of ejected balls is determined, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1415 in FIG. 104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has been V-winned with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the flag 223aa has been added.

The V winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has already passed through the probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot. If the V winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the probability change switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the probability change switch has not been detected. This V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON based on the first reception of the probability-change winning command output from the main controller 110 each time the passage of the probability-change switch is detected in the first round of the jackpot (the V-winning flag 223aa). See S5503 in FIG. 108). Further, the V winning flag 223aa is set to off when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, the V-winning success effect of notifying the player that the winning is won to the probabilistic winning opening is executed. By executing this V winning success effect, it is possible to make the player aware that his / her selection (launching direction) is correct and that the player will shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot. It can make people feel more satisfied.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 104, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. The jackpot control process 7 (S931) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30) of the main control device 110.

Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment are S1001 to S1004, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S1009 to S1011 is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), opening according to the round and the jackpot type. The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1031), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set. The jackpot end process for this is executed (S1032), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the probability variation winning are won. The winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the mouth is executed (S1033). The details of this winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. After the completion of the winning process (S1033), an abnormal process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening is normally ejected is executed (S1034), and this processing is performed. To finish. Details of these winning processes (S1033) and abnormal processing (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1031) described above will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). As described above, this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is a process for setting an opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No). ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process shifts to S1105.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the processing of S1103, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot A7 or jackpot B7, the data for performing the variable operation with the opening pattern of the right V (see FIG. 97A) is read, while the jackpot type this time. If is any of the jackpots C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation is read out in the open pattern of the left V (see FIG. 97 (b)).

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the open pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process is transferred to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled with an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1032) will be described with reference to FIG. 102. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1032) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1032), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), this time. Since it means that no game ball has entered (winned) into the probability variation winning opening (left probability variation winning opening 655La and right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) during the big hit, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set. By setting 100, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the time-saving gaming state (low-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol) (S1202), and the process shifts to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203ba is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening during this big hit, so the probability change. By setting the flag 203e to ON, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic gaming state (probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process shifts to S1204.

In the processing of S1204 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1203, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status after the jackpot set by the processing of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probability change setting flag 203ba is set to off (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 102), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203ba.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1033) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. As described above, this winning process (S1033) is a process for performing processing according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening. In this winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if the round is not valid (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1301: Yes), then, winning to any specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or probable change winning opening) is detected. If it is determined (S1302) and it is determined that the winning to the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening) has not been detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning for the specific winning opening is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203bc to update (S1303), and the process shifts to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1304), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability change switch (S1304: Yes), the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1304). S1305), a probability change winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch is set (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch (S1304: No), each process of S1305 and S1306 is skipped and the process shifts to S1307.

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307), and when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is 10 or more (S1307: Yes), move to the process of S1309 and set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1308), and the round time is determined. If it has passed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 and the end of this round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), it is not necessary to end the round, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S1308, when the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set open pattern is reached, while in the case of the second and subsequent rounds, it is determined. When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

In the process of S1309, the closure of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the probabilistic winning opening) is set (S1309), and the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, the ball brushing period is set by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203db to ON (S1311), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the abnormality handling (S1034) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. As described above, this abnormal processing (S1034) is a processing for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the probabilistic winning opening is normally discharged. In this abnormality processing (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is ejected from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). Whether it was discharged) is determined (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball ejection port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to the process of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203db is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203b is off (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently in the ball brushing period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is 1. Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball brushing period (when 0.8 seconds have passed from the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer If it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the ball brushing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) If it is determined that the ball brushing period is after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1408), and the probability change switch is pressed. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the probability change setting flag 203ba is set to ON. (S1410), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball-brushing period is the ball-brushing period after the second and subsequent rounds are completed (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410. This process is skipped and this process ends as it is.

Further, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the number of discharged balls counter 203bf) is determined. It is determined whether the number of winnings (value) matches the number of winnings (the total value of the value of the winning number counter 203bb and the value of the probability variation passing counter 203bb) (S1411).

If it is determined in the process of S1411 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to the process of S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing a game ball through the probability change switch while the probability change winning opening is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winnings match (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203bc, the discharging number counter 203bf, and the probability variation passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and the present processing is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 104), ball clogging occurs inside each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 and probabilistic winning device), and so on, each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, and specific winning opening 65a, and probabilistic winning device). It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of a problem that the game ball that has entered each probability variation winning opening) is not normally discharged.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the command determination process 7 (S4061) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105. This command determination process 7 (S4061) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), This is a process for analyzing the unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 41).

Of the command determination processes 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4910 and S4918, the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed commands in the process of S4909 (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to the hit has been received (S4921). Here, the commands related to the hit are, specifically, an opening command, a round number command, a closing command, a probability change winning command, an ending command, and the like.

In the processing of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to the hit is received from the main control device 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to the hit is analyzed and the command is commanded. The hit-related command process for executing the control according to the type of is executed (S4922), and this process is terminated. The details of this hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4921 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the command related to the hit (S4921: No), the processing is shifted to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this hit-related command processing (S4922). Of the hit-related command processes (S4922), each process of S4911 to S4917 is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) of S4911 to S4917. Since each process is merely ported as it is, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 does not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the closed command is included in the unprocessed command (S4951). In the process of S4951, when it is determined that the closed command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4951: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of one round of jackpot. Therefore, the closing command process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process is terminated. The details of this closing command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the closing command has not been received (S4951: No), then whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 includes the probability change winning command. If it is determined (S4953) and it is determined that the probability variation winning command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch. The probabilistic winning command process for controlling according to the number of times of passing is executed (S4954), and this process is terminated. The details of this probabilistic winning command processing (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. Further, in the processing of S4953, if it is determined that the probabilistic winning command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4953: No), the processing is shifted to S4916.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned closing command processing (S4952) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As described above, this closing command process (S4952) is a process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round. In this closing command processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first round of the jackpot that has ended this time (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not the first round of the jackpot (S5401: No). , Execution of the interval effect according to the number of rounds is set (S5402), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5401 when it is determined that the round finished this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5403: No), the probability variation winning opening (either the left probability variation winning slot 655La or the right probability variation winning slot 655Ra) during one round). Since it means that the winning of the winning is detected, the V winning flag 223aa is set to off (S5404), and the process shifts to S5402. On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of big hits without being able to enter the game ball into the probability variation winning opening during one round. Since it means that the game has ended, a V winning failure effect for notifying the player that the game ball could not be won in the probability variation winning opening is set (S5405), and this process is ended. .. By executing this V winning failure effect, the game ball did not enter the probabilistic winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch that makes it easier for the game ball to actually win the probabilistic winning opening. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the direction did not match). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the launch direction is predicted more seriously so that the game ball wins (wins) the probable change winning opening at the next big hit. Therefore, since the motivation of the player for the next big hit can be improved, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the above-mentioned probability variation winning command processing (S4954) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the probability variation winning command processing (S4954). As described above, this probability change winning command process (S4954) is a process for performing control according to the number of passes of the probability change switch.

In this probabilistic winning command processing (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501), and when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5501: No). , This means that the probability change winning command is a command output based on the passage of the first probability change switch in the first round of the jackpot, so it is notified that the game ball has entered the probability change winning opening. The execution of the V winning success effect for this is set (S5502), the V winning flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and this process is terminated. By executing this V winning success effect, the game ball enters the probabilistic winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch direction that makes it easier for the game ball to actually win the probabilistic winning opening). Was matched) can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is on (S5501: Yes), it means that the V winning success effect has already been executed, so that the V winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the process from being executed, each process of S5502 and S5503 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the probabilistic game state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) after the end of the jackpot is completed. ) Is given as an opportunity to provide two probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, one of the two probable winning openings is set so that the ball can be entered. That is, by moving the movable member 1 to the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward one of the probabilistic winning openings is formed. Since the period in which the movable member is placed in the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot is as short as 1 second, if the time for the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the movable member is not shortened as much as possible, the inclination formed by the movable member will be obtained. Along the way, the movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probabilistic winning opening, and the game ball cannot enter the probabilistic winning opening. In the seventh embodiment, when the movable member 650Lb is placed in the protruding position, if the left-handed strike is performed, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than that when the right-handed strike is performed. When hitting, it becomes difficult to put the game ball into the left probability change winning opening 655La, while when hitting right, it becomes easy to put the game ball into the left probability changing winning opening 655La. On the other hand, if the movable member 650Rb is placed in the protruding position and the right-handed strike is performed, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb is longer than that when the left-handed strike is performed, so that the right-handed strike is performed. While it becomes difficult to put a game ball into the right probability change winning opening 655Ra, it becomes easy to put a game ball into the left probability change winning opening 655Ra by hitting right. Here, in the first round of the jackpot, the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position is configured so as to be difficult for the player to detect in advance from the production mode and the like, so that the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is made to predict the possible firing direction (the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, any of the probabilistic winning openings can be entered in the first round of the jackpot (that is, one of the movable members can be changed to the protruding position), but the configuration is limited to this. However, the round for setting any of the probable winning openings to be in a state where the ball can be entered may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the round for setting the probabilistic winning opening to be in a state where the ball can be entered is not limited to one time, and may be set twice or more in one big hit. In this case, if the game ball can be entered into the probabilistic winning opening in the first round in which the probabilistic winning opening is set to be able to enter, the probabilistic winning opening can be entered from the next time onward. In the round set to the state, the player may be notified (navigated) of the launch direction in which the game ball can enter.

In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the probabilistic winning opening is configured to be different depending on the launch direction of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handed hitting is more likely to win the left-handed change in a short period of time than the game ball that has reached the specific area by right-handed hitting. The configuration was such that it was easy to reach the mouth 655La. Further, when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting the left side is more likely to win the right change in a short period of time than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting the right side. The configuration is such that it is easy to reach the mouth 655Ra, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a round in which the probability variation winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered, the launch direction in which the period required to reach the probability variation winning opening is shortened may be fixed. That is, in all jackpot types, right-handed hits may be configured so that the time required to reach the probabilistic winning opening is shorter than left-handed hits, or conversely, left. It may be configured so that the time required for hitting to reach the probabilistic winning opening is shorter.

In the seventh embodiment, the period until reaching the corresponding probability variation winning opening of 1 is different between right-handed and left-handed depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position. It is not limited to this. For example, the left probability variation winning opening 655La is placed at a position where a game ball may enter only when a left hit is made, and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra is entered only when a right hit is made. It may be configured to be arranged at a position where there is a possibility that the prize will be reached, and the period until reaching each probability variation winning opening may be different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the jackpot type of 1, the game ball launched by the left-handed hit is the left-probability change prize, rather than the period until the game ball launched by the right-handed hit reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra. While the time to reach the mouth 655La is configured to be shorter, in other jackpot types, the time it takes for the game ball fired by left-handed to reach the left probability change winning mouth 655La is shorter than the time to reach the left probability change winning mouth 655La. , The period until the game ball fired by right-handed hit reaches the right probability change winning opening 655Ra may be shorter. Further, in this case, the winning opening that can be entered by hitting right and the winning opening that can be entered by hitting left do not necessarily have to be both probabilistic winning openings, and the game ball can enter one or both of them. By doing so, it may be replaced with a specific winning opening in which only the prize balls are paid out. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the period until reaching the winning opening when hitting right and the period until reaching the winning opening when hitting left are not different, but reach. The period until this is done may be constant regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, by arranging nails, windmills, etc., it is configured so that the time to reach the winning opening is shorter when aiming at the winning opening on one side of right-handed or left-handing than when aiming at the winning opening on the other side. You may.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, two probabilistic winning devices (left probabilistic winning device 655L and right probabilistic winning device 655R) and one variable winning device can be entered during the execution of the jackpot game. The winning device 65 is provided, and the type of the winning device capable of entering a ball is changed according to the round of big hits. That is, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the probabilistic winning openings (left probabilistic winning opening 655La, right probabilistic winning opening 655Ra) is set to be in a state where the ball can be entered, while in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, a specific winning opening is made. The structure was such that the mouth 65a was set so that the ball could enter.

On the other hand, in this modification, only two probabilistic winning devices (left probabilistic winning device 655L and right probabilistic winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (probability changing switches) are provided inside the probabilistic winning device. After providing a flow path that is provided and a flow path that is not provided with a probability change switch), depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot, one of the probability change winning openings (left probability variation winning opening 655La, right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) It is configured to change the flow path to which the game balls that have entered are distributed. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the probabilistic winning opening in the first round of the jackpot is a flow path provided with a probabilistic change switch among a plurality of flow paths provided inside the probabilistic winning device. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the probability change winning opening after the second round of the jackpot are controlled so as to be distributed to the flow path not provided with the probability change switch. With this configuration, the round (1st round) in which the probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed by entering the probabilistic prize opening with only two probabilistic prize devices, and the game ball is launched into a specific area. It is possible to set up a round (after the second round) in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to do so.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the variable winning device 65 has been deleted, and the left probability variable winning device 655L. The internal structure of the right probability variation winning device 655R has been changed, and the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb have been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the seventh execution is performed. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form.

First, with reference to FIG. 133, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 133, the game board 13 in this modification is different from the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is deleted. Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device (left probability variation winning device 655L and right probability variation winning device 655R) is also partially changed from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment. There is. Since other board configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device in this modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a specific area in the game board 13 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 134, in this modification, the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R are inside the right probability variation winning device 655R, and on the back side of the base plate 60, the left probability variation winning opening 655La and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra are used. A plurality of flow paths through which the entered game ball flows down are provided. More specifically, the downstream side of the left probability variation winning device 655L is branched into two flow paths (probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 and normal induction flow path 655Ld2), and the probability variation is downstream of the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1. A probabilistic entry ball port 656a provided with a switch is provided. When the game ball is guided to the probability change entry ball port 656a by flowing down the probability change guidance flow path 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes through the probability change switch, so that the jackpot The game state after the end is set to the probabilistic game state. The game ball that has entered the probability change entry port 656a and has passed through the probability change switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging the game ball to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a probability change switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the big hit. In other words, regardless of the number of times the ball ejection port 656b1 has passed during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch even once, the probability change game will be the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed. If the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch even once, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, at the position where the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 are branched, the game ball is placed in one of the flow paths (probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2). A flow path distribution valve 655 Lc for distribution to any of) is provided. In the first round of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc is tilted to the left in the front view (a state in which a downward tilt is formed from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view) (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the left probability variation winning opening 655La is distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Ld1 in which the upstream side is open, and is guided to the probability variation entry opening 656a. Therefore, if the game ball can be entered into the left probability change winning opening 655La in the first round of the jackpot, the prize ball for entering the left probability variation winning opening 655La is given to the probability change switch. Since the game ball can be passed through, a probabilistic game state is given as a game state after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, when the first round of the jackpot is completed and the ball bleeding period elapses, the flow path distribution valve 655Lc tilts to the right in the front view. As a result, the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Ld1 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game ball that has entered the left probability change winning opening 655La is distributed to the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2 whose upstream side is open, and is guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 on the downstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2. Will be done. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, even if the game ball is entered into the left probability variation winning opening 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probability variation switch, so that the entry into the left probability variation winning opening 655La is simply entered. Only the prize ball for the ball is given.

As shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right probability variation winning device 655R is merely symmetrical with respect to the internal structure of the left probability variation winning device 655L. The flow path distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the probability variation winning device 655R is tilted to the right side in the front view, so that the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (normally, the upstream side of the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the probability variation induction flow path 655Rd1 and enters the probability variation entry slot 656a. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the flow path distribution valve 655Rc is tilted to the left side in the front view, so that the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 is opened (the upstream side of the probabilistic induction flow path 655Rd1 is closed). As a result, the game ball that has entered the right probability change winning opening 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot is distributed to the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 and enters the ball ejection port 656b2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the operation patterns (flow path switching patterns) of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc in the probability variation winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the change with time of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the open pattern of the left V is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb, and the change with time of the switching of the flow path in the probability change winning device. It is a figure shown by.

As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of the jackpot, until 1 second elapses when the movable member 650Rb is projected to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc is each normal induction flow path (normal guidance flow path). It is held in an arrangement that distributes the game ball to 655Ld2, a normal guide flow path 655Rd2). Then, when one second has elapsed from the start of the first round of the jackpot and the movable member 650Rb moves to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc changes each probabilistic induction flow path (probability change induction flow path 655Ld1, probability change). It is movable in an arrangement (see FIG. 134) for distributing the game ball to the guide flow path 655Rd1). The arrangement of distributing the game ball to the probabilistic guidance flow path continues even after the first round is completed and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruding position to the immersive position, and 0.5 seconds from the end of the first round. After a lapse of time, the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc are returned to the arrangement for distributing the game balls to the normal induction flow paths (normal guidance flow path 655Ld2, normal guidance flow path 655Rd2). The 0.5 second after the end of this one round is the so-called ball-draining period. That is, a sufficient period is set for the game ball that has entered the probability variation winning opening just before the end of one round to reach the probability variation entry opening 656a. By setting a ball brushing period of 0.5 seconds, a situation will occur in which the probable change state is not given after the big hit even though the ball has entered the probable change winning opening just before the end of one round. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall.

After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc does not change until the jackpot ends. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the probability variation winning opening (either the left probability variation winning opening 655La or the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) after the second round of the jackpot is guided to either the ball ejection port 656b1 or 656b2. To. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position even after the second round. That is, the movable member that has been moved to the protruding position in the first round is also moved to the protruding position in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the firing direction is fixed at one jackpot, which makes it easier to enter the probabilistic winning opening (the period from launching the game ball to entering the probabilistic winning opening is shortened). As a result, the player can easily recognize the launch direction that makes it easier to enter the probabilistic winning opening in each round of the jackpot simply by confirming the type of the movable member that is moved to the protruding position in the first round. Therefore, for a player who wants to quickly digest a jackpot game, the game ball can be launched in a firing direction in which the period until the ball enters the probabilistic winning opening is likely to be shortened. On the other hand, for players who want to spend a longer time digesting the jackpot game (want to enjoy it carefully), launch the game ball in the launch direction where the period until entering the probabilistic winning opening tends to be long. Can be made to. This allows the player to select a game method according to the taste of each player.

In the jackpot where the opening pattern of the left V is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruding position in each round of the jackpot. That is, the flow path switching pattern (operation pattern of each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc) inside the probability variation winning device is exactly the same as the jackpot in which the right V opening pattern is set.

As described above, in this modification, only two probabilistic winning devices are provided on the board surface, and whether the probabilistic winning switch can be passed or difficult to pass in each big hit round inside the probabilistic winning device. It is configured to switch (variate the arrangement of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc). With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be deleted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment and its modification, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of jackpot until any of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are moved to the protruding position. However, it is not limited to this. For example, at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1% in the case of a big hit), a notification effect may be executed to notify the launch direction in which the ball can enter the probabilistic winning opening instead of the selection effect. .. With this configuration, the player can be pleased when the notification effect is executed.

In the seventh embodiment and its modified example, the two probabilistic winning openings are arranged so as to face each other in the left-right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of them is replaced with an entrance (second entrance) having the same function as the first entrance 64 (that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed when a game ball enters). The electric accessory 64a provided attached to the first ball entry port 64 may be deleted. Then, when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol, the movable member on the side where the ball can be entered into the second entrance may be moved to the protruding position. With this configuration, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently entered into the second entrance in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game efficiency in the time-saving state is further improved. be able to. In this case, during the probabilistic game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and the time reduction game state, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry port (after launching the game ball, the second ball entry port). It may be configured to notify the player of the direction (the period until entering the ball tends to be short). With this configuration, the game ball can be more reliably entered into the second entrance during the period in which the movable member is arranged at the protruding position by hitting the normal symbol.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided, and a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is projected. The pachinko ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) is guided to the specific winning opening by forming an inclination toward the specific winning opening.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape in which two movable members are combined in the sixth embodiment is provided, and depending on the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b, The game balls that have reached a specific area (the area below the first ball entry port 64) can enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the types of the winning openings are different. Further, in the eighth embodiment, one specific winning opening 657a and one general winning opening 630 are provided in place of the two specific winning openings in the sixth embodiment. Then, by completely arranging the movable member 657b in the protruding position, the movable member 657b forms an inclination that can guide the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, while the movable member 657b moves from the buried position (immersion position) to the protruding position. At the intermediate position during the movement, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that a general winning opening 630 is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La, and the right specific winning opening 630 is provided. A specific winning opening 657a is provided in place of the opening 650Ra, a movable member 657b is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The sixth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. 109 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109 (b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109 (c) is a view of the movable member 657b from the left side when viewed from the front. It is a side view of the case. As shown in FIGS. 109A to 109C, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment forms a front-side tilting member 657bf that forms a downward inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction on the front side of the front view. Is provided, and a rear tilting member 657bb is provided on the back side of the front view to form a tilting downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), these front inclined members 657 bf and the rear inclined members 657 bb are joined at substantially the center of each side surface to form one member.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (c), two points on the inner side surface of the rear inclined member 657 bb project in a rod shape. Although not shown, a solenoid for a movable member for causing the movable member 657b to move in and out (variable operation) is connected to the tip of this protruding portion (the end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb). ing. In each round of jackpot, the solenoid for the movable member is driven to change the movable member 657b to the protruding position. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, but in the eighth embodiment, the appearance and appearance movements of the movable member 657b in each round are different depending on the jackpot type, and the general winning opening 630 is executed during the jackpot game. The configuration is such that a jackpot type in which a haunting motion that tends to increase the chances of winning a prize is set and a jackpot type in which an haunting motion that tends to decrease is set. During the jackpot game, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot increases as the game ball enters the general winning slot 630, so the chances of winning the general winning slot 630 tend to increase. The game can be played with the expectation that the type will be decided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the operation contents of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 110A is a diagram showing a case where the movable member 657b is arranged at an intermediate position temporarily arranged between the time when the movable member 657b is subjected to the projecting operation and the time when the movable member 657b is arranged at the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b protrudes and only the front tilting member 657bf protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60 (only the rear tilting member 657bb is buried), the front tilting member tilts to the front side. The inclination of the member 657bf from the upper right side to the lower left side temporarily forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630. In each round of jackpot, if a specified number (10) or more of game balls are detected in the specified winning opening 657a, or if a specified time (30 seconds) elapses before the specified number of balls are entered. No matter how many game balls enter the general winning opening 630, the end condition of the round will not be affected. That is, the more the game ball is inserted into the general prize opening 630, the more prize balls the jackpot will be. Therefore, the more the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 630, the more the player will be pleased. Therefore, it is possible to positively launch the game ball toward a specific area to the player while the position is in the middle position (see FIG. 110 (a)) that can be arranged during the projecting motion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

FIG. 110B is a diagram showing a state in which the movable member 657b is arranged at a protruding position. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position, in addition to the front inclined member 657 bb, the rear inclined member 657 bb also protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60. .. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear tilting member 657bb, and the specific winning opening is formed by the tilting of the rear tilting member 657bb from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. It is guided to 657a. That is, by arranging the movable member 657b at the protruding position (see FIG. 110 (b)), a state in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 657a is formed.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning openings for guiding the game balls that have reached the specific region are different depending on the arrangement (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b. In the intermediate position where the movable member 657b can be arranged until it reaches the protruding position, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guiding state) is formed, and the movable member 657b is in the protruding position. By arranging in, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a (second guidance state) is formed. As a result, as the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game state increases, so that the player is in the first guidance state. In the meantime, the game ball can be positively fired toward a specific area. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely match the intermediate position shown in FIG. 110 (a), the movable member 657b is arranged within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position. If so, the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front tilting member 657bf. More specifically, for example, among the movable members 657b, the front inclined member 657 bf protrudes from the base plate 60 by about 70% of the whole, and the rear inclined member 657 bb protrudes from the base plate 60 by about 30% of the whole. Until the arrangement is reached, the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630.

Next, the movable pattern of the projecting member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot. The movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which the opportunity for the game ball to enter the general winning opening 630 is larger than that of the movable pattern B (that is, the number of times in the first induction state is increased). First, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the change with time of the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts moving to the protruding position at the same time as the start of the big hit round. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes 2 seconds for the movable member 657b buried inside the base plate 60 to protrude to the protruding position. Of the 2 seconds that move to this protruding position, about 0.7 seconds is a state in which the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guidance state, see FIG. 110 (a)). Therefore, by continuing to shoot the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the first guidance state. In each round of the jackpot, an upper limit (10) is set for the number of balls that can be entered for the specific winning opening 657a, but there is no limit on the number of balls that can be entered for the general winning opening 630. The more the ball enters the general prize opening 630, the larger the number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to positively launch the game ball to the player.

As shown in FIG. 111A, the state of being arranged at the protruding position (the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a) continues for 2.5 seconds. During this 2.5 seconds, each time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so that the winning ball can be obtained for each entry into the specific winning opening 657a. Since the game balls can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds, by continuing to fire the game balls from the start of the round, 4 to 5 balls can be fired in 2.5 seconds. A degree of game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 657a.

As shown in FIG. 111A, when 2.5 seconds have passed since the movable member 657b was placed in the protruding position (that is, 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the round), the movable member 657b was placed in the buried position. Start moving to (immersion position). This variable operation to the buried position is performed over 2 seconds in the same manner as the variable operation to the protruding position. That is, since the operation completely opposite to the variable operation to the protruding position is executed, the first induction state is established for about 0.7 seconds even during the variable operation to the buried position. Therefore, it is possible to allow one or two game balls to enter the general winning opening 630 by continuously firing the game balls into a specific area even during the variable operation to the buried position. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), it moves from the buried position to the protruding position over 2 seconds, and the state of being placed at the protruding position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and it takes 2 seconds from the protruding position. The operation of moving to the buried position is repeated twice at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A, the first induction state is set up to 6 times. The movable pattern A is forcibly terminated even if all the variable movements shown in FIG. 111A are not completed when 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 657a. The period during which the movable member 657b is arranged at the protruding position is 7.5 seconds (2.5 seconds x 3 times) in total, so by continuously firing the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 12 It is possible to reach about 13 game balls. Therefore, it is possible to reliably enter the specified number (10) of game balls into the specific winning opening 657a simply by continuously firing the game balls, and to set the first guidance state up to 6 times. Can be done. Therefore, in addition to the prize balls for the specified number of balls to be entered into the specific winning opening 657a, the prize balls based on the winning to the general winning opening 630 by being set to the first induction state up to 6 times can be obtained. .. Therefore, since the number of prize balls exceeding the predetermined number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, the satisfaction of the player can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

FIG. 111B is a diagram showing changes over time in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b moves to the protruding position over 2 seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state in which the movable member 657b is arranged in the protruding position is 26 at the maximum. It continues for a second (until 28 seconds have passed from the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have passed, it is moved to the buried position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. Therefore, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guidance state in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 630 is set only twice, immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times that the movable member 657b is in the first guidance state (the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. Is configured differently. If the number of times the first guidance state is set is large, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game is also large. You can have greater joy. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to the set movable pattern, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is the first in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the hit type selection table 202b. The configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment, except that the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed. Descriptions other than the hit type selection table 202b will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment defines five types of jackpots A8 to E8.

As shown in FIG. 112, “big hit A8” is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” (see 202b1 in FIG. 112). The "big hit A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a probabilistic gaming state (probability changing state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot ends. Further, in the case of "big hit A8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to increase). For this reason, the "big hit A8" has the largest number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous (that is, a probabilistic gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set), and the general winning opening 630 is reached during the jackpot. There will be more chances to enter the ball (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot will increase). Therefore, "big hit A8" is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit A8" are "0 to 4". Since there are five, the rate at which "big hit A8" is determined when a big hit is won is 5% (5/100).

Further, "big hit B8" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 29" (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). "Big hit B8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit B8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to increase). For this reason, the number of rounds of the "big hit B8" is the second largest after the "big hit A8", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous (that is, a probabilistic gaming state that is more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state is set), and during the jackpot. There will be more opportunities to enter the general prize opening 630 (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of big hits will increase). Therefore, "big hit B8" is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player next to "big hit A8". Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit B8" are "5 to 29". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B8" is determined when a big hit is won is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit C8" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 54" (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). "Big hit C8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probabilistic game state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit C8", in each round of the big hit, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (a movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small). For this reason, the number of rounds of "Big hit C8" is the second largest after "Big hit A8", and the game state after the big hit is advantageous, but the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is reduced (big hit). The number of prize balls paid out in each round of is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit C8" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player in the prize spherical surface as compared with the "big hit A8" and the "big hit B8". Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit C8" are "30 to 54". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C8" is determined when a big hit is won is 25% (25/100).

Further, "big hit D8" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "55-69" (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). "Big hit D8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and a probabilistic gaming state is given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit D8", the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit D8" has an advantage in the game state after the big hit, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chances of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit are also reduced (each round of the big hit). The number of prize balls paid out to is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit D8" is a big hit type that is advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit, but is the most disadvantageous to the player in the prize spherical surface. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit D8" are "55-69". Since there are 15 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D8" is determined when a big hit is won is 15% (15/100).

Further, "big hit E8" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). "Big hit E8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 7 and 100 times of time-saving gaming states are given after the big hit is completed. Further, in the case of "big hit E8", the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern B (the movable pattern in which the number of times of the first induction state is small) in each round of the big hit. For this reason, the "big hit E8" has a disadvantage in the game state after the big hit, the number of rounds is the smallest, and the chance of entering the general winning opening 630 during the big hit is also reduced (paid out in each round of the big hit). The number of prize balls is relatively small). Therefore, the "big hit E8" is a big hit type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big hit and the prize spherical surface. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit E8" are "70 to 99". Since there are 30 pieces, the ratio at which "big hit E8" is determined when a big hit is won is 30% (30/100).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable patterns set in the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot game are configured differently according to the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the movable pattern A, which gives many chances to enter the general winning opening 630, will be the jackpot type (either jackpot A or B). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is the same as the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of the specific winning opening.

Of the jackpot control processes 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022, the jackpot control process in the sixth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022 of 6 (see FIG. 89) are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern (movable) corresponding to the jackpot type. The start of any of patterns A and B) is set (S1041), and the process shifts to S1006. More specifically, if the jackpot this time is either jackpot A8 or B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b, while if it is any of the jackpots C8 to E8, the movable member 657b is set. The movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern of.

Further, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot E8. It is determined whether or not there is (S1042), and if it is determined that the jackpot is E8 (S1042: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving gaming state, and the process is performed to S1013 to end the jackpot. And migrate. On the other hand, in the processing of S1042, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot E8 (one of the jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic gaming state. Then, the process is shifted to S1014 in order to end the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front tilting member 657bf forming an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the downward direction from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. A movable member 657b having a shape in which the rear inclined member 657b forming the inclination of the above is combined in the front-rear direction is provided, and a specific region (first entry) is provided according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b. The game ball that has reached the ball opening 64 (the area below the ball opening 64) can enter the ball (that is, guided by the movable member 657b), and the type of the winning opening is different. More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front inclined member 657 bf protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 60 and the rear inclined member 657 bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the front upper right portion formed by the front inclined member 657 bf is formed. The inclination in the downward direction from the direction to the lower left forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 657b is completely protruded (the state where the movable member 657b is arranged in the protruding position), the movable member 657b is specified by the inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view formed by the rear inclined member 657 bb. It forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the region is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the movable member 657b. The general winning opening 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you play, the more prize balls you can get. Therefore, in the intermediate position until the movable member 657b reaches the protruding position (the first guiding state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front inclined member 657bf), the game ball is positively moved. Since it can be fired to a specific area, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, as a movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot, a movable pattern in which the number of times the first induction state is likely to occur during one round tends to increase. One of two movable patterns, A and the movable pattern B in which the number of times of the first induction state is likely to be reduced, is set. More specifically, when the jackpot is A8 or B8, the movable member 657b is moved by the movable pattern A in each round of the jackpot, whereas when it is any of the jackpots C8 to E8, the movable member 657b is moved. It is configured to be movable with the movable pattern B. As a result, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be either the jackpot A8 or B8, which increases the number of times the first induction state is reached, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, a movable pattern A and a movable pattern B, are provided, but the movable pattern is not limited to two types, and may be more than two types. It may be good or small. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, it is not necessary to perform control processing to select a movable pattern according to the jackpot type at the start of a new round, reducing the processing load during execution of the jackpot game. can do. In addition, by increasing the types of movable patterns more than two types (for example, five types) and diversifying the number of times the first induction state is reached, the game is played with more attention to the set movable patterns. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b is changed in each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the movable pattern may be switched according to the number of rounds. As a result, the movement of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, so that each time a new round is started, the game can be played by paying attention to the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b. ..

In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when the jackpot is A8 or B8, and the movable pattern B is set when the jackpot is C8 to E8. Not limited to this, the correspondence between the type of movable pattern and the type of jackpot can be arbitrarily determined. For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A may be set when the number of rounds is a small number of jackpot types (for example, a jackpot of 7 rounds). With this configuration, if the jackpot type has a small number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot tends to increase, so the jackpot with a small number of rounds was decided. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The modified example of the eighth embodiment is different in that the rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the rotating member 658 is configured to be capable of rotating in the front clockwise direction with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating axis. By rotating the upper end of the rotating member 658 to a state in which the upper end is re-approached to the lower end of the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114 (c)), a state in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 657a is formed. That is, the inclination of the rotating member 658 from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view forms a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific region is guided to the specific winning opening 657a. In each round of the jackpot, the rotating member 658 is controlled to rotate in a predetermined rotation pattern, so that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a. Although the details will be described later, the rotation member 658 is inserted according to the rotation position (rotation angle) until the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114 (c)). The winning opening that can be played is variable. That is, the same operation as that of the eighth embodiment described above can be realized.

In the normal state, the rotating member 658 is in an upright state in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 114 (a). The game ball that has reached the specific area in this state is in the space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (on the left side of the front view of the rotating member 658), or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. Passes through the space (on the right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front) and flows down to the out port 66.

FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position temporarily arranged until the rotating member 658 rotates to a state in which the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), at the intermediate position, the rotating member 658 forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area reaches the general winning opening 630. Form a state that is easily induced. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, it becomes easy to enter the specific winning opening 657a shown in FIG. 114 (c). When releasing the state in which the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 658a as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 114 (a). It will be returned to the original state.

As described above, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. The rotating member 658 is arranged to form an inclination that can guide the game ball to the general winning opening 630 (see FIG. 114 (b)) according to the rotation position (rotation angle), and to the specific winning opening 657a. At least an arrangement (see FIG. 114 (c)) that forms a tilt that can guide the game ball can be taken. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, at the intermediate position while the rotating member 658 is rotating until the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a, the game is temporarily moved to the general winning opening 630. The ball is placed in a state where it can enter. As a result, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit increases as the game ball enters the general winning opening 630 during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

The rotating member 658 in the modified example of the eighth embodiment can also be diverted to the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above. More specifically, a rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left probability changing winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can be entered. In this case, the rotating member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise to form an inclination in a direction downward from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view. Further, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right probability changing winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment can be entered, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise from the upper left side of the front view. A downward slope may be formed on the lower right side.

In the eighth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position, but the state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 is The game ball is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured so that the game ball can be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including an open position or a closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning slot that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, a probabilistic winning slot that triggers a probable change state after the end of the jackpot, or a winning slot that triggers the start of a jackpot. (So-called two types of V winning openings) may be used. In addition, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an out port).

<9th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b that is movable in a predetermined movable pattern (any of the movable patterns A and B) during the execution of the jackpot game, The structure was such that the winning openings that could be won were variable. This makes it possible to change the winning opening in which the game ball is guided according to the timing when the game ball reaches a specific area, and to change the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. Was there.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of the ball entry port that is easy to enter can be changed according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is moved when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol. did. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which there is a high probability of winning in a lottery of ordinary symbols, it is possible to pay attention to the type of entry slot into which the game ball enters and perform the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 110 is provided in the main control device 110. The configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing to be executed has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 8 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the eighth embodiment described above, the description of the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the configuration is replaced from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (general winning opening 630, specific winning opening 657a, movable member). Since only 657b) has been described, in the description of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment, the difference from the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment will be described in order to make the explanation easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is electrically provided with the first ball entrance 64 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 84) in the sixth embodiment. The point that the accessory 64a is deleted, the point that the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are deleted and the variable winning device 65 is provided, and the point that the variable display device unit 80 is provided on the right side of the front view. A front view of the second entry port 640 in which the game ball can enter, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640, and the second entry port 640 with respect to the flow path. It differs from the general winning opening 63, which is provided on the left side and allows a game ball to enter. The second entrance 640 is an entrance that triggers a lottery of special symbols when a game ball enters. That is, it has the same performance as the first ball entry port 64. If the game ball enters the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is the same as the number of entry to the first entry opening 64. Separately held up to 4 times. Further, when the reserved ball for entering the first ball opening 64 and the reserved ball for entering the second ball opening 640 exist at the same time, the reserved ball for entering the second ball opening 640 is held. The lottery of special symbols based on the ball is preferentially executed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, but in the ninth embodiment, the second ball is provided along with the second ball entry port 640, and the second ball is hit when a lottery of a normal symbol is won. The traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is movable in an open state in which the game ball can enter the mouth 640. The traveling direction of the game ball for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 116.

FIG. 116 shows the flow path of the game ball when the game ball driven into the flow path provided in the right direction of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 by right-handed reaches the electric accessory 640a. It is a figure shown for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position), and FIG. 116 (b) shows the state. , The state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position where the second entrance 640 is opened, and FIG. 116 (c) shows the electric accessory 640a in the open position. It shows the state of being placed.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball launched toward the right side of the variable display device unit 80 by right-handed is closed second. The space between the ball entry port 640 and the general winning opening 63 flows down. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the plurality of nails arranged above the general winning opening 63 and forming an inclination in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are the upper right of the general winning opening 63. It protrudes to the right from the plurality of nails that make up the downward inclination from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Therefore, in a state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the closed position, the possibility that the right-handed game ball will flow down toward the general winning opening 63 is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the intermediate position while the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, the right-handed game ball tends to collide with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. When the game ball collides with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a, the collided game ball is reflected in the left direction in the front view and is easily guided in the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. This makes it easier to obtain a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) based on the balls entering the general winning opening 63.

In the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement does not completely match the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b), it is within a predetermined movable range including the intermediate position (for example, before and after the arrangement shown in FIG. 116 (b)). If it is within a movable range of about 10%), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 63 can be further increased.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the open position (the state where the second entrance 640 is open), the right-handed game ball is basically electric. It is guided to the second entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In the state where the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the electric accessory 640a descends from the upper right direction to the lower left direction of the front view, which is arranged at the upper right of the general winning opening 63, from the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. Of the plurality of nails that make up the orientation inclination, the height at which the upper end nail is arranged is higher. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second entry port 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a, but collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left in the front view, a plurality of them. It becomes difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 by passing above the nail. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the game ball that collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected to the left passes through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a and flows downward. ..

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the game ball is likely to be guided to the general winning opening 63 or to the second entry opening 640 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a. It forms a state, or forms a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances. Therefore, in the case of winning in the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the game can be performed by paying attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. In the ninth embodiment, a ball entered in the general winning opening 63 is configured to receive more prize balls than a ball entered in the second entry opening 640. Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at the intermediate position while the electric accessory 640a is moving to the open position, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a game playability that attracts more attention by the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is the second configuration with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11 (a)). The difference is that the hit type selection table 202ba is added.

The second hit type selection table 202ba is a data table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a when a hit is made in a lottery of ordinary symbols. The details of the second hit type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b).

FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the second hit type selection table 202ba, the type of the opening pattern set in the electric accessory 640a and each opening pattern are determined for each state of the normal symbol. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is "0" for the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "0 to 94". An opening pattern that is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is defined in association with each other (see 202c1 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since the random value (counter value) is 95, which is "0 to 94", the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined in the low probability state of the normal symbol. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Since it is extremely difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 within 0.1 seconds when the electric accessory 640a is opened, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened five times, "0.1". It is almost impossible to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 while the opening pattern of "second x 5 times" is set.

Further, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is associated with the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "95 to 99". (See 202c2 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are five random numbers (counter values) of "95 to 99", the ratio at which the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined is 5 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. % (5/100). Since it is easy to put the game ball into the second entrance 640 within 2 seconds, the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" allows the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. It is an open pattern that is easy to ball.

In this way, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, and even if the normal symbol hits, most of them have an open pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it becomes extremely difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in an open pattern that is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the electric accessory 640a is continuously between the closed position and the open position in a short period of time. It is arranged at an intermediate position (see FIG. 116 (b)). Therefore, while the electric accessory 640a is being opened in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the general winning opening 63, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out by hitting right, is reached. And enter the ball at a high rate. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit right while the opening operation is performed in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times".

In addition, although the illustration is omitted, in the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 in the low probability state of the normal symbol. An extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. That is, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol is not executed for 5 minutes thereafter, which is a disadvantageous state. Therefore, in the low-probability state of a normal symbol, if you hit right while the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" (opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the second entry port 640) is performed, the game is played. It will be disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, an opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined, which makes it almost impossible to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In that case, while notifying the player to hit right (right-handed navigation effect), when the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" that makes it easy to enter the second entrance 640 is determined. Is configured not to produce a right-handed navigation effect. As a result, while giving the player the maximum opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is excessively disadvantaged in the low probability state of the normal symbol (a lottery of the special symbol is performed for 5 minutes or more). It can be prevented from becoming a disadvantageous situation).

In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the lottery of special symbols executed based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and the variable display are referred to as "lottery of first special symbols" and "lottery of first special symbols". The special symbol lottery, which is called the "variable display of the first special symbol" and is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and the variable display are the "second special symbol lottery" and the "second special symbol lottery". 2 It is called "variable display of special symbols".

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is "0.1 seconds x 5" for the range where the value of the second hit type counter is "0 to 29". An opening pattern that is opened "times" is defined in association with each other (see 202c3 in FIG. 117 (b)). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since there are 30 random values (counter values) of "0 to 29", the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The ratio is 30% (30/100).

Further, for the value of the second hit type counter in the range of "30 to 99", an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is defined in association with it (FIG. 117). (B) See 202c4). Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern that is released "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are 70 random numbers (counter values) of "30 to 99", the ratio of the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined in the time saving state of the normal symbol is 70%. (70/100).

In this way, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, and when it hits the normal symbol, the opening pattern is "2 seconds x 1 time" at a rate of 70%, so it is normal. By continuing to hit right in the time-saving state of the symbol, it is possible to constantly enter the game ball into the second entry port 640. Further, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected, the game ball can easily enter the general winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Further, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shortened (it becomes equivalent to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), so that the second special symbol is drawn many times at short intervals. Can be done. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to hit right while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so the right-handed navigation effect is executed while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Continue to be done.

By continuing to hit right in the short-time game state and continuously executing the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time", it is possible to continuously execute the lottery of the second special symbol without reducing the number of balls held. can. In addition, if a lot of open patterns of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" are selected fortunately in the time saving state, the prize ball by entering the general winning opening 63 can be obtained without reducing the time saving number of times. .. Therefore, for the player, an opening pattern in which the period of being placed in the opening position is short during the time-saving gaming state (that is, an opening pattern in which the chance of entering the second ball opening 640 is relatively small) is provided. It is possible to realize a novel playability that the game can be played with the expectation that it will be decided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 (c) shows the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure. As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is a special symbol with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87 (b)). Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided, and instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, the first The difference is that the 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided. It is also different in that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 have the same configurations as the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. There is. That is, it has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value of is stored. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the above are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and are special based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. Judgments such as a lottery of symbols are made. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entry port 640. The maximum number of reserved balls (number of waits) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on (starting prize) is 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation processing 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. This special symbol variation process 9 (S141) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, as in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23). be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23) The same processes as those of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is determined. The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol is reserved. Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball count counter 203c2 (S223), and set the special figure 2 hold ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 after the update (S224). .. The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0), (S222: No). Then, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is larger than 0. (S227).

In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S227: No), the first Since neither the reserved ball of the 1 special symbol nor the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol exists, which means that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be newly started, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S228), and set the special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 after the update (S228). S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 30), as in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901).

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is performed. Move to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the details of the start winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 9 (S142) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is detected.

In the start winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entry slot 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variable display to be performed is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the first ball opening 64 has not won a prize (S421: No), or even if the game ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64, the process of S423 When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process shifts to S427. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is added by 1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later. Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203c1 from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 hold ball number command by the process of S425, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and processing is performed. Move to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similar to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entry opening 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (in the lottery of the second special symbol). The corresponding variation display hold count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). S429).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the process of S431, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described above. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the processing of S433. Move to. In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S433), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S433). In this look-ahead process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 in the start winning process 9 (see FIG. 119). If it is determined that no new ball has been detected (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not it is (S1502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time when the ball is detected (starting winning process 9 (FIG. 119)). Based on (see) S426 or various counter values stored in the process of S432), whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether or not it is a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its Predict the fluctuation pattern (S1503).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stop type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and this processing is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121. This ordinary symbol variation process 9 (S143) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the variable display of a normal symbol and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S519, the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S501 to S519 is executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the embodiment of the main generation 9, when it is determined in the processing of S519 that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S519: Yes), the second hit type The opening pattern to be set for the electric accessory 640a is determined with reference to the selection table 202ba, and the electric accessory operation start process for starting the opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531). This process ends. The details of this electric accessory operation start processing (S531) will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned electric accessory operation start processing (S531). In this electric accessory operation start processing (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and the current normal symbol state and the second are obtained from the read table. The opening pattern corresponding to the value of the type counter per 2 is read out (S1602). Here, the current state of the normal symbol is determined to be the time saving state of the normal symbol if the probability variation flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e. Is off, and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state. As described above, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 94", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, while "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected. If the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "95 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern. Further, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 29", "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, while the second hit. If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of "30 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the opening pattern.

When the processing of S1602 is completed, next, the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a by the opening pattern read in the processing of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether or not the present is the low probability state of the normal symbol (whether the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0) (S1604), and in the low probability state of the normal symbol. If there is (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the opening pattern set to start in the process of S1603 is the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the opening pattern set to start this time is the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605: Yes), the opening of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is opened. An open start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the pattern has started is set (S1606), and this process ends. By receiving the opening start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a right-handed navigation effect that urges the player to hit right. As a result, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set, which gives the player many chances to enter the general winning opening 63, the player is given an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63. Can be given with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1604 that the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1604: No), and when it is determined that the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set in the processing of S1605. (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

<Control processing of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 9 (S4071) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4071) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the command determination in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing the unprocessed command stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

Of the command determination processes 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4918, S4901 to the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as each process of S4918 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the winning information command. (S4909: No), then determines whether or not the open start command is included in the unprocessed command (S4931), and determines that the open start command is included in the unprocessed command. If this is the case (S4931: Yes), a right-handed navigation effect of an effect mode for urging the player to hit right is set (S4932), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4931 that the release start command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4931: No), the processing is transferred to S4911.

By setting the right-handed navigation effect by the processing of S4932, when the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" that gives many chances to enter the general winning opening 63 is set, the general winning opening It is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to enter the ball into 63. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game in the most unfavorable normal game state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory 640a, which is moved to the open position when it is hit by a lottery of ordinary symbols, is temporarily moved to the open position. When the gaming ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position where it can be arranged, the board configuration makes it easy for the gaming ball to be guided to the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the second entry opening 640. did. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which there is a high probability of winning in a lottery of ordinary symbols, it is possible to pay attention to the type of entry slot into which the game ball enters and perform the game. Further, in the ninth embodiment, as an opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, it is easy to be arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is large), but it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (the number of times the ball is arranged in the intermediate position is large). The opening pattern of the second ball opening 640 (the opening period of the second ball opening 640 is short) and the opening pattern, which is difficult to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times the ball is placed in the intermediate position is small), is easy to enter the second ball opening port 640 (the second ball opening port 640). An opening pattern (which has a long opening period of the entry port 640) is provided at least. By setting an open pattern that is easy to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times it is placed in the intermediate position is large), an opportunity to enter a game ball into the general winning opening 63 and obtain a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the opening pattern that makes it difficult for the player to enter the second entrance 640 is more difficult than the opening pattern that makes it easier for the player to enter the second entrance 640 (that is, the opening that is disadvantageous in a general gaming machine). It is possible to realize a novel playability of playing a game in a short-time game state in the expectation that it will become a pattern). Further, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol), the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position). When it is decided to execute the open pattern, a right-handed navigation effect (an effect suggesting that a game ball is launched toward the second entrance 640) is executed. With this configuration, in the most unfavorable gaming state for the player, it is possible to give an opportunity to win a prize ball by entering the general prize opening 63 every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a disadvantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal game state.

In the ninth embodiment, right-handed only when it is determined to execute the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is large) in the normal gaming state. It is configured to execute navigation, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute a right-handed navigation effect regardless of the open pattern when it hits a normal symbol, and it is difficult to arrange it in the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged in the intermediate position is small), but the second The right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when the opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball entry port 640 (the opening period of the second ball entry port 640 is long) is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chance of entering the second ball entry port 640 in the normal game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the normal game state from becoming monotonous.

In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position, but is easily guided to the general winning opening 63. The state is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be configured so that the game ball can be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 within a movable range including the open position or the closed position. Further, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning slot that triggers a lottery of a special symbol, or it may be a winning slot that triggers the start of a big hit (so-called two-type V winning slot). In addition, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an out port).

In the ninth embodiment, the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is set while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and when the normal symbol hits. It was configured to execute the right-handed navigation effect only when it was decided, but the execution timing of the right-handed navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, if the normal symbol hits during the time saving state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends after the time saving state ends, and the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is started, the "0.1 seconds x 5 times" opening pattern is started. It may be configured to extend the right-handed navigation effect that was executed during the time saving state until the opening pattern of "second x 5 times" is completed. As a result, the right-handed navigation effect is executed immediately after the player returns to left-handed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the ninth embodiment, the ball is easily entered into the general winning opening 63 according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that opens and closes the second entry opening 640, and the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. The configuration is such that an easy state and a state in which it is difficult to enter any of the entrances are switched, but this configuration is not limited to the second entrance 640. For example, the specific winning opening may have the same configuration as the second entry opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the arrangement of the general winning opening 63 may be the same as in the ninth embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the general winning opening 63 during the big hit game, so that the number of prize balls given during the big hit game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, arrangement of wind turbines, etc.) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13. A game ball (a game ball hit to the right) fired toward the flow path and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) fired toward the flow path provided on the left side. The period from the launch of the ball to the arrival at the specific area (the area below the first entry port 64) was configured to be substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the game ball (right-struck game ball) launched toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 is on the left side. It is configured so that the period until reaching a specific area is longer than that of a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) fired toward a flow path provided in. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the variable display device unit 80 is more than the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side is configured so that the rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a is higher.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The first implementation is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is the variable display device unit in the game board 13 with respect to the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a detour accessory 700 is provided on the right side of the 80 so that the play ball can enter the inside. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but in this detour accessory 700, the time until the right-handed game ball (launched on the right side of the game board 13) reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided to make it longer. In other words, in the detour accessory 700, the game ball fired by right-handed hit reaches the specific winning opening 65a rather than the period until the game ball fired by left-handed reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The flow time of the right-handed game ball can be lengthened so that the time of is longer. In the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The period until reaching is configured to be 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, the details of the detour accessory 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 125, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the upper portion thereof. The game ball launched by right-handed strike can enter the inside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710. Further, at the lower part of the detour accessory 700, an opening 720 is provided for discharging the game ball flowing down in the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700. Further, in the detour accessory 700, in order to prevent the ball that has advanced inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the peripheral portion 730 allows the front side, the back side, and the left-right direction of the front view. It is surrounded by four directions. Since the peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily visually recognize how the ball flows down.

Further, since the plane on the back side of the front view of the peripheral portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, a gap is generated between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral portion 730, the flat surface on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, so that the peripheral portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. By creating a gap between the two, it is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward of the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each guide flow path 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the inner wall on the back side of the front view and the inner wall on the front side of the front view). It is configured to be substantially the same as the distance between). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Further, the guide flow paths 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. Then, the guide flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detour accessory 700. That is, the flow path inclined downward from the upper right direction of the front view to the lower left direction and the flow path inclined downward from the upper left direction of the front view to the lower right direction are alternately provided.

The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guide flow path 740, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guide flow path 740. Then, when the game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 740, the game ball falls from the guidance flow path 740 toward the guidance flow path 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 in the lower right direction of the front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 750, the game ball falls into the guidance flow path 760 and flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 760.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720. Every time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows down changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). It is possible to reduce the momentum (flowing speed) of the ball flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the game ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is launched to the lower part of the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64 or variable winning), as compared with launching the game ball to the left side of the game board 13. The time to reach (the area where the device 65 is arranged) can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is pivotally supported by the flow path support shafts 714 to 791, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each flow path support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. Further, in the rotation operation, the lower surface of each induction flow path 740 to 790 is set with respect to the rotation stop members 742a to 792a provided under each induction flow path 740 to 790 or the rotation stop members 742b to 792b. It stops by touching. This rotation operation will be described by taking the induction flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the induction flow path 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the upper half of the guidance flow path 740 is downward. A force is generated in the direction of turning to. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 clockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates clockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much clockwise and causing the guide flow path 740 to tilt in the opposite direction.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a member having a substantially cylindrical shape, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position does not shift due to the impact when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact. The structures of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b are the same as those of the rotation stop members 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the lower half of the guidance flow path 740 is rotated downward. A directional force is generated. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the induction flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to suppress that the inclination of the guide flow path 740 becomes too large and the momentum of the game ball cannot be reduced. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed strike can be surely flowed down to the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. .. If the game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide flow path 740 to 790 maximized, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640. The path length of 740 to 790 and the maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down while maintaining the maximum inclination angle of all the guidance flow paths 740 to 790, the time for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640 is surely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the slopes of the guided flow paths 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game balls, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the guided flow paths 740 to 790 can be changed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. Further, in the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guide flow path 740 has been described, but a state in which a plurality of balls travel on the same guide flow path may occur during the actual game. In this case, since the rotation operation of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be further irregular, the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners of the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners of the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each induction flow path 740 to 790 rotates, it is possible to make it difficult for the corner of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730. Therefore, since each guide flow path 740 to 790 can be arranged closer to the peripheral edge portion 730, a gap is created between each guide flow path 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge portion 730, and the game ball is formed in the gap. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each guide flow path 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination due to its own weight in a state where the game ball does not flow down. For example, in a state where the sphere does not flow down the guide flow path 740, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the rotation stop members 752a to 792a by their own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is rotating, or whether the game ball flows down while the rotation of each of the guide flow paths 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the ball can be changed accordingly.

It should be noted that each of the guided flow paths 740 to 790 may not rotate under its own weight, but may be configured to rotate only by the passage of the game ball. Further, for example, each induction flow path 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 124. As shown in FIG. 124, a large number of nails below the detour accessory 700 so as to limit the flow direction of the game ball flowing out of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700. Is placed. With these nails, all the game balls that have flowed out of the detour accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65 (the first ball entry port 64). It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 124, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65, a relatively wide space (wider than one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (Flow path) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is open and the game ball is fired by left-handing, many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but some of the game balls (for example, 10). The ratio of one ball to the ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, the right-handed player has a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but the left-handed player has the specific winning opening 65a depending on the reflection direction of the game ball and the ejection situation. The possibility that the time to reach the ball will be long is not 0 (for example, when the game ball launched to the left is temporarily stopped, or when the ball is clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. etc). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the left side. In other words, it tends to be longer (the game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side tends to have a shorter period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a).

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the rate at which the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and the left-handed game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a. It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to finish the jackpot game at an early stage), some loss (a waste of about 1 in 10 balls) is performed during the jackpot game. With the ball) in mind, it is possible to play a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting left. On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting right with the expectation that the period of the big hit game will be long. Can be made. Therefore, since each player can select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability according to the taste of each player. Each round of jackpots ends when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed. Even if you start firing the game ball by hitting right after each round of the jackpot starts, 10 game balls are passed through the detour accessory 700 before 30 seconds elapse, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage in the winning spherical surface (the round ends before a predetermined number of game balls win the specific winning opening 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed on the upper left side of the front view and the upper right side of the front view in the main display area Dm. , A display area HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display areas HR15 and HR16 is formed below the display area HR15 and the display area HR16. In the display area HR15, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and the characters "left-handed high-speed mode" and "the jackpot can be quickly digested" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit to the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, an image imitating a right-pointing arrow is displayed for the display area HR16, and the characters "right-handed low-speed mode" and "you can thoroughly digest the jackpot" are displayed. Characters and characters are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit right during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested over a relatively long time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively slow speed). Can be made to.

As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is being hit are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB imitating a treasure box containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR17, and at the upper right side inside the display area HR17, " A display area HR19 with the characters "big hit" is formed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot game is being executed. Further, on the upper left side inside the display area HR 17, a display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (prize balls up to now). Information indicating the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts) is displayed. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR18 make it possible for the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of the right-handed game ball to the specific winning opening 65a is set, and the left-handed game ball is the specific winning opening. It is configured to be higher than the rate of entering the ball in 65a. With these configurations, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to win a large number of prize balls in a shorter time), some loss (1 ball in 10 balls) during the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to play a game aiming at a specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side with a certain percentage of wasted balls). On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting right with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. Can be done. Therefore, since each player can select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability according to the taste of each player.

In the tenth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball launched by right-handed hit reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. It was configured so that the game ball fired by the player would be longer than the period until the game ball reached the variable winning device 65. That is, it is better to hit right by making the path length when the game ball launched by right-handed strikes down longer than the path length when the game ball launched by left-handed strikes down. It was configured so that the flow time was longer than that of hitting, but it is not limited to this. For example, a known croon means may be provided in place of the detour accessory 700 in the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. With this configuration, the period from reaching the crune means to passing through the crune means can be lengthened, so that the flow time of the game ball launched by right-handed can be lengthened. Further, for example, instead of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 may be provided. Of these, by forming the right side of the game board 13 with a substance having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side (for example, an elastic body such as rubber), the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is the base plate 60. It may be configured so that it is easily decelerated by the friction of. Further, instead of the detour accessory 700, by making the arrangement of the nails different between the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the flow path on the right side, it is better to flow down the flow path on the right side. It may be configured so that the period until reaching the lower region (the region where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) in the game board 13 is longer than when the game board 13 flows down the road.

In the tenth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the game playability when the left-handed hit is performed and the game playability when the right-handed hit is performed are displayed in the display area HR15 and the display area HR16, respectively. However, it is not limited to this, although it was configured to be displayed. For example, during the jackpot, only the image prompting left-handedness may be displayed, or only the image prompting right-handedness may be displayed. By displaying only the image that encourages left-handed hitting, the jackpot can be completed in a short time, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by displaying only the image that encourages right-handed hitting, it is possible to reduce waste balls (game balls that enter the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a). The profit of the player in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, in the case of notifying the player of the firing direction during the jackpot, the firing direction to be notified may be different depending on the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect executed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, when a probability variation jackpot is reached, a variable display effect (an effect mode that is executed only when a probability variation jackpot is reached) is executed in which the main symbols (probability variation symbols) with odd numbers are aligned. It is configured to decide by lottery whether to execute a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed when a normal big hit occurs) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. Then, when it becomes a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and the effect of aligning the normal symbols is determined by the lottery, the effect of notifying whether or not the probability variation jackpot is during the jackpot is executed. .. In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (for example, an effect in which it is not known whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and an immediate notification at the end of the first round. The player is made to select (that is, an operation means such as a button or a lever that can be operated by the player) between the effect mode to be performed and the effect mode in which the player does not know where to be notified in each round of the jackpot. May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and then the selection of the effect mode may be executed in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the jackpot of the normal symbol notification) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, the configuration suggests right-handed strike. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a longer period for the player to select the effect mode, so that the player can more reliably select the desired effect mode. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the probabilistic symbols are aligned), the left-handed hit may be notified during the jackpot. .. With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large number of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is achieved and a production in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot is executed in the first round of the jackpot. However, the effect may be such that an effect (operation effect) for urging an operation on the operating means is executed in the effect. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means, and an effect of urging the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period is executed. Then, the display mode changes according to the number of times the push button is pressed (for example, the gauge of the indicator accumulates), and the display mode changes to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge changes). It may be configured to notify that it is a probable change jackpot by accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, if it becomes a normal jackpot or a probable variable jackpot, and if the effect that the normal symbols are aligned is determined by the lottery (when the operation effect is executed), the right-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot. Since the round period of one round can be relatively long, it is possible to secure a longer period for performing the operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the operation effect. On the other hand, if it becomes a probability variation jackpot and the effect that the probability variation symbols are aligned is decided by lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the jackpot is made by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until the end can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, instead of letting the user select the effect mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (voice effect) played during the execution of the jackpot game is selected. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handed may be notified during the period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (directed by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the song selection menu screen. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be provided with an operation means such as a button that can be operated by the player in place of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content for the operation means. The image of 1 is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, the images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears to be lit, and the other images appear to be extinguished. It is configured as follows. Further, as an operation means, three types of buttons are provided: a button corresponding to the up movement (up button), a button corresponding to the down movement (down button), and a button corresponding to the decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting the pressing of the upper button during the song selection period, the image that was lit until just before the pressing is switched to the lit appearance, and the image arranged one above is switched to the lit appearance. (The image that looks like it is lit moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the lower button is detected, the lit image is configured to move downward by one. Further, by detecting the pressing of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is lit at the time of pressing is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. That is, it is set as a music to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the player's favorite music can be played during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

Under such circumstances, if the configuration is such that the left-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so that the song selection period is shortened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the playback by the enter button. On the other hand, one round is configured to notify the right-handed hit during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot (the jackpot in which the execution of the effect of selecting a song is determined) in which the song selection period is set. Since the round period of the eyes can be relatively long, the player searches for the desired song from the song selection menu screen (operates the up button and down button so that the corresponding image looks lit. It is possible to secure a longer period for making a decision (pressing the enter button). As a result, it is possible to reliably select a favorite song without irritating the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a song can be enhanced. In addition, by configuring the configuration to notify the left-handed hit during the first round of the jackpot for which the song selection period is not set (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot effect is executed), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and speedily. You can digest the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the effect mode executed during the jackpot.

Further, in the case where the effect (operation effect) for urging the player to operate the operation means, such as setting the song selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined ratio in the case of a big hit, the player's past The firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, when the jackpot with the operation effect set is started, the game is played over the jackpot with the operation effect set for the past predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) based on the stored past operation history. If the player is not performing the operation, the left-handed hit may be notified, while if the player is operating within a predetermined number of times, the right-handed hit may be notified. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even if an operation effect is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be awarded in a short time by notifying the player of a left-handed hit and ending the first round of the jackpot earlier. While achieving the gameplay that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation effect, the execution period of the operation effect is extended by notifying the right-handed hit, and the player can perform the operation effect. It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the tenth embodiment, the right-handed hit is a prize spherical surface because the board surface configuration is such that the right-handed hit has a higher entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed hit. The configuration was set to be slightly advantageous, but the configuration for making right-handed hits advantageous on the prize spherical surface is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hit and the game ball fired by left-handed hitting into the specific winning opening 65a the same, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) is used. A general winning opening having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter and the game ball hit to the right can enter). That is, in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open, the game ball hit to the left basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. While flowing down to the mouth 66, the right-handed game ball may basically enter the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the game balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when a right-handed hit is made, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is the prize ball by the jackpot (that is, the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a). Since it is given in addition to the prize ball), it is possible to take advantage of the prize spherical surface by hitting right during the big hit. Therefore, the player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit right with the expectation that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, let them hit left during the jackpot with the expectation that it will be a little more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting on the prize spherical surface. Can be done.

In the tenth embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the characteristics when the player simply hits the right side and the characteristics when the player hits the left side are displayed on the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126). ), Not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether the game board 13 is hit right or left at a predetermined position (for example, the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the middle of the flow path on the right side). The configuration may be such that the detection means such as the above is provided, and the direction in which the player is launching the game ball is determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the effect during the jackpot may be changed according to the determined firing direction. For example, when right-handed strike is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on, while when left-handed hit is detected, the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned on. It may be configured to have the appearance of being turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of game playability will be obtained depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the flow path provided on the right side of the game board 13 is larger than that of the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is easier for each player to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) in the case of flowing down. It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flow direction of the game ball, and the like. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open (that is, during the execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by right-handed hitting rather than the case where the game ball is fired by left-handed hitting. A game board 13 having a board structure is adopted so that it is easier to win (win a ball) in the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a big hit, a right probability variable winning device 659 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65. The right probability variation winning opening 659a of the right probability variation winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and is the same as the left probability variation winning opening 655La and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment described above. In addition, when the game ball enters during the big hit, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit ends. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the big hit, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are given when the game balls enter. In addition, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right. Details will be described later, but hitting left in the first round. If you continue to do so, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation winning device 659 while the right probability variation winning opening 659a can be entered increases, but the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability variation winning opening 659a is It is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the probability variation winning device 659 while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is capable of entering is reduced, but the reached game balls. Is configured so that the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is high. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the ball entry rate is high instead of a small number of reached balls).

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed so as to be the same as the various control processes in the seventh embodiment. .. The tenth regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the tenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment, the curved surface member 810 is provided in place of the curved surface member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 124) in the tenth embodiment. It differs in that it is. As shown in FIG. 127, a probability variation winning device 659 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810.

The probability variation winning device 659 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular right probability variation winning opening 659a in a substantially central portion thereof. This right probability variable winning opening 659a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 659f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot is started, the opening / closing door 659f1 is the jackpot. It is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each type. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a and the state in which it is difficult to enter the ball are switched by a specific switching pattern. Then, while the opening / closing door 659f1 is open (while the ball can enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a), when the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is changed. , The probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol are set (the probability change flag 203e is set to on at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, if the game ball never enters the right probability change winning opening 659a in one jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol. It is set (100 is set in the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a than when the game ball never enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a during the jackpot. (The game state after the big hit is advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 127, since the right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged along the curved path of the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour accessory 700 and has fallen to the curved member 810 By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the right probability variation winning opening 659a can be easily reached. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end of the curved surface member 810 on the upper surface and the left end of the right probability variation winning opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. Further, the curved surface member 820 provided below the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved surface member 810. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 127, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form a downward inclination from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when the game ball hit left and passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 820 Reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in the front view flows down to the lower right in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved surface member 810 can easily reach the right probability variation winning opening 659a by rolling the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 to the right in the front view. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the probability variation winning device 659 regardless of whether the player hits right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be launched in the desired direction.

Next, the structure of the probability variation winning device 659 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the probabilistic winning device 659 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is closed (a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right probabilistic winning opening 659a). In (b), the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is switched from the closed state to the open state (the game ball is switched from the difficult-to-enter state to the open-capable state in the right probabilistic winning opening 659a). It is a front perspective view of the winning device 659.

As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in a state where the right probability variation winning opening 659a is closed, the probability variation winning device 659 of the left end of the opening / closing door 659f1 that closes the right probability variation winning opening 659a and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810. It is smoothly connected to the part on the left side (left floor surface 810b) with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, a convex portion 659g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side of the front view passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 and rolling to the right is provided. It is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1, the game ball that has rolled on the opening / closing door 659f1 from the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 and rolls. The movement stops. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view, so that the game ball whose rolling is hindered by the convex portion 659g1 can be opened / closed. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows down toward the lower left of the front view. Then, the left floor surface 810b is rolled to the left in the front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. The game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the probability variation winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a stronger flow force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so that the opening / closing door 659f1 In the closed state, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659 g1 and flow down to the direction of the out port 66. By arranging the probability variation winning device 659 in an inclined manner in this way, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating on the upper part of the opening / closing door 659f1 during the period when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed, and to the out opening 66. It can be made to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right probability change winning opening 659a is switched to a state in which the ball can enter, the opening / closing door 659f1 blocking the upper part of the right probability change winning opening 659a The opening / closing door 659f1 is opened by sliding and moving to the left in the front view. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), while the opening / closing door 659f1 is being opened, the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side of the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 659 g1 and it becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 659. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, but when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b have almost the same height (almost smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow direction of the game ball that has reached the probabilistic winning device 659 will be described when the opening / closing door 659f1 of the probabilistic winning device 659 is closed and opened. First, FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a probability variation winning device 659 and a curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the heights of the upper end of the convex portion 659g1 provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1 and the left floor surface 810b are substantially the same. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction in the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659 g1. That is, the ball can be easily entered (winned) in the right probability variable winning opening 659a without being hindered by the convex portion 659g1. In addition, with respect to the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) with respect to the probability variation winning device 659, there is something that hinders the entry (winning) of the right probability variation winning opening 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right probability change winning opening 659a.

FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variation winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), when the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed, the right probability variable winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction when viewed from the front with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 has an inclination in the upward direction in the upper right direction formed by the opening / closing door 659f1, and the gravity in the downward direction acts in the lower left direction. , The momentum of rolling is reduced. Further, since the convex portion 659g1 protruding upward from the other part of the opening / closing door 659f1 is provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the momentum of rolling to the right is strong, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is almost the same. Even if it is possible to climb all the way up, the convex portion 659g1 prevents it from reaching the right floor surface 810a side. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1 and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 is in a state in which sufficient momentum is added to overcome the convex portion 659 g1 due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 659g1 and pass through the opening / closing door 659f1. As a result, the curved surface member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 659f1 (right probability variation winning opening 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A11) in which the right probability variation winning opening 659a is set so that the ball can be entered for a relatively long period and the ball is entered for a relatively short period. A jackpot type (big hit B11) that is set to a possible state is provided. The longer the ball can be entered, the more chances that the game ball will enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, so the game state after the big hit is advantageous (the probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol). It is more likely to be set to state). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the gaming state after the jackpot is likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the opening pattern of the right probability variation winning opening 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 is referred to as an opening pattern capable of winning a V, and the right probability variation set in the first round of the jackpot B11. The opening pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V.

FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right probability variable winning opening 659a when a V winning open pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot A11) is set. .. When the V winning open pattern is set, first, the right probability change winning opening 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, at the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right probability change winning opening 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right probability variation winning opening 659a until the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely opened. Therefore, it will be in a completely open state 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have passed (that is, 2.0 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right probability change winning opening 659a is started. .. This closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round), similar to the opening operation. Then, when the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely closed, the state in which the right probability variation winning opening 659a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (that is, 2.8 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the right probability change winning opening 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds, and closed over 0.3 seconds.

After that, the state of being completely closed for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right probability change winning opening 659a is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is for 0.2 seconds. A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. By this repeated operation, in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated 6 times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the final opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 for lengthening the flow time of the game ball is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. .. When the right-handed game ball passes through the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the probability variation winning device 659, etc. are arranged). The period until reaching is 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right-handed hit is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 within a time of at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball reaches the probability variation winning device 659 around the start of the last opening period (8 seconds after the start of the first round) in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a only in the last opening period out of the six opening periods. be.

On the other hand, if the player continues to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (first ball opening 64, variable winning device 65, probability variation winning device 659) takes about 1 to 2 seconds. Since the game ball reaches the area where the balls are evenly arranged), if the game ball is immediately left-handed at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. .. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right probability change winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball that has rolled from the left side toward the right probability change winning opening 659a has an opening period of 1 (completely closed after the opening is started) as compared with the game ball that has rolled from the right side. In 0.8 seconds), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right probability change winning opening 659a is shortened. Further, when the player hits the left side, the number of game balls which cannot reach the probability variation winning device 659 increases as compared with the case where the player hits the right side. That is, when the game ball cannot reach the curved surface member 810 and enters the out port 66 by passing through between a plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, or when the ball enters the out port 66. 1 The ball may enter the ball entry port 64. Therefore, when the opening pattern that allows V winning is set, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability variation winning opening 659a is open by hitting the left in the first round is large, but it is entered. The ratio of balls is low, and the number of wasted balls is large. On the other hand, when a right-handed hit is made in the first round of a big hit, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability change winning opening 659a is open is small, but the rate of entering balls is high. Will be. Therefore, since the game playability of the first round can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot. In addition, the possibility that a game ball will enter during one round is almost the same (for example, about 80% ratio) regardless of whether a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot. As described above, the opening period, the board composition, and the like are set.

FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right probability variable winning opening 659a when an opening pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B11) is set, which makes it difficult to win a V. be. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the right probability variable winning opening 659a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after it is completely opened. To. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to put a game ball into the right probability change winning opening 659a while the right probability change winning opening 659a is open, regardless of whether the player hits the left or the right. The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player can be expected that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A11 (a V winning open pattern is set).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening / closing door 659f1 during the opening period of 1 when the V winning open pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability change winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1, so that the game ball is placed against the right probability change winning opening 659a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 659f1, the opening / closing door 659f1 slides to the left in the front view and is housed inside the curved surface member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability change winning opening 659a that is not blocked by the opening / closing door 659f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (FIG. 131). See (b)). As a result, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a. On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by the portion of the opening / closing door 659f1 that is not housed inside the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 659g1 makes it right. It is prevented from entering the probabilistic winning opening 659a. That is, the game ball that has rolled from the left side cannot enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, as in the state where the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 seconds. Then, after 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 659f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), so that the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659 g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 659f1. (See FIG. 131 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side of the front view with respect to the probability variation winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a. That is, both the game ball rolled from the right direction (the game ball launched by right-handed hit) and the game ball rolled from the left direction (the game ball fired by left-handed hit) are both right probability change winning openings 659a. It will be in a state where it is possible to enter the ball. After that, until the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the game ball that has rolled from both directions (both right side and left side) can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a.

As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (opening / closing door). 659f1 is completely open) (see FIG. 131 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In this closing operation, the operation opposite to the opening operation is performed over the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, during the period from the start of the opening operation to the closing of the opening / closing door 659f1 again, the opening operation is started during the period during which the game ball can enter the probability variation winning device 659a. It is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after that to 0.1 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, in the case of left-handed hitting, it is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 659f1 is completely closed. That is, the rate at which the game ball that has reached the probability variation winning device 659 enters is higher when the player hits the right than when the player hits the left.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which the game ball is possible for the right probability variation winning opening 659a is the game ball that reaches the probability variation winning device 659 from the right side or the game that arrives from the left side. It is configured to be variable according to whether it is a sphere. As a result, when the game ball arrives at the probability variation winning device 659 from the right side, it can be expected to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a more strongly. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, more game balls are played against the probability variation winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot in the case of hitting left than in the case of hitting right. It is configured to reach. Therefore, when a left-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability change winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball, but on the right. When a ball is hit, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left probability change winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property with few chances of entering the ball. Therefore, since the game playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the first round.

In the eleventh embodiment, by providing the convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 659f1, the period during which the game ball that has rolled from the left side can enter the right probability change winning opening 659a is changed from the right side. Although the structure is such that the moving game ball is shorter than the period during which the ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 659 g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is deleted, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the opening / closing door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131 (b)) due to the inclination of the opening / closing door 659f1 in the upward direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right probability change winning opening 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the display mode of the jackpot A11 (the jackpot in which the V winning open pattern is set) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 is started, the characters "mode of hitting several hits by left-handed" and "mode of hitting several hits with left-handed hits" with respect to the display area HR15 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and ". The words "It's hard to get into V though the number of arrivals is large!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, if a left-handed hit is made, more game balls can be reached to the probability variation winning device 659, but it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a (V prize). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game becomes playable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR16, the characters "Right-handed one-shot deadly mode", "The number of arrivals is small, but it is easy to enter V!" And the arrow pointing to the right are imitated. The image that was created is displayed. According to these display contents, when the player hits right, the number of game balls reaching the probability variation winning device 659 decreases, while the game ball easily enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a (it becomes easy to win V). It is possible to easily make the player understand that it becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, an image imitating the probability variation winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed in the display area HR 17 in the third symbol display device 81. Further, on the front side of the front view of the right probability variation winning device 659, a state in which a decoration imitating the alphabet "V" is applied is displayed, and on the upper left side of the front view in the display area HR17, "Aim for V". The display area HR20 in which the characters "!!" are displayed is displayed. With these display contents, it is advantageous for the player to put the game ball into the probability variation winning device 659 which is decorated to imitate the character "V" (special after the big hit). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the symbol is in a probable change state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, the arrows pointing in the direction of the probabilistic winning device 659 are on the left side and the upper right side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the probabilistic winning device 659, respectively. The image is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the probability variation winning device 659 has the characters "hit a few hits", and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the front view. Is marked with the words "one-shot deadly". According to these display contents, when the player hits the left according to the display contents of the display area HR15 (the mode in which several hits are hit is selected), the game ball is displayed from the left direction of the front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the player is rolling. In addition, when the player strikes right according to the display content of the display area HR16 (selects the one-shot deadly mode), the game ball rolls from the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the right probability change winning device 659. This can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand which direction the player should pay attention to to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probability change winning opening 659a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, a privilege (prize ball) is given to the player when the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game (during the special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right probability variable winning device 659, are provided. The right probability variation winning opening 659a of the right probability variation winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot. The probability variation state of the symbol is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a, whether or not the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous to the player changes. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is reached. It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

The right probability variation winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right, and if the game ball continues to hit left in the first round, the right probability variation winning opening Although the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 increases while the 659a is in a state where the ball can be entered, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability variation winning opening 659a is low. .. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right probability change winning device 659 while the right probability change winning opening 659a can be entered decreases, but the reached game. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball enters the right probability variation winning opening 659a is high. That is, in terms of the number of game balls that reach the right probability variation winning device 659 during a predetermined period (the period until the end of one round of opening pattern) (the number of opportunities to win a prize in the right probability variation winning opening 659a) ( The element) is configured so that left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed. Further, the aspect (element) of the ease of entering the ball (entry rate) with respect to the right-probability variable winning device 659 is configured so that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right probability change winning opening 659a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the ball entry rate is high instead of a small number of reached balls). Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability that suits the tastes of more players, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of a big hit, it is more advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate than when a left-handed hit is made (right). The game ball that has reached the probability variation winning device 659 can easily enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a). It was configured to be advantageous in terms of aspect (more game balls can easily reach the right probability variation winning device 659). As a result, the player can decide whether to hit right or left by making the advantageous side and the disadvantage side different between the case of right-handed hit and the case of left-handed hit. Although it has realized the playability that can be selected by, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed is not limited to this. For example, if the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), the entry of the game ball is detected at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when hitting left (for example, it is difficult to enter the ball when hitting right). A lot of prize balls are given when the ball is hit (for example, 15 per hit), and a specific prize opening is provided so that the game ball can easily enter when hitting right (difficult to hit when hitting left). A specific winning opening may be provided at a position where the opening time is long (for example, up to 5 seconds) but the number of prize balls given is small (for example, 3 per entry). Then, the specific winning openings to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely shortened (for example, 0.1 seconds). With this configuration, if you continue to hit left during the big hit, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening tends to decrease, but it will be given when you enter the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize playability in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right during the big hit, it is easier for more game balls to enter the specific winning opening, but less prize balls will be given when you enter the specific winning opening. Sex can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select a desired playability and play the game. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where it is easy for a game ball to enter when hitting left (it is difficult to enter when hitting right), and a game ball enters when hitting right. The right probability variable winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball if left-handed), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period when the right probability variable winning device 659 is opened in one big hit. It may be configured to be shorter than the period. That is, if one continues to hit right at the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the right probability variation winning opening 659a and the probability variation state will be given after the jackpot, but the number of prize balls obtained will be reduced. If you continue to hit left, you will be able to win a large number of prize balls by having many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but it will be difficult to enter the right probability changing winning opening 659a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in this configuration, the superiority can be different for each firing direction during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device in which only the winning ball is given to the winning ball) and the right probability changing winning device 659 (the winning ball is given to the winning ball and the probability changing state). The positional relationship with the variable winning device) may be reversed. Further, setting a surface (element) that is more advantageous for right-handed hitting and a side (element) that is more advantageous for left-handed hitting is not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, in a normal game, an element in which a left-handed hit is more advantageous than a right-handed hit and an element in which a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a left-handed hit may be provided. More specifically, for example, a left-handed ball opening for a left-handed game ball and a right-handed right-handed game ball for a right-handed game ball are provided. When a game ball enters any of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. And, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, playing a game aiming at the right entrance with a right-handed hit is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left-handed hit, while playing a left-handed hit has an aspect of game efficiency. It is more disadvantageous than right-handed, but if you win a big hit, you can easily select the jackpot type (type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed. good.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of a big hit, the game ball reaching the right-right probability change winning device 659 is right-probability change as compared with the case of left-handed hit. While the configuration is such that it is easy to enter the winning opening 659a, when a left-handed hit is made, more game balls are more likely to reach the right probability variable winning device 659 than when a right-handed hit is made. It was composed. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the launch direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. Then, the corresponding effect may be executed according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left-handed hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 132) is such that the display area HR15 is turned on and the display area HR16 is turned off. When right-handed hitting is detected, the display area HR 16 may be turned on and the display area HR 15 may be turned off so that the display mode looks like it is turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the playability selected by himself / herself.

In the eleventh embodiment, the opening / closing door 659f1 of the right probability variation winning device 659 is configured to be opened by sliding to the left in the front view, so that the game is rolled from the right side with respect to the right probability variation winning device 659. The ball is configured so that the ball can enter for a longer period than the game ball that has rolled from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the opening / closing door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 659f1 may be configured to be opened from the front side to the back side of the front view. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 659f1 on the right front side of the front view may be configured to be shorter than the length of one game ball or more on the front left side of the front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 659f1 is stored in the back side of the front view, the game ball can enter the right side of the opening / closing door 659f1 earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 659f1 is closed. May be configured so that when the opening / closing door 659f1 protrudes forward in front of the opening / closing door 659f1, the left side of the opening / closing door 659f1 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter. Even in this configuration, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the game ball that has rolled from the right side with respect to the right probability variation winning device 659 enters the ball more than the game ball that has rolled from the left side. It can be configured to have a longer possible period.

In the eleventh embodiment, a surface in which left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than right-handed hitting due to the board surface configuration (that is, a game ball that has reached the right-handed probability-changing winning device 659 enters the right-probability changing winning opening 659a. (Ratio) and a surface where right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right probability variation winning device 659 in one round). Not limited. For example, it may be realized in a controlled manner. More specifically, for example, the right probability variation winning opening 659a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured so that it can be detected whether the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit, and it is detected that the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit. The opening pattern may be different depending on the case. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the right-handed winning opening 659a is opened a small number of times, but the right-handed winning opening 659a is opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while a left-handed hit is detected. In this case, the right probability variation winning opening 659a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively short while the number of opening of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is relatively large. Further, the player may be allowed to select the game playability of the jackpot by operating an operating means such as a button instead of the firing direction of the game ball.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 151. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) in which a state in which a ball can be entered during execution of a jackpot game are set are arranged to face each other. In addition, a movable member corresponding to each specific winning opening is arranged between the specific winning openings, and the corresponding movable member is projected to form a downward inclination toward the corresponding specific winning opening. It was composed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry slot 640L having the same performance as the first entry opening 64 is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La. That is, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other. Then, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640La provided in place of the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment is projected to move toward the left second entrance ball opening 640L. It is configured to form a downward slope.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit at a specific timing during the execution of the jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, 8 or 9 game balls are entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (that is, the remaining winning balls for 10 which is the upper limit winning number of each round). When the number of times is 2 or less), the normal symbol hits, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal symbol hit. The game ball is not guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second entry opening 640L, but instead the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are located around the intersection position. On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol elapses), the stored (accumulated) game ball is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it becomes possible to allow the game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra in excess of the specified number of the round.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is that a left second ball entry port 640L is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La. The electric accessory 640La is provided in place of the movable member 650Lb, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is one. The part has been changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in the sixth embodiment is deleted, and at the same time, The appearance of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 provided in the right flow path has been changed from the sixth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 139, it has been changed to a mode in which the character "GO" is imitated. Further, in the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment, a left second entry slot 640L is provided in place of the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment. Further, the difference is that the electric accessory 64 provided accompanying the first ball entry port 64 is deleted, and the electric accessory 640La is provided in place of the movable member 650Lb. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640La is placed at the protruding position for a predetermined period (2 seconds x 1 time or 2 seconds x 2 times), so that a specific area (below the first ball entry port 64) is placed. The game ball that has reached the area) forms a state in which it is easy to enter the left second entrance port 640L.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the game state (time-saving game state, probabilistic game state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set is reached, an image for notifying the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed (right-handed notification). The image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the time-saving state of the normal symbol (time-saving game state, probability variation game state), the right-handed notification image is displayed in a specific area by being hit to the right rather than the game ball that has been left-struck to reach a specific area due to the board configuration. This is because the game ball that has arrived has a shorter period until it enters the left second entry port 640L. The correspondence between the launch direction of the game ball and the period until the ball enters is the content described with reference to FIG. 95 in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment. With the 640La placed in the protruding position, the game ball that is hit right and reaches the specific area from the right direction rolls along the downward inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side of the electric accessory 640La. The ball enters the left second entrance 640L in a relatively short period of time. On the other hand, in the state where the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball hit to the left and reaches the specific area from the left direction travels in the direction opposite to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La (on the other hand). Rolls in the direction of climbing the slope). After that, when the momentum of rolling is reduced by gravity and the momentum in the direction of climbing the slope becomes 0, the ball is guided to the left second entrance 640L along the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. In other words, for a game ball that is hit to the right and reaches a specific area from the right, a game ball that is hit to the left and arrives from the left has an extra period from climbing the slope to starting to descend the slope. Therefore, the period until reaching the left second entry port 640L tends to be long. Therefore, if a left-handed strike is performed in the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the protruding position) based on the hit of the normal symbol is performed. It may be difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area to go down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La and enter the left second entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player is urged to play the game by right-handed. .. With this configuration, the player can be made to hit right during the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area during the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol can be obtained. , Can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the time-saving state of the normal symbol more efficiently.

On the other hand, in the game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set, the firing direction is not particularly specified, including during the execution of the jackpot game. In each round of jackpots, if a specified number (10) of game balls can be inserted before 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, the same number of prize balls can be obtained. Here, since the game balls can be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, the period required to fire 10 game balls is about 6 seconds. Further, until the game ball launched by left-handed hitting and reaching the movable member 650Rb from the left direction flows down the inclination in the direction toward the lower right formed by the movable member 650Rb and enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The period of is about 1 second, and the game ball launched by right-handed hitting and reaching the movable member 650Rb flows down the inclination in the direction toward the lower right formed by the movable member 650Rb, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It takes about 3 seconds to enter the ball. For this reason, regardless of whether a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit is made during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game balls are continuously fired, 10 or more game balls will be given a right-specific prize in about 10 seconds. The ball can be entered into the mouth 650Ra. Therefore, regardless of the firing direction, a specified number (10) of game balls can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra within a specified time (30 seconds).

Even during the big hit game, if the game is hit by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the game ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640La is in the protruding position. It is moved to. That is, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La are arranged at the protruding positions. In this case, since the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La intersect at their intermediate positions, the game ball that has reached the specific region is on the upper half of the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La. It forms a state in which it is easy to stay in the region formed by the halves. That is, the game ball cannot be guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second winning opening 640La. This state is basically a disadvantageous state for the player because the game ball cannot enter any of the entry openings (left second entry opening 640L, right specific winning opening 650Ra). However, depending on the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, it may be in an advantageous state for the player. The relationship between the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position and the degree of advantage of the player will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 140.

In FIG. 140 (a), during the round period in the jackpot (during the period in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position), the normal symbol hits (that is, the opening period of the left second entrance 640L is open). It is a figure which showed the state which the electric accessory 640a was moved to the protruding position (beginning). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect with each other. In the vicinity of the intermediate position, the slopes formed by one side are obstructed (blocked together). In other words, it is in a state of forming an inclination in the downward direction from both the left and right sides toward the position where the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area is hindered by the upper half (right half) of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half (left half) of the movable member 650Rb, and also enters the left second entrance 640L. Since it is impossible to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball continues to remain in the specific area until at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb moves to the immersion position (buried position). .. While in this state (the state in which both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions), the game ball that has reached the specific area enters any entry port. It can be said that this is a disadvantageous state for the player as compared with the state in which only one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are both arranged at the protruding positions (the round period of the jackpot and the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol overlapped). The state) is referred to as a "protruding overlapping state".

When the game balls are continuously fired toward a specific area in the protruding overlapping state, a plurality of game balls are stored in the area (upper area) formed by the upper half of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half of the movable member 650Rb (upper area). Will be stopped). While a plurality of game balls were stored (stationed) in the upper region, at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb was moved to the immersion position (buried position), so that it was stored (stationed). The game ball flows down toward one of the entrances. Hereinafter, the flow path of the game ball stored (stayed) in the upper region will be described for each type of member (electric accessory 640La, movable member 650) that was previously moved to the immersion position (buried position) in the overlapping protruding state. do.

FIG. 140 (b) shows a case where the movable member 650Rb is moved to the immersion position (buried position) after the jackpot round is completed before the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol after the protrusion overlap state. It is a figure shown. When the jackpot round ends first, for example, just before 30 seconds have passed since the jackpot round started (for example, when 29 seconds have passed), the normal symbol hits and the electric accessory 640La When is moved to the protruding position, or just before the hit of the normal symbol, the 10th game ball rolls to the downstream side from the intermediate position of the movable member 650Rb, and immediately after the hit of the normal symbol, 10 This is the case when the first game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

When the movable member 650Rb is previously moved to the immersion position (buried position) in the protruding overlapping state, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is moved to the left second entry ball due to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La. It is guided to the mouth 640L. As a result, a plurality of game balls collectively enter the left second entrance port 640L. In addition, since the number of prize balls given when the ball enters the left second entrance 640L is set to one, the number of game balls as many as the number of balls entered will be returned as a prize ball as it is. It is not too much, and the number of balls held does not increase. That is, the degree of advantage is less than when a game ball is inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (when 10 prize balls are given to one winning ball). In particular, just before 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position, and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the immersion position before the electric accessory 640La is moved to the immersion position. In that case, less than the specified number (10) in the round can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so the electric accessory 640La cannot be moved to the protruding position. It is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained.

In FIG. 140 (c), after the protrusion overlap state, the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol ends before the round of the jackpot ends, and the electric accessory 640La is in the immersion position (buried position). It is a figure which showed the case which moved to. In addition, when the opening period associated with the hit of the normal symbol ends first, it is before 28 seconds have passed since the start of the big hit round, and the specified number (for the right specific winning opening 650Ra). This is the case where a normal symbol is hit when the game ball (10) is not entered. In this case, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. For this reason, a plurality of game balls will continuously enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In particular, the number of game balls that have already entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the round and the upper part. When the total number of game balls stored in the area exceeds the specified number, the electric accessory 640La can be moved to the immersion position to allow more than the specified number of game balls to enter. That is, since it is possible to pay out the prize balls for the specified number of balls or more in one round, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot is larger than usual, which is advantageous for the player.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol hits during a big hit, an opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set for the electric accessory 640La. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, three game balls can reach the front and rear upper regions within 2 seconds when the electric accessory 640La is placed at the protruding position. Therefore, if the electric accessory 640La is placed in the protruding position with 8 or 9 game balls inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, there is a high probability that the specified number of balls will be 10 in each round. A larger number of game balls can be entered into the right specific winning opening 640La. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the entry of a number of game balls exceeding the specified number of entry balls of 10 in each round into the right specific winning opening 640La is referred to as "over-winning". In the twelfth embodiment, an effect of notifying the player of the passing timing for the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, which is likely to cause an over-winning when it is assumed that the normal symbol is hit (right-handed navigation effect, right-handed navigation effect, FIG. 141 (a)) is configured to be feasible. If the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 according to this right-handed navigation effect and the normal symbol hits as intended, it will be in a state where over-winning is likely to occur (see FIG. 140 (c)). It is possible to further improve the interest of the person. If the player makes a right-handed hit according to the right-handed navigation effect and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, and the result is a hit of the normal symbol, the hit of the normal symbol is started (electric accessory). Based on the fact that 640La is moved to the protruding position), an effect of urging the game ball to be stored in the upper region (storage effect, see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. With this storage effect, the player can more easily aim for over-winning.

Although not shown, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the immersion position (buried position) with almost no time difference, the game ball stored (retained) in the upper region is on the left. 2 The ball cannot enter either the entry port 640L or the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and flows down to the out opening 66 provided below the game board 13. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the immersive position without a time difference (for example, within 0.5 seconds), the prize ball cannot be obtained and is held. Since the number of balls does not increase, it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned right-handed navigation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (a). FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a right-handed navigation effect occurs. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), during the jackpot interval period, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR21 is formed below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm, and a vertically long display area HR21 is formed below the display area HR9. A rectangular display area HR22 is formed. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the characters "Right-handed and pass GO !!" are displayed inside the display area HR21. Further, inside the display area HR22, an image imitating a through gate 67 and an image imitating an arrow in a direction passing through the image imitating the through gate 67 are displayed, and an image imitating an arrow is displayed. The words "Pass through !!" are displayed inside. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is some advantage if the through gate 67 is hit right so that the game ball passes through.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation effect is executed for the first half of the two seconds set as the interval period. When a right-handed game ball is hit through the through gate 67 during this 1 second, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra and the normal symbol is displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the fluctuation time of is passed. That is, if it is a hit in the lottery of ordinary symbols, there is a high possibility that the electric accessory 640La will be placed in the protruding position with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It is configured to be. As described above, when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position while the eight to nine game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La are in the protruding position. It becomes a protruding overlapping state arranged in. If the game balls are continuously fired during this protruding overlapping state, about three game balls can be stored (retained) with respect to the upper region. When the opening period (2 seconds) elapses in this state and the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersion position, the stored game balls are collectively guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that an over winning may occur. The sex becomes high. Therefore, if an over-winning occurs as intended, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is 1/10. That is, when right-handed according to the right-handed navigation effect, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra at an average rate of once in 10 times, resulting in a protruding overlapping state. can do. As described above, about three game balls can be stored in the upper region during the protruding overlapping state. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersion position, three game balls are once on average. Enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. If 8 game balls have already entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra and 3 additional game balls enter, one more game ball than the specified number (10) will be added to the right specific winning opening. Since the ball will be entered into 650Ra, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be 10 more than usual (the number of prize balls to be paid out for the specified number of balls entered). In addition, if 9 game balls have already been entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra and 3 additional game balls are entered, 2 more game balls will be specified on the right than the specified number (10). Since the ball will be entered into the winning opening 650Ra, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be 20 more than usual (the number of prize balls to be paid out for the specified number of winning balls). Therefore, with a probability of 1/10, it is possible to win 10 to 20 more prize balls than usual. Therefore, during the jackpot interval period, each time according to the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). If you hit right and pass through the through gate 67, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game is higher. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively perform a right-handed strike when the right-handed navigation effect is executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned storage effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the storage effect is executed. In this storage effect, during each round of the jackpot, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position with 8 or 9 game balls inserted into the right specific winning opening 650Ra for 0.5 seconds. It is a production that is executed when it has passed. This storage effect is an effect for promoting the storage of the game ball in the upper region during the opening period of the electric accessory 640La, and forming a state in which over-winning is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b), when the storage effect is executed, the characters "The more balls are accumulated in the intersection !?" are displayed on the display area HR21. Further, an image imitating the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb in the protruding overlapping state is displayed on the display area HR22, and an arrow pointing at a position where the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect. An image imitating is displayed. Inside the image that imitates this arrow, the characters "Aim !!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to positively launch the game ball into the upper region during the protruding overlapping state. As a result, even a player who has not played much with the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment can easily generate an over prize. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the storage effect is executed after 0.5 seconds have elapsed instead of immediately executing the storage effect when the protrusion overlap state is reached is the specified number immediately after the protrusion overlap state is reached. The purpose is to prevent the storage effect from being executed when the game ball of No. 1 enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra and the round is completed. If there is a game ball flowing down the movable member 650Rb immediately before the protruding overlapping state, the game ball completely flows down the movable member 650Rb within 0.5 seconds after the protruding overlapping state is reached, and the right specific winning opening. Enter the ball into 650Ra. For this reason, if the round is not completed even after 0.5 seconds have passed since the protruding overlapping state, there is a possibility that the jackpot round will be completed until the opening period associated with the normal symbol hit has elapsed. Therefore, by storing the game balls in the upper region, it is an advantageous state in which an over-winning can be generated with a high probability. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the storage effect is executed only when the round is not completed even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the protruding overlapping state. As a result, the storage effect can be accurately executed only when the over-winning can be aimed at, so that the player's interest when the storage effect is executed can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a change with time of the effect mode in the case of hitting a normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, when the jackpot interval period is started, the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) is executed. This right-handed navigation effect is executed over one second. During this time, a right-handed hit is made to pass the game ball through the through gate 67, and if a hit is made by a lottery of ordinary symbols, a state in which an over-winning is easy to be formed is formed. Taking into account the period from the visual recognition of the right-handed navigation effect to the launch of the game ball and the period until the launched game ball passes through the through gate 67, the timing of passing through the through gate 67 is the latter half of the interval period (1). In most cases, it will be from the time when seconds have passed to the time when 2 seconds have passed. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 67 1.5 seconds after the start of the interval period as a result of right-handed striking during execution of the right-handed navigation effect.

One second after the right-handed navigation effect is executed, the right-handed navigation effect ends and the normal interval effect is switched to. Then, when another 1 second elapses, the interval period (2 seconds) elapses and the next round is started. When the round is started, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position, and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is in a state where the ball can be entered. As described above, the firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, so if the player continues to fire the game ball at the shortest firing interval, it is about 0.6 for the right specific winning opening 650Ra. A game ball enters at intervals of seconds. Therefore, about 5 seconds after the big hit round is started, 8 to 9 game balls are already in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the twelfth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the execution of the jackpot game is set to 5.5 seconds, the fluctuation period of the normal symbol is set 4.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the start of the round. Elapses (if it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position). Therefore, if the lottery of the normal symbol is successful, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position with about eight game balls already entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position with eight game balls already entered (winning).

As shown in FIG. 142, if 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening period of the electric accessory 640La and the round period of the jackpot has not ended, the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) starts. Will be done. By firing the game balls during the execution of this storage effect, about three game balls can be stored (retained) in the upper region. The storage effect ends at the same time as the opening period (2 seconds, which is the period of being arranged at the protruding position) of the electric accessory 640La elapses. When the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersive position (buried position), the game balls stored in the upper region are guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra at once. Then, the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra with almost no time difference in about 0.5 seconds. As a result, it becomes possible to enter (win) a game ball in excess of the specified number of balls (10) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in one round of big hits. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is the storage effect standby flag 223ba with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B). The difference is that the standby period timer 223bb and the winning number counter 223bc are provided.

Whether or not the storage effect standby flag 223ba is a waiting period (0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the execution condition of the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) to the actual start of the storage effect. It is a flag indicating. When the storage effect waiting flag 223ba is on, it indicates that it is a waiting period until the storage effect is started, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a waiting period. As described above, in the storage effect, the electric accessory 640La is placed in the protruding position during the jackpot round period and with 8 or 9 game balls already inserted in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The execution condition is satisfied, and the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to ON (see S5704 in FIG. 149). In this state, if the waiting period (0.5 seconds) elapses without the end of the jackpot round, the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to off (see S5610 in FIG. 147). .. Further, even when the jackpot round ends during the waiting period, the storage effect waiting flag 223ba is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The standby period timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the waiting period from the establishment of the execution condition of the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) to the actual start of the storage effect. A timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223bb at the start of the standby period (see S5705 in FIG. 149). During the waiting period, the waiting period timer 223bb is updated every time the jackpot processing is executed (see S5607 in FIG. 147), and when the timer value is updated to 0, the execution of the storage effect is started (FIG. FIG. See S5609 in 147). Further, the waiting period timer 223bb is reset to 0 when the round ends before the waiting period elapses (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The winning number counter 223bc is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in each round of big hits. The initial value of the winning number counter 223bc is set to 0, the winning (winning) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is detected by the main control device 110, and the winning is notified by the large open opening winning command. The value is added and updated by 1 each time (see S4972 in FIG. 150). Further, the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 every time each round of big hits is completed (see S5603 in FIG. 147). If the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position by hitting a normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, the counter value of the winning number counter 223bc is referred to, and if the value is 8 or 9 (that is, that is). If the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the round is 8 or 9, the waiting period is set (see S5704 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 12 (S151) executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 12 (S151) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523, the ordinary symbol variation processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) ( The same processes as those of S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523 of (see FIG. 26) are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the processing of S514, the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set. If it is determined (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 5.5 seconds (S541), and this process is terminated. As described above, this 5.5 seconds fluctuates when the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by right-handed hitting according to the right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)) executed during the jackpot interval period. It is a variable period in which it is highly possible that eight or nine game balls have already been entered in the right specific winning opening 640Ra at the end timing.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the processing of S520, the time reduction of the normal symbol is not performed (the probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 0). (S520: No), an opening time of "2 seconds x 1 time" and an opening pattern of the number of times are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640La (S542), and the process proceeds to S523. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the time reduction of the normal symbol is in progress (the probability variation flag 203e is on or the value of the time reduction medium counter 203f is 1 or more) (S520: Yes), the motor is operated. As the opening pattern of the accessory 640a, an opening time of "2 seconds x 2 times" and an opening pattern of the number of times are set (S543), and the process shifts to S523.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S523 is completed, it is voiced that the opening period (state in which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position) is started. A normal map release command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S544), and this process is terminated. The normal map release command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal figure opening command, is it in a state where eight or nine game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra at the jackpot (that is, an electric motor at the timing when the over winning can be aimed at). It is determined whether the object 640La has been moved to the protruding position), and if it is the timing for aiming for over-winning, the waiting period for the storage effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 151, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the main process 12 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. The main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 33) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the main treatments 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the treatments S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019, the main treatments in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 33), respectively. The same processes as those of S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019 are executed. Further, in the main process 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S4011 is completed, the effect is updated instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The process 12 is executed (S4081), and then the command determination process 12 is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (S4082), and the process is transferred to S4014. And migrate. Details of the effect update process 12 (S4081) and the command determination process 12 (S4082) will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 151, respectively.

First, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process 12 (S4081) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The effect update process 12 (S4081) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the display mode and the like are displayed during the execution of various effects. This is a process for updating. Of the effect update processes 12 (S4081) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S4301 to S4311, the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) of S4301 to S4311 respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 12 (see FIG. 146) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variation display is not being executed (S4301: No), the effect mode is updated during the jackpot. (S4351) is executed during the jackpot processing for the purpose, and this processing is terminated. The details of this jackpot processing (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium processing (S4351). In this jackpot middle process (S4351), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (S5601), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (S5601: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5601, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being executed (S5601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the jackpot round (S5602), and the end timing of the round is determined. If it is determined to be (S5602: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 (S5603). Next, the storage effect standby flag 223ba is set to off, the timer value of the standby period timer 223bb is reset to 0 (S5604), and it is determined whether or not the finished round is the final round (S5605).

If it is determined in the process of S5605 that the finished round is not the final round (S5603: No), it means that it is the start timing of a new interval period, so that it is a right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). ) Is set to start (S5606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5605, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the final round (S5603: Yes), the next round does not exist, and even if the player hits right and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, an over prize is won. Can not be generated, so the process of S5606 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5602, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round period in the jackpot (S5602: No), then whether the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (that is, the execution start of the storage effect is started. It is determined whether or not it is a waiting period (S5607). If it is determined in the process of S5607 that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is off (S5607), it means that it is not a standby period and there is no possibility of executing the storage effect, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5607, when it is determined that the storage effect standby flag 223ba is on (S5607: Yes), the value of the standby period timer 223bb is first updated by subtracting 1 (S5608), and then subtracted. It is determined whether or not the later timer value becomes 0 (S5609).

In the process of S5609, when it is determined that the timer value after subtraction becomes 0 (S5609: Yes), it means that the waiting period has elapsed, so the start of the storage effect is set (S5610), and the storage standby flag is set. 223ba is set to off (S5611), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5609, when it is determined that the timer value of the waiting period timer 223bb after subtraction is not 0 (S5609: No), it means that it is not the start timing of the storage effect, so S5610 and S5611. Each process of is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this jackpot processing (see FIG. 147), it is possible to accurately determine the passage of the waiting period and set the execution of the storage effect. By executing the standby effect, over-winning can be generated more easily, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the command determination process 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 148. This command determination process 12 (S4082) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is controlled according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for performing. Of the command determination processes 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S4901 to S4910 and S4918, the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is S4901. The same processing as each processing of ~ S4910 and S4918 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the winning information command (S4909). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the received command includes the normal figure release command (S4961). If it is determined that the normal figure release command is included in the processing of S4941 (S4961: Yes), it means that the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol is started. The general map release command process for executing the control according to the start timing is executed (S4962), and this process is terminated. The details of this general map release command process (S4962) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include the normal figure release command in the process of S4691. Case (S4961: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a hit-related command (S4963). In the processing of S4943, when it is determined that the hit-related command is included in the unprocessed command (S4963: Yes), the hit-related command processing for controlling according to the type of the hit-related command 12 Is executed (S4964) to end this process. The details of the hit-related command processing 12 (S4964) will be described later with reference to FIG. 150.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received in the process of S4943 (S4963: No), then the main control device It is determined whether or not the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from 110 (S4965). This state command is a command indicating that the game state has been changed. Specifically, when the probabilistic jackpot ends and the probabilistic gaming state is set, a state command indicating the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is output, and when the normal jackpot ends and the time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving game state is set. A state command indicating the transition to the gaming state is output, and when the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed in the time-saving gaming state and the transition to the normal gaming state is completed, the status command indicating the transition to the normal gaming state is output.

If it is determined in the processing of S4965 that a state command is included in the unprocessed command (S4965: Yes), the state command processing for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command is performed. Execute (S4966) to end this process. The details of this state command processing (S4966) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. On the other hand, in the process of S4965, when it is determined that the state command is not included in the unprocessed command (S4965: No), the process is shifted to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above-mentioned normal figure opening command processing (S4962) will be described. As described above, this normal figure release command process (S4962) is a process for executing control according to the start timing of the release period. In this general map release command processing (S4962), first, whether or not a jackpot is being hit (S5701), if it is determined that a jackpot is being hit (S5701: Yes), and then during the jackpot round period. It is determined whether or not there is (S5702). In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the round period is in progress (S5702: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 223bc is either 8 or 9 (S5703), and the counter. If the value is 8 or 9 (S5703: Yes), the waiting period for the storage effect is set by setting the storage effect standby flag 223ba to ON (S5704). Then, a timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223bb (S5705), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed in the processing of S5701 (S5701: No), or when it is determined that the round period is not in progress in the processing of S5702 (S5702: No), a prize is won in the processing of S5703. If it is determined that the value of the number counter 223bc is neither 8 nor 9 (S5703: No), the present process is terminated as it is without setting the waiting period for the storage effect.

By executing this normal figure release command process (see Fig. 149), when the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position by hitting the normal symbol at the timing when the over prize can be aimed, the execution of the storage effect is set. can do. This makes it easy for the player to understand that there is a chance of over-winning.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing 12 (S4922) will be described with reference to FIG. 150. As described above, the hit-related command process 12 (S4964) is a process for performing control according to the type of the hit-related command received from the main control device 110. Of the hit-related command processes 12 (S4964), each of the processes S4911 to S4917 was executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each process of is merely ported as it is, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 150) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 does not include the round number command (S4913). : No) Then, it is determined whether or not the large open opening winning command is included in the unprocessed command (S4971). As described above, the large open opening winning command is output from the main control device 110 every time a ball (winning) to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is detected during the execution of the big hit game in the twelfth embodiment. Command.

In the processing of S4971, if it is determined that the large opening winning command is included in the unprocessed command (S4971: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223bc (S4972). End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4971 that the large opening winning command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4971: No), the processing is shifted to S4916. By executing this hit-related command process 12 (see FIG. 150), each time a game ball wins a prize in the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the number of winnings can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well.

Next, the above-mentioned state command processing (S4966) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. As described above, this state command process (S4966) is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command. In this state command processing (S4966), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state notified by the state command is the time-saving gaming state (S5801), and it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the time-saving gaming state. If (S5801: Yes), the process is transferred to S5803. On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the transition to the time-saving gaming state (S5801: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802). ), If it is a command indicating the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802: Yes), the process is shifted to S5803. In the processing of S5803 executed when the transition to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is notified, the display of the right-handed notification image indicating the start of the right-handed state is set (S5803), and this processing is terminated. ..

The reason why the right-handed notification image is displayed in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set and the probability variation game state is to allow the game ball to enter the left second entrance 640L more efficiently. Is. That is, as described above, if the left-handed strike is performed while the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, the opening period based on the fact that the normal symbol is hit (the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the protruding position). It may be difficult for a game ball that has reached a specific area during the period) to go down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La and enter the left second entrance 640L by the end of the opening period. There is sex. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player is urged to play the game by right-handed. .. With this configuration, the player can be made to hit right during the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area during the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol can be obtained. , Can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, it is possible to more efficiently perform the game in the time-saving state of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (S5802: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicates the transition to the normal gaming state. (S5804), if it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the normal gaming state (S5804: Yes), the display of the image for notifying that the right-handed state has ended is set (S5805), and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5804 that it is not a command indicating the transition to the normal gaming state, the process of S5805 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and when a normal symbol is hit, the left second entry opening is placed. By projecting the electric accessory 640La provided between the two entrances 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra, a downward inclination toward the left second entrance 640L is formed. It is supposed to be. Then, in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and in the probabilistic gaming state, in order to match the direction of inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La with the flow direction of the game ball, the player is asked. It is configured to notify the right-handed hit (display the right-handed notice image). With this configuration, the period required for the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640La to flow down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La can be minimized, so that the launched game ball can be made more efficient. It is possible to enter the ball into the left second entrance 640L. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently advance the game in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit at a specific timing during the execution of the jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, 8 or 9 game balls are entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra (that is, the remaining winning balls for 10 which is the upper limit winning number of each round). When the number of times is 2 or less), the normal symbol hits, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the normal symbol hit. The game ball is not guided to either the right specific winning opening 650Ra or the left second entry opening 640L, but instead the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are located around the intersection position. On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the hit of the normal symbol elapses), the stored (accumulated) game ball is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it becomes possible to generate an over prize. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the firing timing to the through gate 67 is set to the right, where there is a high possibility that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol will elapse with 8 or 9 game balls winning in the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It is configured to notify the player by hitting navigation effect (see FIG. 141 (a)). As a result, the game ball can be positively fired at the through gate 67 every time the right-handed navigation effect is executed for the player, so that the jackpot game is prevented from becoming monotonous (suppressed). )can do.

In the twelfth embodiment, the game method (launch method) is not specified except when the right-handed navigation effect or the storage effect is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured to notify the player to perform a left-handed stroke except when the right-handed navigation effect is executed. With this configuration, the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb can be matched with the flow direction of the game ball incident on the specific region, so that the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The period of can be shortened. Therefore, the jackpot game can be advanced more speedily. Further, since the through gate 67 is provided only in the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, it is notified to perform left-handed movement except when the right-handed navigation effect is executed. , It is possible to prevent frequent hits of ordinary symbols during big hits. As described above, if a normal symbol hits during the big hit round period, a protruding overlapping state (see FIG. 140 (a)) occurs, and a game ball is placed in both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It becomes impossible to enter the ball. For this reason, except in the state where 8 or 9 game balls have already been entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game balls cannot be entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and an over-winning is given. Since it becomes difficult to aim, it becomes an unfavorable state for the player. On the other hand, if the right-handed navigation effect is not executed and the left-handed is notified, it will be a wasteful hit (that is, at a timing when it is difficult to aim for over-winning). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from being prevented from entering the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

In the twelfth embodiment, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided in the middle thereof and the movable member 650Rb are movable. The structure is such that the entrance port (the degree of advantage for the player) that allows the ball to enter is variable according to the combination of positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second entry opening and the specific winning opening may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the entry opening for easy entry may be changed depending on the combination of the open / closed states of the entry openings. More specifically, for example, a second entry port is provided upstream of the flow path 1 and a specific winning opening is provided downstream, and when the second entry opening is open, the specific winning opening is provided. Regardless of whether or not is open, it may be configured so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening. On the contrary, when the specific winning opening is arranged on the upstream side and the second entry opening is arranged on the downstream side and the specific winning opening is open, it does not matter whether the second entry opening is open or not. , The game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter into the second entrance. Further, when the entrances are arranged vertically side by side, the two entrances may be configured such that it is more advantageous for the player not to enter the ball than to enter the game ball. Specifically, for example, it is composed of entrances (1 or 0) in which the number of prize balls given to the entrance of the game ball is small, and the game ball is downstream of each entrance. There may be a configuration in which a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 10) is arranged for each of the winning balls. With this configuration, it is most difficult to win a general winning opening when both entrances are open. That is, it is more difficult for the game ball to reach the general winning opening than when only one entrance is open or both entrances are closed. Therefore, the state in which each entrance is open can be regarded as the most disadvantageous state for the player, and the game can be played with the expectation that each entrance will not be opened. Playability can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second entry port 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and an electric accessory 640La and a movable member 650Rb are provided between them. It was composed. Then, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position to form a downward inclination toward the left second entry port 640L, while the movable member is formed during the big hit round period. By arranging the 650Rb at the protruding position, it is configured to form an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Further, both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the protruding positions by hitting the normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, and in the upper upper region of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb. It forms a protruding overlapping state in which the game ball can be stored (retained). The game ball is in a protruding overlapping state with 8 or 9 balls already entered in the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and by storing multiple game balls in the upper area, the right side when the opening period of the electric accessory 640La has elapsed. It was configured so that the game balls could be won in excess of the specified number (10 pieces) to the specific winning opening 650Ra. As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to the timing when the normal symbol hits.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the opening / closing plate 6400La, which can be opened and closed at the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra, which are arranged so as to face each other, And the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is provided. The opening / closing plate 6400La and the opening / closing plate 6500Rb have a structure that does not interfere with each other, and even if the hit of the normal symbol and the round period of the big hit overlap, one of the opening / closing plates goes to the other entrance. It is configured so that it can be opened without hindering the entry of the ball. With this configuration, when a normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game (that is, the opening condition of the left second entry opening 640L and the opening condition of the right specific winning opening 650Ra are satisfied in duplicate. Even in the case of), it is possible to allow the game ball to enter both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, the game can be efficiently advanced during the execution of the big hit game regardless of the frequency of hitting the normal symbol.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 13 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, in this modification, an inclined member 6500b having a substantially triangular shape in front view is arranged between the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Since the left and right side surfaces of the inclined member 6500b form an inclination in the lower left direction and the lower right direction as shown in FIG. 152, the game ball that has reached the specific region is formed by the inclined member 6500b. The inclination guides the user to the lower left direction of the front view or the lower right direction of the front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the left second ball entry port 640L in the present modification is provided with an opening / closing plate 6400La capable of opening and closing the left second ball entry port 640L. The opening / closing plate 6400La is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction so as to prevent the game ball from entering from the right direction in the front view. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the opening / closing plate 6500La tilts to the right toward the tilting member 6500b, thereby forming a downward tilt toward the left second entry port 640L. As a result, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the left second entrance 640L is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the right specific winning opening 650Ra in this modification is provided with an opening / closing plate 6500Rb capable of opening and closing the right specific winning opening 640Ra. The opening / closing plate 6400Rb is normally configured to stand upright in the vertical direction so as to prevent the game ball from entering from the left direction in the front view. On the other hand, when the jackpot round is started, the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is tilted to the left toward the tilting member 6500b, thereby forming a downward tilt toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. As a result, a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the flow direction of the game ball in a state where the opening / closing plates 6500La and 6500Rb are open will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 153 (a), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153 (a), when the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the opening / closing plate 6500Rb leans against the right side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the inclined member 6500b and the opening / closing plate 6500Rb form an inclined downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In this state, the game ball that has reached the right side of the inclined member 6500b is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the left side of the inclined member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening / closing plate 6500La and the inclined member 6500b and flows down to the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153 (b), the flow direction of the game ball when the opening / closing plate 6500La is open will be described. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), when the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened, the opening / closing plate 6500La leans against the left side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the inclined member 6500b and the opening / closing plate 6500La form an inclination in the downward direction toward the left second entry port 640L. In this state, the game ball that has reached the left side of the inclined member 6500b is guided to the left second entry port 640L. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the right side of the inclined member 6500b passes through the flow path between the opening / closing plate 6500Rb and the inclined member 6500b and flows down to the out port 66.

As described above, in this modification, if the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened, the game ball can easily enter the left second entry port 640L regardless of whether or not the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened. It is configured to form. Similarly, if the opening / closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the game ball is easily entered into the right specific winning opening 650Ra regardless of whether or not the opening / closing plate 6500La is opened. With this configuration, even in a situation where the opening condition of the left second entrance opening 640L and the opening condition of the right specific winning opening 650Ra can be satisfied at the same time, such as during the execution of a jackpot game, the opening condition is always opened. It is possible to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance. That is, as in the protruding overlapping state of the twelfth embodiment described above, it is possible to temporarily form a state in which the game ball cannot enter both the left second entrance opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Since there is no such thing, the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, since the game can be performed without feeling the stress of being unable to enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be enjoyed by the player.

<Second variant of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second entry opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged so as to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided between them is arranged at a protruding position. The structure is such that a downward inclination is formed toward the left second entry port 640L so that the game ball can easily enter the left second entry opening 640L. Further, by arranging the movable member 650Rb provided between the left second special winning opening 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra at the protruding position, an inclination in the downward direction toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra is formed. However, the structure is such that the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Further, while both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are in the protruding overlapping state in which they are arranged at the protruding positions, a state in which the ball cannot enter any of the entrances is temporarily formed. Was supposed to be. That is, in the protruding overlapping state, it becomes difficult to allow the game ball to enter various entrances, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, the central second entrance 640C is located at the intersection of the electric accessory 640Ca provided in place of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Ra. It is easier for the game ball to enter the central second entrance 640C in the case where the protrusions overlap than when only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged in the protrusion position. It was configured as follows.

The flow direction of the game ball around the specific region (the region below the first entry port 64) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 (a) is a diagram showing the flow direction of the game ball when the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the protruding position and the movable member 650Ra is arranged at the buried position. It should be noted that this state is formed mainly when a normal symbol hits in a state other than a big hit. That is, it is a state that is likely to be formed in a time-saving gaming state (1 / 1.2) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high, or in a probabilistic gaming state.

When only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged in the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the game ball moves downward to the left due to the downward inclination of the electric accessory 640Ca formed by the electric accessory 640Ca. Be guided. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), in the second modification, since the central second entry port 640C is provided at a substantially intermediate position of the electric accessory 640Ca, the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca is formed. A part of the game ball flowing down along the ball enters the central second entrance 640C, and a part passes through the central second entrance 640C. In the second modification, since the entry port is not provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 640Ca, the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 640Ca falls downward and flows down to the out port 66. Therefore, since only a part of the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the central second entrance 640C, even if the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is set, the central second entrance 640C is reached. It is relatively difficult to carry out a lottery based on entering a ball.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 154 (b), in the protruding overlapping state, the game ball flowing down along the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca directly enters the central second entrance 640C, and also in the center. The game ball that has passed the position of the second entry port 640C and has rolled to the inclination on the movable member 650Ra side is also finally guided to the central second entry port 640C. More specifically, the game ball that has rolled to the inclination on the movable member 650Rb side climbs the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb until the momentum becomes zero. Then, when the momentum becomes 0, the movable member 650Ra rolls in the lower right direction along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Ra. As a result, the game ball is guided again to the intersection position where the central second entry port 640C is provided. Even if the ball passes through the central second entrance 640C again and proceeds to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640Ca, it climbs on the electric accessory 640Ca and the momentum is 0 as in the case of climbing the movable member 650Rb. Then, it goes down on the electric accessory 640Ca in the lower left direction and is guided to the central second entry port 640Ca. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area during the protruding overlapping state is always guided to the central second entrance 640C unless the protruding overlapping state is released on the way. Therefore, in the second modification, the protruding overlapping state makes it easier to enter the central second entry port 640C than the state in which only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the protruding position. From the viewpoint of the ball entry rate to the second ball entry port 640C, the protruding overlapping state is the most advantageous state.

In particular, the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery based on the entry into the central second entry opening 640C) is better than the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery based on the entry into the first entry opening 64). If the configuration is such that it is easy to be advantageous (it is easy to determine the advantageous jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot), it may make you want to store more reserved balls of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively pass through the through gate 67 and play the game while expecting that the protruding overlapping state occurs. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

In the second modification, the time-saving gaming state is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, and the probabilistic gaming state is continued until the next big hit. It is not limited to. For example, the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state may be limited to the period until the special symbol lottery is executed four times. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, when only the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is drawn in a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state. The number of lottery will be subtracted. Therefore, for a player who wants to make all the lottery executed while the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state is set into an advantageous second special symbol lottery, more second game is being executed during the jackpot game. It can make you want to get a reserved ball with a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to form a situation in which the ball can easily enter the central second entrance 640C by making the protrusions overlap more times during the execution of the jackpot game. You can play the game by paying attention to the lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, the central second entry port 640C is provided at the intersection of the electric accessory 640Ca and the movable member 650Rb, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second entrance and the specific winning opening may be exchanged. With this configuration, if the normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game, it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening at the intersection position, so that the normal symbol hits during the jackpot. You can play the game with a strong expectation that you will become.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set for the variation display of 1, but it is not always necessary to keep the continuous transformation effect within the variation time of the variation display of 1, and the variation of a plurality of variation displays. You may perform a continuous transformation effect over time. That is, when there are a plurality of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, whether or not to set the continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (whether or not each reserved ball is correct, the type of fluctuation, etc.), and whether or not to set the continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the continuous transformation effect is to be set, it may be configured to determine which of the reserved balls the continuous transformation effect is to be continued until the variable display corresponding to the holding ball. Further, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect may be calculated from the look-ahead result of each reserved ball, and the upper limit number of transformations may be set according to the effect time. With such a configuration, the effect time of the continuous transformation effect can be lengthened, so that the upper limit number of success notification modes can be increased. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player more opportunities to display the success notification mode, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game when the continuous transformation effect is executed. In addition, by configuring the continuous transformation effect to continue over a plurality of variable displays, it is more difficult for the player to predict how long the success of the transformation (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) will continue. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In addition, when the continuous transformation effect is continued over the fluctuation time of a plurality of fluctuation displays, the progress status of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the number of remaining fluctuations, the fluctuation time of the reserved ball, etc.) Depending on the configuration, the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous transformation effect, the upper limit number of success notification modes, and the like may be increased or decreased. Regarding this, at the start of the fluctuation, a continuous transformation effect is executed over the display period of the fluctuation display of 3 times (the fluctuation + 2 holding balls) including the fluctuation, and the jackpot is notified by the 3rd fluctuation display. Then, the case where it is determined will be described more specifically by taking as an example. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 almost at intervals from the start of the operation valid period, most of the operation valid period is shortened, and the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed in the middle of the second variation display. If it is finished, the continuous transformation effect may be completed in the second variable display. Then, in the third variable display, which was originally supposed to continue the continuous transformation effect, an effect completely different from the continuous transformation effect may be executed. Further, when the last operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect ends immediately after the start of the third variation display, for example, by increasing the upper limit number of transformations, the effect time of the third variation display is left over. It may be configured to prevent it from being stored. In this way, by flexibly changing the effect mode according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, the effect mode can be further diversified.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during the execution of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuous transformation effect may be executed during the execution of the jackpot (for example, 1 to 5 rounds). In this case, for example, whether the continuous transformation effect is a jackpot (that is, jackpot A or jackpot B) notified by the stop display of the same normal symbol (main symbol imitating an even number) is displayed. It may be configured to be executed in (when it is difficult to identify). Then, the larger the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) in the continuous transformation effect, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be in a probable change state after the end of the jackpot (this jackpot is the jackpot A). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining promotion, and to make the game during the jackpot more enjoyable.

In this case, the condition for terminating each operation valid period may be, for example, a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a instead of pressing the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in a continuous transformation effect simply by firing a game ball at the specific winning opening 65a in order to win a prize ball during a big hit. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the description has been made on the premise of a continuous transformation effect in which the effect of whether or not the character 811 is transformed is executed one or a plurality of times. Is not limited to the application of. For example, it may be configured to be applied to an effect (single-shot effect) in which any one of two types of results (success, failure, victory, defeat, confirmation, loss, etc.) is notified in a single shot. That is, the configuration may be such that the subsequent display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like can be changed depending on whether or not the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period set in the one-shot effect. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode, the method of selecting the effect period, and the like depending on whether or not the press is detected. In a part or all of the operation valid period, the notification mode is exactly the same when the press on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation valid period and when the operation valid period ends without detecting the press. For example, the success notification mode) may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the operation valid period). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the press is detected may be different, and the determination timing and the display timing of the notification mode may be common. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, it is not always necessary to notify that the pressing is detected. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (pressed) by the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is executed as one of the hobby effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as a kind of entertainment effect during the execution of the jackpot, may be executed as a kind of so-called hold notice effect, or may be executed during the so-called demo effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the effect time of the transition effect or the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol match, but it is necessary to completely match the end timing. However, it may have a degree of freedom. Specifically, for example, the effect time of the transition effect or the like so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variation display of the third symbol are within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). It may be configured to set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the calculation of the production time such as the transition effect about, so that it is possible to reduce the processing addition required for the calculation.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Make the total validity period longer than the production period)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode in the effect period of 1, an upper limit number of times setting means for setting an upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the specific effect of 1. Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions in the effect period, the first condition is satisfied in the specific period setting means for setting the specific period and the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The first aspect display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the above, and the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. Based on this, the specific display mode is provided with a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode, and the specific period setting means displays the specific display mode only by the first mode display means in the production period of 1. When this is done, the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the specific period of the length at which the effect period ends is set before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit of the number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the specific effect of 1 is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. Based on the fact that a predetermined setting condition is satisfied in the production period, a specific period is set by the specific period setting means, and the first condition is satisfied in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, in the specific period, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied. In the production period of 1, when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, the specific period of the length at which the effect period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed is It is set by a specific period setting means.

As a result, if a specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one effect period, the effect period of the specific effect ends before the specific display mode of the maximum number of times is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game hoping that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the first aspect display means displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific period, and the second aspect display means during the specific period. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific display mode is displayed after the specific period is completed based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the elapse of the specific period, while the second mode is displayed during the specific period. Based on the condition being satisfied, the second aspect display means ends the specific display mode and displays the specific display mode. Therefore, the earlier the timing when the second condition is satisfied, the earlier the specific display mode is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to end a specific period at an early stage. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of times a specific display mode is displayed in one effect period. Therefore, for a player who wants to display a specific display mode more. There is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the second condition will be satisfied at an early stage.

The gaming machine A1 or A2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the second aspect display means is specified based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations with respect to the operating means are detected in the specific period of 1. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the display mode of the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second aspect display means is based on the fact that a predetermined number of operations for the operating means that can be operated by the player are detected in one specific period. Since the specific display mode is displayed, the player who wants to display more specific display modes can positively operate the operating means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the specific production can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means can set the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. The period and the display period of a specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, as the specific period ends earlier, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed can be increased, so that the specific period can be set for the player who desires to display more specific display modes. When set, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second condition will be satisfied sooner.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminant means. The upper limit number setting means is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing the above, and the upper limit is one of a plurality of times including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number. The first number of times is set as the number of times, and when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the ratio set by the upper limit number of times setting means is higher than that of the second number of times. A game machine A5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. The number of times of 1 is set as the maximum number of times by the upper limit number of times setting means from a plurality of times including at least the first number of times and the second number of times different from the first number of times. The first number of times is configured so that when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the ratio set by the upper limit number of times setting means is higher than that of the second number of times.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, the setting ratio of the first number of times is increased as the upper limit number of times, so that the player can guess the discrimination result by the discrimination means from the upper limit number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who wants to know the upper limit number of times can play the game during the specific production with a strong expectation that the second condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the first number of times is larger than the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, since the first number of times is larger than the second number of times, it is expected that a specific display mode of at least a larger number of times than the second number of times is displayed. Then, the player can be made to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be expected that the second condition is satisfied more times.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the above-mentioned dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the specific effect executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. While the game machine A7 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. While the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect.

This has the effect of suppressing the player from getting bored between the time when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed and the time when the information is dynamically displayed.

In the gaming machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect different from the specific effect and the effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means are set. The gaming machine A8 comprising a second effect time determining means for determining based on the remaining dynamic display time.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A7, a second effect different from the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means after the end of the specific effect. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined by the second effect time determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect is completed, the second effect can be executed with the remaining dynamic display time, so that the player can execute the second effect from the end of the specific effect to the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. Has the effect of suppressing boredom.

<Characteristic B group> (Control that the period until transformation becomes longer as the number of button PUSHs decreases during the transformation production of 1)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in the effect period of 1, and predetermined during the display of at least the previous predetermined effect mode in the effect period of 1. The display includes a condition determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, and a display time setting means for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on the determination result by the condition determination means. In the time setting means, the ratio of setting a long display time is higher when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied than when it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine B1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B1, a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. In the production period of 1, it is determined by the condition determination means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at least during the display of the previous predetermined production mode, and based on the determination result by the condition determination means, the predetermined production mode is determined. The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. When it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied by the condition determining means, the ratio of setting a long display time by the display time setting means is higher than when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, if the specific conditions are not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect mode tends to be long, so that the number of times of the predetermined effect mode executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to expect a player who wants to display a predetermined effect mode a larger number of times to satisfy a specific condition each time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied by the player operating the operating means, so that the display time of the predetermined effect mode is shortened. It is possible to positively operate the operating means for the player who wants to play the game every time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to participate more actively in the game.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in the effect period of 1, and the display period setting means determines. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the larger the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the ratio of setting a long display time.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one effect period, the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the condition determination means. The greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determination means, the higher the proportion of the long display time set by the display period setting means.

As a result, the longer the display time is set easily as the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied is continuous, the number of times of the predetermined effect mode that can be displayed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who wants to display more predetermined production modes can play the game with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied each time the predetermined production mode is displayed. be.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 is provided with an upper limit number of times setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times that the predetermined effect mode is displayed in the effect period of 1.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times a predetermined effect mode is displayed in one effect period is set by the upper limit number of times setting means, so that the upper limit of the number of times is set. It is possible to make people want to display more production modes within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, based on the display time being determined by the display time setting means, the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value. The display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on the determination by the terminal determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined effect mode is to be completed after the threshold value. The gaming machine B5, which is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding this.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are played. Based on the fact that the display time is determined by the display time setting means, it is determined by the cycle determination means whether or not the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value, and the end determination means thereof. The avoidance means avoids setting the display time determined by the display time setting means based on the determination that the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value.

This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the production time of the specific production becomes too long.

In the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means, the setting determination for determining whether to set the display time having a length shorter than the display time in which the setting is avoided is determined. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means, the display time is set to be shorter than the display time that was avoided. Since it is determined by the setting determination means, there is an effect that more predetermined effect modes can be displayed within a range in which the effect time of the specific effect does not become too long.

In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the shortest display time that can be set based on the determination that the display time of the short length is set by the setting determination means. The gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the shortest length that can be set by the display time setting means based on the determination that the display time of the short length is set by the setting determining means. Since the display time of is set, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the production time of a specific effect from becoming too long.

A game characterized in that any of the gaming machines B5 to B7 is provided with an end determination means for determining whether to end the specific effect when the avoidance means avoids setting the display time. Machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, when it is avoided that the display time is set by the avoiding means, it is determined by the ending determining means whether to end the specific effect. Therefore, if the display time exceeding a predetermined threshold value is determined, the end determination means may determine the end of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in the hope that the display time is set as short as possible.

<Characteristic C group> (Control that makes the transformation success rate higher when the button PUSH is performed than when the effective period has passed without PUSH)
The specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect, the determination period number determination means for determining the number of times the determination period is set for executing the predetermined determination in the effect period of the specific effect 1, and the specific effect 1 In the effect period, whether the discrimination period setting means for setting the discrimination period of the number of times determined by the discrimination period number determination means and the predetermined specific condition as the predetermined discrimination are satisfied during the discrimination period. The condition discriminating means for determining whether to display a specific display mode based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition discriminating means, and the condition discriminating means for determining whether to display a specific display mode. The second aspect display determination means for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on the elapse of the determination period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the means, and the first aspect display determination. As a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the means, a ratio setting means for setting a ratio higher than the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second aspect display determining means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. In the effect period of 1 specific effect, the number of times the determination period is set for executing a predetermined determination is determined by the determination period number determination means. In the effect period of the specific effect of 1, the determination period of the number of times determined by the determination period number determination means is set by the determination period setting means. As a predetermined determination, whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the determination period is determined by the condition determination means, and a specific display is made based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. Whether to display the aspect is determined by the first aspect display determining means. The second mode display discriminating means determines whether to display a specific display mode based on the elapse of the discriminating period without determining that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition discriminating means. As the ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the first aspect display determining means, a ratio higher than the ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the second aspect display determining means is set by the ratio setting means. Will be done.

As a result, when the specific condition is satisfied during the discrimination period, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher rate. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who wants to display a specific display mode play a game with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied, it can be expected that a specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected. Pachinko machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, when an operation on an operating means that can be operated by the player is detected, it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied. By operating the operating means during the period, the ratio of displaying a specific display mode can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. The specific effect executing means includes a game executing means, and the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the discriminating means. It is executed based on the specific discrimination result rather than the execution of the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the ratio of being determined to display the specific display mode is set higher when the specific effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is executed, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. The specific effect executed based on the specific judgment result is more than the execution of the specific effect executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a deviation judgment result different from the specific judgment result. The rate of execution is set to be higher when it is determined that a specific display mode is displayed by the rate setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained, a specific display mode is easily displayed. Therefore, when a specific display mode is displayed, a feeling of expectation that the privilege game will be executed for the player. It has the effect of being able to embrace.

In the game machine C3, when the ratio setting means displays the specific display mode by the first mode discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discrimination. The first ratio is set as the ratio to be discriminated, and the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discrimination. The first aspect is set during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the fact that a second ratio lower than the first ratio is set as the ratio determined to be displayed and the result of the deviation determination is obtained. A third ratio lower than the first ratio is set as the ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the display determination means, and the identification executed based on the result of the deviation determination. During the execution of the effect, a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio is set as a ratio determined to display the specific display mode by the second mode display determining means, and the first ratio is set. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the difference between the ratio and the third ratio is larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are played. That is, as a ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the first mode discriminating means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the specific discriminating result, the ratio setting means first. The percentage is set. A ratio lower than the first ratio as a ratio determined to display a specific display mode by the second mode display determining means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. The ratio of 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third ratio, which is lower than the first ratio, is determined to display a specific display mode by the first mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the deviation determination. The ratio of is set by the ratio setting means. The fourth ratio, which is lower than the second ratio, is determined to display a specific display mode by the second mode display discriminating means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the deviation determination. The ratio of is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first ratio and the third ratio is set to be larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

As a result, the degree of expectation of the privilege game is higher when it is determined that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the first aspect display determination means than when it is determined that the specific display mode is displayed by the second aspect determination means. Can be made to be recognized by the player when the value is high. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific display mode will be displayed after the specific conditions are satisfied during the determination period.

In the gaming machines C3 or C4, the determination period number determination means is executed based on the specific determination result rather than the specific effect executed based on the deviation determination result. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the specific effect makes it easier to set a large number of times as the number of times of the determination period.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, it was executed based on the specific discrimination result rather than the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result. Since it is easier to set a larger number of times for the specific effect by the means for determining the number of discriminant periods, there is an effect that the larger the number of discriminant periods, the higher the expectation of the player for the privileged game.

Based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determining means or the second aspect display determining means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect The gaming machine C6, which is provided with a specific effect ending means for ending the game.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is determined that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determining means or the second aspect display determining means. Based on this, since the specific effect is terminated by the specific effect end means, it is possible to make the player who wants to enjoy the specific effect for a longer time more strongly expect that the specific display mode is displayed. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger desire that the specific condition is satisfied during the discrimination period.

In the gaming machine C6, a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and an operation of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time setting means for setting the dynamic display time of the target display, and the specific effect executing means is said to be specified within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. The remaining dynamics are based on the determination that the effect is executed and that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first mode display discriminating means or the second mode display discriminating means. An effect of an effect to be executed after the specific effect is completed by the specific effect end means based on the remaining time determination means for determining the display time and the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determination means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized by comprising a production time determining means for determining the time.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. .. Within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination means based on the determination that the specific display mode is not displayed by either the first aspect display determination means or the second aspect display determination means. Based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time determining means, the effect time determining means determines the effect time to be executed after the specific effect is completed by the specific effect end means.

As a result, in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the remaining dynamic display time after the end of the specific effect, regardless of the end timing of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine C7, the effect time determining means determines one effect time from a plurality of predetermined different effect times within a range in which the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C7, the production time determination means is used within a range in which the end timing of the production does not exceed the dynamic display time from among a plurality of predetermined different production times. Since the effect time of 1 is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic D group> (The possibility of transformation and the mode of production after the transformation are changed according to the remaining fluctuation time at the time of button PUSH and the number of transformations)
Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect composed of at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect executed after the end of the first effect. And the upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times of the said specific display mode to be displayed in the said first effect of 1, and the specific determination period for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the said first effect. The discriminant period setting means that is set once or a plurality of times during execution, the first aspect display means that displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific discriminant period, and the specific discriminant period. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the second aspect display means for ending the specific determination period and displaying the specific display mode, and the specific display displayed during the execution of the first effect of 1. Based on at least one of the mode display number counting means for counting the display number of the aspect, the display number counted by the mode number counting means during the execution of the first effect, and the remaining effect period. The gaming machine D1 is provided with an effect time determining means for determining the effect time of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine D1, a specific effect composed of at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect executed after the end of the first effect. Is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect of 1 is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. The specific determination period for determining whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. Based on the elapse of the specific determination period, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific determination period, the specific determination period is terminated by the second aspect display means, and the specific display mode is displayed. The display count of the specific display mode displayed during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the mode display count counting means. During the execution of the first effect, the effect time of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining effect period.

As a result, the effect time of the second effect is variable according to the situation of the first effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the specific effect can be diversified.

The gaming machine D1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the discriminating period setting means sets a period during which the operation on the operating means is valid as the specific discriminating period. , The gaming machine D2, which is established when an operation on the operating means is detected.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, as the specific determination period, the period during which the operation for the operation means is valid is set by the determination period setting means. A specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected.

This has the effect that the player who wants to display the second effect with a longer effect time can positively operate the operation means.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the above, and the specific effect executing means is within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means. The specific effect is executed, and the effect time determining means of the second effect is based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized in that it determines the production mode.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. .. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect time determination means based on at least one of the display number counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect within the range of the dynamic display time during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the player's interest during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information can be improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the effect time determining means has a plurality of different effect times defined as the effect time of the second effect, before the end of the effect period of the specific effect. The gaming machine D4, which determines the longest production time in the range in which the second production ends.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the production period of the specific production is more than the end of the production period of the specific production from among a plurality of different production times defined as the production time of the second production. Since the longest production time in the range in which the second production ends before is determined by the production time determining means, the production time of the second production can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the specific effect is configured to include a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determining means. The gaming machine D5 is provided with a third effect time determining means for determining the effect time of the third effect based on at least one of the effect time and the remaining effect period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, the specific effect includes a third effect that is different from both the first effect and the second effect. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determination means based on at least one of the effect time determined by the effect time determining means and the remaining effect period.

As a result, it is possible to execute a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect during the execution of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect modes during the execution of the specific effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started, and the third effect time determining means is the first effect. The feature is that the effect time of the third effect is determined based on the difference between the remaining effect period at the time when one effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means. Pachinko machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is completed and before the second effect is started. The effect time of the third effect is determined by the third effect time determining means based on the difference between the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time determined by the effect time determining means.

This has the effect that the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed according to the effect period of the specific effect.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 is provided with an effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the second effect based on the display number of times counted by the aspect number counting means. ..

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect mode determining means based on the display number counted by the mode number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that the first effect and the second effect are related to each other. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game in the specific production can be improved.

In the gaming machine D7, the execution information used for executing the second effect is stored in the storage means stored for each effect mode of the second effect, and based on the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Of the execution information selected by the selection means based on the selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means and the effect time determined by the effect time determination means, the second of the present times. It is characterized by comprising a specific means for specifying a range used for executing the effect, and a second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the execution information in the range specified by the specific means. The gaming machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution information used to execute the second effect is stored in the storage means for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage means by the selection means. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determining means, the range used for the execution of the second effect of this time is specified by the specific means among the execution information selected by the selection means. The second effect is executed by the second effect execution means based on the execution information in the range specified by the specific means.

As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of second effects having different effect times from each execution information, so that the execution information is stored as compared with the case where the execution information is individually stored for each effect time. It has the effect of reducing the storage area required for storage.

<Characteristic E group> (The suggestion mode of the degree of expectation is different depending on the tendency of the button PUSH)
Based on a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times in one effect period, and a predetermined display condition being satisfied during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. The effect mode setting means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of predetermined effect modes and the display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means. At least one of the means, the specific discriminant means for executing the specific discriminant in the effect period of 1, and the effect mode having a high ratio of being determined by the effect mode determining means according to the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a determination ratio variable means that is variable when the predetermined effect mode is determined.

According to the gaming machine E1, a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. Based on the fact that the predetermined display condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. To. The display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is set by the effect mode setting means. In the production period of 1, a specific discrimination is executed by the specific discrimination means, and a production mode having a high ratio of being determined by the production mode determination means according to the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is at least one predetermined production mode. When deciding, it is varied by the determination ratio variable means.

As a result, it becomes easy to determine a different effect mode according to the determination result by the specific determination means, so that the impression of the specific effect can be changed according to the result of the specific determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a production that is hard for the player to get bored.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means is 1 as the specific determination. The determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in the effect period is discriminated, and the determination ratio variable means is the specific determination unit in the effect period of 1. With respect to the predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode to be discriminated by, the effect mode in which the ratio determined by the effect mode determining means is high is changed. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. As a specific determination, the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period is determined by the specific determination means. In the production period of 1, the ratio of the predetermined production mode set by the production mode setting means after the predetermined production mode to be discriminated by the specific discrimination means is determined by the effect mode determining means is high. Is variable by the determination ratio variable means.

As a result, while the predetermined effect mode to be discriminated by the specific discriminating means is displayed, the game can be performed while paying attention to the discriminating situation by the specific discriminating means, while the predetermined setting is set thereafter. In the effect mode, the game can be performed by paying attention to which effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since the points to be focused on can be changed according to the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it determines the number of times of the predetermined effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determining means among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period. Since the number of times of the predetermined effect mode is determined by the specific determination means, it is possible to change the effect mode that is easy to set according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a specific condition is satisfied when an operation on the operating means is detected while a predetermined effect mode is displayed. The production mode can be changed depending on whether or not the person operates the operating means. Therefore, since the effect mode can be changed by the player's selection, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is more difficult to get tired of.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination by the discriminant means resulting in a specific discriminant result. The specific effect executing means is provided with a privilege game executing means for executing the specific effect, and the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the discriminating means, and the determination ratio variable means is described. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, it is displayed at a predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined effect mode, the ratio of determining the first aspect is variable so as to be higher than that of the other effect modes, and the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is different from the first discrimination result. When the specific effect is being executed, which is the second determination result and is executed based on the specific determination result, the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times is determined. At the same time, the ratio of determining the second aspect different from the first aspect is variable so as to be higher than that of the other effect modes, and the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and the specification. When the specific effect executed based on the discriminant result different from the determination result of the above is being executed, when the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times is determined, the first The ratio of determining the two modes is variable so as to be higher than that of the other production modes, and the execution is performed based on the fact that the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and the deviation discrimination result is obtained. When the specific effect is being executed, the ratio of determining the first aspect is higher than that of the other effect when determining the predetermined effect mode to be displayed at the specific number of times. The gaming machine E5 characterized by being variable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. To. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, the predetermined number of times to be displayed is predetermined. The determination ratio is variable by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio of determining the first aspect when determining the effect mode is higher than that of the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the specific discrimination result is being executed, the specific number of times is executed. When determining a predetermined effect mode displayed on the screen, the rate of determining the table 2 mode different from the first mode is changed by the determination ratio variable means so that the ratio of determining the table 2 mode is higher than that of the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the first discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result is being executed, it is displayed at the specific number of times. When determining a predetermined effect mode to be performed, the rate of determining the second aspect is varied by the determination ratio variable means so as to be higher than the other effect modes. When the discrimination result by the specific discrimination means is the second discrimination result and the specific effect executed based on the deviation determination result is being executed, the predetermined effect mode displayed at the specific number of times is displayed. At the time of determination, the determination ratio variable means is changed so that the ratio of determining the first aspect is higher than that of the other effect modes.

As a result, it is possible to make the player estimate the degree of expectation of the privileged game according to the determination result by the specific determination means and the predetermined effect mode of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed, and the specific determining means is the present time as the specific determination. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is displayed. As a specific determination, the determination is executed by the specific determination means based on the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the present specific effect.

As a result, the effect mode in the present specific effect changes depending on the determination result of the condition determination means in the previously executed specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means has the number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect of this time, and the specific condition by the condition determination means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which it is determined that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, the number of predetermined effect modes displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect this time, and the specific condition by the condition determination means. Since the discrimination is executed by the specific discriminating means based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine E7 includes an identification means for identifying a player playing a game, and the specific determination means is displayed while the same player is identified as playing a game by the identification means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode and the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined by the condition determination means to satisfy the specific condition. ..

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the player playing the game is identified by the identification means. The number of predetermined effect modes displayed while the same player is identified as playing a game by the identification means, and the number of predetermined effect modes determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the determination is executed by the specific determination means.

As a result, it is possible to make the tendency of the effect mode that is easy to set different according to the game result for each player, so that there is an effect that the effect according to the player can be provided.

<Characteristic F group> (Adjust the connection between the first half of the production and the second half of the production)
During the execution of the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect composed of at least the first effect and the second effect executed after the first effect within one effect period, and the execution of the first effect, The first effect of terminating the first effect based on the end condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end condition determining means determining that the end condition is satisfied. The length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect by the end means and the first effect end means is set based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by comprising a period setting means for starting the second effect and an effect starting means for starting the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine F1, at least a specific effect composed of a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect execution means. During the execution of the first effect, it is determined by the end condition determining means whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means, the first effect is performed. The first effect is terminated by the termination means. The length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect by the first effect end means is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period. Based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means, the second effect is started by the effect starting means.

As a result, the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be changed according to the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed. be.

In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect as the length of the period between the end of the first effect and the end of the second effect. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the length at which the production ends is set.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the end of the first effect. Since the length at which the 2 effects are completed is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the specific effects can be more preferably executed.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, as the second effect, a type selection means for selecting one effect type from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect times is provided, and the period setting means is selected by the type selection means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect is set based on the effect time of the effect type.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selection means from a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the effect time of the effect type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the first effect is set by the period setting means.

As a result, the start timing of the second effect can be set according to the effect time of the second effect, so that there is an effect that the second effect can be executed more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the first effect of 1 and the first effect of 1 during execution of the first effect. A number counting means for counting the number of times a specific condition is satisfied is provided, and the end condition is when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or more than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is at least established.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, in the first effect of 1, the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set by the upper limit number of times setting means. The number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the number counting means. At least the end condition is satisfied when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means.

This has the effect that even if the end timing of the first effect changes according to the number of times of the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, the start of the second effect can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine F4, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period that enables an operation on the operation means once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect, and an operation validity period setting means thereof. The first aspect display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the elapse of the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, and the operation valid 1 set by the operation valid period setting means. A second aspect display means for ending the operation valid period and displaying the specific display mode based on the detection of an operation on the operation means during the period is provided, and the specific condition is the specific condition. The gaming machine F5, which is established when the display mode of the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation validity period for validating the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is set once or a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect by the operation validity period setting means. Based on the elapse of the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. Based on the fact that the operation for the operating means is detected during the one operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, the operation valid period is terminated by the second mode display means and a specific display mode is displayed. .. A specific condition is satisfied when a specific display mode is displayed.

As a result, the end timing of the operation valid period changes according to the timing when the player performs an operation on the operation means, so that even if the end timing of the first effect changes, the start of the second effect is suitably set. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third effect executing means for executing a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means, and a third effect executing means. The effect data of 1 from the effect data storage means based on the effect data storage means for storing the effect data for executing the third effect and the length of the period set by the period setting means. Of the data reading means for reading the data and the effect data of 1 read by the data reading means, the data in the range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is used for the third effect. The gaming machine F6 is provided with a data range setting means for setting data to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are played. That is, a third effect different from any of the first effect and the second effect is executed by the third effect executing means in the period of the length set by the period setting means. The effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. Based on the fact that the length of the period is set by the period setting means, the effect data of 1 is read out from the effect data storage means by the data reading means. Of the 1 effect data read by the data reading means, the data in the range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set as the data for executing the third effect by the data range setting means. Will be done.

As a result, when the third effect is executed, it is possible to set data having different effect periods based on the effect data of 1, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data for executing the third effect. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting means is the period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the range of data for executing the third effect is set so that the display time of the specific still image is variable according to the length.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image. The data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting means so that the display time of the specific still image changes according to the length of the period set by the period setting means.

As a result, even if the production time of the third effect is variable, the display time of a specific still image is only variable, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content. ..

It is executed by the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means thereof in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. A dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information is provided, and the specific effect executing means determines the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determining means. Based on the above, the gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed within the determined dynamic display time.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means within the determined dynamic display time.

This has the effect that the specific effect can be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Characteristic G group> (Adjust the mode after the production with an indefinite production time is completed)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period, and a predetermined end condition before the elapse of the effect period during the execution of the first effect. An effect ending means for terminating the first effect and an effect ending means for terminating the first effect based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means for determining whether or not the above is satisfied. The present invention is characterized by comprising an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period at least based on the length of the remaining effect period. Game machine G1 to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in one effect period. During the execution of the first effect, it is determined by the end condition determining means whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied before the effect period elapses. The first effect is terminated by the effect ending means based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means. The effect mode from the end of the first effect to the end of the effect period by the effect end means is set by the effect mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining effect period.

As a result, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the length of the remaining effect time, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, as the effect mode set by the mode setting means, a type selection means for selecting one type from a plurality of types of the effect mode having at least different effect times is provided. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, as an effect mode set by the mode setting means, at least one type is selected from a plurality of types of effect modes having different production methods by the type selection means. Since it is selected, there is an effect that the production mode of the production time suitable for the length of the remaining production period can be set.

In the gaming machine G2, the effect time is set by the effect mode setting means after the first effect is completed, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining effect period. The gaming machine G3 is provided with a period setting means for setting a period until the effect mode is started.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the production is performed after the first production is completed based on the production time of the production mode selected by the type selection means and the Nagasato of the remaining production period. Since the period until the effect mode set by the mode setting means is started is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interval between the first effect and the effect mode can be suitably set. ..

In the gaming machine G3, the period setting means sets the period so that the timing at which the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means ends and the timing at which the effect period ends are within a predetermined period. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means ends and the timing at which the effect period ends are within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect mode can be appropriately set.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means is the difference between the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selection means. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the period of is set as the period.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect is completed and the effect time of the type of effect selected by the type selection means. Since the difference period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the effect period and the end timing of the effect mode can be matched.

The gaming machine G1 includes a storage means for storing the effect data used to execute the effect mode, and the effect mode setting means corresponds to the length of the remaining effect period of the effect data of 1. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the range of data to be played is selected and set.

According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the effect data used to execute the effect mode is stored in the storage means. Of the effect data of 1, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of effect modes having different effect times from one effect data, so that there is an effect that the amount of data for displaying the effect mode can be reduced.

The gaming machine G6 is provided with a data selection means for selecting one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from a plurality of effect data stored in the storage means, and the effect mode setting. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the means is to select and set a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period from among the effect data of 1 selected by the data selection means. ..

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means is selected by the data selection means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means. Of the 1 effect data selected by the data selection means, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining effect period is selected and set by the effect mode setting means.

This has the effect that the production mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine G7, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privileged game execution for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminating means. A gaming machine G8 comprising means and means, wherein the data selection means selects the effect data of 1 from the storage means at least based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. .. At least based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, the effect data of 1 is selected from the storage means by the data selection means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game will be a privileged game from the effect mode, so that there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode and play the game.

<Characteristic H group> (The time it takes for a right-handed ball to reach the attacker is longer than when it is left-handed)
A first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path. A ball entering means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the ball and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and a predetermined ball based on the entry means of the gaming ball entering the ball entering means. The second flow path is provided with a privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above, and the second flow path is launched in the second direction rather than the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period until the gaming ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In the conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is awarded to the large winning opening during the hit state, so that the player can play the game with one pleasure in the hit state. Can be made.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that it became.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction flows down the first flow path, and the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction flows down the second flow path. Flow down. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. Second, the period until the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the entry means is longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. The flow path is configured.

As a result, it is possible to launch the game ball aiming at the first flow path for the player who wants to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible, while the game ball takes a relatively long time. It is possible to launch a game ball aiming at the second flow path to a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since it is possible to select a preferred firing direction for each player and perform the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine H1, the ball-entry means is at a position where the rate at which the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters is higher than the rate at which the game ball flowing down the first flow path enters. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the rate at which the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path enters is higher than the rate at which the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path enters. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when the ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier to enter the ball entry means, but the period until reaching the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the firing direction that suits each player's taste.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the gaming machine H1 or H2 is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball launched in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until the ball means reaches the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it can be changed to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is obtained, the variable means performs the discrimination from the second position a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine H4 comprising: a variable gaming execution means for executing a variable gaming variable to a first position.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means.

In the gaming machine H4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and the variable means using the second variable means during execution of the variable game. The first variable that causes the variable means to be changed to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position. The variable means is referred to as the first variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the control means and the variable game. A second variable control means that is variable to two positions is provided, and during the specific period, the gaming ball is launched in the second direction at the specific firing interval after the gaming ball is started to be launched in the second direction. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the specified number of gaming balls is at least longer than the period until the second flow path is completely flowed down.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means becomes the first based on the fact that after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means. 1 It is variable to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Will be done. At least a specific period from the start of launching the game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction flowing down the second flow path at specific firing intervals. Is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction during the execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be entered into the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. It has the effect of suppressing the loss of a person.

In the gaming machine H4, the variable game executing means has a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after elapse is controlled to be variable by the variable means in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times, and one or more in the specific variable pattern. The execution period of the first variable operation is such that the game ball launched in the first direction can be reached after the specific variable pattern is started, and the first variable pattern is started. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that a gaming ball launched in two directions is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the first position, and after a predetermined first period elapses, the variable means is changed to the second position. The variable means is controlled to be variable by the variable game executing means in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or more first variable movements in a specific variable pattern is such that the game ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can be reached, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the chance of the game ball entering the ball entry means is reduced as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the first direction. It has the effect of being able to remind you.

In the game machine H6, as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the first game state is set when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. The game is characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when the game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine H7.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H6, as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the game is played when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in one variable game, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be performed during the execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the first flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and the second flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the third direction. The variable means is configured to allow the gaming ball to flow down the upper surface of the variable means while being variable to the second position, and the pachinko ball is made to reach the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the above. The fourth direction side is inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position. In a state where the gaming ball can enter from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the upper portion is closed by the variable means, and the variable means is The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that it can be changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, while the game ball flowing down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. To reach. While the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means is tilted so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Are arranged. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above. Further, in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entering means is blocked by the variable means. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in the direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball arriving from the third direction side to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball arriving from the fourth direction side enters the ball. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than the game ball is launched in the first direction during the execution of the variable game. It has the effect of being able to be raised.

<Characteristic I group> (Right-handed during a big hit is more advantageous than left-handed on one side, but more disadvantageous than left-handed on another side)
Specified by a launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and discrimination by the discrimination means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, and the first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means, in which it is more advantageous for the player to keep firing the game ball in the first direction than to keep firing the game ball in the second direction during a specific period, and the first. It is advantageous for the player that the second element different from the element is continuously fired in the second direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising two-element advantageous means.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In the conventional gaming machine, by winning a game ball into the large winning opening during the hitting state, a predetermined privilege such as a prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is hit. The state can be made to play a game in one fun.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the launching means is configured so that at least the gaming ball can be launched in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. The first factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the second element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball can be launched in the first direction to the player who wants to make the first element advantageous during the execution of the privilege game, while the second element can be made to be advantageous to the player who wants to make the second element advantageous. The game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide playability that suits the taste of each player.

In the game machine I1, to the ball entry means provided at least at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the ball entry means thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the gaming ball, a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means, and the entry means rather than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a variable that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine I2 comprising a control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. During the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is variable by the variable control means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the privilege game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the first element advantageous means is a method in which the gaming ball continues to be launched in the first direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, it is better that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction than the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased by the first factor advantage means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high rate of entering the ball entry means. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively launched in the first direction.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element advantageous means is such that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the first direction during the specific period. The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the number of gaming balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, it is more likely that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction than that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction during a specific period. Since the number of game balls that reach the ball entry means is increased by the second factor advantage means, the player who wants to make more game balls reach the ball entry means is positively directed to the second direction. It has the effect of being able to fire a game ball.

In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during the specific period, and in the second element advantageous means, the gaming ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific period is the first number of times. It is intended to suppress the arrival of the ball entry means until the execution period of the variable operation ends, and at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that it is a period during which the gaming ball launched in the second direction can be reached after the start.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are played. That is, the first variable operation, which is changed to the second position after the predetermined first period elapses after the variable means is changed to the first position, is executed the first time by the variable control means during the specific period. Will be done. The second factor advantage means means that the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means between the start of the specific period and the end of the execution period of the first variable motion of a predetermined number of times. It is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of a predetermined number of times is composed of a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can be reached after the specific period is started.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the game ball reaches the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable motion more times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

In the gaming machine I5, in the second element advantageous means, the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means is before the gaming ball launched in the second direction. The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed so as to be longer than the period until reaching the entry ball means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, the game ball launched in the second direction enters the ball during the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. Since the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantageous means so that the period until reaching the means is longer, the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed. , It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball entering means from being reached before the end of the first variable operation a predetermined number of times. Therefore, launching the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of more reliably entering the ball into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine I5 or I6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is variable so as to be in the second period, and the first element advantageous means is such that the gaming ball launched in the second direction enters the ball entry means during the second period. It is easier for the gaming ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entry means during the second period than to reach the ball entry means. Characteristic gaming machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means so that the period from the start of the variable from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is variable. The game ball launched in the first direction reached the entry means during the second period than the game ball launched in the second direction reached the entry means during the second period. It is easier to enter the ball entry means by the first element advantage means.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position is also performed. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball into the ball entry means, it is possible to prolong the period during which the ball can enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the first direction, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine I7, the gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow down, and the flowing gaming ball can reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and in the second direction. The variable means includes a second flow path in which the launched game ball can flow down and the flowed-down game ball reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While the position is variable to the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball-entry means is configured so that the gaming ball can enter from above in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, and the variable means is the second position. In the state of being variable to, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is said to be oriented from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction through the first flow path. The game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is variable to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball from above with respect to the ball entry means, while in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the ball entry means. The upper part of is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state where the ball can enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that the ball is launched in the first direction and is launched from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to facilitate the entry of a game ball that has reached the entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the ball entry rate when the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably than the game ball launched in the second direction.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, when the gaming ball does not enter the ball-entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. 1 Game state setting means for setting a game state and setting a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1. A gaming machine I8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, the gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to whether or not to play the game while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic J group> (Variable attacker who can easily win a game ball that has reached the same area)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a specific area where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach, and a first entry ball provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter. To the means, the second ball entry means, the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting means that grants a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the ball entering the game ball, and a game ball that has reached the specific area enters the first ball entering means. A first position that makes it possible and difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position that makes it difficult to enter the first ball entry means and allows the ball to enter the second ball entry means. The position, at least the variable means that can be changed, and the variable means are changed to the first position based on the establishment of the first condition, and the variable means is changed to the first position based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. The gaming machine J1 is provided with a variable control means that can be changed to a second position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, a specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched by the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball can reach. A first ball entry means and a second ball entry means are provided at positions where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. The first privilege is given by the first privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the first based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. A second benefit that is different from the benefit of. The variable means allows the game ball that has reached a specific area to enter the first ball entry means, and the first position where it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means is difficult to enter. It is configured to be at least variable to a second position where the ball can enter the second ball entry means. While the variable means is variable to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition. It is variable to.

As a result, it is possible to make the ball entry means different so that the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the ball according to the variable position of the variable means. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance, and the variable means is the first ball entry means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it is arranged between the second ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance. The variable means is arranged between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

This has the effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the variable means are separately provided for the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable means has the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter any of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. , At least variably configured, the variable control means changes the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the first position. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it is variable from the third position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the two conditions.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the variable means is variably configured at the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The variable means is variable from the third position to the first position based on the condition of the first condition, while the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position based on the condition of the second condition. It is variable by variable control means.

As a result, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Therefore, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that is established.

In the gaming machine J3, the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entry means is the first ball entry means with respect to the specific area. The first position is provided in a second direction different from the direction, and the first position is a position where the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific region tends to be in the first direction. The second position is a position where the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the second direction, and the third position is the traveling direction of the gaming ball that has reached the specific area. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the position tends to be different from any of the direction of the above and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the first ball entry means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, the second ball entry means is in the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. It is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the first direction, while when it is arranged at the second position, the game that has reached the specific area. The traveling direction of the sphere tends to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific region tends to be different from both the first direction and the second direction.

As a result, in the first direction and the second direction, it is less likely that the game ball that has reached the specific area advances in the state where the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied. The configuration between the ball entry means and the configuration between the specific area and the second ball entry means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

In the game machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the first direction from the specific area is difficult to enter, and the second ball entry means. Is a gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is difficult for a gaming ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the second direction from the specific region to enter.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J4, the first ball entry means is configured such that it is difficult for a gaming ball traveling from a specific area to a traveling direction other than the first direction to enter the ball. , Since the second ball entry means is configured so that it is difficult for a gaming ball that has traveled from a specific area to a traveling direction other than the second direction to enter the ball, the game is played in a state where the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied. There is an effect that the ball can be suppressed from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first position is such that the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board and the second variable member is buried in the board. The second position is the second position. The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. The third position is the first variable member and the first variable member. The two variable members are arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the first variable member can guide the gaming ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. The second variable member constitutes a flow path capable of guiding a gaming ball that has reached the specific region to the second ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. A gaming machine J6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are played. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. In the first position, the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board surface, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. At the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. At the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are embedded in the board surface. By projecting the first variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific region to the first ball entry means is configured. By projecting the second variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific region to the second ball entry means is configured.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

In the gaming machine J6, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view, and the first ball entry means is The game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and the game ball arriving from the other direction is difficult to enter. 2 The ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The gaming machine J7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view. The first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter.

This has the effect of suppressing the game ball from entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means in the state where the variable means is arranged at the third position.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the variable means from the third position to the third position based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J8 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times at one position or the second position.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6 or J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J8, as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the third position to the first position during the execution of the variable game. A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a game and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege is a gaming machine J9 characterized in that it is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of variable games executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during the execution of the variable game, and the variable means are in the third position. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is variable to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege is composed of a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

As a result, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than the second variable game is executed. Therefore, the game is performed by paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determination means. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed the first number of times from the third position to the first position, and in the second variable game, the variable means is the first. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the second number of times is variable from the third position to the second position, which is less than the first number of times.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is changed the first number of times from the third position to the first position, while in the second variable game, it is variable. Since the means is variable from the third position to the second position a second number of times less than the first number, when the first variable game is executed, a first privilege that is more advantageous than the second privilege is given. In addition to being easy to do, the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position also increases. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view, and the variable The means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction in the front view between the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means, and the variable means is the first in the first position. The second position is a position close to the ball entry means, the variable means is a position close to the second ball entry means, and the third position is the position of the first position and the second position. The gaming machine J11 characterized by being in the middle position.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged on the board surface at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view. The variable means is configured to be variable in the left-right direction in the front view between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. When the variable means is placed in the first position, the variable means is close to the first ball entry means, while when the variable means is placed in the second position, the variable means is close to the second ball entry means. When the variable means is arranged at the third position, the variable means is arranged between the first position and the second position.

As a result, the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means to the left or right, so that there is an effect that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms an inclination in the direction in which the left side surface descends from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, and the right side surface forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. In the first ball-entry means, a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball-entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction is difficult to enter. The second ball-entry means is such that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball-entry means can enter the ball and the game ball arrives from another direction. Is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball, and in the first position, the gaming ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means is on the side of the second entry means. It is possible to flow down so as to reach the first ball entry means from the direction, and in the second position, the gaming ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means is said to be the first. The gaming machine J12 is characterized in that it can flow down so as to reach the second ball entry means from the direction of the ball entry means side.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction, and the → side surface of the variable means forms an inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. .. The first ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. The second ball entry means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entry means can enter the ball, and a game ball arriving from the other direction becomes difficult to enter. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific region due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the first entry means from the direction of the second entry means side. It will be possible. When the variable means is arranged at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the second entry means from the direction of the first entry means side. It will be possible.

As a result, the game ball can be entered into both the first entry means and the second entry means by simply letting the game ball flow down along the inclination of the side surface of the variable means. Has the effect of being able to be simplified.

In the gaming machine J12, the third position has a distance of one game ball or more between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means, and the right end of the variable means. The gaming machine J13 is characterized in that a distance equal to or greater than the width of one gaming ball is provided between the second ball entry means and the gaming machine J13.

According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the width of one game ball between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entry means. Since the above distance is vacant and the distance between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entry means is at least the width of one gaming ball, the variable means is arranged at the third position. , There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the second entry means.

<Characteristic K group> (The period until the game ball that has reached a specific area enters the attacker is changed in the launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means, and a launching ball in the second direction. A game is provided to a specific area provided at a position where the game ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and the ball entry means. The privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering, the first position at which the ball can enter the ball entering means, and the first position different from the first position, and the ball entering means. Based on the fact that at least a variable means that can be changed to a second position that allows the ball to enter the ball and a third position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a predetermined specific condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period, and a second variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period. A variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable by any of a plurality of variable movements including at least a plurality of variable movements is provided, and in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the first position is provided. A gaming ball launched in one direction and reaching the variable means has a shorter period of time to enter the ball entry means than a gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means. The gaming machine K1 characterized by being easy to become.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the launching means is configured so that the gaming ball can be launched at least in the first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter, and a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means. .. The first position that allows the ball to enter the ball entry means, the second position that is different from the first position and allows the ball to enter the ball entry means, and the ball entry means become difficult. At least the variable means is variably configured at the third position. The first variable operation in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period and the variable means are changed from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific conditions. The variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be changed by any of a plurality of variable movements including at least the second variable movement. In the state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the variable means enters the ball more than the game ball launched in the second direction and reaches the variable means. It is configured so that the period until the ball enters the means is likely to be shortened.

As a result, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game method of launching the game ball in the first direction to a player who wants to put the game ball into the ball entry means in a short period of time is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to let a player who does not want to immediately enter the game ball into the ball entry means select a game method of launching the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, it is difficult for the gaming ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means variable to the first position and enter the ball entering means during the predetermined period. A gaming machine K2 characterized by a period of a certain length.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the gaming ball launched in the second direction reaches the variable means variable to the first position and enters the ball entering means for a predetermined period. Since it is composed of a period of length that makes it difficult to ball, when the variable means is changed to the first position, if the game ball is not launched in the first direction, the game ball becomes the entry means. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to realize the playability of launching the game ball in the first direction by predicting the timing of changing to the first position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the gaming ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means is launched in the first direction and said. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the game ball that has reached the variable means, and during the predetermined period, the game ball launched in the second direction is in the first position. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it is a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach the variable means and enter the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the state where the variable means is variable to the second position, the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the variable means is more likely than the game ball launched in the first direction and reached the variable means. The period until the ball enters the ball entry means tends to be shortened. The predetermined period is composed of a period of length in which it becomes difficult for the game ball launched in the second direction to reach the variable means variable to the first position and enter the ball entry means. ..

As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that allows the player to quickly determine the launch direction that facilitates entry into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the variable by the variable control means based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminant means. A gaming machine K4 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result. Since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means is executed by the variable game executing means, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means. ..

In the game machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. When a state is set and the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed is from the first game state. The gaming machine K5 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, when the gaming ball enters the ball-entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the variable game is executed. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end, pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means. It is possible to play a game while the variable game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player for the variable game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game is the first. The variable game type determining means is provided, which is determined by the ratio of the above and the variable means determines the second variable game controlled by the second variable operation at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. The gaming machine K6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4 or K5, as a type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during the execution of the variable game. 1 The variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, while the second variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined at a ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction when the variable game is executed. .. That is, since it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the launch direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by using the ratio of the type determined by the variable game type determining means as a clue, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine K6, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the entry of a pachinko ball into the ball is provided, and the variable game executing means obtains the variable ball entering means during execution of the variable game. The number of times predetermined according to the type of the variable game is changed from the second state to the first state, and the first of the periods during which the variable ball-entry means is in the second state. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be variably operated by one variable operation or the second variable operation.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game executing means causes the variable control means to control the variable ball entry means so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game executing means causes the variable control means to control the variable means so that the variable means operates variably in the first variable operation or the second variable operation in the predetermined period of the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be entered into the variable entry means during the execution of the variable game, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable entry means is given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who could not enter the ball into the ball entry means from being discouraged.

In the gaming machine K7, in the first variable game, the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state more frequently during the variable game of 1 than in the second variable game. The gaming machine K8, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, in the first variable game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times the game is played increases, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that it will be the first variable game.

<Characteristic L group> (During the V round, the direction in which the V prize is likely to be won is predicted and the game ball is fired)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means, and a launching ball in the second direction. A specific area provided at a position where the pachinko ball can be reached, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter, and a variable operation in a predetermined variable pattern. A game ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied as a variable means capable of and a variable pattern set for the variable means. A first variable pattern is determined in which a gaming ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entry means, and a second condition different from the first condition is determined. Based on the establishment, the game ball launched in the second direction and reached the specific area enters the ball entry means rather than the game ball launched in the first direction and reaches the specific area. Based on the fact that the variable pattern determining means for determining the second variable pattern that facilitates ball formation and the first condition or the second condition are satisfied, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode in which it is difficult to identify.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the launching means is configured so that the gaming ball can be launched at least in the first direction and in the second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching means and the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area can enter. The variable means is configured to be capable of variable operation with a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, the first condition is higher than that of the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and reached the specific area by the variable pattern determining means based on the fact that the predetermined first condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the first variable pattern, which makes it easier for a game ball launched in a direction to reach a specific area to enter the ball entry means, is determined, while a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The second variable pattern is variable, which makes it easier for the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area to enter the ball entry means than the game ball launched in the first direction and reached the specific area. It is determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the fact that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the specific effect of the effect mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the production mode whether the variable means is variable by the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, so it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to enter the ball. It is possible to realize the playability of launching a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern allows a gaming ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means during a specific period after the first condition is satisfied, and the first variable pattern is described. A gaming ball launched in the second direction during a specific period makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern is the second variable pattern for the specific period after the second condition is satisfied. In the meantime, the game ball launched in the first direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entry means. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for at least the specific period.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, the game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the first condition is satisfied becomes Uto for the entry means and the specific period. In the meantime, the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entry means during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied, and the second variable pattern is set. A game ball launched in two directions can enter the ball entry means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for at least a specific period.

As a result, it is possible to predict the direction in which the ball is likely to enter and to launch the game ball in the predicted direction during a specific period, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the gaming machines L1 or L2, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the variable determined by the variable pattern determining means based on the specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminant means. A gaming machine L3 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determining means is used based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition yields a specific discrimination result. Since a variable game including at least a variable operation of the variable means is executed by the variable game executing means in the determined variable pattern, the game is expected to have a specific discrimination result each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. It has the effect of being able to do.

In the game machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. When a state is set and the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed is from the first game state. The gaming machine L4 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, when the gaming ball enters the ball-entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the variable game is executed. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set as the game state after the end by the game state setting means, the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game. You can play the game by paying attention to whether or not you do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved while the variable game is being executed.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during the execution of the variable game is the first. The variable game type determining means for determining the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is provided at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A game machine L5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, the first variable pattern is set in the variable means during the execution of the variable game as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means. 1 The variable game is determined by the variable game type determining means at the first ratio, while the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first ratio by the variable game type determining means. Since it is determined by the second ratio, it may make the player think that it is easier to enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction when the variable game is executed. can. That is, since it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the launch direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by using the ratio of the type determined by the variable game type determining means as a clue, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine L5, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the entry of a pachinko ball into the ball is provided, and the variable game executing means obtains the variable ball entering means during execution of the variable game. The variable means is variable by a variable operation that changes from the second state to the first state and a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game. A gaming machine L6 characterized by performing an operation.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable operation for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means. The variable operation in which the variable means is changed is executed by the variable game execution means.

As a result, even if the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable entry means is given. It has the effect of suppressing the discouragement of the player who could not get the ball into the ball.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Based on the avoidance means for avoiding this and the avoidance of the execution of the specific effect by the avoidance means, the information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied is notified. A gaming machine L7 comprising: a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the following effects are played. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the avoidance means avoids the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. Based on the fact that the execution of the specific effect is avoided by the avoiding means, the notification effect executing means executes the notification effect for notifying the information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to specify the firing direction in which it is easy to enter the ball entering means by executing the notification effect, so that the game can be performed in anticipation of the notification effect being executed. effective.

<Characteristic M group> (The attacker who can easily win a prize changes according to the movable position from the start to the end of the attacker's movement)
A game is performed in the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, the first position in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball becomes difficult to enter, and the variable means are determined from the second position to the first position based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The second ball entry means includes a variable control means for controlling the period to be variable, and the second ball entry means is described according to a variable position between the second position and the first position. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that the ease of entering a gaming ball that has reached a variable means is variable.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the first position where the game ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter into the first entry means. The variable means is configured to be variable. Based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. The ease of entering the game ball that has reached the variable means into the second entering means varies according to the variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

As a result, it is variable whether it is easy to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means according to the variable position of the variable means, so pay attention to the variable position of the variable means. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, the second ball-entry means reaches the variable means in a state where the specific range from the second position to the first position is variable. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that a ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the gaming ball that reaches the variable means in a state where the variable means changes a specific range from the second position to the first position. Is able to enter the second ball entry means, so that the game can be played by devising a way to make the game ball reach the variable means while the variable means is variable in a specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured in a range that does not include at least the first position, and the second ball entry means is the variable means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the gaming ball that has reached is difficult to enter.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the specific range is configured in a range not including at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range, the variable means Since it becomes difficult for the gaming ball that has reached to enter the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the timing of launching the gaming ball can be further devised.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means is the first ball entry means. With a first inclined member provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means and forming an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball entering means is provided. The first position is at least composed of a second inclined member that forms an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entering means is provided. The game ball that has reached the variable means is at a position where it is easy for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and it is difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the second inclined member. The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is at a position where it is difficult for the first inclined member and the second inclined member to flow down.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. A first tilting member that is provided between the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means and that forms an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball-entry means is provided, and a first (2) At least the variable means is composed of a second inclined member forming an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the ball entering means is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the variable means tends to flow down the first inclined member, and it becomes difficult for the variable means to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means has a second. When arranged at the position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first inclined member and the second inclined member.

As a result, the game ball can flow down to each entry means by the inclination formed by each inclination member, so that complicated control for guiding the game ball to each entry means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface, and the first position is on the front side of the first inclined member and the first inclined member. Both of the second inclined member provided in the machine are arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second position is the first inclined member and the second inclined member. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that both of the above and the above are buried in the board.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, both the first tilting member and the second tilting member provided on the front side of the first tilting member are on the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. It will be a protruding arrangement.

This has the effect that it is possible to change the ball entry means that allows the ball to enter by a simple control of causing the variable means to appear and disappear.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, as a variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means, a first variable pattern in which the number of times of variable from the second position to the first position tends to increase is likely to occur. A variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variables including at least a second variable pattern in which the number of changes from the second position to the first position is likely to be smaller than that of the first variable pattern is provided. A gaming machine M6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means is often changed from the second position to the first position. 1 variable by a variable pattern determining means from a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern that tends to be and a second variable pattern that tends to change from the second position to the first position less frequently than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

In the gaming machine M6, the specific condition is determined during one execution period based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination by the discrimination means that results in a specific discrimination. A gaming machine M7 comprising: a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which a number of times is established.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the discrimination by the discriminant means executed based on the establishment of the discriminant condition yields a specific discriminant result during the execution period of 1. Since the variable game in which the specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. , There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M7, as the types of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific condition is satisfied, and a first variable game. A variable game type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M8 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M7, as a type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied. One type by the variable game type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means when a specific condition is satisfied. Since the number of times the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry means is changed according to the type of the variable game, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable game.

In the gaming machine M8, the first variable game is characterized in that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the variable game of 1 is more likely to be smaller than that of the second variable game.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, in the first variable game, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the variable game of 1 is likely to be smaller than that in the second variable game. In this case, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being discouraged by the fact that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is small.

<Characteristic N group> (It is easier to win more prize balls in the open pattern where it is difficult to win the electric chew than in the open pattern where it is easy to win the electric chew during the electric support)
A ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and a ball-entry means that allows the game ball to enter the ball-entry means. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the first position to be, the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position, and the establishment of the predetermined first condition. As the variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable pattern for which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern thereof. Also includes a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that facilitates the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and the first variable. While the variable means is controlled by the pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern. Machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determining means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

As a result, the variable pattern expected by the player can be made different depending on whether the ease of satisfying the second condition is prioritized or the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means is prioritized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern has a larger number of times the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is the total of the periods during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern, as compared with the first variable pattern. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the variable means is changed to the first position more times from the start to the end of the variable pattern 1 than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern is longer than that of the first variable pattern.

This has the effect that it is possible to easily distinguish between the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern according to the number of times the pattern is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the gaming ball can enter the ball, and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. More than the predetermined privilege based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball is easily guided by the variable means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege, which is more than the predetermined privilege, is given by the second privilege granting means.

As a result, since the first variable pattern can be set to obtain more opportunities to acquire the second privilege, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the first variable pattern will be set. Can be done.

In the game machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means variably operates within the predetermined range. If so, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down to the variable means is in an area where it is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to a specific area. A specific area is configured so that a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means at least in a state where the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, it is possible to make the game play by devising to reach the variable means while the game ball is variably operating within a predetermined range, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entering means, and the first discriminating means by the first discriminating means. The second is based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the privileged game execution means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above and the entry into the ball entry means. The variable control means is provided with a second discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, and the variable control means determines the variable pattern by assuming that the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means and the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable by a variable pattern determined by the means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game is based on the fact that the first discrimination means is executed by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The privileged game that is advantageous to the person is executed by the privileged game execution means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the entry into the ball entry means. The variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable pattern is variable according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means, assuming that the second determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, since the first determination is executed by entering the ball entering means, the game ball enters the ball entering means while the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the ball enters.

In the gaming machine N5, as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the first game state, and the privilege. The type of the award game is determined from a plurality of a plurality including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the game is completed is set to a second game state different from the first game state. A gaming machine N6 comprising a privilege game type determining means, wherein the first gaming state is less likely to be the second determination result in the second determination than the second gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the first game state, and after the execution of the privilege game is completed. The type of the privileged game is determined by the privileged game type determining means from among a plurality of the second privileged games in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The first gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination is less likely to result in the second discrimination than in the second gaming state.

This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the privilege game type determination means.

In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern has a larger number of times the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of the first variable pattern than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is the total of the periods during which the variable means is changed to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern, as compared with the first variable pattern. The first game state is the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the determination ratio of is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first variable pattern is configured so that the variable means is changed to the first position more times from the start to the end of the variable pattern 1 than the second variable pattern. In the first gaming state, the determination ratio of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means is higher than that in the second gaming state when the discrimination by the second determining means gives the second determination result.

As a result, in the first game state, the game ball enters the ball entry means relatively frequently, so that the first determination can be efficiently executed. Further, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first gaming state, the second condition is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the variable pattern.

In the gaming machine N7, a game in which a gaming ball can enter and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means variably operates in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball is easily guided by the variable means, and a second ball having more than the predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above and the first discrimination by the first discriminating means when the gaming ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter and the gaming ball enters. The first direction is based on the specific ball-entry means in which the above is executed, the second discrimination result in the second gaming state, and the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determining means. It is provided with a suggestion effect executing means for executing a second direction suggestion effect suggesting that the game ball is launched in a second direction different from that of the ball entering means. A gaming machine N8 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operating in a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege granting means grants a second privilege that is greater than the predetermined privilege. A specific ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and when the game ball enters, the first determination by the first determination means is executed. It is suggested that the game ball is launched in the second direction different from the first direction based on the second determination result in the second game state and the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means. The second-direction suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter.

As a result, when the first variable pattern is determined, there is an effect that the player can be surely given an opportunity to acquire the second privilege.

<Characteristic O group> (Navigation in the direction of electric support is generated at the time of unfavorable electric support opening pattern)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means can enter, and a gaming ball entering the ball entering means. Based on this, the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position, a variable control means that controls the variable means to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a variable control means thereof. As the variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the above, a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. A variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from the variable patterns, and at least while the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern by the variable control means, the gaming ball is launched in the specific direction. The gaming machine O1 is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine O1, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. The variable means is variably configured in a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. There is. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means, a plurality of variables including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable combination pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. 1 variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means from the variable patterns of. At least while the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first variable pattern, a suggestion effect suggesting the launch of the game ball in a specific direction is executed by the effect executing means.

This has the effect of giving the player the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine O1, the gaming ball enters the second entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and the second entry means thereof. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege based on a ball, a first gaming state in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first gaming state thereof. The effect executing means includes a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the second game state is the second game state. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means in the set state.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. From a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which a specific condition is likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means. Based on the fact that the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means in the state where the second gaming state is set, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, the launch direction of the game ball can be changed according to the game state, so that there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of striking the launch direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine O2, a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine O3 is characterized by comprising a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the above.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, a specific discrimination result is determined by the discrimination means executed based on the ball entering the ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Since the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the above, there is an effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained each time the determination by the determination means is executed.

In the game machine O3, the game state setting means sets one game state by assuming that the condition for ending the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is satisfied and the predetermined setting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine O4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O3, the game state 1 is set by the game state setting means, assuming that the predetermined setting condition is satisfied that the end condition of the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is satisfied. Is set, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the game state set after the end of the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range while changing from the second position to the first position, the number is larger than the predetermined privilege. 3 The gaming machine O5 characterized in that it forms a state in which benefits are easily given.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means changes a predetermined variable range while changing from the second position to the first position, it is predetermined. Since a state is formed in which a third score, which is more than the privilege of, is likely to be given, it is possible to play the game by devising to reach the variable means while changing the predetermined variable range. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine O5, a position where the gaming ball can enter and the gaming ball that reaches the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means changes the predetermined movable range. It is characterized by being provided with a third ball entry means provided in the above, and a third privilege granting means for granting the third privilege based on the ball entering the third ball entry means. Pachinko machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third variable means capable of entering the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is changing a predetermined movable range. .. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, the third privilege is granted by the third privilege granting means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entry means.

In the game machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter, and the variable means variably operates the predetermined movable range. In this case, the flowing game ball is easily reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is in a state where at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down to the variable means is in a region where it is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can enter. When the game ball is variably operating in a predetermined movable range, the flowing game ball is likely to be reflected to a specific area by the variable means. In the specific area, at least the variable means is in a state where the game ball flowing down to the variable means is arranged in the first position or the second position while the variable means is arranged in the first position or the second position. It becomes difficult for the game ball that has flowed down to reach.

As a result, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the path of the game ball, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (Two members can be moved independently by one drive source)
A first variable means that can be changed to a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a second variable means that can be changed to a third position and a fourth position different from the third position. By driving the first variable means from the first position to the second position by driving in the first direction from the specific reference position, the first variable means is changed from the specific reference position to the first direction. P1 is a gaming machine P1 comprising: a driving means for changing the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position by driving in different second directions.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like, such as an opening / closing plate for opening / closing a specific winning opening. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large opening openings that are opened when a lottery is won based on a starting prize are provided, and large opening openings that are opened according to the type of winning and the number of rounds are provided. By switching, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes complicated, so that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation for a plurality of variable members. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the first variable means is variably configured in the first position and the second position different from the first position. The second variable means is variably configured in the third position and the fourth position different from the third position. The first variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by driving the driving means in the first direction from a specific reference position as a starting point. On the other hand, the second variable means is changed from the third position to the fourth position by driving the driving means in a second direction different from the first direction from a specific reference position as a starting point.

As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means can be changed by the driving means, so that there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In the gaming machine P1, the driving means drives the first variable means from the second position to the first position by driving the first variable means in the second direction in a state where the first variable means is variable to the second position. The second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position by driving the second variable means in the first direction in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. A gaming machine P2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, when the driving means is driven in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Further, when the driving means is driven in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position.

As a result, the variable direction of each variable means can be switched by simply switching the drive direction of the drive means, so that there is an effect that the configuration of the drive means can be further simplified.

The gaming machine P2 includes variable suppression means for suppressing the second variable means from changing from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine P3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, it is variable that the second variable means is variable from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. Since it is suppressed by the suppressing means, there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In the gaming machine P3, the second variable suppressing means for suppressing the first variable means from changing from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the first variable means is variable from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. Since it is suppressed by the two variable suppressing means, there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be changed more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means are provided, and the first position is the said. It is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, and the second position is easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. The third position is a position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position than the third position. 2. The gaming machine P5 characterized in that the gaming ball is easily entered into the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable means is in the first position, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the second position, while in the second position, the first ball is entered rather than the first position. A game ball can easily enter the means. When the second variable means is in the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the fourth position, while when the second variable means is in the fourth position, it is the third position than in the third position. 2 It becomes easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means.

As a result, the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball changes according to the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the driving means is composed of a motor that can be rotationally driven in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction. The gaming machine P6 is characterized in that the first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are played. That is, the driving means is composed of a motor that can be rotationally driven in a first rotation direction and a second rotation direction opposite to the first rotation direction. The first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

As a result, the movement of each variable means can be controlled only by switching the rotation direction of one motor, so that there is an effect that the configuration for changing each variable means can be simplified.

In the game machine P6, a first gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first variable means, a second gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second variable means, and the above. It comprises a first gear and a third gear that is meshed with the second gear and is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, wherein the driving means is at the particular reference position. While rotating in a first rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the first rotation direction with the starting point, mesh with the third gear and outside the first rotation range. It is configured so as not to mesh with the third gear while rotating, and the second gear is such that the driving means rotates in the second rotation direction with the specific reference position as a starting point. While rotating in a second rotation range that can be arranged while rotating, it meshes with the third gear, and while rotating outside the second rotation range, it engages with the third gear. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it is configured so as not to mesh with each other.

According to the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6. That is, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first variable means by the first gear. The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second variable means by the second gear. A third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor is configured to be meshable with the first gear and the second gear. While the drive means is rotating in a first rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the first rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the first gear and the third gear mesh with each other. The first gear is configured so that the first gear and the third gear do not mesh with each other while rotating outside the first rotation range. While the drive means is rotating in a second rotation range that can be arranged while rotating in the second rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the second gear and the third gear mesh with each other. The second gear is configured so that the second gear and the third gear do not mesh with each other while rotating outside the second rotation range.

As a result, the first gear and the second gear can be driven only by the first third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, so that the configuration for varying each variable means can be further simplified. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the driving means drives the first variable means in the second direction in a state where the first variable means is variable to the second position, whereby the first variable means is driven by the second variable means. The second variable means is driven from the fourth position to the first position by changing the position from the position to the first position and driving the second variable means in the first direction in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. It is variable to three positions, and is variable to prevent the second variable means from changing from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. A suppressing means and a second variable suppressing means that suppresses the first variable means from changing from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. The first variable means is provided with a second driving means capable of varying the first variable means between the first position and the second position regardless of the variable position of the second variable means. The variable means is characterized in that it is variable by the second driving means while the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied, and is variable by the driving means while the specific conditions are not satisfied. Amusement machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are played. That is, the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position by driving the driving means in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position. Further, the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position by driving the driving means in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. While the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position, the variable suppression means suppresses the change of the second variable means from the third position. While the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position, it is suppressed by the second variable suppressing means that the first variable means is variable from the first position. Regardless of the variable position of the second variable means, the first variable means is changed between the first position and the second position by the second driving means. While the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable means is variable by the second driving means, while the first variable means is variable by the driving means while the specific condition is not satisfied. To.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom when moving the first variable means.

In the gaming machine P8, the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined first determination condition. The first variable means is variable for a predetermined period from the first position to the second position based on the first discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means for executing the above and the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The variable control means for controlling the slingshot, the second discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating means for discriminating by the second discriminating means. The first variable game execution means is provided with the variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the second variable means is changed from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the above. The position is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, and the second position is a position where the game ball enters the first ball entry means rather than the first position. The third position is a position where it is easier to enter the ball, the third position is a position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the second ball entry means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position. This is a position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means, and the variable control means is the second drive when the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game. When the first variable means is controlled to be variable by the means and the first determination result is obtained while the variable game is not executed, the first variable means is changed by the drive means. The gaming machine P9, which is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the predetermined first determination condition. Based on the result of the first determination in the determination by the first determination means, the first variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period. The discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. 2 The variable game in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means. When the first variable means is changed to the first position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the second position, while when it is changed to the second position, it is more difficult than the first position. It becomes easy to enter the first ball entry means. When the second variable means is changed to the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the fourth position, while when the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, It is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. If the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game, the variable control means is controlled so that the first variable means is variable by the second driving means, while the variable game is not being executed. When the first determination result is obtained, the variable control means is controlled so that the first variable means is variable by the drive means.

As a result, the driving means for changing each variable means can be switched depending on whether or not the first variable means and the second variable means may move at the same time, so that the movable means is more preferable. It has the effect of being movable.

<Characteristic Q group> (There are a variable pattern that allows entry regardless of the launch direction and a variable pattern that has a different entry rate depending on the launch direction).
A launching means capable of launching a game ball with a first firing intensity and a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity, and a launching means launched by the launching means can enter. A first position where the ball means and the game ball fired at the first firing intensity and the second firing intensity are provided at least at a reachable position and can enter the ball entering means, and in front of the ball means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means, and a first variable pattern that sets a first variable pattern for the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. A second variable pattern setting that sets a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern for the variable means based on the establishment of the variable pattern setting means and the second condition different from the first condition. The first variable pattern comprises means, and the first variable pattern includes a game ball that has reached the variable means from a first direction in which a game ball launched at the first firing intensity is likely to advance, and the second firing intensity. The game ball that has reached the variable means from the second direction in which the game ball launched in the above is easy to advance can enter the ball entry means, and the second variable pattern is the first variable pattern. Compared to the variable pattern, the gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that a gaming ball that has reached the variable means from at least the second direction is less likely to enter the ball entering means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the launching means is configured so that the game ball can be launched at least with a first firing intensity and a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. It is difficult for the variable means to enter the ball entry means at the first position where the variable means can enter the ball entry means at least at the position where the game ball launched with the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity can reach, and the ball entry means. It is configured to be variable to the second position. A first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the first variable pattern setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. Based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, the second variable pattern setting means different from the first variable pattern is set for the variable means. When the first variable pattern is set, the game ball launched at the first firing intensity reaches the variable means from the first direction in which the game ball launched at the first firing intensity is likely to proceed, and the game ball launched at the second firing intensity becomes A game ball that has reached the variable means from the second direction, which is easy to move, can enter the ball entry means. When the second variable pattern is set, the game ball that reaches the variable means from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the game ball that reaches the variable means from the second direction.

As a result, the firing intensity of the game ball can be made different depending on whether the first variable pattern is set or the second variable pattern is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine Q1, the ball-entry means is composed of at least a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means. In the variable means, as the first position, a first ball entry position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second ball entry position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. The first variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position during the first period, and is configured to be variable to the two ball entry positions. The variable pattern of the gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the variable means is a variable pattern that is variable to the second ball entry position in a second period different from the first period.

According to the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1. That is, the first position is variable between the first ball entry position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second ball entry position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. The means are configured to be variable. When the first variable pattern is set, the variable means is changed to the first ball entry position in the first period, while when the second variable pattern is set, the variable means is different from the first period. In the second period, it is changed to the second ball entry position.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the game ball will enter either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine Q2, at the second entry position, the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity is fired more than the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity. The gaming machine Q3, characterized in that the period from the time of entering the ball to the first ball entry means is likely to be shortened.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q2, when the variable means is changed to the second entry position, the first firing intensity is higher than that of the gaming ball launched at the second firing intensity. When the variable means is changed to the second entry position, the launched game ball tends to have a shorter period from the launch of the game ball to the entry into the first entry means. In addition, there is an effect that the player can launch the gaming ball with the first firing intensity.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity and reaches the variable means is the second entry means. The period required to enter the ball is likely to be shorter than that of the second period, and the variable means is launched at the second launch intensity in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position. Q4 is a gaming machine characterized in that the period required for a gaming ball that has reached the variable means to enter the second entry means is likely to be longer than the second period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the state where the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the period required for the game ball launched at the first firing intensity and reaching the variable means to enter the second entry means is required. , While it tends to be shorter than the second period, the period required for the game ball launched at the second firing intensity to reach the variable means to enter the second entry means is longer than the second period. Also tends to be long.

As a result, when the game ball is launched with the second firing intensity while the variable means is arranged at the second entry position, the variable means is changed to the second position before entering the second entry means. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball will be launched, the game ball can be launched with the first firing intensity. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, a passing means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can pass, and a predetermined means based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball. The second variable pattern setting means includes a passage determination means for executing the determination of the above, and the second variable pattern setting means sets the second variable pattern based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the passage determination means. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, a passing means is provided at least at a position where the gaming ball launched with the first firing intensity can pass. A predetermined determination is executed by the passage determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means. The second variable pattern is set by the second variable pattern setting means based on the fact that the discrimination by the passage discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the passage discrimination means.

In the gaming machine Q5, based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied, the first gaming state that becomes the specific determination result is set with the first probability by the determination by the passage determination means, and the first setting is made. A gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that results in the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the condition, and a gaming state setting means thereof. It is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for urging the game ball to be launched with the first firing intensity based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means. Game machine Q6.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied, the game state setting means sets the first game state, which is the specific determination result with the first probability by the determination by the passage determination means, while the first game state is set. Based on the fact that the second setting condition different from the setting condition of 1 is satisfied, the game state setting means sets the second game state, which is a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. Will be done. Based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect for urging the game ball to be launched with the first firing intensity.

As a result, when the second game state is set, it is possible to perform a game method that makes it easy to enter the second ball entry means, so that the player can efficiently perform the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means and the discrimination by the discrimination means have resulted in the first discrimination result. Based on this, the gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that the variable means includes a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable in the first variable pattern a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entering means. Based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means, the variable game execution means executes the variable game in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times by the first variable pattern.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in the first discrimination result.

In any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. The first variable entry position is such that the first variable member projects toward the front side of the board and the second variable member is buried in the board. The ball entry position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member projects toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second position is the second position. The 1-variable member and the 2nd variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the 1st variable member is a first-entry-type gaming ball that reaches the variable means by projecting from the board surface. The second variable member constitutes a flow path that can be guided to the ball means, and the second variable member can guide the gaming ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entry means by projecting with respect to the board surface. A gaming machine Q8 characterized in that it constitutes a flow path.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. When the variable means is variable to the first ball entry position, the first variable member projects toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface, and the second variable member is embedded in the board surface. When the variable means is variable to the second ball entry position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the front view with respect to the board surface. When the variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface. By projecting the first variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the variable means to the first ball entry means is configured. By projecting the second variable member with respect to the board surface, a flow path is formed in which the game ball that has reached the variable means can be guided to the second ball entry means.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entry means capable of entering the ball depending on the type of the protruding variable member.

<Characteristic R group> (The degree of advantage changes according to the opening timing between the attacker and the electric chew)
A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first position on which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means. A first variable means that changes to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a third position thereof. The second variable means, which is variable to a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and the first variable means, are said to be the first from the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. The first variable control means that changes the first position to one position and the second variable means are changed for the second period from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the said. The state in which the second variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the fourth. The gaming machine R1 characterized in that the state of being variable to the position is one in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, the first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry means and the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable means is configured to be variable. The second variable means is variably configured at a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. .. Based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition, the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the first variable control means for the first period. Based on the establishment of the predetermined second condition, the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means for the second period. The first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is the third position. The variable state and the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position are configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player.

As a result, the degree of advantage varies depending on the combination of the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so that there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable positions of each variable means.

In the gaming machine R1, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position. Moreover, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, rather than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the player has a higher degree of advantage to the player.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the first. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, rather than a state in which the second variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. Since the method has a high degree of advantage for the player, a novel playability that makes the player wish to avoid allowing both the first and second ball entry means to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to provide.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine R3 is variable and is characterized in that it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is the first variable means. Is variable to the second position, and it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the second variable means is variable to the third position, so that a novel operation can be realized. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is the first variable means. A game characterized in that the game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is the first. Since it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the state where the 1 variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, a novel operation is realized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. The gaming machine R4 is characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege more than the first privilege based on the entry of a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effects are played. That is, the first privilege is given by the first privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second privilege, which is larger than the first privilege, is given by the second privilege granting means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine R4, the number of gaming balls that have entered the second ball entry means after the second variable control means has been changed to the third position by the second variable control means is a specific number or more. Based on this, the gaming machine R5 is provided with a third variable control means that changes the second variable means to the fourth position regardless of whether or not the second period has elapsed. ..

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R4, the gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry means after the second variable means has been changed to the third position by the second variable control means. Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the third variable control means regardless of whether or not the second period has elapsed based on the number of the number being equal to or more than the specific number, the game ball. Can prevent the ball from being excessively entered into the second ball entry means and the second privilege being given too much. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

In the gaming machine R5, the gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the first period is composed of a period having a length that allows a plurality of gaming balls to reach the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, the length of the first period is configured to be a length that allows a plurality of gaming balls to reach the first variable means. When the first period elapses with a plurality of gaming balls reaching the first variable means, a plurality of gaming balls can be entered into the second entry means at one time. Therefore, since the second privilege can be continuously acquired in a short period of time, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine R5 or R6 includes a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, and a first determining means for executing the first determination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the first variable. The control means is characterized in that the first variable means is variable to the first position, assuming that the first determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine R7.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R5 or R6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The first variable means is changed to the first position by the first variable control means, assuming that the first condition is satisfied by the discrimination by the first determination means.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result by the first discrimination means and perform the game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R7, a second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination result by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. A game characterized by comprising a variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable control means. Machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R8, the second discrimination is performed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means. Based on the result, the variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable control means is executed by the variable game executing means. You can play the game by paying attention to the result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic S group> (The winning state of each winning opening is set regardless of the state of the other winning opening by the distribution member provided between the two winning openings).
A first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entry means, and a second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the above-mentioned first. A first position provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position. A first variable means that is variable to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, a game ball provided between the first entry means and the second entry means, and the second entry means has a game ball. A second variable means that changes to a third position where the ball can enter, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the first variable means, which are predetermined. The first variable control means that changes from the second position to the first position for the first period based on the satisfaction of one condition, and the second variable means are said to be the second variable means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second condition. A second variable control means that changes from a fourth position to the third position for a second period is provided, and the first condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means. The gaming machine S1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of predetermined benefits that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the hit state will be just like the work of continuously firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since it is the same as other conventional gaming machines in that it becomes, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball is provided with a predetermined distance from the first entry means capable of entering the game ball. .. Between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. A first variable means configured to be variable is provided at the second position. In addition, between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the game ball enters from the third position. A second variable means configured variably is provided at a difficult fourth position. The first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for the first period by the first variable control means based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. The second variable means is variable for a second period from the fourth position to the third position by the second variable control means based on the establishment of the predetermined second condition. The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the state of the two variable means provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means, so that the first variable means and the second variable means mutually. Since it may be changed regardless of the arrangement of the above, there is an effect that the control can be simplified.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first variable means is variable to the first position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position. The second variable means is variable and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. The state is a gaming machine S3 characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means. Is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. However, since the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other, the game can be played by paying attention to the combination of the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S3, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the first variable means is variable to the first position. Moreover, the gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the second variable means is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the first variable means is the first variable means in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Both the first and second ball-entry means are configured to be variable to one position and more advantageous to the player than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the player expect the player not to be in a state where the ball can be entered.

In the gaming machine S4, when the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position. Further, the gaming machine S5 is characterized in that it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball-entry means than in a state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S4, the first variable means is the first variable means in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. Since the second variable means is configured to be more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means than in the state where the second variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is the second. The game can be played with the expectation that the first condition will be satisfied while the position is variable to four positions. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S5, in a state where the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, the first variable means and the second variable means S6 is a gaming machine S6, which forms a holding region capable of holding the reached gaming ball without flowing down.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S5, the reached gaming ball is caused to flow down by the first variable means and the second variable means in a state where the first variable means is changed to the first position. Since a holding area that can be held without being formed is formed, a game ball can be entered depending on whether the first entry means becomes difficult to enter or the second entry means becomes difficult to enter. It is possible to change the means of entering the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the operation of each variable means.

In the gaming machine S6, the gaming ball enters the first privilege granting means and the second entering means, which grants the first privilege based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entering means. The gaming machine S7 is characterized by comprising a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege less than the first privilege based on the above.

According to the gaming machine S7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S6. That is, the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, while the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Based on the above, the second privilege granting means grants a second privilege less than the first privilege.

This has the effect that when the game ball is held in the holding area, it can be expected that the second variable means is first changed to the fourth position.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a passing determining means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the first ball entering means. The second variable means is the second variable based on the fact that the ball entry discriminating means that executes the discrimination based on the ball entering the game ball and the discrimination by the ball entry discriminating means results in the first discrimination result. The first variable control means includes a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to the third position a predetermined number of times by the control means, and the first variable control means is determined by the passage determination means to obtain a second determination result. The gaming machine S8 is characterized in that the first variable means is changed to the first position based on the fact that the first variable means has been changed.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, the following effects are played. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass, the determination by the passing determination means is executed. Discrimination by the ball entry discriminating means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. A variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable means is executed by the variable game executing means based on the determination result of the first determination result by the ball entry determination means. To. The first variable control means changes the first variable means to the first position based on the second determination result obtained by the discrimination by the passage determination means.

As a result, the game can be played by paying attention to the discriminant result by the passing discriminating means and the discriminating result by the ball entry discriminating means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic T group> (Move the distribution member provided between the two winning openings so that the winning states do not overlap)
A first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entry means, and a second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, and the above-mentioned first. A first traveling direction provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and the traveling direction of the reached gaming ball is easily entered into the first ball entering means, and the second entering. Any of a plurality of directions including at least a second traveling direction in which it is easy to enter the ball means and a third traveling direction in which it is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The first state in which the distribution means for distributing in the traveling direction and the state of the distribution means are more likely to be distributed in the first traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period. The state of the first state setting means and the distribution means set to is set to the second state in which the reached game ball is more likely to be distributed in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the second period. The second state setting means for setting is provided, and the distribution means is suppressed from being set to the first state by the first state setting means at least while being set to the second state. A gaming machine T1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like, such as an opening / closing plate for opening / closing a specific winning opening. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large opening openings that are opened when a lottery is won based on a starting prize are provided, and large opening openings that are opened according to the type of winning and the number of rounds are provided. By switching, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes complicated, so that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation for a plurality of variable members. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball is provided at a predetermined distance from the first entry means capable of entering a game ball. There is. Between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the traveling direction of the reached game ball is the first traveling direction in which it is easy to enter the first ball entry means, and the ball enters the second ball entry means. A swing that distributes to one of a plurality of directions including at least a second traveling direction that is easy to enter and a third traveling direction that is difficult to enter into either the first entry means or the second entry means. Separation means are provided. While the state of the distribution means is set by the first state setting means to the second state in which the reached game ball is more likely to be distributed in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period. The second state setting means is set to the second state in which the reached game ball is easily distributed in the third traveling direction as well as in the second traveling direction during the second period. At least while the sorting means is set to the second state, the first state setting means suppresses the sorting means from being set to the first state.

This has the effect that the state of the sorting means can be suitably set.

The gaming machine T1 is characterized in that the distribution means is suppressed from being set to the second state by the second state setting means at least while being set to the first state. Pachinko machine T2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, the sorting means is set to the second state by the second state setting means at least while the sorting means is set to the first state. Since it is suppressed, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means can be set more preferably.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the distribution means has a first position in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a first position thereof. A first variable member that can be changed to a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than a position, and a game ball that can enter the second ball entry means and the first entry means. It is composed of at least a third position that makes it difficult to enter the ball means and a second variable member that can be changed to a fourth position that makes it difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, and the second state setting means The gaming machine T3, characterized in that the second variable member is variable from the fourth position to the third position during the second period.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means is composed of at least a first variable member and a second variable member. The first variable member is in the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and which makes it difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and in the first ball entry means rather than the first position. It is variably configured with a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball. The second variable member is at a third position where the game ball can enter the second entry means and is difficult to enter the first entry means, and at the second entry means rather than the third position. It is variably configured with a fourth position that makes it difficult to enter the ball. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, while the second state setting means changes the second variable member during the second period. Is variable from the 4th position to the 3rd position.

As a result, each state can be set by a relatively simple control of changing the variable member corresponding to the state, so that there is an effect that the processing load when switching the state can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the first ball entry means reaches the distribution means from the first direction at least when the distribution means is set to the first state. A game ball arriving from a second direction different from the first direction is easier to enter than a game ball, and at least the distribution means is said to be the second ball. When the two states are set, the game ball arriving from the first direction is easier to enter than the game ball arriving at the distribution means from the second direction. A gaming machine T4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the following effects are played. That is, at least when the distribution means is set to the first state, the ball arrives from the second direction different from the first direction than the game ball arriving at the distribution means from the first direction. The first ball entry means is configured so that the game ball is easier to enter. Further, at least when the distribution means is set to the second state, the second game ball arriving from the first direction is easier to enter than the game ball arriving from the second direction. The means of entering the ball is configured.

As a result, depending on the state of the distribution means, the player can adjust the direction of the game ball when reaching the distribution means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means according to the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine T4, the distribution means has a length from the first period until the game balls arriving from the second direction are distributed in the first traveling direction and reach the first ball entry means. Also, the length of the game ball arriving from the first direction until it is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entry means becomes longer than the second period. The gaming machine T5, which is configured to be easy to use.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T4, the length until the gaming ball arriving from the second direction is distributed in the first traveling direction and reaches the first ball entry means is the first period. In addition, the length of the game ball arriving from the first direction until it is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entry means is liable to be longer than in the second period. Since the distribution means is configured in, the case where the gaming ball reaches the distribution means from the second direction in the first state and the case where the game ball reaches the distribution means from the first direction in the second state. Then, it becomes difficult for the pachinko ball to enter each entry means. Therefore, since the direction of arrival of the game ball with respect to the distribution means can be adjusted more seriously to the player according to the state of the distribution means, the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. There is.

In the gaming machine T5, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privileged game execution for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminating means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the means and the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first state setting means includes a type determining means for determining the type, and the first state setting means sets the distribution means to the first state based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means. The second state setting means is characterized in that the distribution means is set to the second state based on the determination of the second privilege game by the type determination means. Gaming machine T6.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific determination result. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. Is determined. Based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the distribution means is set to the first state by the first state setting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the distribution means is set to the second state by the second state setting means.

As a result, the direction of arrival of the game ball with respect to the distribution means for allowing the game ball to enter any of the ball entry means can be changed according to the type of the privilege game. It is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by selecting a corresponding arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T6, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, the game ball enters either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game. Based on this, a first gaming state advantageous to the player is set, and the gaming ball does not enter either the first entry means or the second entry means during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine T7 is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T6, a first gaming state advantageous for the player is set by allowing the gaming ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed, the state set for the distribution means can be predicted more seriously, and the game can be performed so as to be in the corresponding arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine T6 or T7 includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a launching means that can launch the game ball into the gaming area with a firing intensity according to the operation content for the operating means. The period until the launched game ball reaches the distribution means from the first direction and enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from the second direction until the gaming ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the second ball entering means is from the second period. The gaming machine T8, which is characterized by being easily shortened.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine T6 or T7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means with the firing intensity according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. The period from the first direction until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the first ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from the second direction until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the sorting means and enters the second entering means tends to be shorter than the second period.

As a result, when the game ball is launched after the distribution means is set to the first state or the second state, the game ball enters the corresponding ball entry means regardless of the arrival direction of the game ball with respect to the distribution means. Since the ball is impossible, it is possible to realize the game property of launching the game ball by selecting the direction to reach the distribution means before being set to the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine fuses a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the player may end up with a task of simply continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction aiming at the big winning opening while the hit state is reached. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in playing games.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and a predetermined distance from the first entry means. A second ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, the first ball-entry means, and the second ball-entry means are provided, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A first variable means that changes to a first position, a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A second position that is provided between the two and is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The variable means, the first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and the second variable. The means is provided with a second variable control means that changes the means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, and the first condition is the second condition. It can be established regardless of the arrangement of the variable means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3. The first variable means is variable to the second position, the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the first position. Moreover, the degree of advantage for the player is different from the state in which the second variable means is variable to the fourth position.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. The first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is variable to the third position, which is more advantageous to the player.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. The game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than in the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. be.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the first ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter and the first ball-entry means are provided at a predetermined distance from each other, and the game ball enters. A first ball-capable second ball-entry means, a first ball-entry means provided between the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A first variable means that changes to a position and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means are provided. In addition, a second variable means that is variable to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The first variable control means for changing the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and the second variable means in advance. A second variable control means that changes from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition is provided, and the first condition is an arrangement of the second variable means. It can be established regardless.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means, and thus the first variable. The means and the second variable means may be changed independently of each other, and there is an effect that control can be simplified.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is changed. Is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is the said. Since the degree of advantage for the player is different from the state in which the second variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, the first variable means and the second variable means are arranged. It is possible to pay attention to the combination of and play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the first variable means. The first variable state is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the player expect that the ball cannot be entered into both the ball entry means and the second ball entry means.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is the first variable means. In the state where the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the game ball is moved to the first ball entry means in the state changed to the three positions. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the first condition is satisfied while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
640L Left second ball entry port (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
640La electric accessory (first variable means, second variable means)
650Ra Right specific winning opening (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Rb movable member (first variable means, second variable means)
S542 1st variable control means, 2nd variable control means S1021 1st variable control means, 2nd variable control means

Claims (5)

A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entry means and on which a game ball can enter.
A first position provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a game from the first position. The first variable means that changes to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter,
A third position provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a game from the third position. A second variable means that changes to the fourth position where the ball is difficult to enter,
A first variable control means that causes the first variable means to be variable for a first period from the second position to the first position based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition.
The second variable control means is provided with a second variable control means for changing the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second condition.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means. The first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position and the first. The state in which the two variable means are variable to the third position and the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position are mutually exclusive. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the degree of advantage for the pachinko machine is different. When the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the first variable means is variable. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the variable means is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the variable means is variable to the third position. When the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the first variable means is variable. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming ball is more difficult to enter into the first entry means than the variable means is changed to the fourth position.

Images